■ 


C&e  JU&tatp 

of  m 

{3nfoer$itp  of  J13ottb  Carolina 


THE  LIBRARY  OF  THE 
UNIVERSITY  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 
AT  CHAPEL  HILL 


*     ENDOWED  BY  THE 
DIALECTIC  AND  PHILANTHROPIC 
SOCIETIES 


pcian 

.S5kB 


UNIVERSITY  OF  N.C.  AT  CHAPEL  HILL 


0001246590 


This  book  is  due  at  the  LOUIS  R.  WILSON  LIBRARY  on  the 
last  date  stamped  under  "Date  Due."  If  not  on  hold  it  may  be 
renewed  by  bringing  it  to  the  library. 


DATE 
DUE 

RET. 

DATE 

DUE  RET 

:  :  :.s  * 

1  0  U  :  ( ) 

—  -    -  -        •  «*  ~ 

a 

i 

i 

— t — 

|p>  mi           nUg  4 

m 

- 

JAN  0  8 

20IT 

r   DEC  i 

JUN' 

.   

■ 

$FP2f 

Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2014 


https://archive.org/details/beginnersspanishOOshap 


A  BEGINNER'S 
SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


BY 

ALBERT  A.  SHAPIRO,  Ph.D. 

ASSOCIATE   PROFESSOR   OF   SPANISH   IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF 
NORTH  CAROLINA 


CHAPEL  HILL,  N.  C. 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA  PRESS 
LONDON:  HUMPHREY  MILFORD 
Oxford  University  Press 


copyright,  1924,  by 
The  university  of  north  Carolina  Press 


PRINTED  BY  THE  J.  H.  FURST  COMPANY 
BALTIMORE,  MD. 


PREFACE 


In  presenting  a  new  Spanish  grammar,  the  author  feels 
that,  as  so  many  American  students  are  not  intimately 
acquainted  with  the  ordinary  facts  of  general  or  even 
English  grammar,  special  emphasis  and  drill  on  syntax  is 
the  most  important  feature  of  foreign  language  study, 
whether  one  inclines  to  the  direct  or  the  grammar  method. 
It  seems  important,  therefore,  to  explain  many  elementary 
and  seemingly  obvious  facts  of  language  structure,  avoid- 
ing, so  far  as  possible,  technical  terms. 

Pronunciation  has  been  incorporated  within  the  body  of 
the  text,  to  make  the  student  feel  that  it  is  an  essential 
feature  of  language  work.  At  the  beginning  of  the  gram- 
mar, it  is  taken  up  in  its  broad  aspects,  to  give  the  student 
a  working  acquaintance  with  it;  at  the  end  of  the  book, 
when  the  student  has  already  a  certain  intimacy  with  the 
language,  it  is  considered  in  some  finer  details.  The  les- 
sons, which  are  short  on  the  average  so  that  an  ordinary 
class  can  cover  each  assignment  in  an  hour,  are  designed 
to  be  progressive.  Idiomatic  structure  is  emphasized 
throughout,  both  in  special  idioms  and  in  general  construc- 
tion. Thus  the  subjunctive,  which  presents  such  difficulty 
to  American  students,  is  given  special  attention.  It  has  a 
general  introduction,  explaining  its  peculiar  function ;  and 
the  ten  lessons  on  it  are  not  put  in  one  group,  but  are 
separated,  so  that  the  student  may  acquire  the  use  of  the 
mood  more  at  leisure  and  with  the  feeling  that  it  works  all 
through  the  language.  There  is  an  appendix  with  a  com- 
plete summary  of  the  subjunctive,  so  that  the  student  may 
J  at  all  times  have  a  bird's-eye  view  of  the  subject.  Simi- 
^  larly,  the  irregular  verbs  are  made  the  topics  of  special 
<4  lessons,  with  exercises  based  directly  upon  them,  with  the 
3*  idea  of  having  the  students  learn  their  verbs  by  using  them, 


iv 


PREFACE 


exactly  as  they  make  use  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  gender 
and  number. 

A  high  school  course  in  Spanish  might  well  occupy  three 
years ;  but  owing  to  the  demands  made  on  students  by  other 
work,  two  years  are  usually  the  maximum  given.  This 
grammar  is  designed  to  be  covered  in  two  years  of  high 
school  or  one  year  oir  college.  It  is  strongly  recommended 
that  each  lesson  of  the  grammar  should  be  done  completely, 
the  pupils  being  thoroughly  quizzed  on  subject  matter  and 
vocabulary.  The  drill  work,  usually  in  A  and  AA,  may  be 
done  orally,  as  also  B ;  but  BB  should  always  be  written 
out  at  home  in  exercise  books  and  gone  over  in  class  with 
board  work.  It  is  suggested  also  that  review  tests  should 
be  held  about  every  five  lessons,  the  results  to  determine 
whether  the  students  are  prepared  to  go  ahead  or  should 
spend  further  time  on  the  work.  This  grammar  work 
should  be  accompanied  by  reading  as  soon  as  the  progress 
and  ability  of  the  class  warrant,  oral  work  to  start  the  first 
week  and  to  continue  in  increasing  proportion. 

In  concluding,  the  author  wishes  to  express  his  obliga- 
tions to  Miss  G.  B.  Simonds,  one  time  teacher  of  modern 
languages  at  Haverhill  High  School,  whose  sympathetic 
assistance  has  done  much  to  make  this  book  possible;  Dr. 
S.  E.  Leavitt,  head  of  the  Spanish  department  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina,  whose  careful  and  intelligent 
reading  of  manuscript  and  proof  has  been  of  very  material 
help  in  clearing  the  text  of  errors;  to  Dr.  L.  R.  Wilson, 
head  of  the  University  Press,  who  has  encouraged  and 
aided  the  author  in  the  many  difficulties  arising  in  con- 
nection with  the  printing.  Much  of  the  merit  of  this  text 
is  due  to  their  helpful  interest. 

A.  A.  Shapiro. 

Chapel  Hill,  1ST.  C,  1924. 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Lesson  I 

1 

II 

3 

III 

4 

IV 

6 

V 

7 

VI 

9 

VII 

Position  of  Adjectives.    Possession  .... 

11 

VIII 

13 

IX 

Number  and  Agreement  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives 

14 

X 

Present  and  Preterite  Indicative  of  Second 

16 

XI 

Present   and   Preterite   Indicative  of  Third 

18 

XII 

Plural  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives  Ending  in  a 

19 

XIII 

Subject  Pronouns  

21 

XIV 

24 

XV 

26 

XVI 

XVII 

Possessive  Adjectives     .     .     .     .     .     .  ^ 

30 

XVIII 

Interrogative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives  . 

^ — ■> 

<m 

XIX 

un  for  una;  el  for  la.    Apocopation  .... 
Cardinal  Numbers  to  99  

34 

XX 

36 

XXI 

Conjunctive  Pronouns  

39 

XXII 

Cardinals  (concluded).    Adjective  as  Noun  . 

41 

XXIII 

44 

XXIV 

Relative  Pronouns  

47 

XXV 

Relative  Pronouns  (concluded)  

50 

XXVI 

52 

XXVII 

55 

XXVIII 

haber,  to  have  

58 

XXIX 

Idioms  with  tener  and  haber  

61 

XXX 

Demonstrative  Adjectives  and  Pronouns  . 

63 

XXXI 

Demonstratives  (concluded)      .     .     .     .  . 

66 

XXXII 

Future  (Indicative)  and  Conditional 

68 

XXXIII 

Nouns  and  Adjectives — Gender  and  Position  . 

72 

XXXIV 

Plural  

75 

XXXV 

Radical-Changing  Verbs  (Classes  I  and  11)  . 

78 

XXXVI 

Radical-Changing  Verbs  (Class  III,  Classes  II 

and  III)  

81 

XXXVII 

83 

XXXVIII 

Conjunctive  Pronouns  

86 

XXXIX 

Radical-Changing  Verbs  (continued).  Summary 

of  Indicative  

90 

XL 

Possessive  Pronouns   

93 

XLI 

Negation,    pero,  mas,  sino  

96 

XLII 

Disjunctive  Pronouns  .  

98 

XLIII 

Present  Subjunctive  

101 

XLIV 

Past  Subjunctive  

104 

XLV 

Conditional  Sentences  

108 

V 


Vi  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

XLVI    Subjunctive  (cont'd.)-  Impersonal  Expressions  110 

XL VII    Dative  of  Taking  Away.    Past  Anterior    .     .  112 

XL VIII    Reflexives  and  Reciprocals   114 

XLIX    Reflexives  and  Reciprocals  (concluded)      .     .  117 
L    Conjunctions  with  Indicative.  Conjunctions 

with  Infinitive.    Infinitive  as  Noun  .     .     .  J2CP^ 

LI    Orthographic  Changes   123 

LII    Subjunctive  of  Radical-Changing  Verbs     .    .  127 

LIII    Subjunctive  in  Adverbial  Clauses    ....  130 
LIV    Subjunctive  in  Main  Clauses.    Subjunctive  in 

Adjective  Clauses   132 

LV    Subjunctive  in  Noun  Clauses   135 

LVI    The  Infinitive   139 

LVII    Present  Participle  and  Infinitive  (summary)  142 

LVIII    Orthographic  Changes  (concluded)     ....  145 

LIX    Indefinite  and  Definite  Articles  (summary)   .  149 

LX    Dates;  Weather   151 

LXI    Uses  of  Definite  Article   155 

LXII    Imperative   158 

LXIII    Imperative  with  Pronoun  Objects     .     .    .     .  161 
LXIV    Spanish  Present  for  English  Perfect,    e  =  y; 

u  =  o.    por  and  para   164 

LXV    Irregular  Past  Participles   168 

LXVI    Principal  Parts  of  Verbs,    salir,  traer,  valer    .  170 

LXVII    Ordinals   174 

LXVIII    andar,  estar,  caer,  huir,  oir,  reir   177 

LXIX    Exclamations  and  Interjections   182 

LXX    haber,  saber,  ser,  caber,  ir   184 

LXXI    Vowels   189 

LXXII    dar,  ver,  poder,  querer   191 

LXXIII    Consonants   195 

LXXIV    decir,  venir,  hacer,  poner,  tener  ......  197 

LXXV    Stress  and  Accent;  Division  into  Syllables   .  202 
LXXVI    antojarse,    constar,    placer,    asir,    soler,  yacer, 
Superlative  Absolute.  Intensive  (Emphatic) 

Prefixes   203 

LXXVII    Augmentative s  and  Diminutives;  Future  Sub- 
junctive   206 

Appendices 

A    Person  and  Number   208 

B    Idioms   208 

C    Subjunctive  (preliminary)   210 

D    Subjunctive  (summary)   212 

E    Orthographic  Changes   215 

P    Abstract  and  Generic  Nouns   216 

G   Ordinals   217 

H    Idioms  and  Translation   217 

List  of  Irregular  Verbs   220 

General  Vocabulary — Spanish-English  .     .    .  223 

General  Vocabulary — English-Spanish  .     .     .  *  242 

Index    261 


A  BEGINNER'S  SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


ABBREVIATIONS 


adj. 

adjective 

adv. 

adverb 

art. 

article 

of. 

consult,  compare 

conj. 

conjunction, 

conjunctive 

est. 

construction 

def. 

definite 

demonstr. 

demonstrative 

disj. 

disjunctive 

indecl. 

indeclinable 

indef. 

indefinite 

int. 

interrogative 

interjec. 

interjection 

intrans. 

intransitive 

irreg. 

irregular 

part. 

participle 

pers. 

personal 

Pi. 

plural 

pluperf. 

pluperfect 

pos. 

possessive 

pp. 

past  participle 

prep. 

preposition 

pres. 

present 

pro. 

pronoun 

R-ch. 

radical-changing 

rel. 

relative 

sent. 

sentence 

sing. 

singular 

subjunct. 

subjunctive 

VOWELS 


3 


14.  rr  is  trilled  about  twice  as  long  as  single  r. 
perro,  dog 

15.  s  is  pronounced  as  in  English  sit.  (Never  give 
Spanish  s  the  z  sound  of  English  has). 

A.  Pronounce  the  consonants  below: 
"Grito  postrero 
"La  palida  Nereida  americana 

la  reina  de  los  mares  de  occidente, 

sacude  su  melena  refulgente 

como  un  rayo  de  sol  en  la  sabana. 
"Radiante  y  luchadora,  la  manana 

acaricio  su  ensangrentada  frente, 

y  su  selva  escucho  cual  mar  rugiente 

el  tropel  de  la  carga  soberana. 
i '  Hoy,  si  el  que  ayer  se  declaraba  hermano 

nos  quiere  avasallar,  ;  guerra  al  tirano ! 

brille  el  acero  en  nuestro  puno  fuerte 
"y  resuenen  de  nuevo  los  clarines 

llamando  a  los  heroicos  paladines 

al  ultimo  combate  de  la  muerte." 

LESSON  II 
VOWELS 

Review  Lesson  I. 

Only  the  accented  vowels  need  be  considered  here,  as 
those  unaccented  are  the  same,  in  general,  but  for  the  dif- 
ference produced  by  stress  (cf.  Eng.  the  alone  and  in  the 
phrase  the  man). 

1.  a  has  the  sound  of  English  a  in  harm. 
vaca1  papel,  paper 

2.  e  has  the  sound  of  English  e  in  there, 
cero  ver,  to  see 

1  Meanings  already  given  are  not  repeated. 


4  SPANISH  GRAMMAR 

3.  i  has  the  sound  of  English  i  in  machine, 
giro  cilindro 

4.  o  has  the  sound  of  English  o  in  bought, 
zorra  loro,  parrot  dos,  two 

5.  u  has  the  sound  of  English  oo  in  hoof, 
burro  ninguno,  none 

(The  Spanish  sound  is  somewhere  between  oo  in  Eng- 
lish hoof  and  boot.) 

6.  In  diphthongs  or  triphthongs  (two  or  three  vowels 
coming  together),  pronounce  each  vowel  as  it  is  pronounced 
when  standing  alone,  but  run  the  two  (or  three)  together, 
y  at  the  end  of  a  word  takes  the  place  of  i. 

hay,  there  is         ley,  law  hoy,  today  aun,  even 

tibio,  warm  cuando,  when     miedo,  fear  buey,  ox 

Cousino,  Cousino  (proper  name)      agua,  water 

A.  Pronounce  the  following  words,  putting  the  stress 
on  the  next  to  the  last  syllable. 

cuando  agua  tibio  toro  burro  ojo  hinchado  medida 
mejilla  Gonzalez  cuidado  azahares  zorra  chubasco 
centro 

B.  Pronounce  the  following  words,  putting  the  stress  on 
the  last  syllable. 

llorar  ciudad  frac  general  querer  temblar  huracan 
aleman    papel    vaiven    sillon  descubridor 

C.  Pronounce  the  passage  at  the  end  of  Lesson  I. 

LESSON  III 
ACCENTUATION;  PUNCTUATION 

Review  Lessons  I  and  II. 

1.  There  is  only  one  written  accent  in  Spanish,  the 
acute,  as  in  sillon. 

2.  A  word  with  an  accent  mark  is  always  stressed  on 


ACCENTUATION ;  PUNCTUATION 


5 


the  syllable  with  that  mark.  The  accent  mark  indicates 
usually  that  the  word  is  irregular  in  stress. 

atletico,  athletic      Gonzalez      vaiven,  fluctuation       orin,  rust 
An  i  with  an  accent  mark  is  not  dotted :  1 

3.  Where  no  accent  mark  is  written,  the  word  is  regular, 
that  is,  it  is  stressed  according  to  one  of  the  two  rules 
below. 

(a)  A  word  ending  in  a  consonant,  except  n  or  s, 
stresses  the  last  syllable. 

general        azul,  blue        jugar,  to  play        tomar,  to  take 

(b)  A  word  ending  in  either  consonant  n  or  s,  or  in  any 
vowel,  stresses  the  next  to  the  last  syllable. 

quieren  quieres  cama 

4.  In  general,  two  vowels  coming  together  are  pro- 
nounced as  a  diphthong;  that  is,  they  count  as  a  single 
syllable. 

hay,  there  is         miedo,  fear         tibio,  warm         muy,  very 

However,  if  an  accent  is  written  over  either  i  or  u,  the 
two  vowels  are  pronounced  separately,  forming  two  syl- 
lables. 

aun  (a  un),  yet  acentuo  (acentu  o),  I  stress 

5.  Punctuation  marks  are  the  same  in  Spanish  as  in 
English,  except  at  the  beginning  of  an  exclamation  or 
question,  where  another  exclamation  point  or  question 
mark,  inverted,  is  placed. 

iaja!   Aha!  iQuien?  Who? 

Paragraphs  in  quotation  are  not  enclosed  in  quotation 
marks,  but  are  begun  with  a  dash.   But  a  quotation  with- 
in a  quotation  is  enclosed  in  quotation  marks. 
Y  as!  dijo:  And  thus  he  said: 

—  Senoras  y  senores  ...    "  Ladies  and  Gentlemen  .  . 

6.  Capitals  are  used  as  in  English,  with  the  following 
exceptions : 


6 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


(a)  Adjectives  of  nationality  begin  with  a  small  letter, 
ingles,  English 

(b)  yo,  I,  has  a  small  letter;  but  Vd.,  the  abbreviation 
for  usted,  you,  has  a  capital. 

A.  Bead  aloud  the  passage  in  I,  A,  paying  attention  to 
pronunciation  of  consonants  and  vowels,  and  noting  the 
accent  marks. 

LESSON  IV 
PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  hablar 

Study  Appendix  A. 

1.  hablar,  to  speak  (stem  habl-) 


2.  Note  that  (a)  no  pronouns  need  be  used  in  Spanish; 
(b)  the  third  person  singular  may  mean  he,  she,  it,  the 
context  usually  determining  which  is  meant;  (c)  the  sec- 
ond persons  singular  and  plural  are  different  in  Spanish. 

3.  In  English,  there  are  three  forms  for  the  present  of 
a  verb,  as  I  speak,  I  am  speaking,  I  do  speak.  In  Spanish, 
there  is  usually  one  form  (given  above),  which  is  equiva- 
lent to  any  of  the  three  English  forms  according  to  the 
sense:  hablo,  I  speak,  am  speaking,  do  speak;  hablas,  you 
speak,  are  speaking,  do  speak;  etc. 


Singular 


Plural 


hablo,  I  speak 
hablas,  you  speak 
habla,  lie,  she,  it  speaks 


hablamos,  we  speak 
hablais,  you  speak 
hablan,  they  speak 


VOCABULARY  * 


America,  America 
dolar,  dollar 
el,  the 
en,  in,  on 
hablar,  to  speak 
hallar,  to  find 


hoy,  today 
por,  for 
sombrero,  hat 
trabajar,  to  work 
pagar,  to  pay,  to  pay  for 


1  Words  in  sections  on  grammar  should  be  learned  as  well  as  those  in  formal 
vocabularies. 


GENDER 


7 


A.  1.  Pagamos  por  el  sombrero.    2.  Pagamos  el  dolar. 

3.  Trabajais  en  America.  4.  Trabajo.  5.  Halla  el  dolar. 
6,  Trabajan  en  America.  7.  Habla  hoy.  8.  Pagan. 
9.  Hallo  el  dolar.   10.  Pago  el  dolar  hoy. 

B.  1.  I  work.    2.  I  do  work.    3.  They  work  in  America. 

4.  I  am  paying  for  the  hat.  5.  We  are  speaking  today. 
6.  Today  we  speak.  7.  They  are  paying  for  the  hat. 
8.  She  pays  for  the  hat.  9.  You  work.  10.  You  do  work 
(singular).  11.  You  are  working  (plural).  12.  They  are 
working  in  America. 


LESSON  V 

1.  Gender.  In  Spanish,  there  are  only  two  genders,  mas- 
culine and  feminine.  Objects  which  in  English  are  mascu- 
line or  feminine  are  usually  the  same  in  Spanish;  but 
objects  which  in  English  are  common  or  neuter,  are  either 
masculine  or  feminine  in  Spanish. 

hombre,  man  (masculine)  mujer,  woman  (feminine) 

casa,  house  (feminine — but  neuter  in  English) 
nino,  child  (masculine — but  common  in  English) 

In  Spanish,  therefore,  the  gender  of  nouns  is  largely  a 
matter  of  grammar. 

2.  In  English,  adjectives  have  no  gender ;  thus,  the  defi- 
nite article  the  may  be  used  with  a  noun  of  any  gender; 
the  man,  the  woman,  the  house,  the  child.  In  Spanish, 
however,  the  adjectives,  like  the  nouns,  have  gender,  taking 
the  gender  of  the  noun  they  modify. 

If  the  masculine  form  of  an  adjective  ends  in  -o,  the 
feminine  ends  in  -a. 

pequeno,  small  (masculine)  pequena,  small  (feminine) 
pequeno  nino,  small  child  pequena  casa,  small  house 

Other  adjectives  have  but  one  form  for  both  genders. 

facil,  easy  (masculine  and  feminine) 


8 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


3.  Definite!  Article.  The  definite  article  in  Spanish  is 
el,  masculine  singular ;  la,  feminine  singular. 

el  verbo,  the  verb  la  mujer,  the  woman 

The  preposition  a,  to,  and  el  contract  to  al. 
The  preposition  de,  of,  and  el  contract  to  del. 
There  are  no  other  written  contractions  in  Spanish. 

4.  Always  repeat  an  article  or  a  preposition  in  Spanish 
referring  to  different  objects. 

el  libro  y  la  tiza,  the  book  and  chalk 

5.  Interrogation.  A  verb  is  made  interrogative  by  put- 
ting the  subject  after  the  verb.  If  the  subject  is  not  ex- 
pressed, the  tone  of  voice  indicates  the  question. 

^Trabaja  el  hombre?    Is  the  man  working? 
^Trabaja?    Is  he  working? 

VOCABULARY 

alumno,  -a,  pupil,  student  para,  for, 

amigo,  -a,  friend  lapizarra,  slate 

con,  with  la  pluma,  pen 
el  hombre,  man 1  sin,  without 

el  lapiz,  pencil  la  tiza,  chalk 
la  mujer,  woman  y,  and 

A.  1.  con  la  pizarra  2.  para  el  hombre  3.  de  la  mujer 
4.  al  hombre  5.  del  libro  6.  con  la  pluma  7.  el  hombre 
y  la  mujer  8.  el  amigo  del  alumno  9.  sin  tiza  10.  la 
pluma  del  hombre    11.  el  papel  y  el  lapiz  del  hombre 

AA.  1.  the  woman  2.  a  pencil  3.  with  chalk  4.  with- 
out the  slate  5.  the  friend  of  the  pupil  6.  for  the  pupil 
7,  the  pencil  and  (the)2  pen  of  the  student  8.  to  the  friend 
of  the  pupil  9.  without  paper  10.  with  the  paper  of  the 
student  11.  Is  the  man  working?  12.  Does  the  man  work? 
13.  Is  he  working? 

B.  1.  Trabajo  con  el  lapiz  del  alumno.  2.  El  amigo  del 
hombre  habla.  3.  ^Hallan  el  sombrero  del  alumno? 
4.  Trabajamos  en  America.  5.  Hoy  hablamos  con  el  alumno. 


1  The  definite  article  is  put  before  nouns  in  the  vocabularies  to  indicate  gender. 
2(     )  means  supply  or  substitute  the  expression  so  enclosed; 
[    ]  means  omit  the  expression  so  enclosed. 


GENDER  OF  NOUNS 


9 


6.  El  alumno  halla  el  sombrero.  7.  El  alumno  conjuga  el 
verbo.  8.  La  mujer  lava  el  sombrero.  9.  Toman  lapiz  y 
papel  y  estudian.  10.  Tomo  el  lapiz  del  amigo  del  hombre. 
11.  Toma  el  libro  y  la  pluma  del  alumno.  12.  ^Toma  el 
libro  del  alumno? 

BB.  1.  We  wash  the  pen.  2.  They  conjugate  the  verb 
"to  take."  3.  They  are  speaking  with  the  pupil.  4.  We 
are  speaking  with  the  friend  of  the  student.  5.  The  wo- 
man takes  the  hat.  6.  They  are  working  with  chalk.  7.  Is 
the  student  working  with  chalk  ?  8.1  am  taking  the  pencil. 
9.  Are  you  taking  the  pen  and  (the)  pencil?  10.  They  are 
speaking  with,  the  friend  of  the  student.  11.  Are  they 
speaking  with  the  friend  of  the  student  ? 


LESSON  VI 
GENDER  OF  NOUNS 

Review  Lesson  V. 

1.  Nouns  ending  in  unstressed  -o  are  regularly  masculine. 

el  piano,  piano    el  tio,  uncle  el  hermano,  brother 

el  libro,  book      el  verbo,  verb  el  trabajo,  work 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  unstressed  -a  are  regularly  feminine, 
la  tia,  aunt  la  hermana,  sister 

3.  If,  however,  a  noun  ends  in  a  consonant,  or  in  a  vowel 
other  than  -o  or  -a,  its  gender  must  be  learned  at  the  same 
time  as  its  meaning. 

el  papel,  paper        el  hombre,  man         la  madre,  mother 
But  nouns  ending  in  -ion,  -ad,  or  -ud  are  always  femi- 
nine. 

la  virtud,  virtue 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  -o  in  the  masculine  change  the  -0  to 
-a  to  form  a  corresponding  feminine. 

el  tio,  uncle  la  tia,  aunt 


10 


SPANISH  GUAM  MAR 


VOCABULARY 

bianco,  -a,  white  el  padre,  father 

es,  (he,  she,  it)  is  el  piano,  piano 

facil,  easy  el  primo,  cousin;  la  prima,  cou- 

grande,  large  sin  (fern.) 

el  hermano,  brother ;  la  hermana,  la  salud,  health 

sister  la  tinta,  ink 

la  Teccion,  lesson  el  tio,  uncle ;  la  tia,  aunt 

la  madre,  mother  tocar,  to  play  (an  instrument) 

elmozo,  boy,  waiter;  la  moza,       el  trabajo,  work 
girl  la  verdad,  truth 

negro,  -a,  black  la  virtud,  virtue 

el  nino,  boy,  child ;  la  nina, 
girl,  child 

A.  Put  the  correct  form  of  the  definite  article  hefore  the 
following  words,  and  translate: 

1.  amigo  2.  hombre  3.  lapiz  4.  tio  5.  tiza  6.  lapiz 
7.  lapiz  y  papel  8.  tia  y  hermana  9.  hermano  y  tia  10. 
salud  y  virtud  11.  leccion  y  trabajo  12.  padre  y  madre 
13.  verbo  y  leccion    14.  tia    15.  primo    16.  prima 

AA.  Give  the  Spanish  word  for  each  of  the  following,  pre- 
fixing the  correct  form  of  the  definite  article: 
1.  brother  2.  uncle  3.  health  4.  pupil  (feminine)  and 
slate  5.  cousin  (feminine)  and  uncle  6.  woman  with  book 
7.  brother  with  sister  8.  brother  and  sister  9.  slate  with- 
out chalk  10.  white  (masculine),  black  (masculine).  11. 
friend  (masculine)  12.  pupil  (masculine)  13.  pencil  and 
paper 

B.  1.  El  verbo  es  facil.  2.  El  piano  es  negro.  3.  La 
alumna  habla  con  el  padre.  4.  El  tio  del  nino  es  grande. 
5,  <;Es  negra  la  tinta?1  6.  La  tiza  es  blanca.  7.  El  tra- 
bajo del  hombre  es  facil.  8.  La  leccion  de  la  alumna  es 
muy  grande.  9.  La  pizarra  es  negra  y  la  tiza  es  blanca. 
10.  El  trabajo  del  hermano  es  grande,  pero  el  trabajo  de  la 
nina  es  facil. 

BB.  1.  Is  the  chalk  white?  2.  The  chalk  is  white,  and 
the  pencil  is  black.    3.  The  lesson  of  the  pupil  is  easy. 


1  If  the  verb  means  to  be,  this  is  the  common  order  in  a  question  with  one 
noun  and  one  predicate  adjective.  With  more  than  one  predicate  adjective,  the 
order  j§  usually   :he  same  as  in  English. 


POSSESSION" 


11 


4.  The  uncle  is  large.  5.  The  book  is  white  and  the  pen  is 
black.  6.  The  lesson  of  the  boy  is  easy.  7.  Is  the  man 
large?  (Is  large  the  man?)  8.  Is  he  conjugating  the  verb 
"to  speak"?  9.  Is  the  man  playing  the  piano?  10.  Is  the 
chalk  white?    11.  The  waiter  is  large. 


LESSON  VII 

1.  Possession.  Possession,  as  John's  book,  Mary's  lesson, 
is  in  Spanish  expressed  by  the  book  of  John  (el  libro  #e 
Juan) ;  the  lesson  of  Mary  (la  leccion  de  Maria).  S 

el  padre  del  primo,  the  cousin's  father  (lit.,  the  father  of  the 
cousin) 

The  apostrophe,  used  in  English  to  denote  possession, 
does  not  exist  in  Spanish. 

2.  Position  of  Adjectives,  (a)  Limiting  adjectives  are 
placed  before  the  nouns  they  modify;  (b)  descriptive  ad- 
jectives, however,  follow. 

el  hombre,  the  man  But  alumno  diligente,  industrious  stu- 

dent 

mucho  trabajo,  much  work       hombre  feliz,  happy  man 

A  limiting  adjective  is  one  which  refers  to  quantity  or 
existence :  a,  the,  one,  thirteen,  first,  such,  this,  that,  which, 
etc.  Associate  the  verb  is  with  these  :  A  man  is  .  .  .  ;  that 
man  is  ...  . 

A  descriptive  adjective  is  one  which  refers  to  quality, 
to  a  characteristic  of  a  noun,  to  that  which  marks  it  off 
from  all  other  nouns  of  the  same  class.  Thus,  apple  may 
be  any  apple  whatsoever ;  but  red  apple  refers  to  the  qual- 
ity of  redness,  marks  off  apples  with  the  quality  of  redness 
from  all  others.  Associate  the  verb  has  with  these;  red 
apple  =  an  apple  has  redness.  Note,  too,  that  it  is  only 
descriptive  adjectives  which  are  readily  used  as  predicate 
nominatives:  apples  are  red.  (But  we  could  not  say: 
apples  are  the.) 

■ 


12 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


VOCABULARY 

contento,  -a,  contented,  satisfied,     o,  or 

glad  pequeno,  -a,  small,  little 

diligente,  diligent,  industrious       perezoso,  -a,  lazy,  idle 
feliz,  happy  poco,  little  (adverb) 

grande,  large,  great  tambien,  also 

la  mesa,  table,  desk  tomar,  to  take 

ni,  nor 

A.  1.  la  mesa  del  hombre  2.  la  hermana  del  primo 
3.  el  lapiz  negro    4.  el  libro  bonito    5.  el  hombre  contento 

6.  el  trabajo  del  alumno  perezoso  7.  el  mozo  feliz  8.  el 
libro  negro   9.  la  tiza  blanca 

AA.  1.  the  man's  book  2.  the  mother's  piano  3.  much 
work    4.  the  chalk     5.  great  work    6.  the  white  chalk 

7.  the  large  man's  brother  8.  the  diligent  student  9.  easy 
lesson    10.  black  pencil    11.  satisfied  man 

B.  1.  El  alumno  toca  el  piano.  2.  El  hombre  toma  el 
libro  del  nino.  3.  La  leceion  es  facil.  4.  El  trabajo  es 
grande.  5.  El  hombre  diligente  es  feliz.  6.  Tomo  la  mesa 
pequena.  7.  Toman  el  libro  de  la  hermana  y  el  (libro 
is  understood  tut  not  expressed )  del  hermano  tambien. 

8.  Tomo  la  pluma  del  primo  y  la  de  la  prima.  (See  Sent.  7) 

9.  Conjugan  el  verbo  muy  dificil  "ser."  10.  El  tio  toma 
ios  libros  de  los  primos.  11.  Lavan  la  pizarra  de  la  alumna 
y  tambien  la  del  alumno. 

BB.  1.  They  are  taking  the  student's  book.  2.  They 
are  speaking  to  the  Lincle  and  also  to  the  aunt.  3.  They 
play  the  piano.  4.  The  pupil's  work  and  the  cousin's  (see 
B,  7)  is  difficult.  5.  They  are  taking  the  student's  book. 
6.  I  am  speaking  to  the  cousin  and  to  the  uncle.  7.  "She  is 
washing  the  black  slate.  8.  The  father  is  large,  but  the 
uncle  is  small.  9.  The  large  student  is  conjugating  the 
verb.  10.  The  student  is  diligent,  and  the  sister  is  also 
diligent.    11.  Is  the  student  diligent? 


PRETERITE  INDICATIVE;  NEGATION  13 

LESSON  VIII 

Review  Lesson  IV. 

1.  Preterite  Indicative  of  hablar  (stem  habl-) 

Singular  Plural 

hable,  I  spoke  hablamos,  we  spoke 

hablaste,  you  spoke  hablasteis,  you  spoke 

hablo,  he,  she,  it  spoke  hablaron,  they  spoke 

2.  The  ordinary  past  tense  of  Spanish  is  known  as  the 
preterite.  It  denotes  a  simple  action,  completed  in  the 
past. 

3.  The  endings  of  the  preterite,  like  those  of  the  present, 
are  added  directly  to  the  stem. 

4.  Negation.  Negation  in  Spanish  is  expressed  by 
putting  no  before  the  verb. 

No  hablo,  I  do  not  speak. 
No  hable,  I  did  not  speak. 

5.  In  a  negative  question,  also,  no  precedes  the  verb. 
iNo  hablo  el  tio?  Didn't  the  uncle  speak? 

VOCABULARY 

la  cara,  face  el  muchacho,  boy ;  la  muchacha, 

cocinar,  to  cook  girl 
la  comida,  dinner,  meal  no,  not ;  no 

comprar,  to  buy,  to  purchase        preparar,  to  prepare 
el  diente,  tooth  un,  a  {masculine) ;  una,  a  (fern- 

flaco,  -a,  thin,  lean  mine) 

limpiar,  to  clean 

A.  1.  conjuga  2.  tome  3.  lavaron  4.  ^no  lavaron? 
5.  (jno  tocaste  el  piano?  6.  <;toc6  el  tio  el  piano?  7.  no 
toco  el  piano  8.  hablaron  9.  el  tio  grande  hablo  10.  no 
eonjugamos  el  verbo,  pero  tocamos  el  piano 

AA.  1.  we  do  not  conjugate  2.  they  did  not  play  the 
piano  3.  didn't  he  play  the  piano?  4.  we  spoke  the  truth 
5.  you  conjugated  the  verb  6.  didn't  you  take  the  large 
table?  7.  I  did  not  clean  8.  didn't  they  speak?  9.  we 
did  not  buy  the  table   10.  didn't  you  play  the  piano? 

B.  1.  ^Es  facil  preparar  una  comida?  2.  La  madre 
preparo  la  comida  para  el  nifio.   3.  El  nino  no  es  diligente, 


14 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


es  perezoso.  4.  No  prepararon  la  leccion.  5.  El  primo  es 
muy  f eliz ;  hallo  el  lapiz  y  la  pluma  tambien.  6.  El  primo 
no  hablo  con  el  alumno  perezoso.  7.  El  hombre  hallo  poco 
trabajo.  8.  ^No  limpiaron  la  mesa  del  alumno?  9.  No; 
no  lavaron  la  mesa  del  alnmno,  ni  la  del  padre.  10.  El 
nino  perezoso  no  conjugo  el  verbo  "ser".  11.  <:Es  facil 
la  leccion?  12.  No;  no  es  facil.  13.  <:No  compraron  la 
mesa?    14.  El  nino  es  mny  flaco. 

BB.  1.  The  child  is  not  very  thin.  2.  He  worked  little, 
but  he  conjugated  the  verb  well.  3.  He  did  not  clean  the 
table,  he  cooked  the  dinner.  4.  I  cleaned  the  teeth  of  the 
child.  5.  He  plays  the  piano  [but]  little.  6.  Did  they 
conjugate  the  verb  "to  be"?  7.  No,  they  did  not  conju- 
gate the  verb.  8.  Did  you  prepare  the  dinner?  9.  I  did 
not  take  the  pupil's  pen.  10.  Don't  you  play  the  piano? 
11.  It  isn't  easy  to  prepare  a  meal  well.  12.  They  also 
played  the  piano.  13.  They  did  not  clean  the  table. 
14.  They  did  not  tell  (dijeron)  the  truth  to  the  father  or 
(ni)  to  the  mother.    15.  They  did  not  prepare  the  lesson. 


LESSON  IX 

NUMBER  AND  AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 

1.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  an  unstressed  vowel 
form  the  plural  by  adding  -s. 

hombre,  man  hombres,  men 

pluma,  pen  plumas,  pens 

bueno,  good  {masc.  sing.)  buenos,  good  (masc.  pl.\ 

buena,  good  (fern,  sing.)  buenas,  good  {fern,  pi.) 

2.  The  plural  of  the  indefinite  article  is  unos  for  the 
masculine  and  unas  for  the  feminine.  These  forms  mean 
some. 

The  plural  of  the  definite  article  is  los,  masculine,  and 
las,  feminine. 

unos  hombres,  some  men        unas  plumas,  some  pens 
los  hombres,  the  men  las  plumas,  the  pens 


NUMBER  AND  AGREEMENT  OF  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES  15 

3.  When  an  adjective  modifies  more  than  one  noun,  the 
adjective  is  feminine  only  when  all  the  nouns  are  feminine ; 
if  at  least  one  noun  is  masculine,  the  adjective  is  masculine 
plural. 

pizarra  y  pluma  negras,  black  slate  and  pen 
papel  y  lapiz  blancos,  white  paper  and  pencil 
tiza  y  papel  blancos,  white  chalk  and  paper 

The  same  rule  applies  to  nouns  which  have  a  masculine 
or  a  feminine  form. 

hermanos,  brothers  hermanas,  sisters 

hermanos,  brother  and  sister,  or  brothers  and  sister,  or  brothers 

and  sisters,  or  brother  and  sisters 
padres,  fathers,  or  fathers  and  mothers,  or  parents 

A.  Give  the  plural  of  el,  la,  una,  un. 

A  A.  Give  the  plural,  with  the  definite  article,  of: 
1.  alumno  2.  pluma  3.  pizarra  4.  hombre  5.  piano 
6.  hermano  7.  padre  8.  grande  9.  flaco  10.  nino 
11.  grande  12.  contento  13.  alumno  14.  hermana 
15.  pequena  16.  hombre  flaco  17.  libro  bianco  18.  alumno 
perezoso    19.  nina  flaca 

AAA.  1.  the  men  2.  a  diligent  student  3.  the  lean  men 
4.  the  large  students  5.  the  white  chalk  6.  the  black 
slates  7.  the  satisfied  students  8.  the  lazy  men  9.  the 
large  pianos  10.  the  industrious  children  11.  the  black 
books 

B.  1.  Los  alumnos  diligentes  hablan  la  verdad.  2.  Las 
alumnas  conjugan  los  verbos  en  el  libro  bianco.  3.  Limpian 
las  mesas.  4.  Compran  una  comida  muy  grande.  5.  To- 
mamos  los  libros  y  las  plumas  grandes.  6.  ^Limpiaste 
muchas  pizarras?  7.  Los  alumnos  diligentes  prepararon 
el  trabajo.  8.  Cocinan  siempre  las  comidas.  9.  Tomaron 
los  libros  blancos  y  negros.  10.  ^No  preparasteis  los 
verbos  ? 

BB.  1.  The  pupils  prepared  the  meal.  2.  We  spoke  a 
good  deal  (much)  with  the  brother  and  sister  (los  herma- 
nos; or  for  greater  clearness,  el  hermano  y  la  hermana). 


16 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


3.  Did  you  clean  the  large  table?  4.  Did  the  cousin  pre- 
pare the  dinner?  5.  The  slates  are  (son)  black.  6.  "We 
cleaned  the  teeth  of  the  children.  7.  They  got  (prepared) 
their  dinner.  8.  Are  the  books  and  pencils  large  or  small  ? 
9.  The  lazy  pupils  did  not  prepare  the  verbs.  10.  They 
took  a  book.    11.  Are  the  chalk  and  pencil  white  or  black? 


LESSON  X 
SECOND  CONJUGATION 
1.  Present  Indicative  of  beber,  to  drink  (stem  beb-) 

Singular  Plural 

bebo,  I  drink,  etc.  bebemos,  we  drink 

bebes,  you  drink  bebeis,  you  drink 

bebe,  he,  she,  it  drinks  beben,  they  drink 

Preterite  Indicative  (stem  beb-) 


bebi,  I  drank 
bebiste,  you  drank 
bebio,  he,  she,  it  drank 


bebimos,  we  drank 
bebisteis,  you  drank 
bebieron,  they  drank 


2.  Comparing  the  above  tense  endings  of  the  present 
tense  with  those  of  the  first  conjugation,  it  is  seen  that  the 
only  difference  is  the  vowel  e  for  a  in  all  persons  but  the 
first  singular,  where  both  conjugations  have  -o. 

3.  In  the  preterite  tense,  i  is  the  vowel  throughout  the 
second  conjugation,  with  the  diphthong  -io  in  the  third 
singular  and  -ie-  in  the  third  plural. 


VOCABULARY 


beber,  to  drink 

bueno,  -a,  good 
la  casa,  house 

comer,  to  eat 
la  cosa,  thing 

dificil,  difficult 

mucho,  much,  a  great  deal 
(adverb) 


mucho,  -a,  much  (adjective) ; 

(plural)  many 
muy,  very 

que,  which,  that,  who,  whom 

(relative  pronoun) 
satisfecho,  -a,  satisfied 
~~  tampoco,  either  (negative) 
temer,  to  fear,  to  be  afraid 
vender,  to  sell 


A.  On  the  above  models,  conjugate  in  the  present  and 
preterite:  vender  (stem  vend-)  comer  (stem  com-)  temer 
(stem  tern-) 


SECOND  CONJUGATION 


17 


AA.  Locate  the  forms: 

1.  bebi  2.  comieron  3.  comimos  4.  vivio  5.  bebemos 
6.  <Jbebiste?  7.  comes  8.  comer  9.  no  temen  10.  temieron 
11.  comemos  12.  bebimos  13.  comeis  14.  vendo  15.  ven- 
dio  16.  vendi  17.  temio  18.  teme  19.  bebio  20.  <;no 
bebieron?   21.  bebisteis    22.  temieron 

AAA.  Give  the  Spanish: 

1.  I  sold    2.  they  drink    3.  did-he-eat?    4.  we  fear 

5.  you-are-selling    6.  does  he  eat?  7.  we  eat    8.  we  ate 

9.  we  sell    10.  does  she  fear?    11.  they  did  not  sell  12. 

don't  you  drink?    13.  I  am  eating  14.  I  ate    15.  they  ate 

16.  they  sold  17.  did  they  sell?  18.  they  did  not  sell 
19.  she  is  selling 

B.  1.  Vende  las  plumas  y  los  papeles.  2.  El  tio  no 
eomio  la  comida.    3.  Vendieron  las  plumas  que  hallaron. 

4.  Beben,  comen,  y  tocan  el  piano — pero  no  trabajan. 

5.  ^Preparaste  la  comida  que  comimos?  6.  No  vendio  la 
mesa  que  hallo  en  la  casa.  7.  Cocina  bien  (well),  pero  no 
come  las  comidas  que  prepara.  8.  Los  alumnos  perezosos 
no  limpiaron  los  dientes  de  los  ninos.  9.  Vende  pizarras, 
plumas  y  libros  grandes  y  pequenos.  10.  ^No  comes  la 
comida  que  preparo?  11.  No,  no  como  la  comida.  12. 
Bebieron,  y  comieron  mucho  tambien. 

BB.  1.  They  sold  the  slates  which  they  found.  2.  Did 
you  drink  much?  3.  No,  we  ate,  but  we  did  not  drink. 
4.  The  mother  prepared  a  large  meal,  which  they  ate  very 
[much]  1  satisfied.  5.  The  diligent  students  do  not  fear  the 
exercises,  but  the  lazy  ones  fear  the  lessons  (lecciones). 

6.  It  is  difficult  to  sell  a  piano  which  is  not  good.  7.  Did 
you  eat  a  good  meal?  8.  No,  we  did  not  eat,  and  we  did 
not  drink,  either.  9.  Were  you  afraid?  10.  He  doesn't 
sell  desks — he  sells  pianos.  11.  Did  the  men  eat  the  meal 
you  prepared?  12.  The  brothers  sold  the  things  they 
found. 


In  Spanish,  one  says  muy  for  English  very  much  before  a  past  participle. 


IS 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XI 
THIRD  CONJUGATION 

Review  Lesson  X. 

1.  Present  Indicative  of  escribir,  to  write  (stem  escrib-) 

Singular  Plural 

escribo,  I  write,  etc.  escribimos,  we  write 

escribes,  you  write  escribis,  you  write 

escribe,  he,  she,  it  writes  escriben,  they  write 

Preterite  Indicative  (stem  escrib-) 

escribi,  I  wrote  escribimos,  we  wrote 

escribiste,  you  wrote  escribisteis,  you  wrote 

escribio,  he,  she,  it  wrote  escribieron,  they  wrote 

2.  The  endings  of  the  present  tense  of  the  third  conju- 
gation are  the  same  as  those  of  the  second  except  in  the 
first  and  second  persons  plural. 

3.  The  preterite  endings  of  the  third  conjugation  are 
exactly  the  same  as  those  of  the  second. 

VOCABULARY 

aburrir,  to  bore,  to  weary,  to  tire  rojo,  -a,  red 

acudir,  to  hasten;  to  come  (to)  salir,  to  go  out 

alii,  there  si,  yes 

aqui,  here  tiene,  (he,  she,  it)  has 

ayer,  yesterday  tienen,  (they)  have 

manana,  tomorrow  vivir,  to  live 

A.  Conjugate  in  the  present  and  preterite: 

vivir  (stem  viv-)      .  aburrir  (stem  aburr-) 

A  A.  1.  escribio  2.  escribimos  3.  salieron  4.  aburre 
5.  acudimos  6.  vivimos  7.  vivo  8.  vivio  9.  viven  10. 
bebieron  11.  acude  12.  aburrio  13.  sale  14.  escribio 
]5.  escribieron  16.  <;no  acudes?  17.  no  escribi  18.  <jno 
salisteis?   19.  viven    20.  ^escribiste?    21.  tienen 

AAA.  1.  he  has  2.  they  are  living  3.  did  he  live? 
4.  she  is  not  going  out  5.  they  hastened  6.  did  she  hasten? 
7.  I  lived  8.  did  you  hasten?  9.  are  you  writing?  10. 
are  you  going  out?  11.  you  wrote.  12.  did  she  go  out? 
13.  she  did  not  go  out   14.  we  hastened   15.  is  he  hasten- 


PLURAL  OF  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 


19 


ing?  16.  he  lived  17.  he  bores  18.  they  are  boring  19. 
they  bored   20.  I  am  drinking 

B.  1.  <;  Tiene  un  trabajo  dificil?  2.  No,  tiene  un  trabajo 
facil,  y  no  tiene  verbos  para  manana.  3.  ^Vivio  aqui? 
4.  El  alumno  vive  en  la  casa  blanca,  y  la  alumna  en  la 
casa  de  la  tia  del  alumno.  5.  ^Temeis  un  trabajo  dificil? 
6.  Los  alumnos  perezosos  aburren  mucho.  7.  La  mujer 
que  vive  en  la  casa  blanca  preparo  la  comida  para  los 
ninos.  8.  Bscriben  la  leccion  en  el  libro  negro.  9.  Tiene 
todo  el  trabajo  de  hoy  en  un  libro  muy  pequeno.  10.  Los 
alumnos  viven  en  la  casa  roja,  y  las  alumnas  en  la  de  la 
tia.   11.  Los  ninos  acuden  al  padre. 

BB.  1.  Did  they  live  in  the  white  house?  2.  Do  the  lazy 
pupils  write  a  great  deal?  3.  The  little  children  hastened 
[over]  to  the  uncle.  4.  She  is  going  out.  5.  He  has  much 
difficult  work  today.  6.  Is  she  preparing  the  meals?  7. 
The  child  who  found  the  slate  is  writing.  8.  Did  you  go 
out  yesterday?  9.  They  live  neither  (They  do  not  live) 
in  the  red  house  nor  in  the  white  [one]  ;  they  live  in  the 
large  house  which  the  uncle  has  (which  has  the  uncle). 
10.  He  sold  the  house  in  which  he  is  living.  11.  Has  he  a 
piano? — Yes.    12.  I  don't  live  in  the  white  house  either. 

LESSON  XII 

Review  Lesson  IX. 

1.  Plural  of  Nouns  and  Adjectives  Ending  in  a  Con- 
sonant. 

Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  a  consonant  form  the 
plural  by  adding  -es. 

mujer,  woman  mujeres,  women 

nacion,  nation  naciones,  nations 

lapiz,  pencil  lapices,  pencils 

facil,  easy  {sing.)  faciles,  easy  (pi.) 

Words  like  nacion,  which  are  stressed  according  to  rule 
when  forming  the  plural,  automatically  lose  the  written 
accent. 


20 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


Words  ending  in  z  change  the  -z  to  -c-  when  adding  -es 
for  the  plural. 

2.  a,  with  a  Direct  Object.  The  preposition  a  is  used 
before  a  direct  object  when  that  object  is  a  specific  person 
or  a  proper  noun. 

Busco  al  hombre,  I  am  looking  for  the  man. 
Busco  a  Juan,  I  am  looking  for  John. 

In  the  sentence,  "I  am  looking  for  someone  to  write 
the  exercise, "  a  would  not  be  used  because  " someone,' ' 
though  a  person,  is  not  specific;  and  in  the  sentence,  "I 
am  looking  for  the  book,"  the  preposition  a  would  not  be 
used  either,  because  "book,"  though  specific,  is  not  a 
person. 

3.  Neuter  lo.  The  pronoun  lo  is  used  in  referring  to  a 
predicate  adjective  previously  mentioned.  Lo  is  classed 
as  neuter  because  it  refers  to  an  adjective,  which  in  itself 
does  not  determine  grammatical  gender. 

iEs  feliz? — Si,  lo  es.    Is  he  happy? — Yes,  he  is  (it). 
Note  the  position  of  lo. 


A.  Give  the  plural  of: 

1.  mujer  2.  salud  3.  nacion  4.  virtud  5.  reloj  6. 
verdad  7.  pieza  8.  casa  9.  papel  10.  lapiz  11.  facil 
12.  feliz    13.  dificil 

Give  the  singular  of: 

1.  verdades  2.  faciles  3.  lapices  4.  hombres  5.  ninos 
6.  mujeres  7.  lapices  8.  naciones  9.  casas  10.  dificiles 
11.  naciones    12.  veces 

A  A.   Give  in  Spanish  the  plural  of: 
1.  easy   2.  house   3.  nation   4.  paper    5.  happy    6.  room 


VOCABULARY 


buscar,  to  look-for,  to  seek 


Juan,  John 


la  calle,  street 
Elena,  Helen 
Enrique,  Henry 
Gabriel,  Gabriel 
hay,  there  is,  there  are 


Maria,  Mary 
la  pieza,  room 


el  reloj,  watch,  clock 
la  vez,  time  (used  in  series,  as: 
eight  times,  eighth  time) 


SUBJECT  PKONOUNS 


21 


7.  truth  8.  pencil  9.  woman  10.  nation  11.  virtue  12. 
difficult    13.  watch 

B.  1.  Hay  muchos  relojes  en  la  casa.  2.  Tiene  lecciones 
faciles  y  dificiles  tambien.  3.  Halle  muchos  papeles  en  la 
calle.  4.  i  Tiene  lapices  para  los  alumnos?  5.  Si,  tengo 
muchos,  y  plumas  y  pizarras  tambien.   6.  ^Buscais  a  Juan 

0  a  Elena?    7.  Las  mujeres  compraron  los  relojes  ayer. 

8.  No  es  facil  preparar  una  comida  buena.  9.  Los  alumnos 
diligentes  no  son  siempre  felices,  ni  los  perezosos  lo  son 
tampoco.  10.  La  verdad  es  muchas  veces  dificil.  11.  Com- 
pre  el  reloj  en  la  casa  de  Enrique.  12.  No  buscamos  los 
lapices. 

BB.  1.  The  lazy  pupils  do  not  have  easy  lessons  and 
they  are  not  happy  either.  2.  Are  the  diligent  pupils 
happy?  3.  They  do  not  come  (use  correct  form  of  acudir) 
to  (the)  class  with  good  lessons.  4.  In  the  street  we  found 
many  things — papers,  slates,  pencils,  and  pens,  some  good 
and  some  not  (no).  5.  I  am  looking-for  John.  6.  Did  you 
look  for  the  pencils  ? — Yes,  but  we  found  the  pens,  not  the 
pencils.  7.  Are  the  industrious  pupils  good  (Are  good  the 
industrious  pupils)  ?  8.  The  ladies  whom  we  are  looking- 
for  are  Gabriel's  and  Mary's  aunts.  9.  They  are  (Son) 
always  happy.  10.  We  have  many  pencils  and  pens  for 
the  students.    11.  Are  you  preparing  the  dinner?   12.  No, 

1  eat  and  drink,  but  I  do  not  cook.  13.  It  isn't  very  easy 
to  cook.    14.  It  is  the  truth. 


LESSON  XIII 
SUBJECT  PRONOUNS 


Review  Lesson  IV,  2. 
1.  yo,  I 

tu,  you  (thou) 


{  nosotros,  we  (masc.) 
)  nosotras,  we  {fern.) 


listed,  you 


ustedes,  you 


22 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


2.  Usted  and  ustedes  take  the  verb  in  the  third  person 

singular  and  plural  respectively. 
Usted  escribe,  You  are  writing. 

3.  The  formal  pronoun  subject  of  address  is  usted, 
ustedes.  This  is  used  in  all  cases  of  politeness  or  formality, 
as  in  speaking  to  older  persons,  persons  of  position  or  rank, 
and  persons  whom  one  meets  casually,  including  servants, 
waiters,  clerks. 

Note.  Unless  otherwise  informed,  the  student  should  al- 
ways use  the  usted  forms. 

4.  In  speaking  to  people  with  whom  one  is  intimate — 
close  friends  or  near  relatives,  young  children — or  to  ani- 
mals such  as  pets,  one  uses  tii  and  vosotros. 

5.  Note  that  there  are  special  forms  for  the  feminine  in 
all  but  the  first  and  second  singular,  and  in  the  usted 
forms. 

6.  Always  use  the  pronoun  usted  or  ustedes  once  in  a 
sentence.  The  other  pronouns  are  generally  omitted, 
though  they  may  be  kept  for  clearness  or  emphasis:  He 
is  writing,  but  I  am  studying. 

7.  In  writing,  usted  may  be  contracted  to  Ud.,  Vd.,  or 
V. ;  and  ustedes  to  Uds.,  Vds.,  or  V V. 

8.  Never  change  from  an  usted  to  a  tii  form,  or  vice 
versa. 

VOCABULARY 
el  cielo,  sky,  heaven  la  puerta,  door 

estudiar,  to  study  el  senor,  Mr. ;  gentleman 

la  Moneda,  the  Mint  la  serlora,  Mrs.;  lady,  madam 

otro,  -a,  other,  another  la  serlorita,  Miss ;  young  lady 

perder,  to  lose  el  suelo,  ground;  floor  {of  a  room) 

elpiso,  floor,  story  {of  a  house)    la  ventana,  window 
por  consiguiente,  consequently,      ya,  already;  ya  no,  no  longer- 
therefore 

A.  1.  usted  2.  tu  3.  Ud.  4.  yo  5.  el  6.  nosotras 
7.  ellas  8.  ella  9.  Vd.  10.  VV.  11.  vosotros  12.  ellos 
13.  vosotras  14.  el  habla  15.  ^habla  el?  16.  yo  hablo 
17.  ^cocino  yo?    18.  ;No,  senor! 


SUBJECT  PKONOUNS 


23 


AA.  1.  he  2.  she  3.  they  (masculine)  4.  you  (polite 
singular)  5.  you  (polite  plural)  6.  they  (fern.)  7.  you 
(int.  pi.)  8.  they  speak  9.  I  10.  you  (int.  sing.)  11. 
you  (int.  pi.  masc.)  12.  they  (masc.)  13.  they  (fem.) 
14.  he  15.  you  (polite  pi.)  16.  they  speak  17.  no,  we 
speak   18.  we  are  eating    19.  you  speak,  but  he  works. 

B.  1.  ^Vendio  usted  las  casas,  Senor  X.?  2.  No,  Juan, 
tu  no  acudes  al  trabajo,  por  consiguiente,  no  tocas  el  piano 
muy  bien.  3.  Nosotros  estudiamos  las  lecciones  dificiles  y 
las  faciles  tambien.  4.  <;No  limpiais  vosotras  la  cara  del 
nino  ?  5.  Hay  muchas  ventanas  y  puertas  en  la  casa  blanca. 
6.  Nosotras  viyimos  en  el  piso  en  que  ellas  viven.  7.  La 
senorita  no  tiene  buena  salud.  8.  Nosotros  aburrimos  al 
senor.  9.  El  no  vive  en  la  calle  en  que  vivimos  nosotros 
(pronouns  used  for  contrast).  10.  En  el  cielo  no  hay  lec- 
ciones ni  trabajo.  11.  El  otro  senor  no  busca  a  la  senora; 
busca  al  padre.  12.  Ellas  (emphatic)  ya  no  viven  aqui; 
viven  en  la  Calle  de  la  Moneda. 

BB.  1.  Do  you  live  in  Moneda  Street,  Mr.  X.?  2.  The 
young  ladies  are  studying  the  lesson.  3.  They  are  study- 
ing with  the  other  students.  4.  They  speak  the  truth; 
you  do  not  speak  the  truth.  5.  They  study  the  easy  les- 
sons, but  they  do  not  study  the  difficult  [ones].  6.  John 
and  Mary  are  brother-and-sister ;  she  is  small,  but  he  is 
large.  7.  Again  (Otra  vez)  you  lost  your  book,  Mary  and 
Helen.  8.  Are  you  buying  others  today?  9.  They  are 
drinking;  we  are  eating.  10.  She  is  studying,  and  he  is 
writing.  11.  They  prepared  the  dinner,  but  they  did  not 
eat.  12.  Is  she  happy?  Yes.  13.  There  are  good  students 
and  bad  [ones]  ;  she  is  [a]  good  [one].  14.  I  bought  a 
pencil,  but  he  bought  pens.  15.  He  has  two  pencils,  but 
he  is  buying  [an]  other. 


24  SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XIV 

SER,  to  be  (irregular) 

1.  Present  Indicative  (stem  irregular) . 

Singular  Plural 

soy,  I  am  somos,  we  are 

eres,  you  are  sois,  you  are 

es,  he,  she,  it  is;  you  are  son,  they  are;  you  are 

Preterite  Indicative  (stem  irregular) . 

Singular  Plural 
fui,  I  was  fuimos,  we  were 

fuiste,  you  were  fuisteis,  you  were 

fue,  he,  she,  it  was;  fueron,  they  were;  you  were 

you  were 

2.  Ser  is  used  with  a  predicate  noun  or  adjective. 

es  rojo,  it  is  red 

el  hielo  es  frio,  the  ice  is  cold 

es  suyo,  it  is  his 

el  libro  es  de  mi  padre,  the  book  is  my  father's  (lit.,  of  my 
father) 

3.  Nouns  of  trade,  profession,  nationality,  when  used 
predicately  after  ser,  omit  the  indefinite  article. 

es  sastre,  he  is  a  tailor 
es  soldado,  he  is  a  soldier 
es  ingles,  he  is  English 

In  this  construction,  the  noun  is  treated  as  an  adjective ; 
hence  the  omission  of  the  definite  article. 

4.  Certain  adjectives  (a)  have  a  special  meaning  with 
ser,  or  (b)  denote  permanent,  inherent  quality. 

(a)  es  bueno,  he  is  good        es  malo,  he  is  bad 
el  es  muy  cansado,  he  is  very  tiresome 

(b)  el  vapor  es  caliente,  the  steam  is  hot 
es  moreno,  he  is  dark 

VOCABULARY 

americano,  -a,  American  frio,  -a,  cold 

bastante,  enough  generalmente,  generally 

el  capitan,  captain  el  hielo,  ice 

espanol,  Spanish  malo,  -a,  bad 
frances,  French 


SER 


25 


mas,  more  rubio,  -a,  blond,  light 

moreno,  -a,  dark,  brunette         el  sastre,  tailor 
pobre,  poor  el  soldado,  soldier 

el  precio,  price  suficiente,  sufficient,  enough 

rico,  -a,  rich,  excellent,  sump-    todo,  -a,  all,  every 
tuous  todos  los  — ,  every 

A.  1.  es  2.  son  3.  Ud.  es  4.  ella  es  5.  somos  6. 
ustedes  son    7.  vosotras  sois    8.  ^es  el?    9.  es  suficiente 

10.  el  hielo  es  frio  11.  es  capitan  12.  sois  franceses  13. 
es  americano  14.  es  bueno  15.  son  morenos  16.  fui  17. 
cjfue  Vd.  ?    18.  no  fue  suficiente 

AA.  1.  I  am  2.  she  is  3.  you  (polite)  are  4.  they  are 
5.  is  he?  6.  they  (feminine)  are  7.  he  is  [a]  soldier  8. 
she  is  [an]  American   9.  it  is  enough   10.  the  steam  is  hot 

11.  he  is  small  12.  we  are  tailors  1^3.  he  is  [a]  tailor 
14.  they  are  Spanish  15.  he  is  bad  16.  are  you  French? 
17.  the  books  are  red  18.  the  men  are  large  19.  the  les- 
sons are  easy  20.  is  the  chalk  white?  21.  we  were  poor 
22.  are  they  good  ? 

B.  1.  ^Son  las  mesas  blancas  o  rojas?  2.  No  estudias 
mas;  <:ya  es  suficiente  la  leccion  que  tienes?  3.  Los  libros 
que  los  alumnos  tienen  son  negros.  4.  <jEs  frio  o  caliente 
el  vapor?  5.  Bl  vapor  es  caliente;  el  hielo  es  frio.  6.  Los 
hombres  son  diligentes,  son  generalmente  buenos.  7.  \  Es 
el  tio  soldado  o  sastre?    8.  La  senora  es  una  mujer  feliz. 

9.  Hay  muchos  hombres  felices  que  no  son  ricos  ni  pobres. 

10.  ^Es  el  primo  rubio  o  moreno?  11.  El  primo  es  rubio; 
la  tia  es  morena.    12.  Fue  rico. 

BB.  1.  Is  it  the  father's  desk  or  the  uncle's  that  she 
cleaned?  2.  Is  the  pupil  good?  3.  The  brothers  are,  the 
one  [a]  tailor,  and  the  other  [a]  soldier.  4.  These  books 
are  very  good.  5.  I  am  a  captain.  6.  The  steam  is  hot, 
but  the  ice  is  cold.  7.  Have  you  (formal  singular)  enough 
work?  8.  The  work  is  sufficient.  9.  They  are  Americans. 
10.  The  men  who  sold  the  things  to  the  Americans  are 
French.  11.  The  slates  are  black.  12.  The  windows  and 
doors  are  large.  13.  The  cousin  is  blond,  and  the  sister  is 
a  brunette. 


26 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XV 

ESTAR,  to  be  {irregular) 

Review  Lesson  XIV. 

1.  Distinguish  between  the  two  Spanish  verbs  to  be. 
Each  verb  is  nsed  only  under  special  circumstances,  and 
the  beginner  must  carefully  note  what  these  are. 

2.  Present  Indicative  of  estar  (stem  est-) 

Singular  Plural 

estoy,  I  am  estamos,  we  are 

estas,  you  are  estais,  you  are 

esta,  he,  she,  it  is;  you  are  estan,  they  are;  you  are 

Preterite  Indicative  (stem  estuv-) 

estuve,  I  was  estuvimos,  we  were 

estuviste,  you  were  estuvisteis,  you  were 

estuvo,  he,  etc.  was;  you  estuvieron,  they  were;  you 
were  were 

3.  Estar  is  used  to  express  position  of  any  sort. 

esta  aqui,  he  is  here 

estan  en  Francia,  they  are  in  France 

4.  Certain  adjectives  (a)  have  a  special  meaning  with 
estar  or  (b)  denote  a  temporary  or  transitory  quality. 

(a)  esta  bueno,  he  is  well  esta  malo,  he  is  ill 
esta  cansado,  he  is  tired 

(b)  esta  agua  esta  tibia  (fria),  this  water  is  warm  (cold) 
la  pizarra  esta  limpia,  the  slate  is  clean 

estoy  listo,  I  am  ready 

VOCABULARY 

(la)  Alemania,  Germany  (la)  Francia,  F'rance 

cuando,  when  fresco,  -a,  fresh,  c(ool 

desear,  to  desire,  want  (la)  Inglaterra,  England 

el  ejercicio,  exercise  limpio,  -a,  clean 

(la)  Espana,  Spain  lleno,  -a,  full 

este;  estos,  this;  these  quedar,  to  remain,  to  stay 

{masculine)  si,  if 

esta;  estas,  this;  these  sucio,  -a,  dirty 

{feminine)  tibio,   -a,  warm,  luke-warm, 

(los)  Estados  Unidos,  the  United  tepid 

States  vacio,  -a,  empty 
el  vaso,  glass 


ESTAR 


27 


A.  1.  estuve  2.  esta  3.  estuvimos  4.  no  estuvieron 
5.  estamos  6.  estan  7.  Vds.  estan  aqui  8.  estuvieron 
9.  esta  lleno  10.  no  estan  vacias  11.  i  estan  Vds.  listos? 
12.  si,  esta  aqui.  13.  ^esta  fresca  esta  agua?  14.  esta  fria 
15.  no  esta  mala    16.  estamos    17.  estuvieron 

AA.    1.  we  were    2.  were  they?    3.  we  are    4.  is  he? 

5.  you  (formal  singular)  are  6.  were  you?  7.  we  are 
good  8.  they  are  well  9.  the  glass  is  full  10.  this  water 
•is  hot  11.  were  they  ready?  12.  it  was  13.  is  he  there? 
14.  you  (intimate  plural)  were  15.  were  they  not?  16. 
it  was  dirty  17.  he  is  well  18.  it  is  clean  19.  yes3  it  is 
(lo  es)    20.  it  was 

B.  1.  Las  pizarras  y  los  libros  estuvieron  muy  sucios. 
2.  £  Hay  un  vaso  de  agua  fresca  aqui?  3.  ^ Estan  listos  los 
alumnos  ?  4.  No  estuvieron  malos  los  padres  del  alumno ; 
estuvieron  buenos.    5.  ^Esta  listo  el  primo  del  alumno? 

6.  Cuando  ellos  estan  aqui,  hablamos  de  las  lecciones.  7. 
Si  no  estan  aqui,  no  estudiamos.  8.  No  estuvieron  listos 
los  alumnos  cuando  nosotras  estuvimos  alii.  9.  Los  libros 
no  son  rojos,  son  negros.  10.  El  vaso  esta  lleno  de  agua 
tibia.  11.  <;Es  rubio  o  moreno?  12.  El  vaso  ya  esta  vacio, 
no  hay  mas  agua.  13.  Nosotros  estuvimos  alii,  pero  ustedes 
no  estuvieron.  14.  ^Esta  alii  Juan?  15.  No  estan  en 
Prancia,  estan  en  Inglaterra. 

BB.  1.  They  were  in  America,  not  in  England  (no  en 
Inglaterra).  2.  Is  this  water  warm  or  hot?  3.  The  glass 
is  not  full;  it  is  empty.  4.  Was  she  ill?  5.  If  the  water 
is  warm,  they  do  not  want  to  drink  it  (beberla).  6.  He 
wanted  to  be  in  France,  but  we  were  not  there,  we  were 
in  Germany,  and  so  he  stayed  in  the  United  States.  7,  Is 
he  happy?  8.  No,  his  lessons  are  difficult,  he  does  not 
want  to  study,  and  he  is  not  well.   10.  Was  the  glass  dirty? 

11.  No,  it  is  clean,  but  there  is  no  water  (no  hay  agua). 

12.  The  exercises  are  easy,  but  he  does  not  study.  13.  The 
children  are  dirty,  and  the  mother  wants  to  clean  John's 
face.   14.  Are  you  ready?   15.  No,  are  you  (and  you)  ? 


28 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XVI 

THE  PASSIVE 1 

Review  Lessons  XIV  and  XV. 

1.  The  past  participle  of  most  Spanish  verbs  is  formed 
by  adding  -ado  to  the  stem  of  the  first  conjugation,  and 
-ido  to  the  stem  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations. 

habl  ado       hablado,  spoken 

beb  ido        bebido,  drunk  viv  ido       vivido,  lived 

2.  The  passive  voice  in  Spanish  is  made  up  of  the  appro- 
priate form  of  the  verb  ser  plus  the  past  participle  of  the 
transitive  verb. 

es  temido,  he  is  feared 

The  past  participle  must  agree  with  the  subject  in  per- 
son and  number. 

(vosotras)  sois  temidas,  you  are  feared 

La  casa  fue  comprada  por  Juan,  The  house  was  bought  by  John. 

3.  The  agent  (or  doer)  of  the  action  with  the  passive 
is  expressed  in  most  instances  by  por. 

El  verbo  fue  conjugado  por  el  alumno,  The  verb  was  conjugated 
by  the  student. 

With  some  verbs,  however,  in  which  the  action  is  not  so 
much  material  as  mental,  de  is  used. 

Es  temido  de  sus  enemigos,  He  is  feared  by  his  enemies. 

4.  There  must  be  distinguished  from  the  passive  a  some- 
what similar  form,  with  estar  instead  of  ser.  The  dis- 
tinction is  this:  in  the  real  passive  (the  form  with  ser), 
an  action  is  or  was  actually  carried  on;  that  is,  the  sub- 
ject of  the  passive  verb  actually  receives  the  effect  of  some 

1  The  active  voice  of  a  transitive  verb  is  that  form  of  it  in  which  the  doer  of  an 
action  is  the  subject  of  the  verb  and  the  receiver  of  the  action  the  object  of  the 
verb.  "John  (doer)  hits  (verb,  active  voice)  the  ball"  (receiver  of  action). 
The  passive  voice  of  a  transitive  verb  is  that  form  of  it  in  which  the  receiver  of 
the  action  is  the  subject.  "  The  ball  (receiver)  was  hit  by  (verb,  in  the  passive) 
John"  (doer,  governed  by  "by"). 

A  transitive  verb  is  one  that  performs  an  action  on  a  person  or  thing.  "  I  see 
the  man."  An  intransitive  verb  is  one  that  cannot  perform  an  action  on  a  person 
or  thing.  "  John  is  here."  John  cannot  "  is  "  anything.  Intransitive  verbs  have 
no  passive. 


THE  PASSIVE 


29 


action,  and  an  agent  is  expressed  or  implied.  Cf.  the 
English:  "The  ball  was  hit  by  John."  In  the  apparent 
passive,  however,  (the  form  with  estar),  the  past  parti- 
ciple does  not  represent  a  real  action,  but  is  used  as  an 
adjective,  without  at  all  the  force  of  a  verb.  Cf.  the 
English:  "The  meat  is  well  done."  "Done"  is  here  used 
as  an  adjective. 

La  casa  esta  comprada,  The  house  is  bought. 

VOCABULARY 

ahora,  now  lavar,  to  wash 

amar,  to  love  la  media,  stocking 

el  calcetin,  sock  la  palabra,  word;  speech 

dar,  to  give  tocar,  to  touch;  to  play  (a  mu- 

escrito,  written  {irregular  sical  instrument) 

past  participle)  la  vajilla,  kitchen  utensils,  dishes 

el  estadista,  statesman  {collective  noun) 

A.  1.  el  verbo  es  conjugado  por  Enrique  2.  los  calce- 
tines  (why  not  an  accent?)  son  buenos  3.  son  amados  de 
todos  4.  esta  escrito  5.  fue  escrito  por  Juan  6.  los  ninos 
fueron  lavados  por  la  madre  7.  la  vajilla  esta  vendida 
8.  la  vajilla  fue  vendida  por  la  senora  9.  fue  comprada 
por  el  hombre 

AA.  1.  Explain  why  ser  or  estar  is  used  in  each  sentence 
in  A.  2.  Note  the  agreement  of  the  past  participle  with  the 
subject  of  ser  or  estar  in  each  sentence  of  A. 

AAA.  1.  the  socks  are  good  2.  the  verbs  are  being 
conjugated  3.  it  is  all  written  4.  the  child  was  washed 
by  the  mother  5.  the  letters  were  written  by  the  student 
6.  are  the  socks  white?  7.  they  were  bought  by  the  lady 
8.  it  is  sold  9.  the  meals  were!  prepared  by  the  woman 
10.  he  is  beloved  of  all   11.  the  glass  is  cleaned 

B.  1.  Estos  hombres,  que  son  muy  buenos,  son  amados 
de  todos  los  alumnos.  2.  Ya  esta  estudiada  la  leccion,  ya 
estan  escritas  las  cartas.    3.    Estan  vendidas  las  medias? 

4.  Los  libros  fueron  vendidos  a  los  alumnos  por  el  hombre. 

5.  La  mesa  y  el  piano  fueron  comprados  por  el  tio  y  dados 
al  primo.  6.  Los  vasos  estan  llenos  de  agua  tibia.  7.  La 
senora  no  es  muy  feliz.    8.  <;Son  blancas  las  mesas?  9. 


30 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


Vivimos  en  la  casa  que  esta  en  la  calle  X.  10.  El  hielo  es 
frio;  esta  agua  esta  tibia.  11.  No  estan  ahora  en  Francia; 
viven  en  Inglaterra. 

BB.  1.  When  we  are  here,  yon  do  not  study.  2.  Were 
the  stockings  sold?  3.  We  lived  in  the  house  with  (de) 
two  stories.  4.  Were  they  bought  by  the  man?  5.  The 
glasses  are  clean,  but  there  is  not  [any]  water.  6.  Was 
the  piano  bought  by  the  man  or  the  woman?  7.  Are  the 
glasses  washed?  8.  Were  they  washed  by  you,  Mary? 
9.  He  is  loved  by  the  pupils.  10.  The  glass  is  full  of  cold 
water.   11.  Is  the  meal  prepared?    12.  The  books  are  red. 


LESSON  XVII 
POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES 

Review  Lesson  V,  2  and  V,  4. 

1.  The  possessive  adjectives  are : 

mi,  my  (goes  with  yo)  nuestro,  -a,  our  (goes  with  nosotros, 

-as) 

tu,  your  (goes  with  tu)  vuestro,  -a,  your  (goes  with  vosotros, 

-as) 

su,  his,  her,  its;  your  (goes       su,  their;  your  (goes  with  ellos,  -as; 
with  el,  ella;  usted)  ustedes) 

Note  that  the  possessive  adjective  tu  has  no  accent.  It  is 
thus  distinguished  from  the  pronoun  subject  tu ;  just  as  el, 
he,  has  an  accent  to  distinguish  it  from  el,  the. 

(yo)  tengo  mi  casa,  I  have  my  house 
(tu)  tienes  tu  casa,  you  have  your  house 
(el)  tiene  su  casa,  he  has  his  house 
Vd.    tiene  su  casa,  you  have  your  house. 

Note  that  su  is  also  used  for  the  polite  your  (usted  takes 
everything  in  the  third  person). 

2.  Like  any  adjective,  these  possessives  agree  with  the 
noun  modified  (not  the  antecedent). 

mis  casas,  my  houses  (mis  plural  to  agree  with  casas,  not  yo) 
nuestra  casa,  our  house  (nuestra  singular  and  feminine  to  agree 
with  casa) 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES 


31 


3.  Only  nuestro  and  vuestro  have  special  feminine  forms. 
All  other  possessives  are  used  in  one  form  for  both  genders. 

VOCABULARY 

el  azucar,  sugar  el  papa,  father,  "dad";  {plural, 
la  carne,  meat  papas) 

el  cafe,  coffee;  {plural  cafes,)  la  sed,  thirst 

hallar,  to  find  tengo  sed,  I  am  thirsty 

el  huevo,  ego-  la  silla,  chair 

la  leche,  milk  elte,  tea;  {plural,  tes) 
la  mantequilla,  butter  tengo,  I  have 

el  pan,  bread  el  vino,  wine 

A.  1.  mi  2.  tu  3.  su  4.  sus  5.  nuestras  6.  sus 
7.  tu  8.  su  9.  nuestras  10.  vuestros  11.  mi  12.  tus 
13.  mis   14.  vuestras    15.  tus 

AA.  1.  my  2.  your  3.  your  (polite)  4.  your  book 
5.  your  (polite)  books  6.  your  book,  Henry  and  John 
7.  our  pens  8.  their  books  9.  your  exercises  10.  our  book 
11.  your  (intimate)  slate  12.  my  pens  13.  your  books, 
Mary    14.  my  pens    15.  your  books,  Henry 

B.  1.  Buscamos  ayer  nuestras  plumas.  2.  ^Hallasteis 
vuestras  lecciones?  3.  No  preparamos  nuestras  comidas: 
la  mujer  prepara  sus  comidas  y  tambien  las  de  nosotros. 
4.  ^Toca  usted  todavia  su  piano,  Senor  X?  5.  Lavamos 
la  cara  de  nuestros  ninos.  6.  ^Fueron  vendidos  los  libros 
por  su  hermana?  7.  Sus  vasos  estan  limpios.  8.  La 
senora  no  esta  muy  feliz  (lucky).  9.  No  hay  mas  azucar 
ni  leche  en  mi  casa.  10.  Sus  huevos  no  son  buenos.  11. 
Tengo  sed;  deseo  un  poco  de  su  vino.  12.  ^Tiene  Vd.  sed? 
(jDesea  Vd.  te  o  cafe?  13.  El  vino  esta  en  la  mesa,  pero 
el  busca  agua.    14.  No  hay  mas  sillas  en  la  pieza. 

BB.  1.  His  books  were  bought  by  his  students.  2. 
Have  you  my  pen  ?  3.  The  child  is  on  his  table — he  is 
looking  for  sugar.  4.  His  books  are  always  bought  by  his 
sister.  5.  Do  you  still  live  in  this  house?  6.  Her  pen  was 
not  found.  7.  He  is  hungry;  but  he  does  not  want  to 
drink  coffee  or  (nor)  tea,  he  wants  to  drink  water.  8. 
He  has  no  wine,  he  is  drinking  milk.  9.  I  want  some  (a 
little  of)  meat.    10.  Our  piano  was  bought  by  his  cousin. 


32 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


11.  Are  yon  thirsty,  Mr.  X?    Do  you  want  some  water? 

12.  His  books  are  clean.  13.  Have  you  your  book  there, 
John?  14.  Our  pens  and  your  pencils  are  all  bad.  15. 
He  is  eating  some  (unos)  eggs. 

LESSON  XVIII 

INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 

1.  <;  Quien?  who?  ^quienes?  ( plural)  is  used  as  the  sub- 
ject of  a  verb  or  object  (whom)  of  a  verb  cr  preposition. 

£  Quien  esta  aqui?    Who  is  here? 

I A  quien  busca  listed?    Whom  are  you  looking-for? 

iCon  quien  estudias?    With  whom  are  you  studying? 

The  adjective  corresponding  to  the  above  pronoun  is 

<;que? 

iQue  hombre  esta  aqui?    What  man  is  here? 

I  Con  que  alumno  estudias  ?    What  pupil  are  you  studying  with  ? 

Note:  In  Spanish,  the  preposition  must  come  before  the 
word  it  governs. 

2.  iQue?  what?  referring  to  things,  subject  of  a  verb 
or  object  of  a  verb  or  preposition,  is  adjective  or  pronoun. 

iQue  esta  aqui?    What  is  here? 
iQue  cosa  es?    What  (thing)  is  it? 

iPor  que  estudias?    Why  are  you  studying?    (What  are  you 
studying  for?) 

3.  Other  interrogative  words  are: 
£c6mo?  how? 

^cual?  icuales?  which?  what?  (adjective  or  pronoun) 
icuyo,  -a;  -os,  -as?  whose?  [adjective  or  pronoun) 
ide  quien?  whose?  (literally,  of  whom?) 

^cuanto,  -a;  -os,  -as?    how  much?  how  many?   (adjective  or 
pronoun) 

£C6mo  estas?    How  are  you? 

iCual  libro  desea  usted?    Which  book  do  you  want? 
iCual  busca  usted?    Which  (one)  are  you  looking-for? 
^Cuyo  libro  tiene?    Whose  book  has  he  ? 

^De  quien  es  el  libro  que  tiene?    Whose  book  has  he?  (lit.,  Of 

whom  is  the  book  that  he  has?) 
iCuantas  sillas  hay?    How  many  chairs  are  there? 
^Cuantas  hay?1   How  many  are  there? 


INTEKROGATIVE   PRONOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES  33 


4.  Interrogative  words,  whether  used  in  an  indirect  or 
direct  question,  always  have,  an  accent  mark  written  over 
the  stressed  syllable.  This  accent  is  not  to  indicate  stress, 
but  to  distinguish  the  interrogative  from  a  corresponding 
relative  word.  Cf .  interrogative  :  6 i  When  did  you  come  ? ' ' 
with  relative:  "I  was  there  when  he  came."  The  two 
forms  in  Spanish  are  pronounced  alike. 


A.  1.  ^cuando?  2.  ^como?  3.  ^jcuantas  plumas?  4. 
<;a  quien?  5.  ^quienes?  6.  (Jcon  qiie?  7.  ^por  que?  8. 
<;para  que?  9.  ^cual?  10.  ^cuyo  libro?  11.  ^cual  pluma? 
12.  ^cuyas  plumas? 

AA.  1.  why?  2.  whose  lessons?  3.  when?  4.  with 
what?  5.  for  whom?  6.  whose  glass?  7.  how?  8.  how 
many  books?  9.  which?  10.  what  man?  11.  which  man? 
12.  to  whom?  13.  whose  chairs?  14.  who  is  here?  15. 
when? 

B.  1.  <:Que  lecciones  estudiasteis  ?  2.  <;Con  quien 
hablasteis?  3.  ^Cual  verbo  conjugan?  4.  quienes 
buscaron  Vds.  ayer?  5.  ^Cuyo  libro  es  el  que  usted  tiene? 
— Es  el  que  (the  one  which)  compre  ayer.  6.  <:Por  que 
no  preparan  las  ninas  la  comida?  7.  ^No  estudio  el 
alumno?  8.  ^No  esta  en  casa?  9.  i  Quien  es? — Soy  yo 
(It  is  I).  Somos  nosotros.  El  es  (It  is  he).  10.  ^Que 
platos  tiene  Vd.  ?  11.  ^Cuales  tenedores,  cuchillos,  y 
cucharas  desea  usted?— No  deseo  cucharas,  deseo  cucha- 
ritas.  12.  (jPor  que  no  comen  ustedes?  13.  <:Que  hombre 
es  el  que  estudia  el  libro  rojo?  14.  ^Cual?  15.  ^Cuantos 
libros  hay  en  la  mesa?  16.  No  hay  muchos.  17.  ^Cuanto 
azucar  desean  ustedes?   18.  <;En  que  casa  viven  ahora? 

BB.  1.  Is  it  you  (Es  usted)  ?  2.  It  is  I.  It  is  we.  It 
is  they.  3.  How  many  glasses  are  there  on  the  table? 
4.  What  books  did  you  study?  5.  For  whom  is  she 
preparing  the  dinner  today?     6.  Why  are  not  these 


VOCABULARY 


cuando,  when 
la  cuchara,  spoon 
la  cucharita,  teaspoon 


el  cuchillo,  knife 
el  plato,  plate 
el  tenedor,  fork 


2 


34 


SPANISH  GUAM  MAR 


diligent  pupils  happy?  7.  Who  is  lazy?  8.  What  forks 
and  spoons  did  you  find?  9.  Do  you  want  the  dinner 
now?  10.  What  knife  is  that?  11.  How  much  water  is 
there  in  the  glass?  12.  How  are  you?  13.  What  stu- 
dents are  you  studying  with  ?  (Where  does  with  come  in 
Spanish?)  14.  What  lesson  is  your  sister  studying? 
15.  What  bread  is  it?  16.  In  whose  house  are  you  living 
now,  Mr.  X.?  17.  How  do  you  clean  the  slate?  18.  Why 
don't  you  study  more?  19.  Why  don't  you  study  when 
they  are  here? 


1.  Apocopation.  The  adjectives  below  drop  the  -o  of 
the  masculine  singular  when  coming  before  a  noun  (this 
is  called  apocopation). 


el  primer  ejercicio,  the  first  exercise 
un  buen  hombre,  a  good  man 

2.  The  other  forms  (feminine  singular,  and  both  plurals; 
never  have  apocopation :  la  primera  leccion,  the  first 
lesson. 

As  pronouns,  also,  these  words,  even  in  the  masculine 
singular,  do  not  have  apocopation :  el  primero  y  el  tercero, 
the  first  and  third. 

3.  Ninguno  after  the  verb  requires  no  before  it  (but  if 
ninguno  comes  before  the  verb,  no  is  omitted)  : 

No  tengo  ningun  trabajo,  I  have  no  work. 

Ningun  trabajo  tengo,  I  have  no  work,   (more  emphatic) 

4.  Note  that  ninguno  and  alguno  require  the  accent 
when  the  -o  is  dropped. 

ningun  hombre,  no  man      But  ninguno,  no  one  (profiouin) 

5.  Un  for  una  and  el  for  la.  Before  a  feminine  noun 
in  the  singular  beginning  with  a  stressed  a  or  ha,  una 


LESSON  XIX 


uno  un  a;  one 
alguno    algun  some 


bueno  buen  good 
malo       mal  bad 


ninguno     ningun  none 

primero  primer  first 

tercero  tercer  third 

postrero  postrer  last 


APOCOPATION 


35 


becomes  un  and  la  becomes  el.  This  is  to  prevent  two 
stressed  a  sounds  from  coming  together.  But  if  the  femi- 
nine noun  begins  with  an  unstressed  a,  the  regular  form 
una  or  la  is  kept. 

un  aguila,  an  eagle  But  una  alumna,  a  pupil 

el  alma,  the  soul  la  aritmetica,  arithmetic 

VOCABULARY 

aguila,  eagle  (use  el  for  la)  -laesquina,  corner  (outside  corner, 
-  alma,  soul  (use  el  for  la)  as  of  a  street) 

la  aritmetica,  arithmetic  hacha,  axe  (use  el  for  la) 

el  cuento,  story,  tale;  account      el  jamon,  ham 
el  dinero,  money  el  pie,  foot 

el  dormitorio,  bedroom  el  piso,  floor  (of  a  house),  story 

el  entresuelo,  ground  floor  el  rincon,  corner  (inside  corner,  as 

of  a  room) 

A.  1.  primera  leccion  2.  tercer  ejercicio  3.  ninguna 
esquina  4.  un  vaso  5.  ningun  vaso  6.  buen  dormitorio 
7.  una  comida  8.  un  vaso  9.  mal  trabajo  10.  ningun 
trabajo  11.  un  tenedor  12.  el  hacha  13.  la  alumna 
14.  el  tercer  piso  15.  un  buen  cuento  16.  ningun  dormi- 
torio 17.  algun  vaso  18.  el  buen  vaso  19.  el  buen  vaso 
y  el  malo  (Why  is  the  -o  kept?  Is  malo  adjective  or  pro- 
noun?)   20.  el  aguila   21.  un  hacha. 

AA.  1.  some  work  2.  no  work  3.  a  slate  4.  the  axe 
5.  the  last  glass  ,  6.  a  story  7.  good  exercise  8.  first  lesson 
9.  third  man  10.  bad  pen  11.  an  axe  12.  the  [girl'] 
student  13.  one  pencil  14.  the  good  pencil,  the  bad 
[one]  15.  no  exercise  16.  the  first  exercise  and  the  third 
[one] 

B.  1.  Un  hombre  cocino  la  comida.  2.  En  la  tercera 
esquina  esta  una  casa  blanca.  3.  ^En  que  dormitorio 
esta?  (lEn  el  tercero?  4.  No  esta  en  el  tercer  dormitorio; 
esta  en  el  primero.  5.  Es  un  buen  ejercicio,  el  que  (the 
one  wrhich)  esta  en  la  tercera  leccion.  6.  El  hacha  no  es 
buena.  7.  ,;Tienes  un  buen  cuento?  8.  Tengo  un  dor- 
mitorio que  es  muy  malo.  9.  ^En  que  piso  esta?  10.  Esta 
en  el  primer  piso.1    11.  No  tengo  trabajo.    12.  No  tengo 


1  Spanish  houses  of  two  stories  have  el  piso  bajo  or  los  bajos,  the  ground  floor; 
and  el  piso  alto  or  los  altos,  the  upper  floor.    Houses  with  several  floors  have: 


36 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


ningun  dinero.  13.  <;No  tiene  ningun  trabajo?  14.  <;Soii 
negros  los  calcetines?  15.  Fueron  comprados  por  este 
buen  nruchacho.  16.  No  hay  buenos  relojes  en  la  casa. 
17.  (jEsta  aqui  el  hombre  qne  preparo  la  comida? 

BB.  1.  The  third  exercise  in  the  book  is  very  difficult. 
2.  What  books  did  you  study  in  your  room?  3.  I  was 
studying  in  my  bedroom,  the  third  room  on  the  first  floor. 
4.  Have  you  any  glasses?  5.  I  haven't  a  glass.  6.  Have 
you  an  axe?  7.  I  have  a  very  good  one  (one  very  good). 
8.  It  is  a  bad  exercise  that  you  have  there.  9.1s  the  house 
on  the  corner  of  the  street?  10.  There  isn't  [any]  more 
sugar  or  (ni)  milk  in  the  house.  11.  Is  there  a  glass  on  the 
table?  12.  He  lives  with  his  father  and  mother  in  the 
third  white  house.  13.  The  brother  and  sister  haven't 
[any]  wTork  now.  14.  Are  their  uncle  and  aunt  here  in 
this  house?  15.  No,  and  they  live  in  the  first  white  house 
on  the  corner  now. 


el  entresuelo,  ground  floor;  el  piso  principal,  or  main  floor;  and  the  floors  above 
are  labelled  consecutively:  primer  piso,  segundo  piso,  tercer  piso,  etc. 

Only  in  large  cities  like  Madrid,  Buenos  Aires,  Barcelona  are  found  many  houses 
of  several  stories. 


LESSON  XX. 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS  TO  99 


1. 


uno,  -a,  one 

dos,  two 

tres,  three 

cuatro,  four 

cinco,  five 

seis,  six 

siete,  seven 

ocho,  eight 

nueve,  nine 

diez,  ten 

once,  eleven 

doce,  twelve 

trece,  thirteen 

catorce,  fourteen 

quince,  fifteen 

diez  y  seis,  sixteen 

diez  y  siete,  seventeen 


diez  y  ocho,  eighteen 
diez  y  nueve,  nineteen 
veinte,  twenty 

veinte  y  uno,  -a,  twenty-one 

veinte  y  dos,  twenty-two 

treinta,  thirty 

cuarenta,  forty 

cincuenta,  fifty 

sesenta,  sixty 

setenta,  seventy 

ochenta,  eighty 

noventa,  ninety 

noventa  y  cinco,  ninety -five 

noventa  y  seis,  ninety-six 

noventa  y  siete,  ninety-seven 

noventa  y  ocho,  ninety-eight 

noventa  y  nueve,  ninety-nine 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS 


37 


2.  For  uno  becoming  un,  see  Lesson  XIX,  1. 

3.  For  the  numbers  veinte  y  uno  through  veinte  y  nueve, 
forms  like  the  following  may  be  used : 

veintidos,  veintitres,  etc. 
The  forms  ending  in  -dos,  -tres,  and  -seis  write  an  ac- 
cent on  the  last  syllable  to  indicate  the  irregularity  of 
stress  of  the  compound  word. 

4.  For  diez  y  seis  through  diez  y  nueve,  the  following 
forms  may  be  used: 

dieciseis,  diecisiete,  dieciocho,  diecinueve 

Here  also  an  accent  must  be  written  on  -seis. 

5.  Note  the  apocopation  in  forms  like : 
veintiun  libros,  plumas,  etc. 

6.  Don  and  dona.  In  Spanish,  two  titles  of  address  are 
found  which  have  no  equivalents  in  English.  Don  may  be 
variously  translated  as  Mr.,  master,  or  omitted  entirely. 
Similarly,  dona  may  be  translated  as  Mrs.,  mistress,  or 
omitted  entirely. 

Don  and  dona  are  used  only  with  the  first  names  of 
people,  and  give  a  more  intimate  touch  than  the  formal 
senor,  senora,  or  senorita  with  the  surname. 

don  Juan,  (master)  John         dona  Elena,  (mistress)  Helen 


A.  1.  treinta  y  cuatro  2.  cincuenta  y  siete  3.  sesenta 
y  nueve  4.  veinte  y  dos  5.  doce  6.  cuarenta  y  tres; 
veintitres  7.  ochenta  y  nueve  8.  noventa  y  ocho  9. 
noventa  y  nueve  10.  cincuenta  y  cuatro  11.  veinte  y  dos 
12.  nueve    13.  veintitres    14.  dieciseis;  diez  y  seis  15. 


VOCABULARY 


el  ano,  year 

tiene  cinco  anos,  he  is  five 

years  old 
Isabel,  Elizabeth 


el  peso,  dollar  (monetary  unit  of 
most  South  American  coun- 
tries; in  Spain  the  word 
peseta  is  used). 


38 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


diez  16.  setenta  y  una  17.  seis  18.  veinte  y  seis  19. 
veintiseis  20.  dos  21.  seis  22.  una  23.  uno  24.  un 
hombre  25.  veinte  y  dos  hombres  26.  treinta  y  un  ejer- 
cicios  27.  veintidos  leeciones  28.  treinta  y  tres  plumas 
29.  veintiseis  plumas  30.  cuarenta  y  cuatro  lapices  31. 
veinticinco ;  veintidos  32.  cuarenta  y  ocho  33.  noventa  y 
nueve  34.  veinticuatro  35.  siete  36.  seis  37.  setenta  y 
cuatro  38.  setenta  y  ocho  39.  sesenta  y  seis  40.  sesenta 
y  dos   41.  treinta  y  cinco 

AA.  1.  55  2.  49  3.  8  4.  18  5.  7  6.  14  7.  eight  men 
8.  (don)  Henry  9.  22  boys  (two  spellings)  10.  Miss 
Mary  11.  21  lessons  12.  17  books  13.  twenty-one  pens 
14.  thirty-one  glasses  15.  42  slates  16.  57  17.  99  18. 
twenty-one  19.  thirty-one  glasses  20.  49  21.  71  22.  22 
23.  44  24.  31  papers  25.  two  pianos  26.  42  pencils 
27.  72  books   28.  83  slates. 

B.  1.  Lavamos  las  dos  mesas.  2.  El  hombre  toma  doce 
libros.  3.  El  padre  del  nino  es  pequeno,  pero  los  dos  tios 
son  muy  grandes.  4.  <;Limpiaste  las  cinco  pizarras?  5. 
No  vendieron  veinte  y  un  lapices,  vendieron  diez  y  ocho. 

6.  Dona  Elena  tiene  veintitres  anos.  7.  Don  Enrique 
tiene  setenta  y  tres;  noventa  y  tres;  dieciocho;  sesenta  y 
cuatro;  cincuenta  y  nueve;  veinte  y  uno;  cuarenta  y 
cinco  ;  veintidos.  8.  i  Buscas  a  don  Juan  ? — No,  busco  a 
sus  dos  hermanos.  9.  Los  diez  y  siete  alumnos  de  la  clase 
son  todos  perezosos.  10.  i  Tiene  usted  trabajo  para  ocho 
hombres?  11.  Todos  son  muy  diligentes.  12.  ^Cuantos 
ninos  hay  en  la  clase?  13.  ^Ochenta  y  cinco?  14.  No, 
hay  setenta  y  nueve.  15.  Cuando  vosotros  estais  aqui, 
nosotros  no  estudiamos. 

BB.  1.  There  are  eighteen  pupils  in  my  room.  2.  How 
many  books  have  you,  Helen?  3.  Have  you  my  books,  too? 
4.  They  did  not  sell  the  eighteen  pencils.  5.  I-am-looking- 
for  my  three  cousins.   6.  How  many  pesos  have  you,  John? 

7.  Sixty-five ;  forty-three ;  eighteen ;  ninety-four ;  eighty- 
four;  sixty-five;  fifty-four.  8.  They  are  cleaning  the 
glasses.    9.  How  many  glasses  are  there?    10.  There  are 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS 


39 


twelve.  11.  For  ten  pupils  there  is  one  teacher.  12.  The 
lady  has  four  children.*  13.  In  the  third  room  there  are 
four  windows.  14.  In  the  white  house  there  are  nine 
rooms.  15.  The  first  room  is  my  bedroom.  16.  He  has  ten 
large  books  and  twenty -three  small  ones. 


LESSON  XXI 

CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS 

1.     me,  me;  myself  nos,  us;  ourselves 

te,  you;  yourself  os,  you;  yourselves 

le,  lo,  him;  you  los,  them   (masculine)  ;   you  (po- 

lo, it  lite) 
le,  la,  her;  you  las,  them  (feminine) ;  you  (polite) 

la,  it 

2.  These  forms  come  directly  before  any  finite  form  of  a 
verb.  Te  busco,  I  am  looking  for  you.  ^Donde  lo  hallo? 
Where  did  he  find  it  ?  Los  buscamos,  We  are  looking-for 
them.    Le  busco,  I  am  looking  for  you  (see  k  below). 

3.  Lo  and  la  are  masculine  and  feminine  forms  respec- 
tively.   Le  is  often  used  for  lo  or  la,  referring  to  persons. 

^Busca  usted  el  libro? — Lo  busco,  Are  you  looking  for  the  book? 

- — I  am  looking  for  it. 
iBusca  usted  a  su  hermano? — Le  (lo)  busco,  Are  you  looking 

for  your  brother? — I  am  looking  for  him. 

4.  As  everything  referring  to  usted  is  in  the  third  per- 
son, polite  you  as  the  object  of  a  verb  is  le  (lo,  la)  singular, 
and  los,  las  plural. 

Le  busco,  I  am  looking  for  you  (masculine  or  feminine) . 
Lo  busco  (masculine);  La  busco  (feminine),  I  am  looking  for 
you. 

A.  1.  le  busco  2.  la  preparamos  3.  <;los  limpiais? 
4.  no  lo  lavo  5.  me  buscaron  6.  ^te  hallo?  ^le  hallo? 
7.  no  nos  hallaron  8.  <;os  busco?  ^los  busco?  9.  no  nos 
hallo  10.  me  aburre  11.  vendio  12.  las  vendio  13.  la 
vendiste  14.  no  lo  vendisteis  15.  lo  deseo  16.  los  lavo 
17.  me  lavo   18.  os  lavais   19.  nos  lavamos   20.  te  lavas 


40 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


AA.  1.  he  found  it  2.  did  he  look-for  us?  3.  she  found 
you  4.  they  want  it  5.  did  they  find  you  (intimate)  ? 
6.  do  you  want  it?  7.  aren't  they  looking-for  us?  8.  he 
bores  me  9.  I  am  washing  myself  (me)  10.  we  are 
washing  ourselves  11.  did  you  prepare  it?  12.  are  you 
drinking  it?  13.  they  washed  them  14.  are  you  looking 
for  me?  15.  did  you  take  it?  16.  I  found  it  17.  they 
cleaned  it  18.  we  bought  them  19.  didn't  they  find  you 
there?  20.  I  am-afraid-of  (fear)  it  21.  I  didn't  write  it 
22.  they  bored  me 

B.  1.  Mis  padres  no  estan  aqui;  los  buscamos  pero  no 
los  hallamos.  2.  No  beben  el  vino,  ni  comen  el  pan.  3.  Bs 
dificil  hallar  las  cosas  que  buscamos.  4.  ^Donde  estan  las 
cosas  que  hallaron? — Las  tomaron  sus  padres  (Their  par- 
ents took  them).  5.  Los  cuchillos,  los  tenedores,  las  cu- 
charas — los  halle  todos  en  la  mesa.  6.  Estos  ninos  pere- 
zosos  me  aburren — no  estudian.  7.  Mis  primos  os  buscaron 
ayer,  pero  no  os  hallaron.  8.  Limpiaron  la  casa  de  las  tias ; 
ahora  la  casa  est  a  limpia.  9.  Cuando  nos  buscasteis,  nos 
hallasteis.  10.  Tomaron  los  libros  en  la  mesa  ayer  y  hoy 
no  los  hallo  (I  don't  find  them).  11.  ^Tiene  usted  el  libro? 
12.  ^Lo  hallo?  13.  ^Cocinan  la  comida  ahora  o  no  la 
cocinan  ? 

BB.  1.  Did  you  find  them?  2.  No,  I  did  not  find  them. 
3.  They  took  the  books  in  my  room.  4.  Did  you  find  my 
three  books?  5.  No,  I  did  not  find  them.  6.  Did  you  write 
it?  7.  No,  there  isn't  any  paper  in  the  house.  Therefore, 
we  are  not  writing  it.  8.  Isn't  there  any  dinner  today? 
9.  No,  I  didn't  prepare  it.  10.  Have  you  (use  usted)  ten 
pencils  for  tomorrow?  11.  They  haven't  them — they  are 
still  looking-for  them.  12.  You  bore  me  with  these  ac- 
counts. 13.  Many  find  it  difficult.  14.  "Where  is  the  din- 
ner?— I  ate  it  all. 


CARDINALS 


41 


LESSON  XXII 

Review  Lesson  XX. 

1.  Cardinals  (concluded). 

ciento,  hundred  mil  tres,  a  thousand  and  three 

ciento  uno,  a  hundred  and  one  mil  ciento  ochenta  y  cuatro,  one 
ciento  dos,  a  hundred  and  two  thousand  one  hundred  eighty  - 

ciento   treinta   y   nueve,   one  four;  or,  eleven  hundred  eigh- 

hundred  thirty-nine  ty-f our 

mil,  a  thousand  un  millon,  a  million 

nueve  millones,  nine  million 

Note  specially  the  hundreds. 

doscientos,  two  hundred  seiscientos,  six  hundred 

trescientos,  three  hundred  setecientos,  seven  hundred 

cuatrocientos,  four  hundred  ochocientos,  eight  hundred 

quinientos,  five  hundred  novecientos,  nine  hundred 

The  ending  -os  is  changed  to  -as  to  form  the  feminine, 
doscientas  plumas,  two  hundred  pens 

Note  the  forms  quinientos,  five  hundred;  setecientos, 
seven  hundred ;  novecientos,  nine  hundred.  The  other  hun- 
dreds are  formed  regularly  by  combining  the  regular  unit 
with  the  plural  (masculine  or  feminine)  of  ciento. 

2.  The  conjunction  y  can  not  be  used  above  noventa  y 

nueve. 

ochenta  y  ocho,  eighty-eight 

ochocientos  ochenta  y  ocho,  eight  hundred  (and)  eighty-eight 
mil  cinco,  a  thousand  (and)  five 

Note :  One  can  not  say  eleven  hundred  in  Spanish,  only 

a  thousand  one  hundred:  mil  ciento. 

3.  Hundreds  as  a  noun  is  usually  centenares. 
centenares  de  lapices,  hundreds  of  pencils 

4.  Thousands  as  a  noun  is  miles. 

miles  de  ovejas,  thousands  of  sheep 

5.  Never  use  the  word  un  before  ciento  or  mil. 

cien  hombres,  a  hundred  men 
mil  vasos,  a  thousand  glasses 


42 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


But  un  must  be  used  before  millon  (in  the  singular), 
which  is  used  only  as  a  noun  and  must  be  followed  by  de. 
un  millon  de  dolares,  a  million  dollars 

6.  Ciento  coming  before  a  noun  of  either  gender  (that  is, 
used  as  an  adjective)  must  drop  -to. 

cien  soldados,  a  hundred  soldiers 

7.  Contraction  of  Santo  and  Grande.  Santo,  saint,  is 
contracted  only  before  a  masculine  singular  noun. 

San  Isidro,  Saint  Isidor 
But  el  santo,  the  saint  Santa  Ana,  Saint  Anne 

Before  a  noun  of  either  gender,  grande,  great,  becomes 
gran. 

un  gran  hombre,  a  great  man    una  gran  mujer,  a  great  woman 

The  full  form,  wrhen  found  before  a  noun,  is  so  used  for 
emphasis. 

8.  Adjective  as  Noun.  Any  adjective  may  be  used  as  a 
noun  by  taking  the  proper  gender  and  number. 

los  lapices  blancos  y  los  negros,  the  white  pencils  and  the  black 
(ones) . 

Note  that  in  Spanish  no  word  is  used  for  ones,  as  the 
adjective  itself  expresses  completely  the  whole  idea  (Cf. 
Lesson  VII,  B7). 

VOCABULARY 

azul,  blue  satisfactorio,  -a,  satisfactory 

habitante,  inhabitant 

A.  Count  aloud  in  Spanish  from  one  to  eleven  hundred, 
omitting  like  combinations. 

A  A.  1.  ciento  uno  2.  doscientas  plumas  3.  quinientas 
4.  setecientas  5.  noventa  6.  ochocientos  7.  quinientos 
lapices  8.  trescientos  9.  setecientos  10.  novecientas 
11.  cuatrocientas  12.  doscientos  13.  ciento  veinte  y  una 
14.  mil  quinientas  sesenta  y  cuatro  15.  veinte  y  un  mil 
setecientos  ochenta  y  tres  16.  gran  soldado  17.  ciento 
cincuenta  y  seis;  mil  novecientos  cuarenta  y  uno  18.  un 
millon   (de  if  a  noun  follows)     19.  ciento  un  lapices 


CARDINALS 


43 


20.  quinientas  plumas  21.  San  Juan  22.  ciento  veinte  y 
uno     23.   ciento   cinco     24.  mil  dos     25.   San  Isidro 

26.  Santa  Maria  27.  doscientos  treinta  y  cuatro  28.  qui- 
nientos  treinta  y  nueve  29.  setecientos  cincuenta  y  dos 
30.  novecientos  ochenta  y  una  31.  seiscientos  sesenta  y 
cinco.    32.  trescientos  cuarenta  y  una. 

AAA.  1.  243  2.  394  3.  587  4.  725  5.  682  6.  444 
7.  892  8.  154  9.  101  10.  194,382  11.  a  million  12.  one 
million  13.  24,583  14.  1,999  15.  Saint  John  16.  Saint 
Mary     17.  121     18.  1,005     19.   Saint  Isidor     20.  524 

21.  983    22.  642    23.  1,001    24.  235    25.  2,534    26.  1,534 

27.  27,000 

B.  1.  ^Compro  usted  quinientos  o  seiscientos  lapices? 
2.  (jDonde  vivio  San  Juan?  3.  Hay  veinte  casas  en  la 
calle.  4.  En  esta  calle  hay  ciento  quince  casas  de  dos  pisos 
y  ciento  una  de  tres  pisos.  5.  En  todo  el  libro  hay  dos- 
cientos treinta  y  dos  ejercicios.  6.  ^Cuantos  tenedores 
venden  ustedes  todos  los  anos?  7.  No  vendemos  muchos 
tenedores,  pero  vendemos  muchas  veces  hasta  (as  much 
as)  quinientas  o  setecientas  cucharas.  8.  Todos  los  libros 
son  azules.  9.  Los  ejercicios  no  son  muy  satisfactorios  hoy; 
son  muy  malos.  10.  ^Cuantas  alumnas  hay  en  la  escuela? 
— I  doscientas  ? — i  doscientas  cincuenta  ? 

BB.  1.  There  are  five  hundred  soldiers  in  the  street 
now.  2.  The  pupils  in  this  school,  and  there  are  250,  are 
all  diligent.  3.  There  are  not  many  schools  where  all  the 
students  are  industrious.  4.  The  two  hundred  exercises  in 
the  book  are  very  satisfactory.  5.  How  many  soldiers  are 
there  now  in  the  street?  6.  Did  you  buy  four  or  six  pen- 
cils? 7.  In  Prance,  there  are  many  large  cities;  but  in  the 
United  States,  there  are  more.  8.  New  York  has  five  mil- 
lion inhabitants,  Chicago  2,500,000,  and  Boston  800,000. 

9.  Are  there  twenty  or  twenty-one  houses  in  the  street? 

10.  In  his  house  he  has  twenty  thousand  books.  11.  He 
sells  seven  hundred  or  eight  hundred  books  every  year. 


44 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


LESSON  XXIII 
COMPARISON 

Review  Lessons  V  and  IX. 

1.  The  comparative  is  formed  by  putting  mas,  more, 
menos,  less,  before  the  positive  degree  of  an  adjective  or 
adverb. 

grande,  large  mas  grande,  larger 

menos  grande,  less  large 

despacio,  slowly  mas  despacio,  more  slowly 

menos  despacio,  less  slowly 

The  superlative  of  adjectives  is  formed  by  putting  the 
definite  article  before  a  comparative  degree. 

el  (la,  etc.)  mas  grande,  the  largest 
With  adverbs,  lo  is  used  before  the  comparative. 

lo  mas  despacio,  most  slowly 

2.  The  following  adjectives  are  irregularly  compared: 

bueno,  good       mejor,  better  el  mejor,  best 

malo,  bad  peor,  worse  el  peor,  worst 

grande,  large     mas  grande,  larger  el  mas  grande,  largest 

mayor,  older  el  mayor,  oldest 

pequeno,  small  mas  pequeno,  smaller  el  mas  pequeno,  smallest 

menor,  younger  el  menor,  youngest 

3.  The  following  adverbs  are  irregularly  compared: 

poco,  little  menos,  less  lo  menos,  least 

mucho,  much  mas,  more  lo  mas,  most 

bien,  well  mejor,  better  lo  mejor,  best 

mal,  badly  peor,  worse  lo  peor,  worst 

4.  Distinguish  between  the  comparative  and  superlative 
in  expressions  like  the  following: 

el  alumno  mas  diligente,  the  more  industrious  student 

(As  the  article  is  not  repeated  with  an  adjective  put 
after  the  noun,  the  above  expression  could  also  mean)  : 

the  most  industrious  student 

5:  (a)  Than  is  expressed  by  que. 
El  es  mas  grande  que  ella,  He  is  larger  than  she. 


COMPARISON 


45 


(b)  Before  a  number,  than  is  de. 

Tiene  mas  de  cinco  pesos,  He  has  more  than  five  pesos. 
But  only  or  no  more  than  is  no  mas  ....  que  (note 
the  negative). 

No  tiene  mas  que  cinco  pesos.  He  has  only  five  pesos. 

(c)  If  two  clauses  are  compared,  than  is  expressed  by 
de  lo  que  if  adjectives  or  adverbs  are  compared;  del  que 
if  nouns  are  compared,  using  el,  la,  los,  or  las  according 
to  the  gender  of  the  noun. 

f  Es  mas  grande  de  lo  que  crees,  He  is  larger  than  you  think. 
Trabaja  menos  de  lo  que  cree,  He  works  less  than  he  thinks. 
El  tiene  mas  trabajo  del  que  ella  tiene,  He  has  more  work  than 
she  has. 

El  tiene  mas  plumas  de  las  que  ella  tiene,  He  has  more  pens  than 
she  has. 

6.  In  after  a  superlative  is  expressed  by  de. 

Es  la  casa  mas  grande  de  la  ciudad,  It  is  the  largest  house  in 
the  city. 

7.  As  ...  .  as  is  expressed  by  tan  (adjective  or  advert) 
como;  or  tanto  (noun)  como. 

No  es  tan  grande  como  yo,  He  is  not  so  large  as  I. 

No  tiene  tantos  libros  como  yo,  He  has  not  so  many  books  as  I. 

8.  The  more  (less)  ....  the  more  (less)  is  expressed 
by  cuanto  mas  (menos)  ....  tanto  mas  (menos).  Tanto 
may  be  omitted. 

Cuanto  mas  trabaja,  (tanto)  menos  tiene.    The  more  he  works, 
tjie  less  he  has. 

Mientras  may  be  used  instead  of  cuanto,  in  which  case 
tanto  must  be  omitted. 

Mientras  mas  trabaja,  mas  tiene,  The  more  he  works,  the  more 
he  has. 

VOCABULARY 

la  ciudad,  city  la  escuela,  school 

creer,  to  believe  pocos,  -as,  few 

A.    1.  mas  facil  que    2.  el  mas  contento  de  la  ciudad 

3.  mas  perezoso  que    4.  el  mas  perezoso  de  todos    5.  tan 

bueno  como    6.  mejor  que    7.  tan  dificil  como    8.  el  mas 


46 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


satisfecho  9.  el  hombre  mas  satisfecho  10.  mas  pequeno, 
el  mas  pequeno  11.  mas  grande,  mas  perezoso,  mayor 
12.  mas  diligente,  el  mas  diligente    13.  el  mas  contento 

14.  el  mas  perezoso  de  la  escuela  15.  mayor,  el  mas  grande, 
la  mas  fria,  los  mas  ricos,  mas  fria  que,  menor  16.  el  es 
mas  grande  que  usted  17.  mas  fresco  que  18.  tiene  mas' 
libros  de  los  que  usted  tiene  19.  tan  caliente  como 
20.  cuanto  mas  tiene,  menos  desea  21.  lo  mas  despacio, 
mas  sucios   22.  menos   23.  menos  satisfactorio   24.  lo  peor 

AA.  1.  as  satisfied  as  2.  the  more  lie  has,  the  more  he 
wants  3.  they  are  smaller  than  we  4.  happier,  less  satis- 
fied, worse,  youngest  5.  the  richest  in  the  street  6.  colder, 
less  cold,  least  cold,  less,  less  lazy  7.  older,  as  young  as, 
worst,  colder,  younger  than  8.  as  warm  as  9.  she  has 
more  books  than  he  has  10.  dirtier,  less  diligent,  laziest, 
oldest,  as  good  as,  richer,  older,  warmer  than  11.  he  writes 
more  than  you  12.  as  good  as  13.  better  than  14.  they 
found  more  pens  than  we  found,  as  diligent  as,  lazier  than 

15.  the  less  he  writes,  the  more  he  prepares 

B.  1.  No  estudiamos  tanto  como  Uds.,  pero  preparamos 
mejor  nuestras  lecciones.  2.  Es  el  nino  mas  grande  de  la 
familia.  3.  No  esta  el  nino  tan  sucio  como  el  primo.  4.  El 
hermano  es  mas  perezoso  que  la  hermana.  5.  Cuanto  mas 
contentos  estan,  tanto  mas  estudian.  6.  Su  trabajo  es 
menos  satisfactorio  que  el  de  su  hermano.  7.  <jEs  su  her- 
mano menor  o  mayor  de  lo  que  es  usted?  8.  ^Quien  tiene 
agua  mas  fresca  de  la  que  esta  en  el  vaso?  9.  <;No  tiene 
usted  mas  libros  de  los  que  tiene  el?  10.  El  nino  que  esta 
aqui  es  el  mas  perezoso  de  la  escuela.  11.  El  hermano  es 
tan  bueno  como  lo  es  la  hermana.  12.  La  hermana  es 
mejor  que  el  hermano.  13.  La  leccion  que  nosotras  estu- 
diamos no  es  tan  dificil  como  la  que  (the  one  which) 
ustedes  estudian.  14.  La  que  ustedes  estudian  es  menos 
dificil.  15.  El  hermano  es  menor  que  la  hermana;  es  el 
menor  de  toclos.  16.  No  trabaja  bien ;  trabaja  mas  despacio 
que  todos. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 


47 


BB.  1.  The  axe  is  not  so  good.  2.  Did  you  find  as 
many  pens  as  we  [did]  ?  3.  We  found  more  pens  than  you 
found.  4.  These  pupils  are  not  as  diligent  as  the  [ones] 
in  the  room  Mr.  X.  has.  5^  The  less  this  lazy  boy  has, 
the  more  he  wants  and  the  less  he  works.  6.  The  dinner 
is  much  colder  than  it  was  yesterday.  7.  He  washes  his 
slate  more  than  you  wash  your  slate.  8.  Is  she  as  young 
as  her  sister?  9.  No,  she  is  older.  10.  He  has  more  pens 
than  his  cousin  has,  but  he  does  not  write  with  them  (ellas) 
much.  11.  These  books  and  lessons  are  not  as  good  as  the 
ones  that  you  have.  12.  They  are  lazier  now  than  we. 
13.  The  man  is  the  richest  [one]  in  the  street.  14.  He  is 
as  rich  as  my  cousin.  15.  And  the  more  he  has,  the  more 
he  wants.    16.  She  is  the  smallest  pupil  in  the  class. 


LESSON  XXIV 
RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 

Review  Lesson  XVIII. 

1.  Note  that  the  relative  pronouns  differ  from  the  cor- 
responding interrogatives  in  that  the  interrogatives  have 
the  accent  written  on  the  stressed  syllable.  This  accent, 
it  must  be  remembered,  does  not  necessarily  indicate  that 
the  word  has  an  irregular  stress,  but  that  the  word  is  in- 
terrogative and  so  to  be  distinguished  from  a  similar  form 
which  is  relative. 

2.  Referring  to  persons,  que,  who,  whom,  that,  is  used 
as  subject  or  object  of  a  verb. 

El  hombre  que  esta  aqui  es  mi  hermano,  The  man  who  is  here 
is  my  brother. 

El  hombre  que  busca  no  esta  aqui,  The  man  (whom)  he  is  look- 
ing for  is  my  brother. 

Quien,  whom,  follows  a  preposition. 

El  hombre  con  quien  trabajo  esta  aqui,  The  man  I  work  with 
is  here. 


48 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


3.  Referring  to  things,  que,  what,  which,  that,  is  used 
as  subject  of  a  verb  or  as  object  of  a  verb  or  preposition. 

El  lapiz  que  esta.  en  la  mesa  es  de  Juan,  The  pencil  which  is  on 

the  table  is  John's. 
El  lapiz  que  halle  es  de  Juan,  The  pencil  that  I  found  is  John's. 
El  lapiz  con  que  escribo  es  malo,  The  pencil  with  which  I  am 

writing  is  bad. 

4.  Other  relative  words  are  : 

(a)  como,  as,  in  comparisons  of  equality  (see  Lesson 
XXIII,  7) 

(b)  cual,  cuales,  (adjective  or  pronoun),  which 

cual  padre  tal  hijo,  like  father  like  son  (lit.,  which  the  father, 
such  the  son) 

(c)  cuyo,  cuya,  etc.  (adjective) ,  whose 

El  hombre  cuyo  libro  tengo,  .  .  The  man  whose  book  I  have  ,  .  . 

De  quien  is  equivalent  to  cuyo. 

El  hombre  de  quien  tengo  el  libro,  .  .  The  man  whose  book  I 
have  ,  .  . 

(d)  cuanto,  cuanta,  etc.  (adjective  or  pronoun)  how 
much,  as  much  as;  as  many  as  (See  Lesson  XXIII,  8)' 

De  cuantos  hay,  nadie  habla  con  Juan,  Of  as  many  as  there  are, 
no  one  is  speaking  with  John. 

(e)  cuando,  when;  donde,  where 

Cuando  usted  esta  en  Nueva  York,  donde  esta  mi  hermano,  .  .  . 

When  you  are  in  New  York,  where  my  brother  is,  .  .  . 

5.  Neither  relative  pronoun  nor  antecedent  may  be 
omitted  in  Spanish. 

el  libro  que  lee,  the  book  (which)  he  is  reading 
Me  dijo  lo  que  hallaron,  He  told  me  (that  which  =  )  what  they 
found. 

6.  The  antecedent  and  pronoun  should  be  as  close  to- 
gether in  Spanish  as  possible ;  and  a  preposition  can  come 
only  directly  before  the  word  it  governs. 

No  halle  al  hombre  de  quien  usted  me  hablo,  I  didn't  find  the 
man  of  whom  you  spoke  to  me.  (I  didn't  find 
the  man  you  spoke  to  me  of.) 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 


49 


VOCABULARY 

bajo,  under  existir,  to  exist 

dice,  (he,  she,  it)  says;  you  say        mismo,  -a,  same,  very;  (after 

dicen,  (they)  say;  you  say  noun  or  pronoun)  -self 

dijo,  (he,  she,  it)  said;  you  said    la  mo  sea,  fly 

ensenar,  to  point  out,  to  show ;     la  pimienta,  pepper 

to  teach  preguntar,  to  ask  (a  question) 

la  tinta,  ink 

A.  1.  de  quien  2.  con  quien  3.  que  es  4.  con  quien 
hablamos    5.  que  es    6.  a  quien  buscamos    7.  que  halle 

8.  con  quien  9.  que  buscaba  10.  como  hallo  11.  cuantos 
libros^  perdieron  12.  el  libro  de  que  hablaron  13.  los 
lapices  que  usted  hallo  (can  you  omit  que?)  14.  los 
veinte  pesos  que  usted  hallo  15.  cuantos  vasos  limpiaron 
16.  con  quienes  hablamos  17.  que  halle  18.  que  deseamos 
19.  cuales  libros  desearon    20.  con  quien  habla 

AA.  1.  who  2.  when  he  found  3.  when  you  found 
4.  when  did  you  find?  5.  with  which  6.  whom  he  spoke 
with    7.  with  whom  he  spoke    8.  which  he  looked-for 

9.  how  much  he  wants  10.  how  he  works  11.  which  books 
she  found  12.  whose  pen  I  am  writing  with  13.  the  less 
he  finds,  the  more  he  loses  14.  the  man  I  spoke  with 
15.  I  found  the  man  who  ....  16.  how  many  pens  you 
(polite  singular)  found  17.  as  many  pens  (as)  he  has,  he 
has  not  enough    18.  like  father  like  son 

B.  1.  Conjugan  los  veinte  primeros  verbos  del  libro. 
2.  Los  alumnos  que  no  estudian  son  perezosos.  3.  Los 
hombres  a  quienes  buscamos  no  estan  aqui.  4.  Los  alumnos 
cuya  pizarra  lavamos  ya  no  estan  aqui.  5.  Me  dijo 
cuantos  pesos  hallaron  cuando  buscaron  la  pluma  bajo 
la  mesa.  (Why  is  there  an  accent  on  cuantos?  Note 
that  an  indirect  statement  or  question  is  always  a  noun 
clause,  whereas  a  relative  clause  is  adjectival  or  adverbial.) 
6.  Ensena  a  su  hermano  como  cocina  las  comidas.  7.  Ven- 
dieron  la  casa  en  que  vivieron,  y  ahora  tienen  que  buscar 
otra.  8.  Los  lapices  que  hallaron  son  de  nuestras  tias. 
9.  Las  lecciones  que  estudiamos  no  son  tan  faciles  ni  tan 
buenas  como  las  que  estudiamos  ayer.    10.  Me  dijo  como 


50 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


hallo  los  libros  ^ue  nosotras  perdimos.  11.  No  me  dijo 
quien  esta  ahora  en  el  piso  alto.  12.  Me  dijo  cuantos 
libros  hay  en  el  dormitorio  de  su  hermano  donde  los  dos 
estudian.  13.  Enseno  cuantos  libros  hay  en  el  dormitorio. 
14.  No  dijo  a  quien  buscaron  ayer  en  la  calle  donde  viven 
sus  primos.  15.  El  lapiz  que  esta  en  mi  mesa  es  de  mi 
hermano.  16.  No  dijo  cuya  casa  compro  ni  de  quien  es 
la  otra  casa  que  vendio. 

BB.  1.  The  fifteen  men  whom  we  spoke  to  are  not  all 
soldiers.  2.  The  boys  who  live  on  the  upper  floor  are  not 
my  cousins.  3.  The  books  I  looked-for  (see  paragraphs  5 
and  6  above)  are  my  brother's.  4.  He  did  not  say  how 
many  exercises  he  wrote.  6.  He  did  not  show  how  he 
worked.  7.  Did  he  tell  whose  house  his  father  bought? 
if  it  is  the  red  [one]  or  the  white  [one]?  8.  The  man 
we  looked-for  is  no  longer  here;  he  is  in  Paris  (Paris). 
9.  Where  is  the  man  you  gave  (dio)  the  five  hundred 
dollars  to?  10.  The  more  he  has,  the  more  he  wants;  and 
the  more  he  wants,  the  less  he  has.  11.  He  told  me  (me), 
when  he  cooked  the  meal,  that  he  wants  to  drink  water 
when  he  eats,  that  he  does  not  want  milk.  12.  Is  the  man 
who  is  over  there  (over  there  =  por  alii)  your  father? 
13.  No;  the  man  I  spoke  of  is  my  cousin.  14.  He  showed 
which  books  he  is  reading.  15.  And  which  [ones]  are 
they?   16.  He  told  me  what  they  said  when  they  were  here. 


LESSON  XXV 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS  {Concluded) 
Review  Lesson  XXIV. 

1.  The  relative  pronoun  has  an  inflected  form,  com- 
posed of  the  definite  article  plus  either  que  or  cual. 

el  que     la  que      los  que        las  que,  who,  which,  what 
el  cual    la  cual     los  cuales     las  cuales 

Note  that  cual  has  a  plural  cuales. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS 


51 


2.  "Where  the  antecedent  of  a  relative  pronoun  may  be 
confused  with  some  other  word,  the  inflected  form  is  used 
to  avoid  confusion. 

El  tio  de  la  nina,  la  cual  (la  que)  es  muy  pequena,  pregunta  .  .  . 

The  girl's  uncle,  who  (the  girl)  is  very  small,  asks  .  .  . 

3.  Which,  referring  to  a  general  idea,  as  that  contained 

in  an  entire  phrase  or  clause,  is  lo  cual,  lo  que  (for  the 

form  lo,  see  also  Lesson  XII,  S). 

Ella  habla  siempre,  lo  cual  me  aburre  mucho,  She  is  always 
talking,  which  bores  me  greatly. 

4.  Quien  is  sometimes  used  as  a  combination  of  ante- 
cedent plus  relative,  meaning  he  (she,  they)  who;  whoever. 

Quien  siempre  habla,  no  dice  siempre  la  verdad,  He  who  (Who- 
ever) is  always  talking,  does  not  always  tell  the  truth. 

VOCABULARY 

antiguo,  -a,  old,  ancient  la  montana,  mountain 

el  empleado,  clerk,  employee  ni  por  mucho,  not  by  a  good  deal 

despues  de,  after  (preposition  of    pasar,  to  pass,  to  go 

time)  el  sendero,  path 

madrileno,  -a,  (native)  of  sevillano,  -a,  (native)  of  Seville 

Madrid  tanto,  so  much  (adverb) 

moderno,  -a,  modern  tantos,  -as,  so  many 

A.    1.  El  no  vive  en  la  calle  en  que  vivimos  nosotros. 

2.  El  padre  de  la  alumna,  el  que  no  trabaja,  es  muy  rico. 

3.  La  tia  de  mi  padre,  la  que  esta  ahora  en  la  casa,  pregunto 
la  misma  cosa.  4.  Los  primos  de  mi  amigo,  el  que  es  muy 
perezoso,  estudian  mucho  y  son  alumnos  muy  buenos. 
5.  i  Quien  es  el  hombre  que  dijo  que  quien  no  trabaja  es 
muy  feliz  ?  6.  La  madre  del  nino,  la  cual  vive  en  la  casa 
blanca,  prepara  la  comida  para  toda  la  familia.  7.  Todo 
lo  que  el  hombre  dice,  lo  cual  no  es  la  verdad,  nos  aburre 
mucho.  8.  Quien  estudia  mucho  no  es  perezoso.  9.  ^Prepa- 
raron  ellos  mismos  la  comida  que  comieron?  10.  Un 
madrileno  es  un  hombre  que  vive  en  Madrid;  y  un  se- 
villano es  un  hombre  que  vive  en  Se villa.  11.  Madrid  es 
una  ciudad  muy  antigua,  y  esta  en  Espana.  12.  Los 
hombres  pasaron  por  un  sendero  que  hallaron  despues  de 
mucho  trabajo.    13.  ^Tiene  V.  un  empleado  muy  bueno? 


52 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


14.  Yo  tengo  nno  que  es  muy  bueno.  15.  Los  libros 
modernos,  que  usted  lee  tanto,  no  son  todos,  ni  por  mucho, 
buenos.  16.  (jHay  muchas  moscas  aqui?  17.  Cree  que  la 
tinta  que  compro  es  buena.  18.  No  halla  muy  satisfactoria 
la  tinta  que  su  hermana  compro. 

AA.  1.  There  are  many  flies  in  this  room.  2.  Sevillians 
are  men  who  live  in  Seville,  not  in  Madrid.  3.  The  man's 
daughter,  who  -(the  daughter)  is  talking  now,  is  a  pupil  in 
this  school.  4.  The  girl,  who  (la  que)  is  the  largest  pupil 
in  the  school,  is  lazy;  she  does  not  study  much.  5.  The 
girl  who  is  writing  there  is  my  sister.  6.  The  [one]  who 
is  studying  is  my  cousin.  7.  The  man  who  is  his  cousin  is 
[a]  tailor.    8.  He  went  through  a  path  which  we  found. 

9.  The  glasses  which  are  full  of  cold  water  are  my  mother's. 

10.  The  books  you  are  looking-for  are  on  the  table.  11.  My 
brother's  daughter,  who  is  in  Mrs.  X's  school  (in  the 
school  of  the  Mrs.  X.),  is  very  diligent.  12.  "We  found  the 
red  books  of  that  man  in  the  house.  13.  What  verbs  are 
you  conjugating? — We  are  conjugating  the  [ones]  we 
prepared  yesterday.  14.  I  don't  want  the  ink  which  is 
black;  I  want  red  ink.  15.  That  path  which  he  is  pointing 
out  to  John  is  very  old.  16.  What  are  madrilenos? 
17.  My  house,  which  is  on  the  corner  of  the  street,  is  very 
large.  18.  He  who  prepares  a  meal  is  not  always  the 
[one]  who  eats  it. 


LESSON  XXVI 

IMPERFECT  (PAST  DESCRIPTIVE)  TENSE 

Review  Lessons  IV,  VIII,  and  X. 
1.  hablar,  to  speak  (stem  habl-) 

hablaba,  I  was  speaking,  used  hablabamos,  we  were  speaking, 
to  speak  used  to  speak 

hablabas,   you  were   speaking,  hablabais,  you  were  speaking, 
used  to  speak  used  to  speak 

hablaba,  he,  she,  it  was  speak-  hablaban,  they  were  speaking, 
ing,  used  to  speak  used  to  speak 


IMPERFECT    (PAST  DESCRIPTIVE)    TENSE  53 


beber,  to  drink  (stem  beb-) 

bebia,  I  was  drinking,  etc.  bebiamos,  we  were  drinking,  etc. 

bebias,  you  were  drinking,  etc.  bebiais,  you  were  drinking,  etc. 

bebia,  he,  she,  it  was  drinking,  bebian,  they  were  drinking,  etc. 
etc. 

escribir,  to  write  (stem  escrib-) 

escribia,  I  was  writing,  etc.  escribiamos,  we  were  writing,  etc. 

escribias,  you  were  writing,  etc.    escribiais,  you  were  writing,  etc. 
escribia,  he,  she,  it  was  writing,    escribian,  they  were  writing,  etc. 
etc. 

2.  The  second  and  third  conjugations  have  the  same 
endings.  Note  that  the  accent  on  all  forms  is  written  on 
the  -i-. 

The  first  conjugation  has  -ab-  instead  of  and  the 
accent  is  written  only  on  the  first  plural. 

3.  The  imperfect  is  used  to  denote  (a)  continued  or 
(b)  habitual  action. 

(a)  Trabajaba  en  Nueva  York,  He  was  working  in  New  York. 
Estudiaba  cuando  yo  le  halle,  He  was  studying  when  I  found  him. 

(b)  Escribia  un  ejercicio  todas  las  tardes,  He  used  to  write  (He 

would  write)  an  exercise  every  afternoon. 

VOCABULARY 

ganar,  to  gain,  to  earn  toda  la  ciudad,  all  the  city,  the 

la  tarde,  afternoon  whole  city 

todo,  -a;  -os,  -as,  all,  whole        todas  las  tardes,  every  afternoon 

A.    1.  quedaba  2.  limpiabamos   3.  cocinaban   4.  lavaba 

5.  tomabais  6.  no  toca  7.  ^escribias?  8.  usted  deseaba 
9.  (jno  preguntabais ?  10.  hablaban  11.  conjugaban 
12.  cocinabamos  13.  tocabamos  14.  aburriamos  15.  be- 
bian  16.  tomaban    17.  escribiamos    18.  estabais 

A  A.  1.  they  were  washing  2.  you  were  writing  3.  I 
used  to  write    4.  it  was  boring    5.  she  would  drink 

6.  would  they  eat?  7.  he  used  to  speak  8.  were  they 
taking?  9.  he  wasn't  playing  10.  he  used  to  conjugate 
11.  yon  were  buying  12.  were  you  (use  estar)  ?  13.  he 
was  14.  they  used  to  take  15.  you  would  write  16.  we 
used  to  write    17.  we  were  living   18.  we  would  speak 


54 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


B.    1.  Escribian  cuando  nosotros  cocinabamos  la  comida. 

2.  Viviamos  en  la  calle  X.  cuando  vendio  la  casa  a  su  tio. 

3.  Ningun  hombre  trabaja  alii.  4.  Comia  en  la  casa  de  mi 
primo.  5.  Cuando  nosotros  estabamos  aqui,  usted  no  es- 
tudiaba.  6.  ^Bs  usted? — Si,  yo  soy  (soy  yo).  7.  El 
hombre  que  vivia  en  la  casa  blanca  ya  no  esta  aqui. 
8.  Vivia  en  la  esquina  de  la  calle  X.  9.  Siempre  pregun- 
taba  las  mismas  cosas.  10.  Comian  siempre  en  la  casa  de 
mis  tios,  que  ahora  est  an  en  Francia.  11.  No  deseaba  una 
cuchara,  deseaba  un  cuchillo.  12.  <jBuscaba  V.  a  Juan  o 
a  Elena?  13.  Buscaba  a  Elena,  pero  halle  a  Juan.  14.  No 
escribia  mas  que  cinco  ejercicios.  15.  El  estaba  en  Paris 
cuando  nosotros  lo  buscabamos  en  Madrid. 

BB.  1.  The  two  men  from  Madrid  whom  we  looked-for 
in  Paris  were  tailors  who  were  on  X.  Street  (the  street  X.). 
2.  We  were  looking-for  our  cousins,  but  we  did  not  find 
them.     3.  He  was  showing  the  work  every  afternoon. 

4.  We  used  to  live  in  the  mountains,  but  now  we  are  living 
in  the  city.  5.  We  used  to  live  on  the  third  floor.  6.  They 
used  to  write  some  very  satisfactory  exercises.  7.  She  was 
looking  for  her  brother's  things.  8.  The  more  he  used  to 
work,  the  less  he  used  to  earn.  9.  The  hundred  men  who 
used  to  work  for  my  uncle  did  not  earn  very  much.  10.  He 
used  to  eat  and  drink  at  my  parents'  (in  house  of  my 
parents).  11.  He  used  to  cook  at  my  uncle's,  but  now  he 
is  working  at  the  captain's  (see  BB,  10).  12.  He  would 
study  with  my  cousins,  but  now  they  are  in  Paris,  and 
he  is  very  lazy — he  does  not  study  now.  13.  What  books 
were  you  studying?  Are  they  as  interesting  as  the  [ones] 
which  we  were  studying?  17.  He  is  showing  the  books  he 
was  studying  yesterday.    18.  He  has  only  eight  now. 

[Before  taking  lesson  XXVII,  study  Appendix  B,  p.  208. 
Beginning  with  Lesson  XXVII,  the  student  should  pay 
special  attention  to  idiomatic  expressions.] 


TENER 


55 


LESSON  XXVII 
TENER,  to  have 

1.  Present  Indicative  (stem  irregular). 

tengo,  I  have,  etc.  tenemos,  we  have,  etc. 

tienes,  you  have,  etc.  teneis,  you  have,  etc. 

tiene,  lie,  she,  it  has;  you  have,    tienen,  they  have;  you  have,  etc. 
etc. 

2.  Imperfect  Indicative  (stem  ten-) 

tenia,  I  had,  etc.  teniamos,  we  had,  etc. 

tenias,  you  had,  etc.  teniais,  you  had,  etc. 

tenia,  he,  she,  it  had;  you  had,    tenian,  they  had;  you  had,  etc. 
etc. 

Preterite  Indicative  (stem  tuv-) 

tuve,  I  had  tuvimos,  we  had 

tuviste,  you  had  tuvisteis,  you  had 

tuvo,  he,  she,  it  had;  you  had      tuvieron,  they  had;  you  had 

2.  (a)  The  present  tense  is  somewhat  irregular.  Note 
the  -g-  in  the  first  person  singular,  and  the  change  of  -e- 
to  -ie-  in  the  second  and  third  singular  and  in  the  third 
person  plural.    The  other  endings  are  regular. 

(b)  The  imperfect  is  wholly  regular. 

(c)  The  preterite  changes  the  stem  from  ten-  of  the 
infinitive  to  tuv-.  The  endings  of  the  first  and  third  per- 
sons singular  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  first  conjugation, 
but  are  unaccented ;  the  other  endings  are  the  regular  sec- 
ond conjugation  endings. 

3.  The  verb  tener  means  to  have  in  the  sense  of  possess, 
and  has  that  meaning  only  (do  not  use  tener  as  the  aux- 
iliary, as  in  I  have  seen,  where  there  is  no  idea  of  pos- 
session). 

Tengo  un  libro,  I  have  a  book. 

Teniamos  nuestras  comidas  en  casa  de  nuestra  tia,  We  used  to 

have  our  meals  at  our  aunt's. 
Tuvo  un  lapiz,  He  had  a  pencil. 

4.  Tener,  when  it  takes  a  direct  personal  object,  does  not 


56 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


have  the  preposition  a  (this  is  an  exception  to  Lesson 


Tengo  un  hermano,  I  have  a  brother. 
5.  Note  the  idioms: 

(a)  iQue  tiene  usted?    What  is  the  matter  with  you?  (lit.,  What 

have  you?) 

No  tengo  nada,  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me.    (lit.,  I  have 
nothing.) 

(b)  i Tiene  usted  frio?    Are  you  cold?  (lit.,  Have  you  cold?) 

Frio  is  a  noun,  hence  must  be  modified  by  an  adjective. 
The  Spanish  does  not  say:  "I  am  very  cold/'  but  "I 
have  much  cold." 

Tengo  mucho  frio,  I  am  very  cold,  (lit.,  I  have  much  cold.) 

This  construction  is  used  only  of  persons.  Cf.  XIV,  2 
and  XV,  4. 

(c)  iCuantos  aiios  tiene  usted?    How  old  are  you?  (lit.,  How  many 

years  have  you?) 
Tengo  diez  y  siete  anos,  I  am  seventeen  years  old.  (lit.,  I  have 
seventeen  years.) 

VOCABULARY 

el  aire,  air  tiene  hambre,  he  is  hungry 

el  ano,  year  llorar,  to  weep,  to  cry 

jca!  not  at  all!  no,  indeed!  el miedo,  fear;  tenemos  miedo,  we 
el  calor,  heat  are  afraid 

tiene  mucho  calor,  he  is  very       nada,  nothing  (pronoun) 


iPor  Dios!  For  heaven's  sake!      tiene  sueno,  he  is  sleepy 
(la)  hambre,  hunger 

A.  1.  tenia  2.  tuvieron  3.  ^ tenia  ella?  4.  ^no  tenia 
el?  5.  usted  tiene  6.  (Jno  tienen?  7.  tuvimos  8.  <:tuve 
yo?  9.  no  tuviste  10.  ^no  tenia  yo?  11.  (Jcuantos  anos 
tenia?  12.  tienes  calor?  13.  tengo  frio  14.  tienen  mucho 
frio  15.  tengo  16.  tenemos  17.  temamos  18.  tuvimos 
19.  tenia  20.  tiene  21.  tuvo  22.  tuvisteis  23.  teneis 
24.  tienes  25.  tiene  26.  teniais  27.  tengo  un  libro 
28.  tengo  dos  tias  29.  <jque  tienes?  30.  no  tengo  nada 
31.  V.  no  tiene    32.  <:  tenia  Vd.? 

A  A.  1.  they  are  twenty  and  twenty-five  years  old 
2.  I  had   3.  they  have   4.  had  they?   5.  were  you  having? 


XII,  2). 


warm 
Dios,  God 


nada,  not  at  all  (adverb) 
el  sueno,  sleep 


TENER 


57 


6.  I  am  holding  (tengo)  7.  were  they  cold?  8.  how  old 
are  you?  9.  is  he  very  old?  10.  she  was  eighteen  years 
old  11.  what  is  the  matter  with  you?  12.  nothing  is  the 
matter  with  her  13.  are  you  cold?  14.  we  are  very  warm 
15.  we  had  16.  did  he  have?  17.  they  were  having 
18.  did  you  use  to  have?  19.  you  would  have  (you  used 
to  have) 

B.  1.  El  aire  en  esta  pieza  est  a  muy  caliente;  ^no  tiene 
usted  mucho  calor  ?  2.  No  tenia  el  libro.  3.  No  tuve  miedo  ; 
pero  yo  soy  muy  pequeno  y  el  es  muy  grande.  4.  <jQue 
tenia? — No  tenia  nada.   5.  Hallo  al  nino,  y  el  nino  lloraba. 

6.  ^Quien  tuvo  mi  libro?   ^Juan  o  Enrique? — Pue  Elena. 

7.  ^Cuanto  dinero  tuviste  ayer?  8.  Mi  madre  no  tenia  ni 
cuchara  ni  tenedor;  Juan  los  tenia.  9.  Escribia  una  carta 
cuando  yo  entre  en  el  dormitorio.  10.  Don  Enrique  tiene 
mucho  frio;  ya  tiene  setenta  anos.  11.  ^Donde  tenias  la 
tinta,  Elena? — En  la  mesa  de  mi  dormitorio.  12.  Los 
amigos  de  mi  primo,  los  que  tenian  la  casa  blanca  de  la 
esquina,  son  muy  perezosos.  13.  La  vajilla  que  esta  en  la 
pieza  esta  muy  sucia.  14.  La  ciudad  donde  tiene  sus  casas 
no  es  muy  grande.   15.  Vivieron  alii  mucho  tiempo. 

BB.  1.  What  have  you  in  your  bedroom?  2.  I  have 
some  books  there  today,  but  I  did  not  have  them  there  yes- 
terday. 3.  Were  you  very  cold  yesterday?  4.  No,  indeed, 
I  was  warm;  but  the  room  was  cold.  5.  Are  you  afraid? 
6.  How  old  are  your  sister's  children  now?  7.  She  is  eight 
years  old,  and  her  father  is  forty-five.  8.  Did  they  con- 
jugate again  the  verbs  the  student  pointed  out?  9.  No, 
they  were  conjugating  them  when  I  entered  the  room. 

10.  Did  you  find  the  man? — No,  he  wasn't  in  the  house. 

11.  I  like  to  have  books,  but  I  have  not  many.  12.  Did 
you  want  the  book  I  was  reading?  13.  No,  I  wanted  the 
book  John  had.  14.  They  had  the  third  exercise,  but  they 
did  not  write.  15.  Didn't  they  study  the  lesson? — No, 
indeed. 


58 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


LESSON  XXVIII 
HABER,  to  have 
Review  Lesson  XXVII. 

1.  Present  Indicative  {stem  irregular) 

he,  I  have,  etc.  hemos,  we  have,  etc. 

has,  you  have,  etc.  habeis,  you  have,  etc. 

ha,  he,  she,  it  has;  you  have,      han,  they  have;  you  have,  etc. 
etc. 

Imperfect  Indicative  {stem  hab-) 

habia,  I  had,  etc.  habiamos,  we  had,  etc. 

habias,  you  had,  etc.  habiais,  you  had,  etc. 

habia,  he,  she,  it  had;  you  had,    habian,  they  had;  you  had,  etc. 
etc. 

Preterite  Indicative  {stem  hub-) 

hube,  I  had  hubimos,  we  had 

hubiste,  you  had  hubisteis,  you  had 

hubo,  he,  she,  it  had;  you  had       hubieron,  they  had;  you  had 

2.  (a)  The  present  tense  is  irregular.  Note  the  first 
person  singular  ending  and  the  -as,  -a  of  the  second  and 
third  persons.  In  the  plural,  the  first  and  third  persons 
are  also  irregular.  The  second  person  plural,  habeis,  is 
the  only  regular  form.  In  the  other  five  forms,  the  stem 
is  shortened  to  h-. 

(b)  The  imperfect  tense  is  wholly  regular. 

(c)  The  preterite  changes  the  stem  from  hab-  of  the 
infinitive  to  hub-.  The  endings  of  the  first  and  third  per- 
sons singular  are  unaccented,  but  have  the  same  vowels  as 
the  first  conjugation  preterite  {cf.  tener  in  Lesson  XXVII, 
2c). 

3.  Hay,  made  by  adding  y  to  the  third  person  singular 
of  the  present,  is  an  impersonal  verb  form  meaning  there 
is  or  there  are. 

Hay  un  lapiz  en  la  mesa,  There  is  a  pencil  on  the  table. 

Hay  dos  plumas  en  mi  pieza,  There  are  two  pens  in  my  room. 


HABER 


59 


In  the  other  tenses,  the  third  person  singular  is  simi- 
larly used,  but  without  adding  y. 

Habia  un  lapiz  en  la  mesa,  There  was  a  pencil  on  the  table. 

Note  expressions  like  debe  haber,  there  must  be  (debe, 
it  ought). 

4.  Hay  is  used  in  certain  idioms. 

hay  viento,  it  is  windy  (lit.,  there  is  wind) 
hay  sol,  it  is  sunny  {lit.,  there  is  sun) 
hay  neblina,  it  is  foggy  {lit.,  there  is  fog) 

5.  Haber  is  used  most  commonly  as  the  auxiliary  to  form 
the  perfect  tenses. 

Perfect  Indicative,  hablar 

he  hablado,  I  have  spoken  hemos  hablado,  we  have  spoken 

has  hablado,  you  have  spoken  habeis  hablado,  you  have  spoken 

ha  hablado,  he,  she,  it  has  spok-  han  hablado,  they  have  spoken; 
en;  you  have  spoken  you  have  spoken 

Pluperfect  Indicative,  hablar 

habia  hablado,  I  had  spoken  habiamos  hablado,  we  had  spoken 

habias  hablado,  you  had  spoken  habiais  hablado,  you  had  spoken 

habia  hablado,  he,  she,  it  had  habian  hablado,  they  had  spoken; 
spoken;  you  had  spoken  you  had  spoken 

Perfect  Indicative,  beber    Perfect  Indicative,  vivir 

he  bebido,  I  have  drunk  he  vivido,  I  have  lived 

has  bebido,  you  have  drunk,  etc.    has  vivido,  you  have  lived,  etc. 

Pluperfect  Indicative,       Pluperfect  Indicative, 
beber  vivir 

habia  bebido,  I  had  drunk  habia  vivido,  I  have  lived 

habias  bebido,  you  had  drunk,  etc.  habias  vivido,  you  had  lived,  etc. 

He  hablado  con  su  padre,  I  have  spoken  with  your  father. 

Lo  habia  escrito,  He  had  written  it. 

In  questions,  the  subject,  if  expressed,  follows  the  whole 
compound. 

I  Lo  habia  escrito  Juan  ?    Did  John  write  it  ? 

VOCABULARY 

despues,  afterwards  {adverb)        despues  que,  after  (conj.) 

A.    1.  hay  viento    2.  hay   3.  i habia?    4.  habia  neblina 


60 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


5.  habia  6.  habiamos  aburrido  7.  no  habiamos  conjugado 
8.  habia  neblina  9.  hubo  10.  <;  habia?  11.  no  hay  12.  no 
hubo  13.  tu  has  vivido  14.  ^ha  habido  sol?  15.  ha 
habido  viento  16.  no  hay  17.  hay  viento  18.  ^no  habia 
viento?    19.  vosotras  habeis  lavado 

AA.  1.  was  it  foggy?  2.  there  is  3.  there  are  4.  there 
wasn't  5.  it  was  sunny  6.  there  were  7.  were  there? 
8.  it  is  windy  9.  was  it  windy?  10.  there  are  11.  it  is  not 
windy  12.  he  has  drunk  13.  he  had  written  14.  you 
have  hastened  15.  she  had  gone  out  16.  we  had  had 
17.  had  we  had?   18.  she  has  prepared 

B.  1.  i  Ha  hablado  a  su  padre  del  libro  que  compro 
ayer?  2.  Hay  mucho  viento  y  yo  tengo  mucho  frio. 
3.  (J  Ha  hablado  usted  con  algun  hombre  ayer  de  las  cosas 
de  su  padre?  4.  ^Hay  mucho  sol  hoy?  5.  ^Hay  muchos 
alumnos  en  esta  escuela?  6.  Si,  hay  muchos.  7.  Ayer 
habia  mucho  viento,  pero  hoy  no  hay  viento.  8.  No  tiene 
leccion  para  hoy;  ayer  habia  estudiado  toda  la  leccion  y 
despues  escribio  el  ejercicio.  9.  El  hombre  que  preparo 
la  comida  no  la  comio.  10.  No  hemos  hallado  los  lapices 
que  buscabamos.  11.  Ayer  habia  sol,  pero  hoy  no  hay  sol. 
12.  Mis  primos  han  vivido  en  Madrid,  pero  ahora  viven  en 
Barcelona.  13.  Yo  he  tenido  mi  dormitorio  en  el  piso  alto; 
pero  ahora  lo  tengo  en  el  piso  bajo.  14.  El  alumno  ha 
preparado  sus  lecciones  para  hoy. 

BB.  1.  Have  they  written  their  exercises  yet?  2.  It  is 
very  sunny  and  windy  today.  3.  Had  they  studied  their 
lessons  when  you  came  into  their  room?  4.  No,  and  they 
have  not  studied  them  yet.  5.  They  are  very  lazy;  the 
man  who  teaches  in  their  school  must  (debe)  be  good. 

6.  Have  you  bought  the  pencils  they  want  ?  7.  Who  wants 
them? — The  man  whose  son  is  studying  in  our  room. 
8.  The  man  who  lived  in  the  house  had  bored  me  a  great 
deal.  9.  It  was  very  foggy  when  we  entered  Paris.  10.  We 
have  not  studied  as  much  as  you  have  studied,  but  we 
have  studied  more  lessons  than  you  have  studied  and  we 


IDIOMS  WITH  TENER  AND  HABER 


61 


have  prepared  them  better.  11.  The  lessons  we  have  pre- 
pared are  the  most  difficult  in   (how  expressed?)  the  book. 

12.  After  we  ate  the  dinner,  we  washed  the  dishes. 

13.  Had  she  finished  washing  the  glasses  when  you  were 
there  ?   14.  As  much  money  as  he  has,  he  wants  more. 

LESSON  XXIX 
IDIOMS  WITH  TENER  AND  HABER 

Review  Lessons  XXVII  and  XXVIII. 

1.  The  following  very  common  expressions  are  formed 
with  tener  and  haber : 

(a)  tener  que,  have  to,  must 

Tengo  que  escribir  el  ejercicio,  I  have  to  (must)  write  the 
exercise. 

The  que  may  be  separated  from  the  verb,  and  then  the 
expression  is  to  be  translated : 

Tengo  un  ejercicio  que  escribir,  I  have  an  exercise  to  write. 

(b)  Haber  de  plus  the  infinitive  means  am  to,  are  to,  etc. 

He  de  escribir  dos  ejercicios  para  manana,  I  am  to  write  two 
exercises  for  tomorrow. 

(c)  Hay  que  (habia  que,  etc.)  is  an  impersonal  expres- 
sion, the  meanings  of  which  are  best  learned  from  ex- 
amples. 

Hay  tres  lecciones  que  estudiar  para  manana,  There  are  three 
lessons  to  be  studied  for  tomorrow. 

No  hay  nada  que  hacer,  There  is  nothing  to  be  done,  (lit.,  noth- 
ing to  do.) 

Hay  que  hacerlo,  It  must  be  done,  It  ought  to  be  done,  (lit., 
There  is  to  do  it.) 

Note  pronoun  object  following  and  joined  to  infinitive. 

2.  Note  the  following  idioms.  Similar  expressions  can 
readily  be  formed. 

jPobre  de  usted!    You  poor  fellow! 

ilnfeliz  de  Juan!    Unhappy  fellow  that  John  is! 

jAy  de  usted!    Woe  to  you!  You  poor  fellow! 

No  ve  lo  buenos  que  son,  He  doesn't  see  how  good  they  are. 


62 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


3.  Present  Indicative  of  Ver,  to  see  (stem  v-) 

veo,  I  see  vemos,  we  see 

ves,  you  see  veis,  you  see 

ve,  he,  she,  it  sees;  you  see  ven,  they  see;  you  see 

VOCABULARY 

la  camisa,  shirt  inf eliz,  unhappy,  unlucky 

el  cuello,  collar  pobre,  poor 

la  chaqueta,  jacket,  coat  el  zapato,  shoe 

hacer,  to  do,  to  make 

A.  1.  jinfeliz  de  nosotros!  2.  han  de  .  .  .  3.  tenia 
que  ...  4.  tenemos  un  libro  que  estudiar  5.  ha  tenido 
que  lavar  6.  teniamos  que  ...  7.  tenemos  lecciones  que 
estudiar  8.  hay  que  hacer  9.  hay  mucho  que  hacer 
10.  hay  que  ver  11.  habia  de  verlas  12.  tenemos  que 
entrar  13.  ha  tenido  que  estudiar  14.  hay  que  leerlo 
15.  habia  que  leer  16.  hemos  tenido  que  escribir 
17.  j  pobre  de  Juan!    18.  ;  ay  de  Maria 

AA.  1.  we  have  a  lesson  to  write  2.  poor  fellows! 
3.  poor  John!  4.  did  we  have  to  come  in?  5.  is  he  to 
speak?  6.  was  he  to  play  the  piano?  7.  we  have  had  to 
study  8.  there  is  much  to  be  done  9.  has  he  had  to  clean? 
10.  there  is  nothing  to  be  cleaned  11.  you  should  have 
seen  the  mist!  (; habia  que  ver  la  neblina!)  12.  was  he 
to  play  the  piano?  13.  they  have  had  to  live  in  that 
(aquella)  house  13.  you  should  have  read  the  book! 
14.  you  ought  to  see  the  house!    15.  poor  fellow! 

B.  1.  i  Tenian  que  comprar  zapatos  sin  medias?  2.  jHay 
que  ver  el  sombrero  que  tiene !  3.  Habia  de  tocar  el  piano 
euando  usted  entro  en  la  pieza.  4.  Compraron  cuatro 
camisas  y  doce  cuellos  y  despues  no  los  hallaron  en  la  casa 
cuando  los  desearon.  5.  Cuanto  mas  tenian  que  estudiar, 
tanto  menos  estudiaron.  6.  ^Ha  tenido  usted  frio  en  su 
dormitorio  ?  7.  Tenemos  que  preparar  la  comida  para  hoy. 
8.  ;  Hay  que  ver  cuanto  comen !  9.  j  Pobre  de  Juan !  no 
trabaja  ni  tiene  dinero.  10.  Hemos  tenido  que  trabajar 
mucho  para  preparar  la  leccion.  11.  Ha  habido  mucho 
viento,  pero  ahora  hay  sol.  12.  ;  Inf elices  de  ustedes! 
<;Por  que  no  prepararon  mejor  su  leccion?    13.  Habia  de 


DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS  63 


tocar  el  piano  ella,  no  el.  14.  <jQuien  ha  lavado  la  vajilla? 
[  Hay  que  ver  lo  sucia  que  esta!  15.  j  Habia  que  ver  lo 
bien  que  escribia ! 

BB.  1.  Did  they  have  to  study  the  lessons  yesterday 
or  are  they  studying  today?  2.  You  ought  to  see  the  ex- 
ercises he  wrote !  3.  You  poor  fellow !  4.  I  am  to  eat 
dinner  with  my  uncle  today.  5.  He  was  to  come  in  the 
room  with  us,  but  he  didn't  finish  studying.  6.  There 
were  so  many  things  to  do  that  I  didn't  do  (no  hice)  any- 
thing (nada).  7.  Did  you  have  many  verbs  to  conjugate? 
8.  No,  we  had  few.  9.  As  many  lessons  as  he  had  to  study, 
none  did  he  study  well.  10.  He  didn't  have  as  much 
money  as  I.  11.  But  he  was  much  happier.  12.  Whose 
books  did  you  have?  13.  I  had  John's.  14.  The  water  is 
warm;  we  didn't  have  cold  water.  15.  They  have  had  to 
live  in  the  white  house  because  they  didn't  buy  the  other. 
16.  Poor  children!  It  was  so  windy  that  they  didn't  see 
the  city.   1?.  Are  you  cold? — Is  the  air  in  the  room  cold? 


LESSON  XXX 
DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS 

1.      Masculine  Feminine 


este,  this        estos,  these 
ese,  that         esos,  those 
aquel,  that     aquellos,  those 


esta,  this  estas,  these 
esa,  that  esas,  those 

aquella,  that    aquellas,  those 


(a)  Este  is  readily  understood  from  the  English 
equivalent. 

(b)  Ese  is  used  of  objects  relatively  near,  and  aquel 
of  objects  relatively  distant. 

Yo  tengo  este  libro,  I  have  this  book.  • 
Tu  tienes  (Vd.  tiene)  ese  libro,  You  have  that  book. 
El  tiene  aquel  libro,  He  has  that  book. 

(c)  Ahf  means  there  (rather  near)  and  alii  also 
means  there  (but  distant  from  the  speaker). 


64 


SPANISH  GEAMMAR 


^Que  tienes  ahi?    What  have  you  there? 

I  Que  tiene  Juan  alii  ?    What  has  John  there  ? 

(d)  Note  the  endings  of  the  masculine  singular. 

2.  The  demonstrative  adjectives  are  also  used  as  pro- 
nouns; but  in  writing,  an  accent  mark  is  placed  over  the 
stressed  syllable  to  distinguish  pronoun  from  adjective. 

este,  this  (one)  estos,  these  esta,  this  (one)  estas,  these 
ese,  that  (one)    esos,  those  esa,  that  (one)       esas,  those 

aquel,  that  (one)  aquellos,  those      aquella,  that  (one)  aquellas,  those 

3.  In  such  phrases  as:  "I  think  not, "  icl  think  so," 
"I  believe  so,"  the  not,  so,  etc.  take  the  place  of  a 
clause  (e.  g.  "I  think  that  it  is  so").  In  Spanish,  there- 
fore, they  must  be  preceded  by  the  conjunction  que,  since 
a  conjunction  cannot  be  omitted  before  the  subordinate 
clause. 

Creo  que  si,  I  think  sov  {lit.,  I  think  that  yes.) 

Me  parece  que  no,  I  think  not.   {lit.,  It  seems  to  me  that  not.) 


el  estudiante,  (college)  student -    el  petroleo,  kerosene 
la  luz,  light 

A.  1.  estas  2.  esos  3.  aquella  4.  esas  5.  estos  ninos 
6.  estas  plumas  7.  esta  agua  8.  este  reloj  9.  aquellos 
dormitorios  10.  estas  virtudes  11.  estas  pizarras  12.  esta 
tiza  13.  esos  14.  aquellos  15.  esta  mesa  16.  estos  za- 
patos  17.  aquellas  camisas  18.  esos  cuellos  19.  esta 
comida   20.  aquellas  ninas 

AA.  1.  these  2.  that  meal  3.  this  house  4.  that 
5.  these  6.  this  truth  7.  that  chalk  8.  those  women 
9.  this  cousin  10.  that  slate  11.  these  students  12.  those 
verbs  13.  fhese  meals  14.  that  15.  those  16.  these 
17.  this  ice  18.  that  water  19.  this  sugar  20.  these 
chairs   21.  those  eggs    22.  those  houses    23.  that  coffee 

B.  1.  ^Has  hallado  los  libros  rojos  y  los  blancos? 


VOCABULARY 


aqui,  here 
cerca  de,  near 
electrico,  -a,  electric 


parece,  it  appears,  it  seems 
me  parece,  it  seems  to  me,  I 
think 


DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS  65 


2.  i  Son  estos  libros  de  su  senor  tio?1  3.  (iCuales  libros 
son  los  que  usted  ha  hallado  en  mi  dormitorio?  4.  <;Han 
liallado  tantos  libros  en  este  como  en  aquel?  5.  Estos 
lapices  son  mejores  que  los  de  Juan.  6.  ^En  que  calle 
de  Madrid  viven  ustedes?  7.  ^Que  tienes  ahi?  <;Es  un 
libro?  8.  Estos  vasos  est  an  vacios,  pero  aquellos  estan 
Uenos  de  agua.  9.  ^Cuyo  piano  es  este? — ^ho  toca  Juan? 
10.  En  aquella  esquina  hay  una  casa  blanca,  en  donde 
(where)  vive  mi  primo,  don  Enrique.  11.  Mis  padres  ya 
no  viven  en  esta  ciudad;  viven  ahora  en  Madrid.  12.  Aqui 
hay  luz  electrica,  pero  ahi  tienes  que  tener  la  luz  de  una 
lampara  de  petroleo.    13.  ^Es  buen  alumno  su  primo? 

—  Me  parece  que  si.  14.  Yo  creo  que  no.  Me  parece  que 
no  es  muy  bueno  como  estudiante.  15.  ^Esta  aqui  su 
senora  madre? 

BB.  1.  Was  it  windy  yesterday?  This  man  doesn't 
think  so.  2.  There  are  now  seven  hundred  soldiers  in  this 
city.  3.  How  many  soldiers  are  there  in  your  (=that) 
city?  4.  This  child  is  younger  than  that  one,  but  he  is 
larger.  5.  Who  is  that  man  who  says  that  he  who  does 
not  work  is  very  happy?  6.  Everything  this  man  says 
bores  me  greatly.  7.  What  did  they  have  there  ?  8.  Are  these 
books  as  difficult  as  John's?  9.  The  more  these  children 
study,  the  less,  it  seems  to  me,  they  learn  (aprenden). 
10.  These  forks  and  spoons  are  my  aunt's;  I  found  them 
today.  11.  Are  these  children  here  your  cousin's? 
12.  This  thin  child  is  my  cousin,  but  that  one  is  not  (it), 
he  is  my  cousin's  friend.  13.  These  chairs  and  tables  are 
no  good.    14.  What  is  that  thing  there  near  you,  John? 

—  Is  it  a  book?  15.  I  think  not.  16.  Is  your  father  in 
Madrid  now? 


1  senor,  (senora,  senorita),  may  be  put  before  a  noun,  in  speaking-  to  a  person, 
to  make  the  expression  more  polite. 

^Corno  esta  su  senor  padre?    How  is  your  father? 
iEsta  aqui  su  senora  madre?    Is  your  mother  here? 

3 


66 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


LESSON  XXXI 

DEMONSTRATIVES  (Concluded) 
Keview  Lesson  XXX. 

1.  Este  (adjective  or  pronoun)  may  mean  the  latter;  and 
aquel,  the  former. 

Juan  y  Maria  estan  aqui;  esta  es  mi  prima  y  aquel  mi  amigo, 

John  and  Mary  are  here;  the  latter  is  my  cousin  and 
the  former  my  friend. 

2.  Expressions  like  my  brother's  are  rendered  in  Span- 
ish by  that  of  my  brother. 

mi  dinero  y  el  de  mi  primo,  my  money  and  my  cousin's 

The  demonstrative  is  'sometimes  used  to  give  more 
emphasis. 

este  nino  y  aquel  que  encontramos  ayer,  this  child  and  the  one 

that  we  met  yesterday 

Note  that  the  demonstrative  does  not  have  the  accent 
here. 

3.  Each  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  has  a  neuter 
form:  esto,  eso,  and  aquello.  As  there  are  no  neuter 
demonstrative  adjectives  (for  there  are  no  neuter  nouns), 
no  accent  has  to  be  written  over  the  forms.  These  pro- 
nouns refer  to  a  clause,  phrase,  or  general  or  vague  idea. 

There  is  no  plural  for  these  forms.    Note  that  it  is  the 
neuter  forms,  and  not  the  masculine,  that  end  in  -o. 
iQue  es  eso?    What  is  that? 

Todo  eso  que  usted  dice  es  la  verdad,  All  that  you  say  is  the 
truth. 

El  las  ha  hallado. — Eso  no  es  la  verdad,  He  found  them. — That 
is  not  the  truth. 

4.  En  esta  has  the  special  meaning  of  in  this  town;  en 
esa,  in  that  town  (the  town  of  one's  correspondent,  to 
whom  one  is  writing). 

En  esta  no  hay  novedad,  There  is  nothing  new  in  this  town 
(here). 


DEMONSTRATIVES 


67 


VOCABULARY 

bajar,  to  go  down,  to  descend      duele,  (it)  hurts 
elbrazo,  arm  el  pie  me  duele,  my  foot  hurts 

un  cabello,  [a]  hair  encontrar,  to  meet,  find,  come 

los  cabellos,  hair  (collective)  across 
el  carro,  street  car,  trolley  enfermo,  -a,  sick,  ill,  sore 

(South-American  word)       flojo,  -a,  lazy 
castano,  -a,  chestnut -colored        izquierdo,  -a,  left 
eldedo,  finger  tomar,  to  take 

derecho,  -a,  right ;  straight       el  tranvia,  street  car,  trolley 

(word  used  in  Spain) 

A.  1.  aquel    2.  este    3.  mi  libro  y  el  de  mi  hermano 

4.  eso  5.  aquello  6.  esta  8.  este  9.  aquel  10.  aquella 
11.  mi  tiza  y  la  del  nino  12.  su  ejercicio  y  el  de  su  primo 
13.  Juan  y  Maria;  esta  y  aquel  ....  14.  este  libro  y 
aquel  15.  <;Que  es  eso?   16.  Eso  es  (That's  so) 

AA.    1.  What's  that?    2.  this    3.  that    4.  this  book 

5.  this  [one]  6.  that  [one]  7.  my  slate  and  my  cousin's 
8.  those  9.  that's  so  10.  that's  right  (that  is  so)  11.  the 
former  and  the  latter  12.  the  latter  and  the  former 
13.  that  is  so  14.  the  former  15.  the  former  and  the 
latter  16.  the  former  17.  it  seems  to  me  that  is  the  truth 
18.  the  former  and  the  latter  19.  in  this  town  20.  in 
your  town    21.  there  (in  your  town) 

B.  1.  iSste  no  esta  muy  sucio;  pero  hay  que  lavarlo. 

2.  ;Que  dice  el  nino  de   (with)   los  cabellos  castanos? 

3.  (jQue  nino?  <j Aquel?  Sus  cabellos  son  rubios,  no 
castanos.  4.  Tomamos  el  tranvia  en  esta  calle,  que  es  la 
calle  X.,  y  bajamos  por  la  calle  Z.    5.  El  dedo  me  duele. 

6.  <jEn  que  calle  vive?  7.  En  esta  hay  muchas  casas 
blancas;  en  esa,  son  todas  rojas.  8.  En  aquella  escuela 
hay  muy  pocos  alumnos;  en  esta,  hay  muchos;  pero  6stos 
son  muy  flojos,  aquellos,  muy  diligentes.  9.  Este  pie  me 
duele;  lo  tengo  muy  enfermo  (it  is  very  sore).  10.  Me 
parece  que  este  nino   esta  muy  contento. — Si,  lo  es. 

11.  Aquellos  ya  no  estan  en  Francia;  estan  en  Inglaterra. 

12.  ,;Le  duele  mucho  la  cara? — Ya  me  parece  que  no. 

13.  En  esta  hay  mucha  neblina.  14.  Sus  ninos  y  los  de 
su  tio  son  muy  diligentes ;  estudian  mucho  en  esta  escuela. 


68 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


15.  No  tomamos  el  carro  en  esta  calle;  lo  tomamos  en 
aquella. 

BB.  1.  Those  are  my  cousins;  they  live  in  this  street. 
2.  This  arm  hurts;  it  is  very  sore  (I  have  it  very  sore), 
o.  These  men  went  by  a  path  they  found  after  much 
trouble  (work).  4.  That  child  with  the  blond  hair  is  my 
sister;  the  one  with  the  dark  hair  is  my  cousin  (see  B,  2). 
5.  The  boy's  fingers  hurt;  they  are  very  sore.  6.  Is  X. 
Street  near  this  one? — I  think  so.  7.  These  pupils  are 
very  diligent ;  they  have  prepared  their  work  well.  8.  Did 
you  take  the  car? — No,  no  one  showed  us  where  to  take 
it.    9.  Is  it  sunny  in  your  city? — No,  it  is  windy  here. 

10.  My  right  foot  hurts  me  very  much;  it  is  very  sore. 

11.  Those  children  are  very  lazy;  they  do  not  study  the 
easy  lessons,  much  less  (so-much  [the]  less)  the  hard 
[ones],  12.  He  is  conjugating  the  first  verb  in  this  book. 
13.  He  has  finished  conjugating  those  in  my  book  and  in 
my  brother's  also.  14.  She  was  buying  the  books  when 
we  found  her.  15.  That  man  is  the  father  of  this  pupil, 
who  goes  to  our  school. 


LESSON  XXXII 

1.  Future  Indicative  of  hablar,  to  speak  (stem  hablar-) 

hablare,  I  shall  speak  hablaremos,  we  shall  speak 

hablaras,  you  will  speak  hablareis,  you  will  speak 

hablara,  he  she,  it  will  speak;  hablaran,  they  will  speak;  you 
you  will  speak  will  speak 

beber,  to  drink  (stem  beber-) 

bebere,  I  shall  drink  beberemos,  we  shall  drink 

beberas,  you  will  drink  bebereis,  you  will  drink 

bebera,  he,  she,  it  will  drink;      beberan,  they  will  drink;  you  will 
you  will  drink  drink 

escribir,  to  write  (stem  escribir-) 

escribire,  I  shall  write  escribiremos,  we  shall  write 

escribiras,  you  will  write  escribireis,  you  will  write 

escribira,  he,  she,  it  will  write;  escribiran,  they  will  write;  you 
you  will  write  will  write 


HABLAR 


69 


Note: 

(a)  The  future  endings  are  alike  in  all  three  conju- 
gations. 

(b)  They  are  added  to  the  whole  infinitive,  not  to  the 
stem.  (Certain  irregular  verbs,  however,  have  a  modified 
infinitive  stem.    Cf.  A,  20  and  21,  below.) 

(c)  Note  that  the  first  plural  is  the  only  form  without 
a  written  accent. 

2.  Conditional. 

hablar,  to  speak  (stem  hablar-) 

hablaria,  I  should  speak  hablariamos,  we  should  speak 

hablarias,  you  would  speak  hablariais,  you  would  speak 

hablaria,  he,  she,  it  would  speak;  habiarian,  they  would  speak;  you 
you  would  speak  would  speak 

beber,  to  drink  (stem  beber-) 

beberia,  I  should  drink  beberiamos,  we  should  drink 

beberias,  you  would  drink  beberiais,  you  Avould  drink 

beberia,  he,  she,  it  would  drink;  beberian,  they  would  drink;  you 
you  would  drink  would  drink 

escribir,  to  write  (stem  escribir-) 

escribiria,  I  should  write  escribiriamos,  we  should  write 

escribirias,  you  would  write  escribiriais,  you  would  write 

escribiria,  he,  she,  it  would  write ;  escribirian,  they  would  write ; 
you  would  write  you  would  write 

Note: 

(a)  The  conditional  endings  are  alike  in  all  three 
conjugations. 

(b)  They  are  added  to  the  whole  infinitive.  (Cer- 
tain irregular  verbs,  however,  have  a  modified  infinitive 
stem.) 

(c)  The  accent  is  written  on  all  six  forms. 

3.  The  future  and  conditional  are  generally  used  as  in 
English. 

Manana  estare  en  Madrid,  Tomorrow  I  shall  be  in  Madrid. 
Manana  estaria  en  Madrid  si  .  .  .    Tomorrow  I  should  be  in 
Madrid  if  .  .  . 


70 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


4.  The  future  has  also  a  special  meaning  in  Spanish: 
it  expresses  probability  in  the  present.  For  "He  is  proba- 
bly here, 9 '  or  "He  must  be  here, ' '  the  Spanish  often  says : 

Estara  aqui,  He  is  probably  here,  He  must  be  here,  etc. 
No  estara  aqui,  He  can't  be  here,  He  isn't  here  likely,  etc. 

But 

Esta  probablemente  aqui  may  be  used. 

5.  The  same  idea  of  probability,  likelihood  in  past  time, 
is  expressed  by  the  conditional. 

Estaria  aqui  ayer,  He  was  probably  here  yesterday. 

But 

Estaba  probablemente  aqui  ayer  could  also  be  used. 

VOCABULARY 
antes,  before  (adv.  of  time) '      el  deber,  duty 
considerar,  to  consider  detras  de,  behind 

cumplir  (con),  to  fulfill;  to  juzgar,  to  judge 

complete  listo,  -a,  ready 

cumplio  hoy  diez  anos,  he  is       llegar,  to  arrive 
ten  years  old  today;  he 
reached  his  tenth  birth- 
day today 

A.  1.  vivire  2.  ^beberia  el?  3.  usted  hablara  4.  ella 
escribiria  5.  tu  quedarias  6.  lavare  7.  cocinareis  8.  con- 
jugare  9.  hallaras  10.  £  estudiarian  ?  11.  compraras 
12.  lavaran  13.  prepararian  14.  acudiran  15.  tu  escri- 
birias  16.  <mo  aburriria?  17.  tocara  el  piano  18.  seria 
19.  no  estare  20.  tendremos  {note  that  tener  has  the  stem 
tendr-  in  the  future  and  conditional)  21.  habra  {note  that 
haber  has  the  stem  habr-  in  the  future  and  conditional)  22. 

habre  tenido  *  ^ 

\ 

AA.  1.  would  they  wash?  2.  I  shall  not  clian  3.  he 
will  hasten  4.  you  would  cook  5.  I  shall  find  6.  will  you 
play  the  piano?  7.  he  would  clean  8.  will  they  have? 
9.  I  shall  be  10.  would  he  have?  11.  you  would  bring 
12.  would  they  study?  13.  you  will  buy  14.  they  will 
clean  15.  would  they  prepare?  16.  they  will  hasten 
17.  you  would  write  18.  wouldn't  he  bore?  19.  he  will 
play  the  piano    20.  would  he  be?    21.  I  shall  not  be 


FUTURE  INDICATIVE  OF  HABLAR 


71 


22.  will  he  not  have?  23.  they  will  not  have  had  24.  I 
shall  have  the  books 

B.  1.  Sin  un  buen  libro  no  estudiare  bien  los  verbos 
espanoles.     2.    Desearia    hablar    nn    poco    con  usted. 

3.  ^Bstara  aqui  su  hermano?  4.  Comere  la  comida  qne 
ella  preparo.  5.  No,  es  para  Juan.  6.  ^Vivira  nsted  en 
esa  casa  blanca  si  la  compramos?  7.  ^Vendera  usted  sus 
libros  si  yo  los  compro?  8.  ^Tocaran  ellos  el  piano  antes 
o  despues?  9.  Detras  de  la  mesa  est  a  la  silla  y  sobre  la 
silla  hay  un  reloj  muy  grande.  10.  ^Como  estara  su  primo 
hoy?  Estara  todavia  enfermo?  11.  ^Cuantos  anos 
tendra  (future  of  tener)  su  hermano  ahora?  12.  No 
tendra  mas  que  quince  anos.  13.  Hablaron  con  sus  amigos 
despues  de  la  comida.  14.  ^Que  tendran  alii?  15.  Proba- 
blemente  esta  aqui. 

BB.  1.  Can  your  brother  be  here  now?  2.  "Where  is 
my  brother?  He  is  probably  studying.  3.  If  he  works, 
we  study;  but  when  we  are  working,  he  plays  the  piano. 

4.  As  he  will  not  be  here  tomorrow,  they  are  not  writing 
the  exercise.  5.  The  more  we  [shall]  work,  the  less  we  shall 
have.  6.  We  shall  not  have  the  house  in  which  we  lived ; 
our  father  has  already  sold  it.  7.  We  shall  have  written 
(Habremos  escrito)  the  exercises  when  you  (will)  arrive. 
8.  What  does  your  brother  judge  of  a  man  who  does  not 
fulfil  (cumple  con)  his  duty?  9.  Can  your  mother  have 
bought  (Habra  comprado  su  senora  madre)  your  books 
already?  10.  Don't  you  consider  that  he  is  a  very  indus- 
trious student?  11.  He  isn't  here  now,  but  he  will  proba- 
bly arrive  today.  12.  He  can't  have  much  work  today, 
but  yesterday  he  had  a-lot  (much).  13.  Do  you  think 
your  brother  is  ready?  (Will  your  brother  be  ready?) 
14.  I  shall  not  have  all  my  lessons  for  tomorrow;  I  have 
not  studied  much  today.   15.  He  is  fifteen  years  old  today. 


72 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XXXIII 

NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 

1.  Gender.  Nouns  and  adjectives  of  nationality  ending 
in  a  consonant  add  -a  to  form  the  feminine. 


2.  Adjectives  ending  in  -on,  -or,  or  -an  add  -a  to  form 
the  feminine. 


Exceptions  are  comparatives  in  -or:  mejor,  peor,  menor, 

and  mayor  (See  Lesson  XXIII,  2), 

3.  Eeview  Lessons  V  and  VI. 

El  dia,  day,  is  masculine;  la  mano,  hand,  is  feminine, 
in  spite  of  the  ending. 

Nouns  ending  in  -ma,  -ta  are  usually  masculine. 

el  cometa,  comet  el  planeta,  planet       el  programa,  program 

el  telegrama,  telegram   el  dentista,  dentist 

Note: 

el  or  la  espia,  spy        el  or  la  gufa,  guide       el  mapa,  map 

el  presidente,  la  presidenta,  president  la  centinela,  sentinel 

4.  Position. 

Review  Lesson  VII,  2. 

Adjectives  of  number  (first,  second,  etc. ;  one,  two,  etc.)  ; 
all  the  articles  (a,  the,  this,  his,  which,  such,  etc.)  ;  usually, 
a  few  very  common  adjectives  (pretty,  good,  some,  and  a 
few  others)  precede  the  noun.  All  other  adjectives — such 
as  adjectives  of  color,  shape,  size,  nationality — follow  the 
noun.  Briefly,  limiting  adjectives  precede;  descriptive 
adjectives  follow. 


aleman,  German  (masculine) 
escoces,  Scotch 
espanol,  Spanish 


alemana,  German  (feminine) 
escocesa,  Scotch 
espanola,  Spanish 


socarron,  sly  (masculine) 
burlon,  humorous,  joking 
hablador,  talkative 
traidor,  treacherous 
haragan,  lazy 


socarrona,  sly  (feminine) 
burlona,  humorous,  joking 
habladora,  talkative 
traidora,  treacherous 
haragana,  lazy 


NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 


73 


el  hombre,  the  man 
este  nino,  this  boy 
su  pizarra,  his  slate 
tres  libros,  three  books 
primer  ejercicio,  first  exercise 
pequenos  libros,  small  books 
bonitas  casas,  pretty  houses 
ciertas^  ninas,  certain  children 
algunas  sillas,  some  chairs 


pluma  negra,  black  pen 
mesa  redonda,  round  table 
hombre  enorme,  huge  man 
ejercicio  espanol,  Spanish  exercise 
sombrero  de  paja,  straw  hat 
carta  escrita,  written  letter 
nino  flojo,  lazy  child 
alumno  diligente,  industrious  stu- 
dent 

muchacha  haragana,  lazy  girl 

5..  If  two  or  more  adjectives  are  used,  each  follows  the 
-normal  rule  for  position. 

las  dos  pizarras  negras  y  cuadradas,  the  two  square  black  slates 
tres  libros  de  mucho  valor,  three  books  of  great  value 

6.  Some  adjectives  that  usually  follow  may  precede 
when  used  in  a  poetic  or  figurative  sense. 

un  soldado  grande,  a  large  soldier 
un  gran  soldado,  a  great  soldier 

mi  hermana  pequena,  my  little  (small)  sister 
mi  pequena  hermana,  my  little  (young)  sister 

cosa  cierta,  sure  (reliable)  thing 

cierta  cosa,  a  certain  thing  (some  thing) 

nino  pobre,  poor  (poverty-stricken)  child 
pobre  nino,  poor  (unhappy)  child 

el  bianco  pan,  white-bread   {as  a  sort  of  compound  word) 
la  pura  verdad,  the  whole  truth 

VOCABULARY 
cuadrado,  -a,  square  (adjective)   la  paja,  straw 


chico,  -a,  small 
desagradable,  disagreeable 
entonces,  then 
largo,  -a,  long 
la  nieve,  snow 


el  poema,  poem 
ronco,  -a,  hoarse 
turco,.  -a,  Turkish 
el  trueno,  thunder 
el  valor,  worth,  value 
la  voz,  voice 


A.  1.  el  poema  2.  traidora  3.  burlona  4.  espanola 
5.  escocesa  6.  peor  {what  is  the  feminine  of  this  word?) 
7.  peores  8.  el  ronco  trueno  9.  la  nieve  blanca  10.  voz 
ronca  11.  gran  hombre  12.  un  telegrama  13.  centinela 
14.  el  cometa  15.  la  mano  16.  la  mano  derecha  17.  nina 
burlona    18.  el  dia    19.  hombres  turcos    20.  alumnas 


74 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


haraganas  21.  verdad  cierta  22.  ciertas  verdades 
23.  hombre  grande  24.  bonito  nino  25.  nino  muy  bonito 
(bonito  follows  the  noun  because  it  is  itself  modified;  bonito 
usually  precedes) 

AA.  1.  the  day  2.  a  certain  lesson  3.  a  telegram 
4.  a  sure  guide  5.  treacherous  spy  6.  the  sentinel 
7,  funny  (humorous)  child  8.  a  hand  9.  the  comet 
10.  humorous  11.  hoarse  voice  12.  my  program  13.  sly 
fellow  14.  great  soldier  15.  talkative  woman  16.  Scotch 
women  17.  some  books  18.  large  girl  19,  pretty  red 
house  20.  very  pretty  child  21.  straw  hat  22.  a  sure 
thing    23.  a  telegram 

B.  1.  No  tengo  bonitos  vasos  para  la  comida.  2.  Los 
espias  pasaron  por  el  camino.  3.  No  halle  un  programa 
y  por  consiguiente  no  deseaba  quedar  alii.  4.  Este  nino 
grande,  que  esta  en  nuestra  escuela,  vive  con  sus  padres 
en  aquella  gran  casa  blanca  (gran  is  here  put  before  the 
noun  to  balance  blanca).  5.  Volvio  a  hablar  de  aquella 
muchacha  habladora.  6.  Cuando  entre  en  la  pieza,  halle 
un  telegrama  muy  largo  de  mi  hermano.  7.  Escribio  el 
primer  ejercicio  en  su  pizarra,  el  segundo  en  papel,  y  el 
tercero  en  su  libro.  8.  Aquel  nino  traidor,  j  no  le  tendria 
en  mi  casa!  9.  Aquel  dia  no  halle  mi  dinero;  pero  hoy 
lo  halle  en  su  dormitorio.  10.  Me  ha  hablado  de  ciertas 
cosas  que  no  deseo  creer.  11.  ^Cuando  estara  aqui  el 
cometa?  12.  Un  gran  hombre  no  es  siempre  un  hombre 
rico ;  y  un  hombre  rico  no  es  siempre  un  hombre  haragan. 

13.  No  habia  tantos  ingleses  como  escoceses  en  Madrid. 

14.  Tienen  algunos  pequenos  libros  rojos,  en  que  escribian 
sus  ejercicios  de  espanol.  15.  Tienen  tambien  pizarras, 
en  que  escriben  con  tiza.  16.  Un  gran  hombre  no  es 
siempre  un  hombre  grande.  17.  ^Son  sus  tios? — Si,  los 
son  (Yes,  they  are). 

BB.  1.  They  found  the  telegram  they  had  from  their 
cousins.  2.  The  books  will  be  here  today.  3.  Are  they 
Scotch  or  English  (the)  [ones]  who  live  in  the  house  now? 
4.  There  used  to  be  several  Englishmen  who  lived  in  that 


PLURAL 


75 


red  house  on  S.  Street  in  Santiago,  but  now  Germans  live 
there.  5.  This  lazy  fellow  has  a  hard  disagreeable  task 
(work),  a  thing  which  seems  very  tiresome  to  him.  6.  These 
boys  are  writing  a  long  exercise  in  Spanish  for  tomorrow. 
7.  That  sly  fellow  will  not  show  me  how  he  works.  8.  Did 
you  show  (to)  John  how  to  do  it?  9.  Did  you  find  my 
program?  10.  John  took  it  from  the  table.  11.  She  is  very 
talkative,  she  talks  very  much,  and  bores  me  always. 
12.  Certain  friends  showed  John  a  white  house,  which  he 
bought.  13.  It  is  a  sure  truth  that  a  large  man  is  not 
always  a '  great  man,  but  many  great  men  are  large. 
14.  They  wrote  the  first  exercise  and  then  the  second,  and 
then  remained  (in  order)  to  talk  of  the  third.  15.  A  cer- 
tain man  showed  me  the  house  in  which  they  live.  16.  They 
had  just  bought  it.  17.  They  have  found  their  Spanish 
books,  but  they  did  not  have  to  write  [any]  exercises. 


LESSON  XXXIV 

PLURAL 

Review  Lessons  IX  and  XII. 

1.  Nouns  ending  in  an  accented  vowel  or  diphthong 
form  the  plural  by  adding  -es  (as  do  words  ending  in  a 
consonant).  . 

el  rubi,  ruby  la  ley,  law 

los  rubies,  rubies  las  leyes,  laws 

2.  Words  in  unstressed  -es  and  -is  have  the  same  form 
in  the  singular  and  plural.  This  is  important  chiefly  for 
the  names  of  the  days  of  the  week. 

lunes,  Monday  viernes,  Friday 

martes,  Tuesday  (sabado),  Saturday 

miercoles,  Wednesday  (domingo),  Sunday 

jueves,  Thursday  (all  masculine;  note  small  letter) 

la  tesis,  thesis  las  tesis,  theses 

3.  A  number  of  words  may  be  considered  as  irregular, 
being  too  rare  for  classification. 


76 


SPANISH  GUAM  MAR 


el  papa,  father,  "  dad  " 


los  papas,  fathers,  "  dads 


{familiar  form) 


la  mama,  mother 

el  pie,  foot 

el  canape,  couch 

el  cortaplumas,  penknife 

el  te,  tea 

el  cafe,  coffee 


las  mamas,  mothers  {familiar  form) 
los  pies,  feet 

los  canapes,  couches  {also,  canapees) 
los  cortaplumas,  penknives 
los  tes,  teas 
los  cafes,  coffees 


4.  Surnames  are  usually  unmodified  in  the  plural,  but 
are  preceded  by  the  definite  article  in  the  plural. 


5.  As  an  adjective  in  the  masculine  plural  may  modify 
at  the  same  time  feminine  and  masculine  nouns,  so  a 
masculine  noun  may  refer  to  objects  of  both  genders. 
(Of.  Lesson  IX,  3). 

mis  tios,  my  uncle  and  aunt,  my  uncles,  my  uncles  and  aunts 
mis  padres,  my  parents 

VOCABULARY 

el  bambu,  bamboo  el  rey,  king 

barato,  -a,  cheap,  inexpensive  la  semana,  week 
caro,  -a,  dear,  expensive  todavia,  still,  yet 

cursi,  cheap,  vulgar  usar,  to  use;  to  wear 

la  hipotesis,  hypothesis  el  maravedi,  farthing 
la  mies,  {pi.)  mieses,  corns, 


A.  1.  bambues  2.  mis  hermanos  3.  rubies  4.  reyes 
5.  canapes    6.  los  lunes    7.  reyes    8.  cafes    9.  las  tesis 

10.  los  miercoles  11.  los  hermanos  Hernandez  12.  cursis 
13.  mis  tios  14.  los  tes  15.  los  cortaplumas  16.  papas 
17.  mamas  18.  los  jueves  19.  pies  20.  maravedies 
21.  mis  primos,  Juan,  Enrique,  y  Maria  22.  rubies 
23.  cafes   24.  canapes 

AA.  1.  kings  2.  laws  3.  couches  4.  penknives  5.  my 
uncle  and  aunt  6.  my  uncles  and  aunts  7.  my  uncles 
8.  Wednesdays    9.  feet    10.  my  cousins,  Mary  and  John 

11.  my  parents  12.  Friday  13.  (the)  Fridays  14.  rubies 
15.  cheap  penknives  16.  theses  17.  fathers  (use  familiar 
word)  18.  teas  19.  farthings  20.  thesis  21.  the  Gutie- 
rrezes  22.  the  Gutierrez  sisters    23.  mammas 


los  Garcia,  the  Garcias 


los  hermanos  Galvez,  the  Galvez  brothers 


grains 


PLURAL 


77 


B.  1.  Mis  tios  beben  su  te  ahora;  toman  [el]  te  con  sus 
amigos  todos  los  miercoles.  2.  ^Han  comido  ya  los  Garcia? 
^Estan  con  ellos  sus  padres?  3.  Hoy  dia  (Today)  no  hay 
muchos  reyes.  4.  Tengo  los  pies  muy  enfermos.  5.  Com- 
praron  un  canape,  pero  todavia  no  ha  llegado  a  la  casa. 
6.  Nq  acabo  de  beber  su  cafe  cuando  sus  primos,  Juan  y 
Maria,  entraron  en  la  pieza.  7.  ^Cuantos  rubies  compro 
su  primo  para  su  hermana  ?  8.  Hemos  hallado  dos  lapices 
(singular  lapiz)  en  esta  pieza;  ^son  de  usted  o  de  su 
padre? — Son  de  mis  primos,  Juan  y  Enrique.  9.  ^Que 
es  cortaplumas  en  ingles?  10.  Los  lunes  y  los  miercoles 
son  dias  de  la  semana.  11.  Los  rubies  que  ensen.6  son  muy 
caros.  12.  Tenemos  que  comprar  dos  canapes.  13.  Las 
leyes  tienen  que  ser  buenas,  pero  no  lo  son  siempre.  14.  Su 
papa  esta  ahora  en  Madrid,  y  maflana  estara  en  Barcelona. 
15.  Escribio  una  tesis,  pero  no  es  muy  buena.  16.  Los 
Garcia  son  muy  cursis. 

BB.  1.  How  many  days  are  there  in  a  week? — There 
are  seven:  the  first  days  are  Monday,  Tuesday,  and 
Wednesday.  2.  Every  Thursday  he  has  to  write  three 
exercises  in  his  Spanish  class.  3.  In  Spanish,  the  word 
dentist  is  dentista.  4.  The  two  theses  he  wrote  are  on  my 
table ;  I  found  them  in  my  room  the  Friday  that  you  were 
here.  5.  They  will  eat  here  today.  6.  Are  there  any 
couches  in  the  house?  7.  We  are  very  sleepy  and  want  to 
stay.  8.  His  feet  are  very  sore.  9.  The  Galvez  brothers 
are  here;  they  want  to  study.  10.  They  had  a  telegram, 
but  we  did  not  find  it  on  the  table.  11.  There  aren't 
many  rubies  here.  12.  Every  Friday  he  prepares  his  les- 
sons for  all  the  week.  13.  Not  all  (the)  laws  are  good. 
14.  As  he  did  not  study  when  he  was  in  (the)  school,  he 
does  not  speak  Spanish  well.  15.  He  bought  tables,  chairs, 
and  couches  for  his  house. 


78 


SPANISH  GEAMMAR 


LESSON  XXXV 

RADICAL-CHANGING  VERBS:   CLASSES  I  AND  II 

Review  Lessons  IV,  X  and  XL 

1.  In  Spanish,  certain  verbs  change  an  -e-  or  -o-  of  the 
stem  to  -ie-  or  -ue-  when  the  stress  falls  on  that  vowel. 
This  happens  in  all  three  persons  singular  of  the  present 
indicative  and  in  the  third  person  plural. 

The  verbs  below,  classes  I  and  II,  are  exactly  alike. 

Class  I,  first  and  second  conjugations. 

mostrar,  to  show  (Radical-changing  I) 

muestro,  I  show  mostramos,  we  show 

muestras,  you  show  mostrais,  you  show 

muestra,  he,  she,  it  shows;  you    muestran,  they  show;  you  show 
show 

pensar,  to  think,  to  intend  (R-ch.  I) 

pienso,  I  think  pensamos,  we  think 

piensas,  you  think  pensais,  you  think 

piensa,  he,  she,  it  thinks;  you       piensan,  they  think;  you  think 
think 

volver,  to  return  (R-ch.  I) 

vuelvo,  I  return  volvemos,  we  return 

vuelves,  you  return  volveis,  you  return 

vuelve,  he,  she,  it  returns;  you    vuelven,  they  return;  you  return 
return 

encender,  to  kindle,  to  light  (R-ch.  I) 

enciendo,  I  kindle  encendemos,  we  kindle 

enciendes,  you  kindle  encendeis,  you  kindle 

enciende,  he,  she,  it  kindles;  you    encienden,  they  kindle;  you  kindle 
kindle 

Class  II,  third  conjugation, 
dormir,  to  sleep  (R-ch.  II) 

duermo,  I  sleep  dormimos,  we  sleep 

duermes,  you  sleep  dormis,  you  sleep 

duerme,  he,  she,  it  sleeps;  you     duermen,  they  sleep;  you  sleep 
sleep 


RADICAL- CHANGING  VERBS 


79 


sentir,  to  feel;  to  be  sorry  (R-ch.  II) 

siento,  I  feel  sentimos,  we  feel 

sientes,  you  feel  sentis,  you  feel 

siente,  he,  she,  it  feels;  you  feel  sienten,  they  feel;  you  feel 

2.  These  verbs  are  conjugated  exactly  like  any  other 
regular  verb  as  regards  the  endings,  the  only  difference 
being  that  where  the  stress  falls  on  the  stem,  the  -e- 
changes  to  -ie-  and  the  -o-  to  -ue-. 

3.  Not  all  verbs  with  a  stem  -e-  or  -o-  change  that  vowel. 
Deber,  for  instance,  does  not  change  the  stem  -e-;  debo, 
debes,  etc. ;  so  tocar :  toco,  tocas,  etc. 


nevar  (ie),  to  snow 

isn't  that  so? 


£no? 

I  no  es  verdad  ? 
I  verdad  ? 
£no  es  asi? 


VOCABULARY 

acostar  (ue),  to  put  to  bed  morir  (ue),  to  die 

almorzar  (ue),  to  lunch,  to 

breakfast 
asi,  thus,  so,  and  so 
cerrar  (ie),  to  close,  to  shut 
confesar  (ie),  to  confess;  to 

admit 

contar  (ue),  to  count,  to  relate 
deber,  ought,  must;  owe 
dormir  (ue),  to  sleep 
encerrar  (ie),  to  shut  in,  to 
lock  up 

entender  (ie),  to  understand 
joven,  young;  el  joven,  youth; 

la  joven,  girl 
jugar  (ue,     as  though  the 

stem  had  an  -0-),  to 

play  (games) 
Hover  (ue),  to  rain 
mentir    (ie),  to  lie  (tell  a 

falsehood) 

A.    1.     Conjugate   on   the  above   models  the  radical- 
changing  verbs:  almorzar  temblar  cerrar  perder  morir 
confesar  tronar  (in  the  third  person  singular  only)  ;  nevar 
(in  the  third  person  singular  only)  ;  encender  volver  sentir 
A  A.  Locate  the  form  and  give  the  infinite  of: 

I.  confieso  2.  confeso  3.  sentimos  4.  ^contais?  5.  siento 
6.  Uueve    7.  siento    8.  mentis    9.  nieva    10.  mienten 

II.  quiero    12.  juega    13.  entendemos    14.  vuelves  15. 


isn't  it  true? 
won't  he  ?  didn't 
they;  aren't 
you?  etc. 

parder  (ie),  to'lose 
para  {plus  infinitive) ,  in  order  to 
poder  (ue),  to  be  able,  can 
querer    (ie),  to  wish;   {plus  a 

noun)  to  love,  to  like 
sentar  (ie),  to  seat 
la  silla,  chair 
tarde,  late 

temblar  (ie),  to  tremble 
tiembla  de  frio,  he  is  trembling 
with  cold 
el  tiempo,  time ;  weather 
tronar  (ue),  to  thunder 
volver  (ue),  to  return 


so 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


duermo  16.  encierro  17.  cierro  18.  volvemos  19.  cuento 
20.  tierublan   21.  almuerzo 

AAA.  1.  they  eat  2.  I  return  3.  it  is  snowing  4.  he 
isn't  counting  5.  are  you  shutting  it  [up]  ?  6.  I  am 
breakfasting  (lunching)  7.  are  you  having-breakf  ast  ? 
8.  you  are  returning  9.  it  is  raining  10.  they  are  dying 
11.  I  am  sorry  12.  they  are  not  feeling  13.  do  you  want? 
1-1.  he  understands  it  15.  he  is  not  lying  16.  he  doesn't 
confess  it  17.  does  she  understand?  18.  they  are  trem- 
bling 

B.  1.  Si  ella  cuenta  las  lecciones,  hallara  treinta  y  ocho 
en  el  libro.  2.  Quiero  sentar  al  nino  en  la  silla  porque 
esta  cansado  y  tiene  sueno.  3.  j  Pobre  de  la  nina !  j  Su 
padre  se   (do  not  translate)  muere  y  ella  es  tan  joven! 

4.  No  confiesa  que  ha  perdido  su  dinero;  pero  lo  perdio. 

5.  ^Truena  hoy? — No  hay  sol,  y  llovera  despues.  6.  La 
hermana  juega  tanto  como  el  hermano,  pero  estudia  mas. 
7.  No  puede  estudiar  tan  bien  como  ellas,  porque  no  tiene 
tanto  tiempo.  8.  Tiene  que  trabajar  todos  los  dias.  9.  La 
madre  acuesta  a  los  ninos  porque  ya  es  muy  tarde. 

10.  Enciende  la  luz  en  el  dormitorio  porque  quiere  leer. 

11.  No  juega  ahora  porque  tiene  que  tocar  el  piano. 

12.  ^Ha  cerrado  usted  la  puerta?  13.  ^Tienes  frio,  mi 
hijo?  14.  Me  cuenta  que  su  padre  ha  comprado  aquella 
casa  grande  que  esta  en  la  calle  X. 

BB.  1.  Does  he  understand  that  we  can't  study  the  les- 
sons today?  2.  It  is  thundering,  isn't  it?  3.  The  children 
are  playing,  and  we  can't  put  them  to  bed  yet.  4.  He 
isn't  counting  his  money;  he  has  no  money  to  count. 
5.  They  are  very  sorry  not  to  have  studied  their  lesson 
for  tomorroAv.  6.  And  now  they  have  no  time  (in-order) -to 
play  the  piano,  either.  7.  I  want  to  seat  the  child  on  the 
chair  near  the  table,  where  he  can  eat.  8.  What  are  you 
telling  me!  He  is  dying  (put  se  before  the  vert)  !  9.  If 
he  is  lying,  we  cannot  speak  with  him  [el]  again.  10.  If 
they  are  tired,  they  can  sleep  in  my  bedroom;  I  shall 


RADICAL-CHANGING  VERBS 


81 


sleep  on  the  couch.  11.  It  is  raining  now;  the  children 
cannot  play  in  the  street.  12.  Are  you  cold?  You  are 
trembling.  13.  They  put  the  children  to  bed,  but  the  latter 
are  now  playing  in  their  bedroom.  14.  They  are  eating 
again  because  they  are  very  hungry.  15.  She  does  not 
want  to  close  the  window,  because  she  feels  warm.  16.  He 
is  sorry  to  have  played  the  piano  because  he  did  not 
understand  that  the  child  was  sleeping. 

LESSON  XXXVI 
RADICAL-CHANGING  VERBS  (Continued) 

Review  Lesson  XXXV 

1.  Class  III  of  Radical-changing  verbs  has  only  one 
vowel  change,  and  that  is  -e-  to  -i-  under  the  accent  (in- 
cludes third  conjugation  only). 

repetir,  to  repeat  (Radical-changing  III) 

repito,  I  repeat  repetimos,  we  repeat 

repites,  you  repeat  repetis,  you  repeat 

repite,  he,  she,  it  repeats;  you     repiten,  they  repeat;  you  repeat 
repeat 

This  change  is  parallel  with  that  in  Classes  I  and  II, 
and  the  same  remarks  apply,  the  only  difference  being 
that  here  only  the  -e-  changes,  and  that  to  an  -i-. 

2.  Class  II  also  changes  -o-  to  -u-  and  -e-  to  -i-;  and 
Class  III  changes  -e-  to  -i-,  when  the  ending  begins  with  a 
diphthong.  This  occurs,  in  the  indicative,  in  the  preterite 
third  singular  and  plural  (two  forms). 

sentir,  to  feel  (R-ch.  II) 

senti,  I  felt  sentimos,  we  felt 

sentiste,  you  felt  sentisteis,  you  felt 

sintio,  he  felt;  you  felt  sintieron,  they  felt;  you  felt 

dormir,  to  sleep   {R-ch  II) 

dormi,  I  slept  dormimos,  we  slept 

dormiste,  you  slept  dormisteis,  you  slept 

durmio,  he,  she,  it  slept;  you  durmieron,  they  slept;  you  slept 
slept 


82 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


repetir,  to  repeat  (R-ch.  Ill) 

repeti,  I  repeated  repetimos,  we  repeated 

repetiste,  you  repeated  repetisteis,  you  repeated 

repitio,  lie,  she,  it  repeated;  you    repitieron,  they  repeated;  you 
repeated  repeated 

VOCABULARY 

competir   (i),  to  compete  impedir  (i),  to  hinder,  to  prevent 

contestar,  to  answer  no  hay  de  que,  not  at  all 

despedir  (i),  to  dismiss  nunca,  never 

derretir  (i),  to  melt  pedir   (i),  to  ask  (a  favor) ;  to 

dieron,  (they)  gave;  you  gave  ask-for  {dative  of  person) 

dio,  (he,  she,  it)  gave;  you  gave   repetir   (i),  to  repeat 
gracias,  thanks  servir  (i),  to  serve 

vestir  (i),  to  dress 

A.  1.  Like  repetir,  conjugate  in  the  present  and  preterite: 
pedir    vestir    competir    impedir    despedir  derretir 

2.  Conjugate  in  the  preterite:  morir  mentir  sentir 
AA.  Locate  the  form  and  give  the  infinite  of: 
1.  pidio    2.  pido     3.  pedimos    4.  viste    5.  compite 

6.  compitieron  7.  sirven  8.  repetis  9.  repetisteis  10.  de- 
rritio  11.  despedisteis  12.  vistieron  13.  competi  14.  pe- 
disteis  15.  derritieron  16.  Yistieron  17.  despidio 
18.  compites  19.  despedis  20.  repite  21.  derrite  22.  pido 
23.  impides 

AAA.  1.  they  are  asking  2.  I  prevent  3.  they  dressed 
4.  is  she  repeating?   5.  they  competed   6.  are  you  serving? 

7.  you  didn't  repeat  8.  they  are  melting  9.  you  are  dress- 
ing 10.  is  she  competing?  11.  they  prevented  12.  they 
dismissed  13.  will  you  prevent?  14.  I  asked  15.  they 
prevented  16.  did  you  prevent?  17.  you  are  competing 
18.  they  are  serving    19.  they  melt 

B.  1.  Piden  a  Juan  (They  ask  John  for)  el  diner o  que 
el  hallo.  2.  No  podemos  competir  con  sus  primos  porque 
estamos  enfermos.  3.  Repitio  que  ellos  dieron  quinientos 
dolares  a  este  hombre  y  que  el  los  dio  a  Enrique.  4.  La 
madre  vistio  muy  bien  a  los  ninos,  pero  ellos  estan  muy 
sucios  ahora.  5.  Me  pide  (He  asks  me  for)  un  poco  de 
dinero,  pero  yo  no  tengo  dinero.   6.  Contesto  que  no  podia 


FORMATION  OF  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE 


83 


hacerlo.    7.  ^Por  que  no  repite  lo  que  ha  preguntado? 

8.  Porque  no  quiere  contest ar.  9.  No  pide  ninguna  cosa 
(anything)  a  su  padre;  nada  quiere.  10.  Compite  con 
alumnos  de  catorce  anos;  siempre  compite  con  ninos. 

11.  No  contesto  cuando  su  padre  le  hablo  (spoke  to  him). 

12.  Tu  no  le  quieres,  ^no  es  verdad?  13.  Si,  es  verdad. 
14.  No  quieren  estudiar. 

B.  1.  They  are  melting  the  ice  in  a  glass  of  water. 

2.  Aren't  you  repeating  the  work  you  had  yesterday? 

3.  They  are  studying  it  again,  aren't  they?  4.  They  have 
just  studied  it;  there  is  no  reason  for  (no  hay  para  que) 
studying  (use  infinitive  with  pronoun  object  joined  to  it) 
it  again.  5.  They  asked  their  uncle  for  the  money,  but  he 
had  none  for  them  (ellos).  6.  The  woman  dressed  her 
child,  and  then  it  went  out  (salio)  and  played  in  the 
street.  7.  Then  the  mother  put  the  child  to  bed.  8.  They 
served  me  a  glass  of  hot  milk,  but  I  wanted  cold  water. 

9.  The  first  glass  had  warm  water;  the  second,  cold. 

10.  When  I  asked  (use  correct  form  of  preguntar)  if  she 
had  cold  water,  she  did  not  answer.  11.  He  repeated 
what  he  said.  12.  He  said  that  it  was  raining.  13.  Is  it 
raining  now?  14.  No,  it  is  snowing.  15.  Yesterday,  it 
was  sunny ;  today,  it  is  windy  and  it  is  snowing. 


LESSON  XXXVII 

1.  Formation  of  Present  Participle.  The  present  parti- 
ciple is  formed  by  adding  -ando  to  the  stem  of  the  first 
conjugation,  and  -iendo  to  the  stem  of  the  second  and 
third  conjugations. 

habl  ando  hablando,  speaking 
beb  iendo  bebiendo,  drinking 
escrib     iendo      escribiendo,  writing 

Note    siendo  (ser)  estando  (estar) 

teniendo  (tener)       habiendo  (haber) 

2.  Eeview  Lesson  XXXVI,  2.    Kadical-changing  verbs 


84 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


of  Classes  II  and  III  undergo  the  second  change  (-0-  to  -u- 
and  -e-  to  -i-) . 

durmiendo  (dormir)      sintiendo  (sentir)      vistiendo  (vestir) 
But    mostrando  (mostrar)     pensando  (pensar)     volviendo  (volver) 

3.  The  verb  estar  with  the  present  participle  of  a  verb 
may  form  a  progressive  tense.  Thus  hablo,  while  .it  may 
mean  "I  am  speaking,"  is  not  as  vividly  progressive  as 
estoy  hablando. 

esta  hablando,  lie  is  speaking    {in  the  act  of  speaking) 
estaba  comiendo,  he  was  eating 

4.  Preguntar  and  Pedir.  Preguntar  means  to  ask  (a 
question)  whereas  pedir  means  to  ask  (for  something,  to 
ask  a  favor). 

Me  pregunta  si  mi  hermana  esta  aqui,  She  asks  me  if  my  sister 


Me  pide  un  libro,  He  is  asking  me  for  a  book. 

Note  that  after  pedir,  a  thing  is  the  direct  object  and  a 
person  the  dative  object. 

Pide  un  poco  de  dinero  a  su  hermano,  He  is  asking  his  brother 


5.  Prepositional  Adjectives.  Prepositional  adjectives 
may  be  formed  like  the  models  below.  Note  that  the  noun 
governed  by  the  preposition  is  not  inflected  even  when  the 
sense  of  the  compound  is  plural. 

pluma  de  oro,  gold  pen  {pen  of    plumas  de  oro,  gold  pens 


leccion  de  espanol,  Spanish  lesson  (lesson  about  Spanish) 
leccion  en  espanol,  Spanish  lesson  (lesson  conducted  in  Spanish) 
anteojos  de  plata,  silver  spectacles 
billete  de  banco,  banknote 

6.  Mismo.    Mismo  before  a  noun  means  same;  after  a 

noun  it  means  -self,  very. 

el  mismo  hombre,  the  same  man 
el  hombre  mismo,  the  man  himself 
la  casa  misma,  the  very  house 


is  here. 


for  a  little  money. 


gold) 


vaso  de  leche,  glass  of  milk 
taza  de  te,  cup  of  tea 
taza  para  te,  teacup  (cup  for  tea) 
sombrero  de  paja,  straw  hat 


vasos  de  leche,  glasses  of  milk 
tazas  de  te,  cups  of  tea 
tazas  para  te,  teacups 
sombreros  de  paja,  straw  hats 


FORMATION"  OF  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE 


85 


VOCABULARY 

Learn  the  expressions  above. 
el  hierro,  iron  el  acero,  steel 

A.  1.  esta  comiendo  2.  estaban  bebiendo  3.  el  mismo 
nino  4.  estan  sirviendo  5.  ^estas  durmiendo?  6.  no 
estaba  durmiendo  7.  ^que  esta  preguntando?  8.  <;que 
pide?  9.  pide  dinero  al  tio  10.  pregunta  si  ellas  estan 
estudiando  11.  sombrero  de  paja.  12.  taza  para  cafe 
13.  el  nino  mismo  14.  leccion  de  ingles  15.  taza  de  te 
16.  billetes  de  banco  17.  lapiz  de  plata  18.  estamos  es- 
cribiendo    19.  estabamos  conjugando 

AA.  1.  will  they  be  serving?  2.  gold  pen  3.  coffee 
cup  4.  we  are  writing  5-  they  were  sleeping  6.  straw 
hat  7.  are  you  counting?  8.  they  are  lighting  9.  the 
same  house  10.  were  they  drinking?  11.  she  is  studying 
12.  banknotes  13.  are  you  speaking?  14.  they  are  count- 
ing 15.  silver  eyeglasses  16.  English  lessons  {conducted 
in  English)    17.  gold  pen   18.  the  money  itself 

B.  1.  Me  pide  un  poco  de  dinero,  porque  nada  tiene  el. 
2.  <;Que  esta  preguntando  su  hermano? — Pregunta  si  hemos 
estudiado  nuestra  leccion.  3.  ^Tenian  ustedes  tenedores  y 
cucharitas  de  plata  y  tazas  para  te  muy  pequenos  ?  4.  No, 
teniamos  tazas  para  cafe,  pero  las  vendimos.  5.  ^Puedes 
beber  tantos  vasos  de  leche  como  yo?  6.  Cuando  le  pre- 
gunte  si  vivian  en  la  primera  casa  blanca  de  la  esquina, 
dijo:  No.  1.  Cuantos  billetes  de  banco  tiene,  y  tiene  mas 
de  cincuenta,  todos  son  de  cien  pesos.  8.  Le  pedi  el  dinero 
porque  el  es  el  hombre  mas  rico  de  la  ciudad.  9.  No 
podemos  tocar  el  piano  ahora  porque  mi  padre  esta  dur- 
miendo. 10.  El  hombre  mismo  que  dice  que  quien  no 
trabaja  es  muy  feliz,  el  mismo  no  trabaja,  y  sin  embargo 
(nevertheless)  no  me  parece  muy  feliz.  11.  Hoy  tenemos 
una  leccion  en  ingles  y  manana  tenemos  una  en  espanol. 
12.  <:Que  estas  contando?  13.  No  tengo  dinero;  he  perdido 
el  billete  de  a  diez  pesos  (ten  peso  bill)  que  usted  ha 
hallado.   14.  ^No  es  Vd.  el  mismo  hombre  que  estuvo  aqui 


86 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


ayer?  15.  ^Que  pidio  usted  a  su  hermana? — Pedi  su 
libro,  pero  no  lo  tenia.  16.  ^Estan  ustedes  estudiando  la 
leccion  para  manana?  17.  No,  estamos  estudiando  la  de 
hoy.  18.  No  quiero  preguntar  si  han  estudiado  sus  lec- 
ciones,  porqne  nunca  estudian. 

BB.  1.  Were  they  speaking  of  their  work  when  you 
entered  the  room?  2.  Did  yon  ask  your  father  if  he  liked 
the  house?  3.  We  drank  the  tea  in  small  cups.  4.  Are 
you  writing  with  a  gold  pen,  Henry?  Can  you  write 
better  with  a  gold  one?  5.  No,  sir;  I  am  studying  my 
lessons,  I  am  not  writing.  6.  Are  you  the  boy  who  found 
a  peso?  7.  I  haven't  any  money  today;  I  lost  it  all. 
8.  The  boy  has  just  finished  writing  his  exercise,  but  he 
has  not  studied  the  lesson  well.  9.  Have  you  a  straw 
hat? — No,  I  have  no  hat;  I  lost  the  one  I  had.  10.  You 
ought  to  see  the  house  I  bought!  11.  He  is  asking  me  for 
(Me  pide)  his  book,  but  I  have  lost  it.  12.  What  are  they 
studying  now?  13.  They  are  not  studying;  they  are 
playing.  14.  I  haven't  a  gold  pen;  I  have  a  steel  pen. 
15.  He  is  asking  me  (me)  if  my  arm  is  sore.  16.  Did  you 
buy  a  straw  hat? — No,  because  I  did  not  like  the  straw 
hats  they  showed  me  (me). 


LESSON  XXXVIII 
CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS 

Keview  Lesson  XXI  (direct  object). 

1.  Indirect  Object. 

me,  to  me,  me  nos,  to  us,  us 

te,  to  you,  you  os,  to  you,  you 

le,  to  him,  him;  to  her,  her;  les,  to  them,  them;  to  you,  you 
to  you,  you;  to  it,  it 

2.  In  the  first  and  second  persons  singular  and  plural, 
the  indirect  forms  are  the  same  as  the  direct. 

Me  da  el  libro,  He  gives  the  book  to  me.    {Of.,  Me  ve,  He  sees  me.) 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS  87 

3.  In  the  third  person,  singular  and  plural,  the  same 
indirect  form,  le,  serves  for  both  genders  and  polite  you. 

Le  da  el  libro,  He  gives  her  the  book.  (He  gives  him  the  book.) 
Le  hablo,  I  am  speaking  to  you. 

4.  The  indirect  pronoun  object  always  precedes  the 
direct. 

Me  lo  da,  He  gives  it  to  me.    (He  gives  me  it.) 

5.  Se  as  Indirect  Object.  When  both  pronoun  objects 
are  of  the  third  person,  the  indirect  is  always  se,  no  matter 
what  the  original  gender,  person,  or  number. 

se  lo  da,  he  gives  it  to  him 
to  her 
to  them 

to  you  (formal  singular  or  plural) 

6.  Position  of  Pronoun  with  Infinitive  or  Present  Parti- 
ciple. A  pronoun  used  as  object  of  an  infinitive  or  pres- 
ent participle  follows  and  is  joined  to  it. 

Quiere  venderme  el  libro,  He  wants  to  sell  me  the  book. 
Quiere  vendermelo,  He  wants  to  sell  me  it. 
Esta  bebiendolo,  She  is  drinking  it. 

'  Note  that  the  accent  may  be  required  in  some  cases. 

7.  Object  Pronoun  with  ser.  (Review  Lesson  XII,  3.) 
The  pronouns  lo,  la,  los,  las  are  used  predicately  after  ser 
when  referring  to  a  noun  already  mentioned. 

iEs  la  hermana?  —  Si,  la  es,  Is  it  the  sister?  —  Yes  it  is  (she). 
VOCABULARY 

el  caballo,  horse  interesante,  interesting- 

la  carrera,  trip,  circuit ;  race  ligero,  -a,  swift,  light,  rapid 

el  coche,  coach,  carriage  nadie,  no  one,  nobody 

da,  (he,  she,  it)  gives;  you  pintoresco,  -a,  picturesque 

give  rapidamente,  rapidly 

dan,  (they)  give;  you  give  rapido,  -a,  rapid 

la  dificultad,  difficulty  sin  embargo,  nevertheless 

en  casa  de,  at  the  house  of 

hace,  (he,  she,  it)  makes, 
does;  you  make,  do 

A.  1.  lo  conjugo  2.  ella  me  los  dio  3.  me  hablaron 
4.  <;te  lo  dio?    5.  no  me  lo  dio    6.  os  lo  ensenaron    7.  lo 


88  SPANISH  GKAMMAK 

hallaron  8.  le  escribio  una  carta  9.  le  escribio  10.  se  la 
escribio  11.  prepararon  la  comida  12.  la  preparo  13.  me 
da  un  lapiz  14.  se  lo  dio  15.  se  la  da  16.  se  las  da 
17.  se  las  dan  18.  se  los  dio  19.  le  da  la  tiza  20.  se  la  da 
21.  me  dice  22.  me  lo  dice  23.  os  dice  24.  os  lo  dice 
25.  te  ensenaron  la  leccion  26.  te  la  ensenaron  27.  os  la 
ensenaban  28.  me  da  la  mano  29.  se  la  da  30  ensenan- 
domelos    31.  desea  verlas   32.  <jes  la  hermana?    33.  la  es 

AA.  1.  lie  gave  me  the  shoes  2.  he  gave  them  to  me 
3.  he  is  showing  me  the  exercise  4.  he  shows  them  to  me 
5.  he  passed  me  the  cup  and  knife  6.  he  passed  them  to 
me  7.  he  is  passing  them  to  you  8.  he  wants  to  pass  them , 
to  us  9.  he  is  passing  them  to  them  10.  passing  them  to 
her    11.  they  want  to  pass  them  to  you  (polite  singular) 

12.  he  is  writing  me  a  letter  13.  he  is  writing  me  it 
14.  he  wrote  it  to  me  15.  this  book  pleases  my  uncle 
16.  it  pleases  me  17.  I  like  it  (it  pleases  me)  18.  it  pleases 
you  19.  she  likes  it  20.  he  gave  21.  he  gave  the  pens 
to  me  22.  he  gives  me  them  23.  I  give  you  them  24.  he 
gives  them  to  them  25.  he  gave  them  to  them  26.  he 
gives  them  to  you  (polite  plural) 

B.  1.  (jPor  que  no  me  ensenaste  la  leccion  que  acabas 
de  estudiar? — Porque  no  habia  estudiado  el  ejercicio. 
2.  No  dio  el  libro  a  Juan;  lo  dio  a  su  hermano.  3.  <;Quiere 
Vd.  tomar  mi  libro? — No,  gracias;  tengo  uno.  4.  Hace 
una  carrera  por  la  ciudad  en  coche.  La  ciudad  es  muy 
pintoresca  y  la  ve  por  primera  vez.  5.  Me  dio  un  coche  y 
sin  embargo  no  acabe  de  ver  toda  la  ciudad.  6.  El  caballo 
que  compro  es  muy  ligero;  ^quiere  usted  vendermelo? 
7.  Es  amado  de  todos  los  alumnos  porque  les  ensena  muy 
bien.  8.  i  Con  quien  y  para  quien  prepara  ella  las  comidas  ? 
9.  Las  prepara  para  su  hermano ;  se  las  prepara  todos  los 
dias.  10.  No  me  gusta  estudiar  todo  el  tiempo;  quiero 
jugar  un  poco.  11.  ^Por  que  les  enseno  V.  la  cuchara 
que  hallo? — Ellos  son  los  que  la  perdieron.   12.  Se  lo  dijo. 

13.  ^Tienes  el  libro? — No,  el  quiere  darmelo,  pero  yo  no 


CONJUNCTIVE  PKONOimS 


89 


lo  quiero.  14.  No  acabo  de  estudiar  cuando  su  hermano 
entro  en  la  pieza.  15.  ^Enseno  usted  el  ejercicio  a  Juan? — 
Se  lo  ensene  porque  el  no  habia  estudiado  todavia  la  lec- 
cion.  16.  ^Dio  usted  los  libros  a  su  hermano? — No  quiero 
darselos. 

BB.  1.  Have  you  the  book? — Yes,  thanks;  John  gave 
it  to  me.  2.  Does  he  see  us?  3.  No,  he  doesn't  see  us;  he 
isn't  here  now.  He  gave  me  a  very  light  (ligero)  carriage, 
and  so  we  have  been  able  to  see  all  that  picturesque  city. 
4.  Did  John  give  you  the  bill  he  found  yesterday?  5.  He 
did  not  give  it  to  me,  and  now  he  has  no  money.  6.  "What 
is  the  matter  with  you?  7.  What  have  you?  Spanish 
books?  Who  gave  them  to  you?  8.  No  one  gave  them  to 
us ;  we  found  them  in  the  house.  9.  Do  you  want  to  give 
them  to  us?  10.  We  can  not  give  them  to  you  because  they 
are  John's.  11.  Are  you  taking  a  trip  today  in  [a] 
coach  to  see  this  interesting  city?  12.  We  don't  want  to 
see  it  because  we  haven't  the  time.  13.  He  gave  me  these 
things  because  they  are  my  father's.  14.  He  didn't  give 
it  to  my  father  because  my  father  wasn't  at  home  (in 
house).  15.  He  does  not  want  to  give  them  to  him  because 
he  isn't  at  home. 

BBB.  1.  He  gave  me  the  paper  because  it  is  my 
brother's.  2.  He  gave  it  to  me  because  it  was  not  his 
paper.  3.  Doesn't  he  want  to  give  it  to  you,  Mr.  X. ? 
4.  Don't  they  want  to  give  them  to  you,  John?  5.  We 
want  to  take  a  ride  in  a  fast  coach  to  see  this  picturesque 
city.  6.  We  want  to  take  a  ride  in  order  to  see  it.  7.  Did 
they  prepare  the  dinner  or  didn't  they  prepare  it?  8.  I 
don't  like  this  city;  it  isn't  interesting.  9.  Is  that  your 
cousin's  piano?  Do  you  play  it?  10.  Where  is  your  ex- 
ercise? 11.  Didn't  you  have  to  write  it?  12.  Don't  you 
understand  that  I  can't  study  it  today?  13.  Where  are 
the  children? — The  mother  put  them  to  bed.  14.  These 
pupils  are  very  diligent;  they  prepared  their  work  well 
yesterday  and  they  are  preparing  it  well  today.    15.  Did 


90 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


you  find  the  man  of  whom  I  was  speaking?  16.  Do  you 
see  them?  17.  Are  their  uncle  and  aunt  here?  18.  Do 
you  see  her?  19.  "Who  is  the  man  whom  I  was  speak- 
ing of?  ■;  \ 


LESSON  XXXIX 
RADICAL-CHANGING  VERBS  (Continued) 
Review  lessons  XXXV  and  XXXVI 

1.  Summary  of  Radical-changing  verbs  treated  thus  far : 

(a)  R-ch.  verbs  of  Class  I 

(1)  are  recruited  from  oanjunetions  1  and  2; 

(2)  change  -e-  to  -ie-  and  -o-  to  -ue-  under  the  accent. 
These  changes  occur  in  all  the  present  singular  forms 

and  third  plural. 

(b)  R-ch.  verbs  of  Class  II 

(1)  are  recruited  from  conjugation  3. 

(2)  change  -e-  to  -ie-  and  -o-  to  -ue-  under  the  accent. 
These  changes  are  in  all  the  present  singular  forms  and 

third  plural. 

(3)  change  -e-  to  -i-  and  -o-  to  -u-  when  the  ending 
begins  with  diphthong. 

These  changes  occur  in  the  third  singular  and  plural  of 
the  preterite  indicative;  and  in  the  present  participle. 

(c)  R-ch.  verbs  of  Class  3 

(1)  are  recruited  from  conjugation  3  (hence,  dis- 
tinguish such  verbs  from  those  in  b) 

(2)  change  -e-  to  -i-  (there  are  no  verbs  with  the 
stem  in  -o-)  either  under  the  accent  or  when  the  ending 
begins  with  a  diphthong. 

These  changes  occur  in  all  the  present  singular  forms 
and  third  plural ;  in  the  third  singular  and  plural  of  the 
preterite  indicative ;  and  in  the  present  participle. 


RADICAL-CHANGING  VEEBS 


91 


2.  The  radical-changing  verbs  errar  and  oler  change  -ie- 
and  -ue-  to  -ye-  and  -hue-  respectively.  This  is  due  to  a 
Spanish  rule  of  spelling  that  a  word  cannot  begin  with  a 
written  diphthong  ie  or  ue  (the  pronunciation,  however, 
is  the  same).1 

errar,  to  err  (R-ch.  I) 

yerro,  I  err 
yerras,  you  err 

yerra,  he,  she,  it  errs;  you  err 

oler,  to  smell  (R-ch.  I) 

huelo,  I  smell 
hueles,  yoa  smell 
huele,  he,  she,  it  smells;  you 
smell 

VOCABULARY 

la  apuntacion,  note  {as,  to  take     la  hoja,  leaf;  page 
notes) 

brillante,  brilliant 

completo,  -a,  complete 

costar  (ue),  to  cost 
el  cuaderno,  notebook 
el  examen,  examination 
el  exito,  (favorable)  outcome, 

result 
el  hielo,  ice 
el  helado,  ice  cream 


erramos,  we  err 

errais,  you  err 

yerran,  they  err;  you  err 


olemos,  we  smell 

oleis,  you  smell 

huelen,  they  smell;  you  smell 


elhueso,  bone 

morder  (ue),  to  bite 
lanota,  mark  (in  class) 
elprofesor,  teacher;  professor 
la  prof esora,  teacher;  professor 

recibir,  to  receive;  to  pass  {a 
student  in  a  subject) 

sobresaliente,  excellent  {mark  in 
class) 

suelto,  -a,  loose 


A.  1.  huele  2.  yerro  3.  olemos  4.  oliendo  5.  errado 
6.  yerra  7.  erramos  8.  hueles  9.  oleis  10.  errais 
11.  yerran  12.  sienten  13.  pide  14.  repetimos  15.  tiem- 
blas  16.  temblais  17.  compito  18.  almuerzan  19.  vuelve 
20.  juegas  21.  huelen  22.  jugando  23.  vistes  24.  Uueve 
25.  yerro  26.  huele  27.  jugamos  28.  jugaran  29.  juego 
30.  huelen 

A  A.  1.  he  is  playing  2.  they  dress  3.  it  smells  4.  I 
am  mistaken  5.  they  smell  it  6.  do  they  smell?  7.  they 
are  asking  8.  I  am  putting  them  to  bed  9.  is  he  playing? 
10.  they  err  11.  you  are  mistaken  12.  do  we  make  a  mis- 
take (do  we  err)  ?   13.  does  it  smell?    14.  she  is  mistaken 


1  Of.  hielo,  hueso,  huevo.  The  hie-  of  hielo  and  the  ye-  of  yerro  are  pro- 
nounced alike  ;  both  avoid  the  initial  ie-. 


02 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


15.  they  don't  smell  16.  doesn't  it  smell?  IT.  they  don't 
smell  IS.  aren't  they  mistaken  19.  is  he  playing? 
20.  they  will  play    21.  playing    22.  I  err    23.  did  it  rain? 

B.  1.  El  perro  ve  el  hueso.  2.  ;Xo  yerran  cuando  dicen 
que  este  nino  es  el  menor?  3.  Xo  juegan.  trabajan;  hacen 
apuntaciones  en  sus  cuadernos.  4.  ;Que  notas  tuvisteis? — 
Malas  :  no  me  recibieron.  5.  Xo  hay  examen  para  manana  ; 
el  profesor  esta  enfermo.  6.  El  hielo  es  frio.  pero  se  derrite 
rapidamente.  7.  Me  enentan  que  los  niiios  no  eseriben  sus 
ejercicios  ahora  en  cuadernos.  S.  El  agua  huele  a  cafe 
(smells  of  coffee):  ;no  esta  limpio  el  vaso?  10.  Los 
aluninos  escribieron  sus  examenes  con  exito  completo ; 
ahora  estan  jugando.  11.  Llueve.  pero  tenemos  que  tra- 
bajar.  12.  Las  alumnas  compiten  la  una  con  la  otra.  y  asi 
son  muy  diligentes.  13.  Veo  el  caballo.  pero  me  parece  que 
no  es  muy  ligero.  1-1.  El  perro  hallo  un  hueso  y  lo  morclio. 
15.  El  nino  juega  con  el  perro.  16.  Si  listed  dice  eso.  yerra 
mucho :  eso  no  es  la  verdad. 

BB.  1.  This  boy  is  mistaken  when  he  says  that:  the 
truth  is  that  he  does  not  study.  2.  If  the  water  smells  of 
tea.  I  don't  want  it:  I  want  fresh  water.  3.  We  ate  the 
dinner,  and  then  the  dog  had  a  bone.  -1.  They  are  asking 
me  for  the  money,  but  I  haven't  got  it  (I  haven't  it). 
5.  Does  the  dinner  smell  of  onions  fcebollas)  ?  6.  He  is 
probably  here:  but  he  is  mistaken  if  he  thinks  we'll  show 
him  those  things.  T.  We  do  not  have  to  study,  for  we  have 
studied  already.  8.  The  dinner  will  be  ready  soon.  9.  He 
is  asking  his  brother  for  his  book,  but  his  brother  hasn't 
studied  it  enough  yet.  10.  He  is  making  good  notes  in  his 
notebook,  for  he  is  a  brilliant  student  and  always  receives 
excellent  marks.  11.  In  the  examinations,,  he  had  (a)  com- 
plete success.  12.  The  dog  is  biting  the  bone.  13.  Is  he 
asking-for  more  fresh  water? 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 


93 


LESSON  XL 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 


Review  Lesson  XVII 


1. 


el  mio,  la  mia,  mine 
el  tuyo,  la  tuya,  yours 


Singular 


Plural 
los  mios,  las  mias,  mine 
los  tuyos,  las  tuyas,  yours 


el  suyo,  la  suya,  his,  hers;  yours   los  suyos,  las  suyas,  his,  hers; 


el  suyo,  la  suya,  theirs;  yours     los  suyos,  las  suyas,  theirs;  yours 

2.  These  pronouns  may  be  used  in  any  of  the  ordinary 
pronoun  relations — subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  object  of  a 
preposition. 

iDonde  esta  el  libro?    Where  is  the  book? 
El  mio  no  esta  aqui,  Mine  isn't  here. 
Juan  tiene  el  mio,  John  has  mine. 

Juan  estudia  con  el  mio,  John  is  studying  with  mine. 

3.  The  pronouns  (like  the  adjectives)  agree  with  the 
thing  possessed  in  gender  and  number. 

Yo  tengo  la  pluma  de  Juan  y  el  tiene  la  mia,  I  have  John's  pen, 

and  he  has  mine. 
I  En  que  calle  tiene  el  las  casas  ? — Las  suyas  estan  en  la  calle  X. 

On  what  street  has  he  the  houses? — His  are  on  X  Street. 

Las  suyas  agrees  with  casas,  the  thing  possessed,  femi- 
nine plural ;  and  not  with  el,  the  possessor. 

4.  When  the  possessive  pronouns  are  in  the  predicate 
after  the  verb  ser,  the  article  is  ordinarily  dropped. 

Esta  casa  es  mia,  This  house  is  mine. 

Esos  lapices  son  nuestros,  Those  pencils  are  ours. 

5.  The  forms  without  the  article  are  also  used  as  ad- 
jectives after  the  noun  if : 

(a)  the  noun  is  preceded  by  a  number  or  an  indefi- 
nite adjective. 


yours 


el  nuestro,  la  nuestra,  ours 
el  vuestro,  la  vuestra,  yours 


los  nuestros,  las  nuestras,  ours 
los  vuestros,  las  vuestras,  yours 


94 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


dos  primos  mios,  two  cousins  of  mine  (But,  mis  dos  primos,  my 

two  cousins) 

el  tercer  ejercicio  mio,  the  third  exercise  of  mine  [But,  mi  tercer 
ejercicio) 

(b)  in  direct  address,  especially  at  the  heading  of  a 
letter. 

Muy  amigo  mio:  My  dear  Friend:    (salutation  in  letters) 

6.  The  definite  article  often  replaces  the  possessive  ad* 
;jective  (either  the  forms  in  5  above,  or  those  in  Lesson 
XVII). 

No  tiene  el  sombrero  aqui,  He  hasn't  his  hat  here. 

Metio  el  dinero  en  el  bolsillo,  He  put  the  money  in  his  pocket. 

VOCABULARY 

el  bolsillo,  pocket  mandar,  to  send 

la  carta,  letter  el  momento,  moment 

(la)  China,  China  los  muebles,  furniture  (plural  in 
decir,  to  say,  to  tell  Spanish) 

dentro  de,  within  (prep.)  lasnoticias,  news 
elhombro,  shoulder  el  renglon,  line  (of  writing) 

A.  1:  el  mio  2.  las  nuestras  3.  las  suyas  4.  el  vuestro 
5.  el  suyo  6.  los  suyos  7.  la  mia  8.  el  nuestro  9.  el  de 
Juan  10.  las  de  mi  amigo  11.  ciertos  libros  nuestros 
12.  dos  ninos  suyos  13.  un  amigo  mio  14.  cierta  amiga 
suya  15.  sns  noticias  16.  un  caballo  vuestro  17.  los 
suyos  18.  la  nuestra  19.  el  mio  20.  los  tuyos  21.  mi 
amigo    22.  amigo  mio    23.  padre  nuestro    24.  padre  mio 

AA.  1.  theirs  2.  mine  3.  ours  4.  yours  5.  a  dog 
of  mine  6.  some  book  of  theirs  7.  theirs  8.  yours 
9.  yours  (formal)  10.  yours  (intimate,  plural  antecedent) 
11.  yours  (intimate,  singular  antecedent)  12.  mine  13.  his 
(modifying  feminine  plural  noun)  14.  his  (modifying  mas- 
culine singular  noun)  15.  yours  16.  hers  17.  good  news 
18.  three  boys  of  hers  19.  her  three  boys  20.  some  cousins 
of  theirs   21.  certain  cousins   22.  My  dear  Friends: 

B.  1.  ^Donde  estan  las  plumas?  Buscabamos  las  nues- 
tras ayer,  pero  no  las  hallamos.  2.  Ciertos  amigos  nuestros 
que  estan  aqui  tienen  notas  muy  buenas ;  pero  las  nuestras 


POSSESSIVE  PKONOUNS 


95 


son  siempre  malas.  3.  £  Toca  usted  todavia  su  piano  ? — No 
toco  el  mio  ahora,  porque  lo  vendi ;  toco  el  de  mi  hermano. 
4.  Las  nuestras  son  noticias  mny  ciertas;  ustedes  pueden 
creerlas.   5.  Metio  en  el  bolsillo  el  dinero  que  habia  hallado. 

6.  Ya  habia  perdido  todo  el  suyo,  y  tenia  mucha  hambre. 

7.  No  tienes  ni  te  ni  cafe?  En  la  casa  de  mi  tia  los  hay 
(there  is  some).  8.  Amigo  mio,  ^quiere  usted  ensenarme 
la  leccion  paramanana?  9.  ^Donde  estaran  esos  amigos 
suyos  (of  yours)  que  habian  de  Uegar  hoy?  10.  Cuando 
el  padre  hallo  al  nino,  el  nino  lloraba.  11.  Muy  amigo 
mio:  escribire  una  cosa  que  no  va  a  (that  you  will  not) 
creer.  12.  Cierto  amigo  mio  me  dijo  que  usted  estaria  aqui 
dentro  de  pocos  dias.  13.  Sus  dos  hijos  tienen  diez  anos 
el  uno  y  quince  anos  el  otro.  14.  Aqui  tengo  mis  libros; 
I  donde  tiene  usted  los  suyos  ? 

BB.  1.  His  books  were  bought  by  his  students,  but  his 
brother  bought  his  furniture.  2.  Their  father  has  not  so 
many  houses  as  mine  has;  but  he  has  better  ones  (he  has 
them  better).  3.  Some  friend  of  mine  is  studying  with 
him.  4.  Have  you  any  of  their  tea  now  ? — No,  I  am  drink- 
ing mine,  but  they  are  sending  me  some  (a  little)  from 
China.  5.  Our  piano  was  bought  for  us  by  our  parents, 
and  theirs  was  bought  for  them  by  theirs.  6.  My  dear 
Friends :  I  can  write  you  a  long  letter  because  I  have  much 
time  today.  7.  He  tells  me  the  sure  news  that  three 
friends  of  his  are  coming  today.  8.  I  have  your  hat ;  where 
did  you  put  mine?  9.  The  more  we  work,  the  better  are 
our  exercises  and  yours.  10.  Our  pens  and  yours  are  all 
bad.  11.  Father,  will  you  give  me  your  pen  a  moment? 
12.  Have  you  much  to  write?  13.  He  put  the  money  in 
his  pocket  and  entered  the  room.  14.  Some  cousins  of 
theirs  are  to  arrive  this  afternoon.  15.  The  mother  had 
the  little  daughter  by  the  hand  as  they  came  (entered) 
into  the  room.  16.  Your  children  and  mine  are  playing  in 
the  house. 


96 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


LESSON  XLI 
NEGATION 

Review  Lesson  VIII,  4  and  5 

1.  No  before  the  verb  makes  it  negative,  with  the  mere 
idea  of  not  or  no. 

No  lo  escribi,  I  did  not  write  it. 

2.  Other  negative  words  are  used : 

(a)  alone  before  the  verb  or  (b)  after  the  verb  but 
with  no  before  the  verb. 

(a)  Nada  veo,  I  §ee  nothing.         (b)  No  veo  nada,  I  see  nothing. 
A  nadie  veo,  I  see  nobody.  No  veo  a  nadie,  I  see  nobody. 

3.  Alguno  following  a  noun  is  negative  in  meaning. 

No  me  ha  ensenado  cosa  alguna,  He  hasn't  showed  me  a  thing. 

Before  the  noun  it  means  some. 

Tiene  algunas  cosas  que  son  muy  raras,  He  has  some  things 
which  are  very  rare. 

4.  Pero,  mas,  and  sino.  The  ordinary  Spanish  con- 
junction for  but  is  pero  (mas,  occasionally  found,  should 
not  be  used  by  the  student,  as  it  is  used  only  in  literary 
style). 

Yo  leo,  pero  Juan  escribe,  I  am  reading,  but  John  is  writing. 

Sino  is  used  in  a  phrase  which  contradicts  a  previous 
clause. 

No  escribo  en  frances  sino  en  espanol,  I  am  not  writing  in 
French,  but  in  Spanish. 

Sino  que  is  used  if  there  is  a  verb  in  the  second  part  of 
the  sentence. 

No  escribo  en  frances  sino  que  escribo  en  espanol,  I  am  not 

writing  in  French,  but  I  am  writing  in  Spanish. 


NEGATION" 


or 


VOCABULARY 


jamas,  never 

nada,  nothing;  not  at  all 
nadie,  no  one,  nobody 
ni  siquiera,  not  even 
ni  .  .  .  ni,  neither  .  .  .  nor 
no  .  .  .  mas,  no  more,  no 


de  ninguna  manera,  in  no  way, 


not  at  all 


detenidamente,  carefully 
el  entusiasmo,  enthusiasm 


examinar,  to  examine,  to  look 


at  carefully 


longer 
nunca,  never 


la  especie,  kind,  sort,  class 


indiferente,  indifferent 
la  lata,  can 


angosto,  -a,  narrow 
aplicado,  -a,  diligent 


amarillo,  -a,  yellow 
ancho,  -a,  wide 


en  lata,  canned,  tinned 
el  pano,  cloth,  goods 
el  pescado,  fish  (caught) 
el  pez,  fish  (not  caught,  in  ivater) 


la  clase,  kind,  sort ;  class 


el  bacalao,  cod 


raro,  -a,  rare,  unusual 
la  sardina,  sardine 
la  seda,  silk 


A.  1.  ningun  entusiasmo  2.  algun  pescado  3.  pescado 
alguno  4.  algun  pescado  5.  j  ca !   6.  no  duermen,  estudian 

7.  no  comieron  carne  sino  pan  8.  no  estudiaba  nunca 
9.  casa  alguna  10.  ninguna  cosa  11.  ninguna  12.  no 
buscamos  a  nadie  13.  a  nadie  buscamos  14.  no  juego  con 
ninguno  de  sus  amigos  15.  ni  el  libro  ni  el  cuaderno  son 
mios  16.  no  escribio  ni  en  el  libro  ni  en  el  cuaderno 
17.  ni  la  pluma  ni  el  cuaderno  son  suyos  18.  no  juega  con 
ninguno  de  sus  amigos  19.  a  nadie  se  lo  ha  dado  20.  no 
se  lo  ha  dado. 

AA.  1.  not  at  all!  2.  I  never  write  3.  no  man  4.  I 
do  not  see  5.  no  man  6.  neither  his  uncle  nor  his  aunt 
is  here    7.  his  uncle  is  here,  but  his  aunt  is  not  here 

8.  not  his  (el)  uncle  but  his  aunt  is  here  9.  they  never 
write  10.  they  never  showed  them  to  me  11.  they  didn't 
show  12.  they  showed  it  to  you  13.  they  will  show  them 
to  no  one   14.  no!    15.  not  at  all   16.  he  never  works 

B.  1.  No  son  perezosos,  sino  indiferentes.  2.  En  la 
clase  estudiamos  detenidamente  toda  clase  de  pano — seda, 
et  cetera.  3.  Hay  que  limpiar  todo — ninguna  cosa  esta 
limpia,  todo  esta  sucio.  4.  Pasamos  por  aquella  calle 
angosta,  donde  no  habia  ni  siquiera  luz  de  petroleo. 


4 


98 


SPANISH  GKAMMAE 


5.  Como  teniamos  hambre,  compramos  una  lata  de  sardinas, 
con  un  poco  de  pan.  6.  No  me  gustan  sardinas  de  ninguna 
manera.  7.  No  todos  los  alumnos  son  tan  diligentes  como 
estos  dos.  8.  ^Quiere  usted  comprar  este  pano? — jCa! 
No  me  gusta  de  ningnna  manera.  9.  No  podemos  examinar 
su  pano  porqne  no  tenemos  mucho  tiempo.  10.  No  estoy 
escribiendo  a  Juan  sino  a  Enrique.  11.  No  preparo  la 
comida  sino  que  la  comio.  12.  ^Quiere  usted  trabajar 
aqui? — [Jamas!  13.  No  tiene  nada.  14.  No  vendio  la 
casa  sino  el  piano. 

BB.  1.  We  didn't  find  the  French  books,  but  the  note- 
books. 2.  I  don't  see  anyone  in  the  street.  3.  Did  you 
ever  prepare  the  dinners?  4.  No,  but  I  have  eaten  them. 
5.  I  have  never  prepared  any  meal.  6.  Don't  you  have  to 
write  the  exercises  for  tomorrow?  7.  Not  at  all!  We 
aren't  preparing  any  work  for  tomorrow.  8.  Don't  you 
have  to  play  the  piano  tomorrow?  9.  These  children  are 
not  hard-working,  but  lazy.  10.  If  you  are  hungry,  you 
can  eat  some  canned  sardines.  11.  We  don't  like  this  can 
of  sardines.  12.  What  kind  of  sardines  are  they? 
13.  Don't  you  like  them?  14.  He  didn't  buy  the  silk 
cloth ;  he  only  examined  it,  and  then  he  said  that  he  would 
certainly  not  (in  no  way)  buy  it.  15.  But  he  did  buy  a 
silk  shirt.  16.  These  glasses  are  not  dirty — they  are  yel- 
low. 17.  The  street  is  not  narrow,  but  wide.  18.  He 
didn't  study  the  lesson,  but  he  wrote  it  in  his  notebook. 


LESSON  XLII 

DISJUNCTIVE  (PREPOSITIONAL)  PRONOUNS 

Eeview  Lessons  XIII  and  XXXVIII. 


mi,  me   •  nosotros,  -as,  us 

ti,  you  vosotros,  -as,  you 

el,  him,  it;  ella,  her,  it  ellos,  -as,  them 

usted,  you  ustedes,  you 


DISJUNCTIVE    (PREPOSITIONAL)    PRONOUNS  99 

2.  These  pronouns  are  used  exclusively  as  the  objects 
of  prepositions. 

Ese  libro  es  para  mi,  That  book  is  for  me. 

Lo  presente  yo  a  usted,  I  introduced  him  to  you. 

With  the  exception  of  the  first  and  second  persons  singu- 
lar, the  prepositional  pronouns  are  the  same  in  form  as 
the  subject  pronouns. 

The  first  person  singular  mi,  me,  has  an  accent  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  the  possessive  adjective  mi,  my. 

3.  With  the  preposition  con,  mi  and  ti  combine  to  form 
conmigo  and  contigo. 

Juan  hablaba  conmigo,  John  was  speaking  with  me. 

4.  The  prepositional  forms  are  used  for  the  indirect 
pronoun  when  the  direct  form  is  a  person. 

Yo  quiero  presentarlo  a  ella,  I  want  to  introduce  him  to  her. 

5.  The  prepositional  form  is  also  used  to  distinguish 
between  persons  or  to  emphasize  a  pronoun  (review 
XXXVIII,  3  and  5).  In  this  use,  it  often  repeats  a  con- 
junctive pronoun  already  used. 

Los  veo  a  el  y  a  ella,  I  see  him  and  her  (I  see  them,  him  and  her) 
Se  lo  doy  a  el,        I  am  giving  it  to  him 

a  ella,  to  her 

a  usted,  to  you 

a  ellos,  to  them 

a  ellas,  to  them 

a  ustedes,  to  you 

A  mi  me  lo  da  (Me  lo  da  a  mi),  He  is  giving  it  to  me. 

VOCABULARY 

acompanar,  to  accompany,  to  go       hare,  I  shall  do;"  haras,  you  will 

with  do,  etc. 

al  lado  de,  beside;  a  su  lado,  at    ellado,  side 

his  side,  beside  him  presentar,  to  introduce,  to  pre- 

correr,  to  run  sent 
dire,  I  shall  say;  diras,  you  will       segun,  according  to 

say;  etc.  solo,  -a,  only,  alone  (adjective) 

hacia,  towards  solo,  only  {advert) 

visitar,  to  visit 

A.    1.  con  el   2.  sin  nosotras   3.  con  ustedes   4.  contigo 


100 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


5.  con  ella  6.  cerca  de  nosotros  7.  segun  vosotros 
8.  conmigo  9.  para  ella  10.  se  lo  doy  a  el  11.  a  mi  me 
hablaron  12.  conmigo  13.  por  el  14.  sin  nosotros  15.  sin 
usted  16.  hacia  ellos  17.  no  estudiaran  18.  se  lo  en- 
senaremos  19.  hacia  nosotras  20.  a  ustedes,  no  a  ellos 
21.  se  lo  ensenaron  a  ustedes,  no  a  ellos  22.  al  lado  de 
Juan  23.  a  su  lado  24.  al  lado  de  el  25.  a  su  lado  de  el 
26.  a  su  lado  de  ella  27.  haran   28.  diremos   29.  hare 

AA.  1.  with  me  2.  without  them  3.  towards  us 
4.  I'll  show  it  5.  I'll  show  it  to  them  6.  to  me  7.  they'll 
show  them  to  her  8.  beside  them  9.  near  us  10.  beside 
him  11.  not  to  her  12.  with  you  (intimate  singular) 
13.  with  me  14.  with  her  15.  with  them  16.  with  you 
(intimate  singular)  17.  with  you  (intimate  plural) 
18.  with  you  (polite  singular)  19.  with  me  20.  without 
me  21.  with  me  22.  toward  you  (formal  plural)  23.  ac- 
cording to  her    24.  according  to  them  (feminine) 

B.  1.  Mi  padre  esta  aqui,  pero  no  le  busco  a  el  sino  a 
mi  madre.  2.  A  mis  primos  los  buscaron  ayer,  pero  no  los 
hallaron.  3.  ^Me  buscas  a  mi?  4.  No  te  busco  a  ti.  5.  Se 
lo  dare  a  el,  no  a  ella.  6.  ^Quien  estudia  contigo?  7.  No 
quieren  estudiar  contigo;  quieren  estudiar  solos.  8.  A 
Juan  no  lo  veo  a  el  sino  a  su  hermano.  9.  Mis  primos  os 
buscaron  ayer,  pero  ni  el  ni  ella  os  encontraron.  10.  No 
se  lo  dio  el  libro  a  Juan  sino  al  hermano.  11.  Se  los  pasa 
los  cuadernos  a  Juan,  pero  Juan  no  los  quiere  tener  (for 
no  quiere  tenerlos).  12.  A  mi  me  dio  un  coche  muy  ligero, 
y  sin  embargo  no  acabe  en  cuatro  horas  de  ver  toda  la 
ciudad.  13.  Pasan  por  el  sendero  hacia  nosotras,  pero  no 
esperaremos.  14.  A  mi  me  dio  mi  libro.  15.  Mi  tio  desea 
leer  aquel  libro;  no  le  gusta  leer  este.  16.  ^Por  que  no 
estudias  conmigo?  17.  A  mi  no  me  dara  una  buena  nota 
porque  no  estudio  bastante.  18.  Corre  y  juega  con  sus 
bermanos,  pero  es  mucho  mas  joven  que  ellos.  19.  <:No 
son  sus  hermanos? — Si,  los  son. 

BB.    1.  What  will  they  give  to  you?    2.  They  won't 


PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE 


101 


give  me  a  very  good  mark  because  I  did  not  study. 
3.  Neither  he  nor  she  are  good  students;  they  don't  study 
enough.  4.  They  were  running  towards  us  and  so  we 
passed  to  one  side.  5.  He  gave  it  to  me,  not  to  them,  be- 
cause it  is  mine.  6.  Will  he  give  it  to  me  because  it  is 
mine  (el  mio,  full  form  for  emphasis)  ?  7.  The  man  of 
whom  I  was  speaking — did  you  find  him  ?  8.  Did  he  give 
the  books  to  you  or  to  him?  9.  Didn't  you  give  them  to 
him?  10.  Shan't  you  wait  for  them?  11.  No!  12.  What 
will  they  do  with  this  book?  13.  What  will  they  do  with 
it?  14.  What  did  he  say  to  you?  15.  I'll  tell  it  to  you 
but  not  to  them.  16.  They  are  working  with  me. 
17.  Aren't  they  with  you  {intimate  singular)  ?  18.  They 
introduced  me  to  her.  19.  Did  they  introduce  you  to 
them?  20.  Never!  21.  He  passed  along  the  path,  and 
his  sister  was  beside  him.  22.  He  visited  me  yesterday, 
and  their  brother  was  with  him.  23.  Isn't  she  your 
cousin? — She  is  (L#  es),  yes.   24.  Who  was  with  you? 

[Study  Appendix  C  as  introductory  to  Lesson  XLIII 
and  the  following  lessons  on  the  subjunctive.] 


LESSON  XLIII. 

PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  hablar,  to  speak  (stem  habl-) 

hable,  (that)  I  speak,  etc.  hablemos,  (that)  we  speak,  etc. 

hables,  (that)  you  speak,  etc.  hableis,  (that)  you  speak,  etc. 

hable,  (that)  he,  she,  it  speaks;  hablen,  (that)  they  speak;  you 
etc.  speak,  etc. 

beber,  to  drink  (stem  beb-)   escribir,  to  write  (stem,  escrib-) 

beba         bebamos  escriba  escribamos 

bebas        bebais  escribas  escribais 

beba         beban  escriba  escriban 

2.  The  characteristic  vowel  of  the  present  subjunctive 
of  the  first  conjugation  is  e  in  all  six  forms ;  of  the  second 
and  third  conjugations,  a. 


102  SPANISH  GRAMMAR 

3.  The  following  verbs  have  certain  irregularities  in  the 
stem  or  ending. 

ser,  to  be  (stem  se-)  estar,  to  be  (stem  est-) 

sea  seamos  este  estemos 

seas  seais  estes  esteis 

sea  sean  este  esten 

tener,  to  have  (stem  teng-)  haber,  to  have  (stem  hay-) 

tenga        tengamos  haya  hayamos 

tengas       tengais  hayas  hayais 

tenga        tengan  haya  hayan 

decir,  to  say  (stem  dig-)       ver,  to  see  (stem  ve-) 

diga  digamos  vea  veamos 

digas        digais  veas  veais 

diga         digan  vea  vean 

4.  When  the  main  verb  is  present  or  f uture,  the  sub- 
ordinate subjunctive  tense  is  present. 

Es  preciso  que  esten  aqui,  It  is  necessary  that  they  be  here. 
Sera  preciso  que  esten  aqui,  It  will  be  necessary  that  they  be 
here. 

VOCABULARY 

el  automovil,  automobile  la  playa,  beach,  shore 

conducir,  to  lead;  to  drive  posible,  possible 

el  dependiente,  clerk  es  posible,  it  is  possible 

dudar,  to  doubt  {takes  subjunc-  (takes  subjunctive) 

tive)  es  preciso,  it  is  necessary 

durante,  during  [takes  subjunctive) 

en  seguida,  then,  next,  at  once  estar  bueno  de  salud,  to  be  in 
imposible,  impossible  good  health 

es  imposible,  it  is  impossible        es  tiempo  de  que,  it  is  time  (to) 

(takes  subjunctive)  (takes  subjunctive) 

necesario,  necessary  las  vacaciones,  vacation 

es  necesario,  it  is  necessary  viajar,  to  travel 

(takes  subjunctive)  Vina  del  Mar,  Vina  del  Mar 

(a  beach  in  Chile) 

A.  Give  the  infinitive  and  locate  the  form  of: 

1.  que  estemos  2.  que  sea  3.  que  seamos  4.  que  seais 
vosotras  5.  que  acudan  6.  que  escribamos  7.  escribimos 
8.  que  cocine  9.  que  limpien  10.  que  tema  11.  que 
tengais  12.  que  usted  tenga  13.  que  vendamos  14.  ven- 
demos    15.  que  tengan    16.  tienen    17.  que  me  aburran 


PKESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE 


103 


18.  que  usted  viva  19.  que  comamos  20.  que  halleis 
21.  que  ustedes  escriban  22.  que  lloremos  23.  que  el 
estudie  24.  que  tengamos  25.  que  estudien  26.  que  sean 
27.  que  digan  28.  que  digais  29.  que  reciban  30.  que 
lo  presentemos  a  ellas 

AA.  Use  subjunctive  with  phrases  introduced  by  that. 

1.  that  we  sell  2.  that  you  have  3.  that  they  are 
4.  that  we  are  5.  that  she  is  well  6.  that  they  cook 
7.  that  his  brother  is  8.  that  he  is  tiring  9.  that  we 
introduce  them  to  her  10.  that  you  find  11.  you  find 
12.  that  we  clean  13.  we  clean  14.  that  they  are  studying 
15.  that  we  believe  16.  we  believe  17.  that  they  are 
18.  that  they  have  19.  that  I  have  20.  that  I  may  have 
21.  I  have  22.  that  she  believes  23.  that  you  have 
24.  that  we  have  to  write  25.  that  she  has  26.  that  they 
have  27.  that  they  see  28.  they  see  29.  I  see  30.  that 
I  am  seeing   31.  that  I  have  found 

B.  1.  Bs  preciso  que  los  ninos  de  mi  tia  estudien.  2.  Es 
tiempo  de  que  estudien.  3.  No  es  necesario  que  limpiemos 
los  vasos  ahora.  4.  Dudo  que  esten  aqui.  5.  Dudan  que 
el  este  aqui.  6.  Duda  que  sea  necesario  que  estudiemos 
ahora.  7.  <jEs  imposible  que  lo  vendan?  8.  Sera  ppsible 
que  nos  vea.  9.  El  dependiente  duda  que  pase  las  vaca- 
ciones  en  la  playa  de  Vina  del  Mar.  10.  Es  posible  que  el 
alumno  viaje  en  automovil  durante  las  vacaciones.  11. 
Dudamos  que  Vds.  escriban  las  cartas  hoy.  12.  Dudo  que 
Vd.  se  lo  escriba  hoy.  13.  El  hombre  no  quiere  conducir 
el  automovil  porque  no  es  suyo.  14.  Dudo  que  lo  pueda 
conducir,  porque  esta  tan  enfermo.  15.  Sera  tiempo  de  que 
vuelva  a  la  casa.  16.  Es  imposible  que  viajemos  durante 
estas  vacaciones.  17.  Sera  preciso  que  laven  los  cuchillos 
y  las  cucharas  en  seguida.  18.  Dudo  que  tengan  el  tiempo 
para  eso.    19.  Dudo  que  vuelvan  a  hacerlo. 

BB.  1.  They  doubt  that  she  is  here.  2.  Is  it  possible 
they  doubt  it?    3.  It  is  time  that  she  washes  the  glasses. 


104 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


4.  It  is  time  for  her  to  wash  the  glasses  (It  is  time  that 
she  washes  the  -■;-.)•  5.  It  is  time  for  them  to  wash  them 
(It  is  time  that  they  wash  .  .  .).  6.  It  will  be  necessary 
that  he  study  more.  7.  It  is  necessary  for  him  to  study 
today.    8.  It  must  be  time  for  them  to  read  the  lesson. 

9.  I  doubt  that  they  will  be  (that  they  are)  here  today. 

10.  It  isn't  necessary  for  them  to  study  the  whole  day 
(See  BB,  6).    11.  It  is  time  they  receive  good  marks. 

12.  I  doubt  that  he  will  travel  in  an  auto  this  vacation. 

13.  It  isn't  possible  that  he  passes  all  his  vacation  at  Vina 
del  Mar.  14.  It  is  time  they  were  (are)  here.  15.  It  will 
be  impossible  for  him  to  study  here.  16.  It  is  impossible 
for  him  to  study  here.  17.  It  will  be  impossible  for  him 
to  study  all  these  lessons  for  tomorrow.  18.  It  isn't  pos- 
sible— he  will  not  study  them.  19.  You  doubt  that  they 
are  studying  now.  20.  It  is  time  they  wash  their  face  and 
hands,  and  study.  21.  During  the  vacation  it  will  be  im- 
possible for  us  to  study.  22.  I  doubt  that  they  are  telling 
the  truth.   23.  Don't  you  doubt  it,  too? 


LESSON  XLIV 
PAST  SUBJUNCTIVE 

Review  Appendix  C. 

1.  hablar,  to  speak  (stem  habl-) 
hablase,  (that)  I  spoke?  etc.         hablasemos,  (that)  we  spoke,  etc. 
hablases,  (that)  you  spoke,  etc.     hablaseis,  (that)  you  spoke,  etc. 
hablase,  (that)  he,  she,  it  spoke;    hablasen,  (that)  they  spoke;  you 
you  spoke,  etc.  spoke,  etc. 

beber,  to  drink  (stem  beb-)  escribir,  to  write  (stem  escrib-) 
bebiese         bebiesemos  escribiese  escribiesemos 

bebieses        bebieseis  escribieses  escribieseis 

bebiese         bebiesen  escribiese  escribiesen 

Note  in  the  past  subjunctives  that  the  endings  of  all 
three  conjugations  are  alike  except  that  the  first  has  -a- 
where  the  second  and  third  have  -ie-. 


PAST  SUBJUNCTIVE 


105 


The  stress  is  on  the  same  syllable  throughout,  the  first 
plural  having  a  written  accent. 

estar,  to  be  (stem  estuv-)      ser,  to  be  (stem  fu-) 

fuese  fuesemos 


estuviese 
estuvieses 
estuviese 


estuviesemos 
estuvieseis 
estuviesen 


fueses 
fuese 


fueseis 
fuesen 


haber,  to  have  (stem  hub-) 

hubiese  hubiesemos 
hubieses  hubieseis 
hubiese  hubiesen 


tener,  to  have  (stem  tuv-) 

tuviese  tuviesemos 
tuvieses  tuvieseis 
tuviese  tuviesen 

ver,  to  see  (stem  v-) 


decir,  to  say  (stem  dij-) 

dijese  1  dijesemos  viese  viesemos 

dijeses  dijeseis  vieses  vieseis 

tlijese  dijesen  viese  viesen 

Note  that  dijese,  etc.  and  fuese,  etc.  lack  the  -i-  of  the 
diphthong  -ie-. 

2.  There  is  another  form  of  the  past  subjunctive  which 
differs  from  that  above  in  having  -ra 1  for  the  final  -se. 

hablar,  to  speak  (stem  habl-) 

hablara,  (that)  I  spoke,  etc.  hablaramos,  (that)  we  spoke,  etc. 
hablaras,  (that)  you  spoke,  etc.  hablarais,  (that)  you  spoke,  etc. 
hablara,  (that)  he,  she,  it  spoke;  hablaran,  (that)  they  spoke;  you 

spoke,  etc. 

escribir,  to  write  (stem  escrib-) 

escribiera  escribieramos 

etc.  etc. 


you  spoke,  etc. 

beber,  to  drink  (stem  beb- 

bebiera  bebieramos 
etc.  etc. 

estar,  to  be  (stem  estuv-) 

estuviera  estuvieramos 

etc.  etc. 

haber,  to  have  (stem  hub-) 

hubiera  hubieramos 

etc.  etc. 

decir,  to  say  (stem  dij-) 

dij  era  dijeramos 

etc.  etc. 

3.  The  past  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  subordinate  clause 


ser,  to  be  (stem  fu-) 

fuera  fueramos 

etc.  etc. 

tener,  to  have  (stem  tuv- 

tuviera  tuvieramos 

etc.  etc. 

ver,  to  see  (stem  v-) 


viera 

etc. 


vieramos 

etc. 


1  In  general,  the  -ra  subjunctive  is  common  in  South  America,  the  -S3  in  Spain. 


106 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


after  a  conditional,  imperfect,  or  preterite  in  the  main 
clause. 

Dudaria  que  estuviesen  aqui,  I  should  doubt  that  they  were  here. 
iEra  posible  que  estuviesen  aqui?    Was  it  possible  that  they 
were  here? 

4.  The  perfect  takes  a  present  or  past  subjunctive  ac- 
cording to  the  sense. 

Compound  forms  of  the  subjunctive  are  regularly  formed 
with  haber. 

Ha  mandado  que  yo  estudiara,  He  ordered  that  I  study  {then). 
Ha  mandado  que  yo  estudie,  He  ordered  that  I  study  {now). 
Dudo  que  lo  hubieran  escrito,  He  doubted  that  they  had  writ- 
ten it. 

VOCABULARY 

mandar,  to  order,  to  command        a  veces,  at  times,  sometimes 
quisiera,  I  should  wish,  I  should 
like,  I  wish 

A.  1.  que  estuvieramos  2.  que  estuviesemos  3.  que 
fueran  4.  que  hubieramos  bebido  5.  que  escribieran 
3.  que  fueran  4.  que  hubieramos  bebido  5.  que  escribieran 
(j.  que  escribiesen  7.  que  dijese  8.  que  dijera  9.  que 
tuvieramos  10.  que  la  vara  11.  que  aburriera  12.  que 
comiese  13.  que  fuera  14.  que  escribieran  15.  que  ven- 
diera  16.  que  hubiera  17.  que  lavasen  18.  que  hablase- 
mos  19.  que  hablaramos  20.  que  viera  21.  que  dijeran 
22.  que  viesen  23.  que  dijeses  24.  que  hayan  comido 
25.  que  tuvieran  26.  que  hubieras  27.  que  comieramos 
28.  que  bebiera   29.   que  lavara   30.  que  vivieramos 

A  A.  Use  subjunctive  with  phrases  introduced  ~by  that. 

1.  that  they  had  2.  that  they  have  spoken.  3.  that 
they  said  4.  that  we  washed  5.  that  you  had  6.  that  he 
saw  7.  that  they  had  eaten  8.  that  they  have  bored 
9.  that  we  drank  10.  that  she  spoke  11.  that  they  wrote 
12.  that  we  ate  13.  that  you  had  travelled  14.  that  we 
doubted  15.  that  he  said  16.  that  he  had  had  17.  that 
I  had  had  18.  that  she  saw  19.  that  we  had  20.  that  you 
wrote  21.  that  they  ate  22.  that  they  had  eaten  23.  that 
I  wrote  24.  that  we  had  written  25.  that  we  had  26.  that 
we  had  spoken   27.  that  she  had  cleaned 


PAST  SUBJUNCTIVE 


107 


B.  1.  Quisiera  que  ellos  se  lo  hubieran  ensenado. 
2.  Dudaba  que  fuera  necesario  que  estudiasemos.  3.  Mande 
que  Juan  tocase  el  piano  hoy,  pero  no  lo  toco.  4.  Dudamos 
(what  tense  is  this?)  que  escribiera  todas  las  cartas  ayer. 
5.  Fue  preciso  que  lavase  los  cuchillos  ayer.  6.  Fue  pre- 
ciso que  lavara  los  cuchillos  y  las  cucharas.  7.  El  depen- 
diente  ha  dudado  que  pasara  las  vacaciones  en  Vina  del 
Mar.  8.  Sentimos  mucho  que  ella  lo  hubiera  dudado. 
8.  <;Fue  posible  que  el  alumno  pasara  las  vacaciones  en  la 
play  a?  9.  ^No  queria  el  hombre  conducir  el  automovil? 
10.  No  fue  preciso  que  los  viese  ayer.  11.  Senti  mucho  que 
ella  no  la  escribiese.  12.  Dude  que  el  hombre  enfermo 
pudiese  conducir  el  automovil.  13.  Fue  imposible  que  lo 
vendieran.  14.  Fue  necesario  que  mis  primos  estudiaran 
todo  el  dia.  15.  Quisiera  que  Vd.  preparase  (or  prepare, 
according  to  the  sense)  muy  bien  esta  leccion.  16.  Fue 
tiempo  de  que  dijeran  la  verdad.  17.  ^jNo  fue  tiempo  de 
que  nosotros  escribiesemos  los  dos  ejercicios?  18.  Sintio 
que.  ellos  no  se  lo  hubieran  ensenado. 

BB.  1.  They  doubted  that  she  was  there.  2.  It  wasn't 
necessary  for  them  to  play  the  piano  the  whole  day.  3.  I 
wish  we  had  written  the  exercise  yesterday.  4.  It  has  been 
impossible  at  times  for  her  to  study.  5.  It  wasn't  impos- 
sible to  learn  the  whole  lesson  for  today.  6.  It  was  time 
for  them  to  wash  the  glasses.  7.  "We  were  sorry  (takes 
subjunctive)  that  we  had  not  studied  the  two  lessons. 
8.  During  the  vacations  it  was  impossible  for  us  to  study 
much.  9.  I  doubted  that  they  would  be  here  today.  10.  We 
have  had  to  work,  or  wTe  should  be  sorry  that  we  did  not 
work.  11.  You  doubted  that  they  had  studied.  12.  He 
ordered  us  to  finish  writing  the  exercise.  13.  It  was  time 
that  they  cleaned  their  slates.  14.  It  was  impossible  that 
he  had, to  have  them  for  yesterday.  15.  They  have  ordered 
us  to  write  the  exercises.  16.  I  doubted  that  they  were 
telling  the  truth.  17.  I  ordered  them  to  tell  the  whole 
truth.   18.  I  wish  we  had  played  the  piano  yesterday. 


108 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XLV 
CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES 

Eeview  Appendix  C. 

1.  There  are  two  kinds  of  conditions  to  distinguish: 
(a)  fact  conditions,  and  (b)  contrary-to-fact  conditions. 

(a)  Fact  conditions  are  conditions  in  which  the  con- 
dition stated  actually  has  occurred  or,  so  far  as  we  know, 
will  occur.  Here  the  if  may  be  equivalent  to  when  or 
whenever.  These  conditions  have  identically  the  same  con- 
struction irT  Spanish  and  in  English,  and  in  Spanish  are 
always  in  the  indicative. 

Si  esta  aqui  temprano,  estudiamos  juntos,  If  (whenever)  he  is 

here  early,  we  study  together. 
Si  esta  aqui  temprano,  estudiaremos  juntos,  If  he  is  here  early, 

we  shall  study  together. 

(b)  Contrary-to-fact  conditions  are  conditions  in 
which  the  if-clause  states  the  opposite  of  wiiat  happens  or 
happened.  In  Spanish,  contrary-to-fact  conditions  have 
one  clause,  sometimes  both  clauses,  in  the  subjunctive. 

2.  In  conditions  contrary  to  fact,  the  if-clause  may  have 
the  -se  or  -ra  past  subjunctive,  and  the  result  clause  the 
conditional  (as  in  English).  Or  the  if-clause  may  have  the 
-se  past  subjunctive,  and  the  result  clause  the  -ra  sub- 
junctive. 

c,  (  estuviese  )  .   ...    .  1  If  he  were  here, 

■     Sl  el  \  estuviera  [  a^U1'  estudianamos  juntos  I      should  stlldy 
Si  el     estuviese     aqui,  estudiaramos  juntos  J  together. 

fhubiese  ) 
hubiera  \   esta^°  a(lu*>  estudiariamos  juntos 

Si  el     hubiese     estado  aqui,  hubieramos  estudiado  juntos 

If  he  had  been  here,  we  should  have  studied  together. 

3.  Si  =  Whether.    Note  that  after  si,  in  the  sense  of 

whether,  only  the  indicative  may  be  used. 

Quiero  saber  si  estan  aqui,  I  want  to  know  whether  they  are 
here. 


CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES 


109 


VOCABULARY 


en  vez  de,  instead  of 
la  guerra,  war 

juntos,  -as,  together 
el  liceo,  high  school,  academy 


prestar,  to  lend,  to  pay  {atten- 
tion) 
el  sofa,  sofa 

temprano,  -a,  early 


A.  1.  Si  tuviera  ocho  mil  dolares,  compraria  la  casa. 
2.  i  Cuantos  soldados  habria  en  esta  ciudad  ahora  si  hubiese 
guerra?  3.  No  tuvieramos  que  estudiar  tanto  si  prepara- 
semos  nuestras  lecciones  tan  bien  como  ustedes.  4.  Me 
habria  ensenado  donde  estan  los  libros  en  su  casa  si  Imbiera 
tenido  mucho  tiempo.  5.  Trabajando  aquel  hombre  (If 
that  man  worked),  estaria  mucho  mas  contento.  6.  Si  ella 
no  preparase  bien  una  comida,  el  no  la  comiera.  7.  £  Donde 
habriamos  vivido  si  hubiesemos  vendido  la  casa?  8.  Si 
dijese  esto,  no  hablaria  con  verdad.  9.  Si  tuviese  veinte 
anos,  no  estaria  en  el  liceo.  10.  Si  la  vajilla  estuviese  sucia, 
ella  la  lavara.  11.  Si  yo  tuviera  calor,  no  cerraria  la  ven- 
tana.  12.  Si  ayer  Vd.  hubiera  hablado  a  su  padre  de  estos 
libros,  el  los  habria  comprado.  13.  Si  usted  estuviese  en 
Madrid,  ^en  que  calle  viviria?  14.  Si  los  alumnos  prepa- 
rasen  sus  lecciones  mejor,  ^tendrian  mejores  notas?  15.  Si 
hubiese  un  sofa  en  la  casa,  el  dormiria  alii.  16.  Si  encen- 
diera  la  luz  en  el  dormitorio,  leeria.  17.  Si  yo  tuviera 
dinero,  compraria  el  pano  hoy  mismo.  18.  Si  aquel  hom- 
bre  dijera  que  quien  no  trabaja  es  feliz,  no  diria  la  verdad. 
19.  Si  me  hubiese  ensenado  la  leccion,  yo  habria  acabado 
de  estudiar  ahora. 

A  A.  1.  If  you  had  your  book  there,  would  you  lend  it 
to  me?  2.  How  many  soldiers  would  there  be  here  now 
if  there  were  still  war?  3.  The  young  pupils  would  not 
be  so  diligent  if  they  did  not  have  to  study.  4.  If  they 
had  sold  their  house,  where  would  they  be  living  now? 
5.  If  they  had  sold  it,  where  would  they  live  now?  6.  If 
the  girl  had  not  washed  the  dishes,  she  would  have  fin- 
ished studying  already.  7.  If  he  had  spoken  to  his  father 
yesterday  about  the  book,  then  he  would  have  it  today. 
8.  If  I  had  my  verbs  to  conjugate  now,  I  should  not  be 
playing  the  piano.   9.  If  this  child  were  younger,  he  would 


110 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


not  be  so  large.  10.  If  he  found  his  book,  he  would  have 
to  study.  11.  If  we  had  nine  thousand  dollars,  we  should 
buy  the  house.  12.  I  should  not  have  all  my  lessons  ready 
if  I  had  not  studied  all  day  yesterday.  13.  If  you  had 
found  the  program,  wouldn't  you  have  given  it  to  them? 
14.  If  they  had  had  a  telegram,  they  would  not  be  here 
now.  15.  If  they  had  put  the  children  to  bed,  they  would 
not  have  to  read  to  them.  16.  If  there  were  coffee  instead 
of  tea,  I  should  drink  it.  17.  If  he  had  good  notes  in  his 
notebook,  he  would  have  better  marks.  18.  If  we  found 
his  hat,  we  should  not  have  to  buy  him  another. 

LESSON  XL VI 
SUBJUNCTIVE  (Continued) 

1.  Subjunctive  with  Impersonal  Expressions.  The  sub- 
junctive is  used  with  many  impersonal  verbs  expressing 
possibility,  necessity,  emotion,  opinion,  and  the  like. 

Es  tiempo  de  que  estudien,  It  is  time  that  they  studied. 
Es  posible  que  lo  tenga,  It  is  possible  that  he  has  it. 

Other  expressions  are : 

es  imposible,  it  is  impossible         importa,  it  is  important 
es  importante,  it  is  important       es  preciso,  it  is  necessary 
es  lastima,  it  is  a  pity 

2.  Many  impersonal  expressions  substitute  an  infinitive 
for  the  que  clause  with  subjunctive.  Here  a  dative  of  the 
personal  pronoun  is  used  with  the  finite  verb. 

Es  imposible  que  este  aqui,  It  is  impossible  that  he  is  here. 
Le  es  posible  estar  aqui,  It  is  possible  for  him  to  be  here. 

But  avoid  the  infinitive  where  the  impersonal  ex- 
pression has  a  noun. 

Es  tiempo  de  que  este  aqui,  It  is  time  that  he  were  here. 

3.  Present  Tense,  saber,  to  know  (stem  sab-) 

se,  I  know  sabemos,  we  know 

sabes,  you  know  sabeis,  you  know 

sabe,  he,  she,  it  knows;  you  know  saben,  they  know;  you  know 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


111 


demasiado,  too  much 
esta  noche,  tonight 
por  lo  comun,  generally 


VOCABULARY 

saber,  to  know;  to  know  how;  to 

taste  of 
a  tiempo,  on  time 


A.  1.  Es  tiempo  de  que  ella  la  vea.  2.  Es  tiempo  de 
que  lavemos.  3.  Es  posible  que  nos  aburran  si  estamos  all! 
mucho  tiempo.  4.  Es  preciso  escribir  los  ejercicios  dificiles 
tan  bien  como  los  faciles.  5.  Es  necesario  que  nos  escriban 
t  odos  los  dias.  6.  No  se  si  estan  aqui  o  no ;  pero  si 1  se 
que  estaran.  7.  Es  imposible  que  tenga  un  mal  ejercicio 
porque  siempre  esta  estudiando.  8.  No  me  dijo  si  estaria 
aqui,  pero  creo  que  si  estara.1  9.  Si  ellos  le  dicen  eso,  yo 
quisiera  saberlo.  10.  No  sabe  si  son  madrilenos  o  sevillanos ; 
pero  si  sabe  que  son  espanoles.  11.  <;Es  posible  que  hayan 
pasado  tanto  tiempo  en  la  playa?  12.  No  le  fue  posible 
viajar  en  automovil  porque  costaba  demasiado.  13,  Era 
posible  hacerlo.  14.  Era  preciso  que  cocinaramos  todos  los 
dias  una  comida  para  veinte  y  un  hombres.  15.  Me  fue 
preciso  preparar  la  comida  para  toda  la  familia. 

A  A.  1.  I  had  to  write  (use  construction  with  era  pre- 
ciso or  necesario)  two  exercises  because  I  had  not  written 
one  the  day  before.  2.  I  don't  know  whether  they  are 
studying  now;  but  generally  they  do  not  prepare  their 
work  on  time.  3.  Do  you  know  whether  they  were  here 
with  their  parents?  4.  It  was  impossible  for  them  to  say 
it.    5.  Do  they  know  yet  whether  they  had  good  marks? 

6.  Wasn't  it  possible  for  them  to  get  better  marks? 

7.  Couldn't  they  study  more  every  day?  8.  It  was  im- 
possible for  them  to  buy  the  ink  because  they  didn't  have 
much  time;  and  now  we  can't  write  our  exercises.  9.  It  is 
time  for  us  to  have  good  marks.  10.  It  was  time  that  they 
did  (hiciese)  their  work;  they  are  the  laziest  children  in 
the  class.  11.  Did  they  know  whether  the  Gonzalez  [es] 
would  be  here  tonight?  12.  It  wasn't  necessary  for  them 
to  work,  because  their  parents  were  rich.  13.  But  it  was 
a  pity  that  they  didn't  work. 


Sf  is  inserted  in  statements  to  make  them  more  emphatic.    Cf.  A,  8. 


112 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  XLVII 

1.  Dative  of  Taking  Away.   Verbs  meaning  to  take  away, 

buy,  ask,  etc.,  take  the  dative  of  the  person,  the  accusative 

of  the  thing. 

Nadie  se  lo  robo,  No  one  robbed  him  of  it. 
La  compraron  al  senor  X,  They  bought  it  from  Mr.  X. 
No  lo  pregunto  a  Maria,  sino  a  Juan,  He  didn't  ask  Mary  that, 
but  John. 

2.  Past  Anterior  (Secondary  Pluperfect), 
hablar,  to  speak 

hube  hablado,  I  had  spoken  hubimos  hablado,  we  had  spoken 

hubiste  hablado,  you  had  spoken  hubisteis  hablado,  you  had  spoken 

hubo  hablado,  he,  she,  it  had  hubieron  hablado,  they  had  spok- 
spoken;  you  had  spoken  en;  you  had  spoken 

beber,  to  drink  escribir,  to  write 

hube  bebido,  hube  escrito 

hubiste  bebido  hubiste  escrito 

etc.  etc. 

The  past  anterior  has  exactly  the  same  meaning  as  the 
pluperfect,  but  is  found  only  after  conjunctions  of  time, 
such  as  cuando,  when;  despues  (de)  que,  after;  luego  que, 
as  soon  as.  Even  here,  however,  the  ordinary  pluperfect 
or  even  the  preterite  may  be  used. 

Despues  de  que  hubo  (habia)  hablado,  partio,  After  he  had 
spoken,  he  left. 

VOCABULARY 

adelante,  on,  ahead  el  negociante,  business  man, 

el  abogado,  lawyer  mercliant 
asi  que,  and  so  los  negocios,  business 

bajo,  under,  beneath  olvidar,  to  forget 

cantar,  to  sing  partir,  to  leave,  to  depart 

el  derecho,  law  pedir  (i),  to  ask  for 

la  medicina,  medicine  pedir  prestado,  to  borrow 

el  medico,  doctor  quitar,  to  take  away 

robar,  to  rob,  to  steal 

A.  1.  el  mismo  alumno  2.  se  lo  pido  a  usted  3.  despues 
de  que  hubo  trabajado    4.  os  lo  robaron  a  vosotros    5.  te 


DATIVE  OF  TAKING  AWAY 


113 


las  robo  a  ti  6.  cuando  hubimos  estudiado  7.  me  lo  pre- 
guntaba  8.  se  lo  pidio  prestado  a  el  9.  la  nina  misma 
10.  cuando  hube  lavado  11.  Juan  mismo  12.  el  hombre 
mismo  13.  los  mismos  papeles  14.  me  las  tomaron  15.  te 
las  robaron  16.  os  lo  pidio  17.  se  lo  preguntamos  18.  nos 
los  quitaron   19.  ^se  lo  quito  a  usted? 

AA.  1.  lie  asked  me  for  it  2.  they  robbed  him  of  it 
3.  after  they  had  come-in  4.  after  coming-in  (after  they 
had  come-in)  5.  they  will  take  it  from  you  6.  he  is  asking 
you  for  them  7.  did  they  take  it  from  him  ?  8.  after  they 
had  eaten  9.  when  they  had  asked  him  for  them  10.  John 
himself  11.  after  I  had  left  12.  the  same  man  13.  the 
man  himself  14.  Mary  herself  15.  the  same  man  16.  the 
very  books  17.  they  had  robbed  him  of  them  18.  when 
they  had  departed  19.  the  same  children  20.  the  children 
themselves 

B.  1.  Despues  de  que  hubo  hablado,  tomo  su  sombrero 
y  partio.  2.  El  mismo  Juan  (That  very  John)  con  quien 
acabamos  de  hablar  estudia  medicina — pero  nunca  sera 
medico.  3.  Cuando  hubimos  comprado  el  pano,  visitamos 
a  mi  hermana.  4.  Robaron  mucho  hierro  a  aquel  nego- 
ciante,  asi  que  ahora  no  puede  seguir  adelante  en  su 
negocio.  5.  Se  lo  pedimos  a  nuestro  padre,  pero  el  no 
tenia  nada  de  eso.  6.  El  mismo  hombre  que  nos  dijo  eso 
antes,  ahora  no  dice  lo  mismo.  7.  Quiero  lo  mio  (note  the 
neuter  use  of  lo  to  denote  indefinite  meaning) — no  lo  tuyo. 
8.  Compro  el  piano  al  senor  X.  9.  Conjugas  los  mismos 
veinte  verbos  que  conjugaste  ayer;  pero  antes  de  manana 
los  olvidaras  otra  vez.  10.  A  mi  tambien  me  preguntaron 
si  habia  estudiado  la  leccion,  y  conteste  que  no.  '  11.  Estos 
lapices  son  mejores  que  los  de  Maria.  12.  Estos  mismos 
lapices  son  mejores  de  los  que  tiene  Maria.  13.  Se  los 
quite  a  Juan.  14.  Despues  de  que  hubo  tocado  el  piano, 
canto.  15.  ^Le  duele  el  mismo  diente?  16.  ^Que  juzga 
usted  de  un  hombre  que  roba  diner o  a  un  nino?  17.  Quiero 
sentar  al  nino  en  la  misma  silla  donde  estaba  antes.   18.  La 


114 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


senora  tomo  los  lapices  de  la  nina  (how  translated?)  y  se 
los  dio  al  hermano  de  Juan.  19.  La  senora  quito  los  lapices 
a  la  nina  (cf.  with  18). 

BB.  1.  No  one  robbed  the  merchant  of  anything ;  he  lost 
his  money.  2.  Did  yon  conjugate  the  same  verbs  as  those 
your  brother  was  conjugating  yesterday?  3.  These  very 
pens  are  the  ones  your  brother  lost.  4.  He  wants  to  seat 
the  child  at  the  table.  5.  Him  too  they  asked  whether  he 
liked  the  cloth ;  but  he  said,  No.  6.  After  we  had  studied 
the  lessons  hard  (mucho),  we  wrote  all  the  exercises. 
7.  Mary  herself  studied  all  the  lesson,  but  the  brother 
never  works.  8.  After  she  had  worked  a  long  time,  she  took 
her  hat  and  left.  9.  If  they  ask  their  father  for  the  money, 
he  will  not  give  it  to  them.  10.  Did  they  buy  the  table  and 
chairs  from  Mr.  S.  ?  11.  They  did  not  buy  them  for  Mr.  S. 
12.  After  they  bought  the  piano,  they  found  it  was  not  a 
good  one.  14.  Did  they  ask  him  too  for  the  money? 
15.  The  lady  took  the  books  from  her  children,  and  then 
they  wrote  the  exercises. 


LESSON  XLVIII 
REFLEXIVES  AND  RECIPROCALS 

Review  Lessons  XXI  and  XXXVIII. 

1.  Conjunctive  forms  (direct  and  indirect). 

me,  myself  nos,  ourselves 

te,  yourself  os,  yourselves 

se,  himself,  herself,  itself;  your-    se,  themselves;  yourselves 
self 

Disjunctive  forms. 

mi,  myself  nosotros,  -as,  ourselves 

ti,  yourself  vosotros,  -as,  yourselves 

si,  himself,  vourself,  itself;  your-  si,  themselves;  yourselves 
self 


REFLEXIVES  AND  RECIPROCALS  115 

Note  the  forms  conmigo,  contigo,  consigo  (Cf.  Lesson 
ZLII,  3). 

2.  Do  not  mistake  the  intensive  pronoun  for  the  re- 
flexive.   Cf .  the  English : 

I  myself  (intensive)  see  myself  (reflexive).  Yo  mismo 
me  veo. 

,  3.  The  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used  reflexively  or  re- 
ciprocally; the  disjunctive  only  reflexively. 

(a)  ,  Keflexively,  a  pronoun  denotes  that  the  subject 
acts  on  itself. 

Me  veo  en  el  espejo,  I  see  myself  in  the  glass. 

(b)  Reciprocally,  the  individuals  of  a  plural  subject 
(nosotros,  etc.)  act  on  one  another.  If  there  are  two  indi- 
viduals, we  say  in  English:  "We  write  each  other. ' 7  If 
there  are  more  than  two  individuals,  we  say:  "We  write 
one  another. ' ' 

Se  escriben  a  menudo,  They  write  to  each  other  (one  another) 
frequently. 

4.  To  prevent  a  reciprocal  verb  from  being  mistaken  for 
a  reflexive,  or  vice- versa  (cf.  the  translations  of  (a)  and 
(b)  above),  the  Spanish  often  adds  el  uno  (la  una,  etc.) 
al  otro  (a  la  otra).   The  article  may  be  omitted. 

Nos  escribimos  la  una  a  la  otra,  We  write  to  each  other. 

Distinguish  also : 

Se  escriben  el  uno  al  otro,  They  write  to  each  other. 
\  Se  escriben  unos  a  otros,  They  write  to  one  another. 

Note  that  some  verbs  require  the  preposition  de. 

Nos  acordamos  la  una  de  la  otra,  We  remember  each  other. 
Se  rien  uno  de  otro,  They  laugh  at  one  another. 

5.  Eeflexive  verbs  are  given  in  vocabularies  with  -se 
added  to  the  infinitive.  In  inflection,  however,  the  student 
must  use  the  proper  form  of  the  reflexive. 

peinarse,  to  comb  oneself 
me  peino,  I  comb  myself 


116 


SPANISH  GRAMMAS 


VOCABULARY 

aburrirse,  to  bore  oneself;  to       felicitarse,  to  congratulate  one- 
be  bored  self,  each  other 

acordarse  (ue)  de,  to  remind       holgarse  (ue),  to  be  idle,  to  have 
oneself  of,  to  remember  a  good  time 

afeitarse,  to  shave  oneself  lejos,  far 

a  menudo,  frequently,  often         mutuamente,  mutually,  each 

bafiarse,  to  bathe  oneself,  to  other,  one  another 

take  a  bath  ocupado,  -a,  busy 

convencerse,  to  convince  one-       ocuparse  de,  to  occupy  oneself 
self,  to  be  convinced  with 

decidirse,  to  decide  oneself,  to        preocuparse  de,  to  be  preoccu- 
make  up  one's  mind  pied  with 

dirigirse,  to  make  one*s  way       pues,  for;  well 

(to),  to  go  salvarse,  to  save  oneself;  to  run 

escaparse,  to  escape,  to  run  away  off 
el  espejo,  mirror,  looking  glass        sentarse  (ie),  to  seat  oneself,  to 

sit  down 

A.  1.  Xos  acordainos  una  de  otra  muybien:  pues.  siendo 
nirias,  habianios  estudiado  en  la  misnia  escuela.  2.  No  nos 
habianios  escrito  porque  no  habianios  tenido  rtiucho  tiempo 
para  eso.   3.  Xo  tiene  nada  consigo.  4.  Me  veo  en  el  espejo. 

5.  Xo  se  rien  unos  de  otros  porque  son  todos  muy  diligentes. 

6.  ^Xo  te  ves  en  este  espejo?  7.  Se  felicitan  mutuamente 
en  sus  cartas  porque  se  quieren  niucho.  8.  Ustedes  pueden 
felicitarse  porque  tienen  hijos  tan  buenos.  9.  <:Se  escriben 
muy  a  menudo?  10.  X'o ;  no  se  escriben  una  a  otra  casi 
nunca ;  y  riven  en  dos  ciudades  que  son  muy  lejos  una  de 
otra.  11.  Yo  me  veo  a  mi  mismo  en  el  agua,  pero  no  te 
veo  a  ti.  12.  Xo  tenian  nada  consigo.  13.  Xo  hablan  nunca 
de  si;  siempre  hablan  de  otros.  14.  <?No  se  acuerdan 
ustedes  uno  de  otro?  15.  Siendo  ninos.  ustedes  vivian  en 
la  misma  calle  donde  vivia  yo  tambien.  16.  Pero  como  no 
se  han  escrito  uno  a  otro,  ya  no  se  acuerdan  el  uno  del  otro. 

AA.  1.  Do  you  see  yourself  in  the  glass?  2.  Don't  they 
write  each  other  frequently?  3.  They  don't  write  each 
other  as  frequently  as  they  used  to  (write  to  each  other). 
4.  Can't  you  see  yourself  in  the  glass?  5.  We  remember 
each  other  very  well,  for  as  (=  being)  children  we  lived 
in  the  same  street.  6.  We  don't  laugh  freimos)  at  each 
other  ( cf.  A,  5).  for  he  is  too  diligent  and  I  am  as  diligent 


REFLEXIVES  AND  RECIPROCALS 


117 


as  I  can  be  (it).  7.  After  they  had  not  written  each  other, 
they  had  no  more  news  of  each  other.  8.  What  has  he 
with  him?  9.  I  see  you  in  the  glass,  but  I  can't  see  myself 
in  it.  10.  They  don't  live  in  the  same  city  now,  and  so 
they  write  each  other  frequently.  11.  Those  good  friends 
congratulate  each  other,  for  they  like  each  other  very  much. 
12.  They  aren't  talking  to  each  other  now,  for  they  are  too 
busy.  13.  We  don't  write  to  ourselves,  we  write  to  each 
other. 

LESSON  XLIX 

REFLEXIVES  AND  RECIPROCALS  {Concluded) 
Review  Lesson  XL VIII. 

1.  (a)  The  reflexive  as  used  in  Spanish  sometimes  cor- 
responds to  the  English. 

Me  veo  en  el  espejo,  I  see  myself  in  the  glass. 

Se  preocupa  de  sus  negocios,  He  busies  himself  with  his  affairs. 

(b)  In  some  cases,  the  reflexive  is  used  explicitly  in 
Spanish  where  it  is  only  implied  in  English. 

Me  visto,  I  dress  (myself). 

Se  lava,  he  is  washing  (himself). 

(c)  In  some  cases,  the  reflexive  meaning  is  not  obvious 
and  must  be  looked  for  in  the  original  meaning  of  the  verb. 

se  acuerda  de,  he  remembers  (recalls  to  himself) 
Se  sienta,  He  sits  down  (seats  himself). 

Se  desayuna,  He  has  breakfast  (breaks  to  himself  the  fast). 

(d)  In  some  cases,  there  is  no  plausible  accounting 
for  the  reflexive. 

ir,  to  go  irse,  to  go  off 

reir,  to  laugh  reirse  de,  to  laugh  at* 

salvarse,  to  run  off  escaparse,  to  run  away 

Se  lo  llevo,  He  carried  it  off  with  him. 

2.  In  Spanish,  the  reflexive  usually  takes  the  place  of 
the  English  passive. 


118 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


Se  aburre,  He  is  bored.    (He  bores  himself.) 
Aqul  se  habla  espanol,  Spanish  is  spoken  here. 

Cf .  also : 

Aqui  se  trabaja  mucho,  Much  work  is  done  here.    {Lit.,  Here  it 

works  itself  much.) 
Se  le  dijo  que  .  .  ,  He  was  told  that  .  .  . 

3.  Note  the  double  expressions  below: 

me  imagino,  se  me  imagina,  I  imagine 
me  figuro,  se  me  figura,  I  fancy,  imagine 
me  olvido  de,  se  me  olvida,  olvido,  I  forget 

Note  that  se  precedes  any  other  form  of  the  con- 
junctive pronoun. 

4.  Where  a  reflexive  is  used,  the  Spanish  often  has  a 
definite  article  for  the  English  possessive. 

Se  pone  el  sombrero,  He  puts  on  his  hat.    (To  himself  he  puts 
on  the  hat.) 

VOCABULARY 

antojarse  {impersonal) ,  to  figurarse,  to  imagine 

fancy,  to  have  a  whim  el  gusto,  taste 

calzar  (se),  to  put  on  (shoes)  imaginar,  to  imagine 

comerse,  to  eat  up  levantar,  to  raise,  to  lift; 

el  cuarto,  room  -se,  to  rise,  to  get  up 

desayunarse,1  to  have  breakfast  llevarse,  to  carry  off 

desnudar  (se),  to  undress  olvidar  (-se  de),  to  forget 

despertar  (ie),  to  wake  up  seguro,  -a,  sure,  certain 

{transitive) ;   -se,  to  siguiente,  following 

awaken  {intransitive)  el  traje,  suit  (of  clothes) 
etcetera,  et  cetera,  and  so  forth    tranquilo,  -a,  tranquil,  quiet, 

fabricar,  to  manufacture  calm 

A.  1.  se  dice  2.  se  pone  los  calcetines  3.  nos  vestimos 
4.  ^te  despertaste?  5.  se  escaparon  6.  se  fueron  7.  me 
olvide  de  eso  8.  me  acuerdo  9.  no  se  estudia  (it  is  not 
studied)  10.  se  me  figura  11.  me  imagino  12.  se  ven  a 
menudo  13.  se  hace  mucho  trabajo  14.  se  habla  ingles 
15.  se  les  antoja  16.  se  toca  mucho  el  piano  en  esta  escuela 


1  Distinguish  between  desayunarse,  to  have  breakfast  (first  meal  of  the  day — 
coffee  or  chocolate  and  a  roll)  and  almorzar,  to  have  lunch  (second  meal,  about 
ten  to  one  o'clock,  depending  upon  the  person  or  social  environment) .  The 
English  often  call  this  Spanish  meal  their  breakfast  because  it  is  the  first  hearty 
meal  of  the  day. 


REFLEXIVES  AND  RECIPROCALS  119 

17.  se  juega  muclio  18.  se  afeita  19.  nos  lavabamos  20.  me 
desayune  21.  me  acostare  22.  os  despertareis  23.  nos 
sentamos  24.  que  me  lave  25.  me  decidi  (por)  26.  que 
Vd.  se  vista  27.  se  huelga  28.  se  limpiaban  los  dientes 
29.  se  pasa  el  tiempo   30.  se  lavo 

AA.  1.  we  shall  go  to  bed  2.  French  is  spoken  3.  I 
was  told  (it  told  itself  to  me)  4.  they  dressed  5.  they  are 
putting  on  their  shoes  6.  you  imagine  7.  we  breakfasted 
8.  I  breakfast  9.  they  are  sitting  down  10.  that  we  woke 
up  11.  there  is  much  piano  playing  (plays  itself  much  the 
piano)  12.  you  fancy  13.  the  piano  is  played  much 
14.  we  woke  up  15.  we  forgot  it  16.  they  went  away 
17.  little  work  is  done  here  18.  he  went  off  19.  they  play 
much  in  (the)  school  20.  there  is  a  good  time  here  21.  he 
will  have  breakfast  22.  (the)  time  is  spent  23.  she  will 
forget  it  24.  he  imagines  25.  we  have  a  good  time  26.  he 
went  to  bed 

B.  1.  Cuanto  mas  la  nina  lava  los  vasos,  (tanto)  mas 
sucias  estan.  2.  Ahora  tiene  que  lavarse.  3.  <;No  te  lavaste 
ya?  4.  No  se  afeitaran  porque  no  tienen  tiempo.  5.  <;No  se 
acuerda  usted  de  cuando,  siendo  jovenes,  estudiabamos 
juntos  en  mi  cuarto?  6.  Aqui  puede  usted  estar  tranquilo 
porque  aqui  se  habla  espanol.  7.  Me  imagino  que  no  estu- 
diaran  las  lecciones  para  manana  porque  son  siempre  tan 
flojos.  8.  No  os  reis  de  ellos,  estoy  seguro.  9.  La  madre  le 
pone  el  sombrero  y  los  zapatos  al  nino,  y  el  se  escapa. 
10.  Cuando  me  despierto  temprano,  me  afeito,  me  lavo,  y 
me  desayuno.  11.  Tu  no  te  afeitas  porque  nunca  tienes 
tiempo  para  eso  en  la  manana.  12.  Nos  acostamos  tem- 
prano  porque  tuvimos  que  levantarnos  al  dia  siguiente  a 
las  seis  (at  six  o'clock).  13.  Aqui  se  aburre  uno  mucho 
porque  no  hay  nada  que  hacer.  14.  ^Que  se  fabrica  aqui? 
^Calzados?  15.  No  se  habla  de  nada  sino  de  sombreros,  de 
calzados,  de  trajes,  etcetera.  16.  Se  le  dijo  a  mi  hermano 
que  no  habia  clases  hoy.  17.  A  el  se  le  antoja  que  pueda 
hacer  todo  a  su  gusto.  18.  En  esta  escuela  se  estudia  mucho. 
1 9.  Nos  lo  llevamos. 


120 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


BB.  1.  Why  doesn't  the  mother  put  the  child's  shoes 
and  stockings  on  him?  2.  One  is  bored  very  much  here, 
because  there  is  nothing  to  do.  3.  Nothing  will  be  spoken 
of  except  (sino)  hats,  shoes,  dresses,  and  so  forth.  4.  She 
fancies  she  can  do  anything  to  her  liking  (taste).  5.  On 
the  next  day  they  went  to  bed  early  because  they  were 
very  tired.  6.  The  more  this  child  washes,  the  dirtier  he  is. 
7.  Spanish  is  spoken  here — but  we  can't  (sabemos)  speak 
it.  8.  The  children  must  wash — they  are  very  dirty.  9.  If 
you  don't  shave,  you  can't  go  with  me.  10.  They  imagine 
that  their  son  can  study  eight  hours  a  (por)  day.  11.  Will 
you  wash  the  dishes  today?  12.  What  is  manufactured 
here?  13.  They  are  putting  on  their  hats  already — they 
are  going  off  at  once.   14.  What  was  spoken  of  yesterday  ? 

15.  Nothing  is  said  of  that  and  so  it  is  done  many  times. 

16.  Have  you  forgotten  what  they  said  to  you?  17.  They 
ran  away,  and  we  didn't  find  them  again.  18.  You  aren't 
laughing  at  them,  I'm  sure.  19.  A  good  breakfast  can  be 
had  (it  breakfasts  itself  well).  20.  They  carried  it  off 
with  them. 


LESSON  L 

1.  Conjunctions  with  the  Indicative.  Common  conjunc- 
tions used  with  the  indicative  are : 

despues  (de)  que,  after  no  solamente  .  .  .  sino  que,  not 

antes  (de)  que,  before  only  .  .  .  but  also 

cuando,  when  porque,  because 

de  manera  que,  so  that  pues,  for 

(result  clause)  tanto  (noun)  como,  as  much  .  .  as 

luego  que,  as  soon  as  tan  (adj.  or  adv.)  como,  as  ...  as 

o  .  .  .  o,  either  ...  or 

No  lo  compro,  pues  no  tenia  dinero,  He  didn't  buy  it,  for  he  had 
no  money. 

2.  Conjunctions  with  the  Infinitive.  If  the  subject  of 
the  main  verb  and  that  of  the  subordinate  clause  are  the 
same,  de  may  usually  be  substituted  in  compound  conjunc- 
tions ending  in  que  and  the  infinitive  used  in  the  sub- 
ordinate clause. 


CONJUNCTIONS  WITH  THE  INDICATIVE 


121 


Despues  de  estudiar  la  leccion,  escribio  el  ejercicio,  After  study- 
ing the  lesson,  she  wrote  the  exercise. 

(a)  Some  prepositions  do  not  require  de. 

No  lo  compro  por  no  tener  dinero,  He  did  not  buy  it  because  he 
did  not  have  any  money. 

(b)  Para  before  the  infinitive  denotes  purpose. 

Pidio  el  dinero  para  comprar  un  piano,  He  asked  for  the  money 
in  order  to  buy  a  piano. 

But  verbs  of  motion  take  a,  except  that  para  may  be 
used  to  denote  very  strong  purpose. 

Vino  a  verme,  He  came  to  see  me. 

Vino  para  verme  a  mi,  He  came  in  order  to  see  me. 

3.  Infinitive  as  Noun.  An  infinitive  may  be  used  as  the 
subject  of  a  verb. 

(El)  no  estudiar  es  malo,  Not  studying  (Not  to  study)  is  bad. 
On  with  a  present  participle  form  in  English  is  ren- 
dered in  Spanish  by  al  (a  plus  el)  with  the  infinitive. 

Al  verme  se  fue,  On  seeing  me,  he  went  off. 

VOCABULARY 

la  cobardia,  cowardice,  act  of  mirar,  to  look  at 

cowardice  vino,  (he,  she,  it)  came;  you 

dejar  (de),  to  stop  (doing)  came 
el  desayuno,  breakfast 

A.  1.  al  escribirlo  2.  despues  de  3.  cuando  4.  despues 
de  5.  cuando  hubo  hablado  6.  al  comprarlos  7.  no  sola- 
mente  los  hombres,  sino  tambien  los  ninos  8.  tan  grande 
como  9.  despues  de  estudiar  10.  antes  de  hacer  11.  des- 
pues de  que  hubimos  12.  antes  de  que  estaba  13.  antes  de 
llegar  ellos  14.  no  solamente  estudio  sino  que  escribio 
15.  para  pedirlo  prestado  16.  despues  de  sentarse  17.  al 
despertarse   18.  para  comprar   19.  de  manera  que  fue 

AA.  1.  after  writing  it  2.  before  awakening  3.  in 
order  to  have  4.  on  doing  it  5.  not  only  did  he  look-at 
but  he  bought  it  6.  on  washing  them  7.  on  writing  it 
8.  as  lazy  as  9.  the  lazier  he  is,  the  less  he  works  10.  in 
order  to  be    11.  on  saying    12.  before  doing    13.  after  he 


122 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


spoke  14.  as  soon  as  lie  had  written  15.  they  didn't  study 
because  they  did  not  have  16.  so  that  she  took  17.  in 
order  to  look  for 

B.  1.  No  escribio  los  ejercicios  despues  de  estudiar  la 
leccion  porqne  estaba  demasiado  cansado.  2.  Cuanto  mas 
miraba  el  piano,  tanto  mas  lo  deseaba.  3.  No  lo  compro 
pues  no  le  gustaba.  4.  Para  comprar  una  casa,  hay  que 
tener  mucho  dinero.  5.  No  se  compra  una  casa  con  poco 
dinero,  no  solamente  en  esa  sino  tambien  en  esta.  6.  Al 
decir  esto,  se  puso  (put  on)  el  sombrero  y  salio  del  cuarto. 
7.  Despues  de  hacer  una  carrera  en  coche  por  la  ciudad, 
nos  dijo  que  quedaria  cuatro  dias  mas.  8.  Cuanto  mas 
compraba,  tanto  mas  deseaba  comprar.  9.  Pide  el  libro  a 
su  hermano  por  tener  el  suyo  en  casa.  10.  Jugar  demasiado 
es  peor  que  estudiar  poco.  11.  No  podemos  examinar  el 
pano  ahora  pues  no  tenemos  mucho  tiempo.  12.  Despues 
de  escribir  los  ejercicios,  se  los  pasa  los  cuadernos  a  Juan 
(are  se  los  necessary?) .  13.  Despues  de  estudiar  usted  mejor. 
tendra  mejores  notas.  14.  El  no  decir  esto  seria  una 
cobardia,  si  lo  que  usted  dice  es  la  verdad.  15.  Sintieron 
que  sus  primos  no  se  lo  ensenasen  despues  de  que  lo  hu- 
bieron  hallado.  17.  El  mismo  hombre  que  nos  lo  dijo  antes 
al  preguntarselo  nosotros,  ahora  no  dice  la  misma  cosa. 
18.  Los  lapices  no  son  tan  grandes  como  nos  dijo  su  her- 
mano.  19.  Contesta  las  cartas. 

BB.  1.  After  seeing  us,  they  took  their  books  and 
studied  again.  2.  On  looking  through  the  window,  we  saw 
them  on  the  path.  3.  These  books  are  not  as  large  as  those 
you  showed  us  yesterday,  but  they  are  better.  4.  After 
they  had  bought  the  piano,  they  did  not  like  it.  5.  In 
order  to  buy  the  piano,  he  had  to  ask  his  uncle  for  more 
money.  6.  Without  saying  anything  (nothing),  he  studied 
three  hours  in  his  room,  and  then  he  went  to  bed.  7.  To 
study  too  little  is  as  bad  as  studying  too  much.  8.  When 
they  had  eaten,  they  washed  the  dishes  and  then  went  to 
bed.  9.  He  didn't  buy  the  house  because  he  did  not  like  it. 
10.  The  same  children  who  told  us  that,  now  say  that  it 


OETHOGKAPHIC  CHANGES 


123 


isn't  the  truth.  11.  They  were  sorry  we  didn't  give  it  to 
them  before  returning  home  (a  casa).  12.  After  he  said 
that,  he  put  on  (see  B,  6)  his  hat  and  left  the  house  without 
saying  anything  more.  13.  To  play  the  piano  so  much  is 
better  than  doing  nothing.  14.  If  you  don't  say  that,  it 
would  be  an  act  of  cowardice.  15.  The  more  pencils  he 
bought,  the  more  he  lost.  16.  In  order  to  play  the  piano, 
one  must  work  hard.  17.  Before  taking  a  ride  around  the 
city,  we  must  look  for  a  carriage.  18.  Did  you  find  the 
child  yesterday  before  you  reached  home?  19.  They  not 
only  studied  the  grammar,  but  they  also  wrote  the  exercise. 
20.  It  was  necessary  for  them  to  do  it  in  order  to  arrive 
there. 


LESSON  LI 
ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES 

Keview  Lessons  I  and  XII,  1  (See  Appendix  E) 

1.  The  consonant  sound  with  which  a  verb  stem  ends 
(most  verb  stems  end  in  a  consonant)  must  be  maintained 
throughout  the  verb.  Now,  as  the  endings  of  verbs  start 
with  the  vowels  -a,  -e,  -i,  or  -o,  it  is  necessary  sometimes 
to  make  certain  changes  in  spelling  (called  orthographic 
changes)  in  order  to  preserve  the  original  consonant  sound. 
For  instance,  as  c  before  a  is  pronounced  like  k,  sacar,  in 
order  to  indicate  the  k  sound  before  the  subjunctive  end- 
ings of  the  present  (which  begin  with  -e),  must  change 
thej  c  to  qu. 

Some  of  the  common  changes  work  according  to  the 
scheme  below. 

(a)  -car  verbs  change  c-  to  qu-  before  -e. 
sacar,  to  pull  out  (stem  sac-,  sound  k) 

preterite  indicative:  saque 
present  subjunctive: 

saque,  saques,  saque;  saquemos,  saqueis,  saquen 


124 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


(b)  -quir  verbs  change  qu-  to  c-  before  -o  or  -a. 
delinquir,  to  be  delinquent  (stem  delinqu-,  sound  k) 

present  indicative:  delinco 
present  subjunctive: 

delinca,  delincas,  delinca;  delincamos,  delincais,  delincan 

(c)  -gar  verbs  change  g-  to  gu-  before  -e. 

llegar,  to  arrive  (stem  lleg-,  sound  g  as  in  good) 

preterite  indicative:  llegue 
present  subjunctive: 

llegue,  llegues,  llegue;  lleguemos,  llegueis,  lleguen 

(d)  -ger  and  -gir  verbs  change  g-  to  j-  before  -o  or  -a. 
coger,  to  catch  (stem  cog-,  j  sound  in  back  of  throat) 

present  indicative:   CO  jo 
present  subjunctive: 

coja,  cojas,  coja;  cojamos,  cojais,  cojan 

elegir,  to  choose,  to  elect  (stem  R-ch.  Ill,  j  sound  in 
hack  of  throat) 

present  indicative:  elijo 
present  subjunctive: 

elija,  elijas,  elija;  elijamos,  elijais,  elijan 

(e)  -guar  verbs  put  a  diaeresis  on  the  ii-  before  -e. 
averiguar,  to  ascertain  (stem  averigu-,  write  -ii-  be- 
fore -e) 

preterite  indicative:  averigiie 
present  subjunctive: 

averigiie,  averigiies,  averigiie;  averigiiemos,  averigiieis, 
averigiien 

(f )  -guir  verbs  change  -gu  to  -g. 

distinguir,  to  distinguish  (stem  distingu,  drop  -u-  be- 
fore -o  or  -a) 

present  indicative:  distingo 
present  subjunctive: 

distinga,  distingas,  distinga;   distingamos,  distingais, 
distingan 

(g)  -jar  verbs  keep  j-  always  (the  change  to  g-  is  not  made) . 
dejar.  to  leave  (stem  dej-  always) 

preterite  indicative:   deje,  etc. 


ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES 


125 


Note  that  (a),  (c),  and  (e)  change  in  the  same  seven 
forms;  and  that  (b),  (d),  and  (f)  change  in  the  same 
rseven  forms. 

Verbs  in  -jer  and  -jir,  e.  g.,  tejer,  to  weave,  and  crujir, 
to  creak,  also  keep  the  j-  unchanged. 

2.  Verbs  of  the  second  or  third  conjugation  with  the 
stem  ending  in  -11  or  -n  drop  the  -i-  of  the  third  person 
singular  and  plural  preterite  indicative,  and  all  the  past 
subjunctives.  The  fact  that  11  and  n  are  pronounced  as 
though  the  -i-  were  present  anyway  accounts  for  the 
dropping  of  the  written  -i-. 

bullir,  to  boil  (stem  bull-) 

preterite  indicative: 

bulli,  bulliste,  bullo;  ballimos,  bullisteis,  bulleron 

past  subjunctive: 

bullese,  bulleses,  bullese;  bullesemos,  bulleseis,  bullesen 
bullera,  bulleras,  bullera;  bulleramos,  bullerais,  bulleran 

tenir,  to  stain,  to  dye  (stem  R-ch.  Ill) 

preterite  indicative: 

teni,  teniste,  tino;  tenimos,  tenisteis,  tineron 

past  subjunctive: 

tinese,  tineses,  tinese;  tinesemos,  tineseis,  tinesen 
tinera,  tineras,  tinera;  tineramos,  tinerais,  tifieran 

The  same  change  also  occurs  in  the  present  participle. 

bullendo  tinendo 


A.  1.  toque  2.  tejer  3.  que  dejen  4.  que  lleguemos 
5.  que  crujan  6.  que  bullese  7.  pague  8.  dirijo  9.  que 
cruja  10.  aloje  11.  gruneron  12.  que  dirijamos  13.  que 
averigiieis  14.  bullo  15.  que  mengiien  16.  que  brunese- 
mos    17.  raje    18.  que  recemos    19.  averigiie    20.  que 


VOCABULARY 


alojar,  to  lodge,  to  dwell 


es  menester,  it  is  necessary 
pagar,  to  pay 
rajar,  to  split,  to  cleave 
rezar,  to  pray 

rogar  (ue),  to  beg,  to  ask,  to 
request 

sacar,  to  pull  out,  to  draw  out 
venir,  to  come 


el  animal,  animal 


(la)  arma,  arm,  weapon 

brincar,  to  jump,  to  skip 
brunir,  to  burnish,  to  polish 
entregar,  to  hand  over,  to 


give  over 
gruiiir,  to  grunt 


126 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


paguen  21.  que  mengiien  22.  distingo  23.  gruneron 
24.  que  delinca  25.  pague  26.  que  rueguen  27.  que  ruegue 
28.  que  juguemos   29.  aloje 

AA.  1.  it  boiled  2.  they  offended  3.  that  it  creaks 
4.  I  take  5.  that  they  distinguish  6.  they  burnished  7.  I 
lodged  8.  that  he  ascertain  9.  I  prayed  10.  that  we  direct 
11.  I  am  directing  12.  that  they  offend  13.  I  played 
14.  that  it  is  lacking  15.  I  offend  16.  that  it  creaks  17.  I 
paid  18. 1  have  paid  19.  that  we  pay  20.  that  you  (intimate 
singular)  pay  21.  that  he  pay  22.  I  arrived  23.  I  shall 
arrive  24.  they  boiled  25.  that  we  distinguish  26.  that 
we  arrive   27.  I  asked  (use  form  of  rogar) 

B.    1.  Gruneron  los  animales  y  el  nino  se  fue  corriendo. 

2.  Lo  cogi  por  el  brazo  y  entonces  me  dijo  la  verdad. 

3.  Saque  un  poco  de  dinero  de  mi  bolsillo  y  se  lo  entregue. 

4.  Crujio  la  puerta  cuando  entramos  en  el  cuarto.  5.  Pague 
diez  pesos  por  el  pano,  pero  despues  no  me  gusto.  6.  Ave- 
rigiie  que  lo  que  il  dijo  era  la  verdad.  7.  Es  preciso  que 
recen  todos  los  dias.  8.  Deje  la  escuela  antes  de  escribir 
los  ejercicios.  9.  Es  preciso  que  toques  el  piano  todos  los 
dias  antes  de  venir  de  la  escuela.  10.  Distingo  entre  los 
alumnos  diligentes  y  los  flojos;  estos  tienen  notas  muy 
malas,  aquellos  las  tienen  muy  buenas.  11.  Es  preciso  que 
alojemos  aqui  porque  no  hay  otra  casa  en  el  camino.  12.  Es 
tiempo  que  usted  me  entregue  la  carta  que  tiene  para  mi. 
13.  Bruneron  sus  armas.  14.  A  los  quince  anos  no  tocaba 
todavia  el  piano. 

BB.  1.  <;Es  preciso  que  la  puerta  cruja  cuando  entras 
en  el  cuarto?  2.  No  distingo  entre  los  alumnos  grandes  y 
los  pequenos,  sino  entre  los  flojos  y  los  diligentes.  3.  No 
es  preciso  que  paguemos  por  la  comida  ahora.  4.  Lo  cogi 
por  el  brazo  y  le  tenia  (held  him)  hasta  no  tener  mas 
fuerzas.  5.  El  soldado  brunia  sus  armas.  6.  ^Fue  menester 
que  las  brunese?  7.  Es  necesario  que  los  ninos  recen  todos 
los  dias.  8.  Nos  dejo  alia,  y  entro  en  su  cuarto,  donde  vol- 
vio  a  estudiar.  9.  Toque  el  piano.  10.  Aloje  en  una  casa  de 
la  calle  X.,  la  mas  grande  de  la  ciudad.    11.  Es  preciso 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  RADICAL- CHANGING  VERBS  127 


que  averigiiemos  la  verdad  de  lo  que  el  dijo.  12.  Es  tiempo 
que  dejemos  todo  eso.  13.  Es  tiempo  de  que  lleguemos  si 
hemos  de  comer  con  ellos  hoy.  14.  Es  menester  que  ave- 
rigiieis  la  verdad. 

BBB.  1.  Was  it  necessary  for  the  door  to  creak  when 
they  went  out  ?  2.  Did  he  have  to  leave  the  school  when  he 
was  only  sixteen  (years)  ?  3.  It  was  time  that  you  left  them 
there.  4.  We  must  distinguish  between  the  large  and  the 
little  chilciren. '  5.  Why  did  the  soldiers  have  to  burnish 
their  arms?  6.  That  day  I  played  the  piano,  because  my 
brother  was  ill  and  could  not  play  it  himself.  7.  I  took 
the  money  from  my  pocket  and  paid  him.  8.  I  ascertained 
the  truth.  9.  It  was  necessary  for  them  to  lodge  there,  for 
they  could  not  go  to  your  town  the  same  day.  10.  He  left 
the  child  with  his  brother,  and  went  off.  11.  It  is  necessary 
for  you  to  play  the  piano  today,  for  John's  brother  will 
not  be  here. 


LESSON  LII 
SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  RADICAL-CHANGING  VERBS 

Eeview  Lessons  XXXV  and  XXXVI. 

1.  In  Class  I,  Radical-changing  verbs  change  in  the  sub- 
junctive all  the  singular  and  the  third  plural  of  the  pres- 
ent (just  as  in  the  indicative). 

volver,  to  return  encender,  to  kindle 

(stem  R-ch.  I)  (stem  R-ch.  I) 

vuelva  volvamos  encienda  encendamos 

vuelvas  volvais  enciendas  encendais 

vuelva  vuelvan  encienda  enciendan 

2.  In  Class  II,  Radical-changing  verbs  change  (a)  in  the 
present  subjunctive  the  same  forms  as  in  the  indicative 
(-o-  to  -ue-  and  -e-  to  -ie-)  ;  and 

(b)  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  present 


128 


SPANISH  GEAMMAE 


subjunctive,  the  present  participle,  and  all  the  past  sub- 
junctives (-0-  to  -u-  and  -e-  to  -i-). 

sentir,  to  feel,  to  be  sorry  (stem  R-ch.  II) 


present 

past 

present  participle 

sienta 

sintiese 

sintiera 

sientas 

sintieses 

sintieras 

sienta 

sintiese 

sintiera 

sintiendo 

sintamos 

sintiesemos 

sintieramos 

sintais 

sintieseis 

sintierais 

♦ 

sientan 

sintiesen 

sintieran 

morir,  to 

die  (stem  F- 

oh.  II) 

muera 

muriese 

muriera 

muriendo 

mueras 

murieses 

murieras 

muera 

muriese 

muriera 

muramos 

muriesemos 

murieramos 

murais 

murieseis 

murierais 

mueran 

muriesen 

murieran 

3.  Class  III  has  only  the  change  e  to  i.  This  change  is 
found  in  every  case  where  either  change  occurs  in  Class  II 
above. 


repetir,  to  repeat  (stem  R-ch.  Ill) 


repita 

etc. 


repitiese 

etc. 


repitiera 

etc. 


repitiendo 


4.  hacer,  past  subjunctive 


hiciese 

hicieses 

hiciese 

hiciesemos 

hicieseis 

hiciesen 


hiciera 

hicieras 

hiciera 

hicieramos 

hicierais 

hicieran 


VOCABULARY 


despedirse  (i)  de,  to  take  leave  la  pregunta,  question 

of  pronto,  soon,  quickly 

durante,  during  propio,  -a,  own 

equivocarse,  to  be  mistaken  romper,  to  break 

A.  Conjugate  the  present  and  past  subjunctives  and  give 
the  present  participle  of :  cerrar  pedir  despedirse  contar 
volver  sentir  sentarse  dormir  morir  vestirse  encender 


SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  RADICAL-CHANGING  VERBS  129 

AA.  1.  que  pidiera  2.  que  cerremos  3.  que  nos  pidan 
4.  que  pidiesemos  5.  que  se  acostasen  6.  que  nos  depida- 
mos  7.  nos  despedimos  8.  que  me  siente  (what  is  the  infini- 
tive?) 9.  que  sienta  (what  is  the  infinitive?  10.  que  sin- 
tamos  11.  que  nos  sentemos  12.  que  me  vista  13.  que 
volvamos  14.  que  volvieramos  15.  que  volviesemos  16.  que 
perdamos  17.  que  repitamos  18.  que  repitan  19.  que 
mienta  20.  que  mintamos  21.  que  llueva  22.  que  cerrase- 
mos  23.  que  cerraran  24.  que  impidiera  25.  que  impida 
26.  que  cfonfiese   27.  que  tiemblen 

AAA.  1.  that  he  should  shut  2.  that  we  dressed  3.  that 
they  were  sorry  4.  that  I  return  5.  that  they  returned 
6.  that  they  return  7.  that  it  was  raining  8.  that  we 
asked-for  9.  they  took  leave  10.  that  it  is  raining  11.  that 
he  is  dressing  12.  that  we  are  counting  13.  that  we  slept 
14.  that  he  is  sleeping  15.  that  we  are  sleeping  16.  that 
he  lies  17.  that  he  had  lied  18.  that  you  lied  19.  that 
you  are  lying  20.  that  they  have  repeated  21.  that  I  am 
repeating  22.  that  she  seated  the  child  near  the  table 
23.  that  it  is  not  snowing  24.  that  it  did  not  snow  25.  that 
he  confessed  26.  that  we  prevented 

B.  1.  Bs  lastima  que  tiemblen  de  frio.  2.  Es  tiempo  de 
que  nos  despidamos  si  hemos  de  llegar  a  tiempo.  3.  Es 
preciso  que  la  hermana  llegue  temprano.  4.  Sienten  mucho 
que  nosotros  no  hayamos  tocado  el  piano.  5.  Fue  preciso 
que  la  madre  vistiese  muy  bien  a  los  ninos,  pero  ellos  ya 
estaban  muy  sucios.  7.  (jFue  necesario  que  los  ninos  con- 
testasen  al  hombre?  8.  Si  lloviese,  estudiariamos  en  casa 
todo  el  dia.  9.  Si  tu  me  lo  hubiese  pedido,  te  lo  hubiera 
entregado.  10.  No  es  necesario  que  vuelvas  a  comer;  ya 
has  comido  demasiado.  11.  Dudo  que  volviesen  a  decirlo 
al  profesor.  12.  Si  no  durmiera  durante  el  dia,  no  traba- 
jaria  en  la  tarde.  13.  Es  posible  que  los  ninos  no  la  quieran ; 
sin  embargo,  es  su  propia  tia.  14.  <;No  fue  posible  que 
repitieran  mal  el  mismo  trabajo?  15.  Dudamos  mucho  que 
hubiera  por  que  volver  a  estudiarlo.  16.  Es  posible  que 
5 


130 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


pueda  derretir  el  hielo  en  un  vaso,  pero  ahora  no  esta 
derritiendolo. 

BB.  1.  It  is  possible  that  he  did  not  ask  for  it,  but  I 
do  not  remember  that.  2.  You  doubt  that  we  asked  for  it. 
3.  If  he  had  asked  me,  I  should  have  answered  him.  4.  We 
doubt  that  they  will  do  it  again.  5.  It  was  a  pity  that 
they  dressed  so  early.  6.  We  are  sorry  that  you  are  trem- 
bling so  much  with  cold,  but  it  is  very  cold  in  this  room — 
it  is  necessary  to  shut  the  windows.  7.  If  he  wanted  to 
melt  the  ice  in  the  glass,  he  would  break  it  first.  8.  We 
doubt  that  the  pupils  compete  with  each  other,  because 
they  are  brothers.  9.  If  we  did  not  sleep  during  the  day, 
we  should  not  sleep  during  the  night  either.  10.  It  is  neces- 
sary for  us  to  eat  again  because  we  are  hungry.  11.  It  is 
a  pity  that  they  did  not  ask  for  it  because  he  would  have 
given  {use  entregar  in  correct  form)  it  to  them.  12.  It  is 
time  that  you  took  leave.  13.  It  was  time  that  they 
took  leave.  14.  I  am  very  sorry  that  we  did  not  have 
breakfast  before  leaving.  15.  Is  it  possible  that  the  chil- 
dren don 't  like  their  own  uncle  ? 


LESSON  LIII 

SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES 

Review  Appendix  C. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  adverbial  clauses  (clauses 
introduced  by  when,  where,  so  that,  although,  etc.)  when 
they  are  indefinite  in  sense.  (Cf.  the  English:  "He 
wanted  to  finish  it  before  they  arrived."  The  time  of 
arriving  is  still  uncertain.  "I  finished  it  just  before  they 
arrived."  The  time  they  arrived  is  a  known  fact;  hence 
the  indicative  is  used  here.) 

2.  Some  of  the  commonest  conjunctions  that  may  intro- 
duce the  subjunctive  in  adverbial  clauses  are : 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES 


131 


a  fin  (de)  que,  in  order  that 

a  menos  que,  unless 

antes  que,  before 

a  pesar  de  que,  in  spite  of  the 

fact  that 
aunque,  although 
cuando,  when 
dado  que,  considering 
de  manera  que,  so  that  (purpose) 
de  modo  que,  so  that  (purpose) 


despues  (de)  que,  after 

en  caso  (de)  que,  in  case 

hasta  que,  until 

luego  que,  as  soon  as 

no  sea  que,  unless 

para  que,  in  order  that 

por  (adjective)  que,  however  .  .  . 

siempre  que,  whenever;  provided 

sin  que,  without 


3.  If  £he  subject  of  the  main  verb  and  the  subject  of  the 
subordinate  clause  are  identical,  substitute  de  for  que  (this 
can  be  done  with  most  compound  conjunctions;  but  note 
that  hasta,  para,  and  por  are  used  without  de)  and  put 
the  subordinate  verb  in  the  infinitive.  This  construction 
is  preferred. 

Usted  estudiara  antes  que  yo  escriba,  You  will  study  before  I 
write. 

Yo  estudiare  antes  de  escribir,  I  shall  study  before  writing. 

A.  1.  Vivira  con  su  padre  hasta  que  compre  su  propia 
casa.  2.  Vivira  en  casa  de  su  padre  hasta  comprar  su 
propria  casa.  3.  Estudian  tanto  como  su  hermana  porque 
son  muy  diligentes.  4.  Estudian  mas  que  su  hermana  para 
que  ella  no  tenga  mejores  notas  que  ellos.  5.  Por  dificiles 
que  sean  las  lecciones,  el  las  aprende.  6.  Sin  que  yo  juzgue 
mal  de  el,  puedo  decir  que  nadie  le  quiere  a  el.  7.  En 
caso  de  que  no  me  muestre  como  trabaja,  no  comprare  las 
plumas  para  el.  8.  Aunque  los  rubies  que  me  ensene  sean 
muy  caros,  los  comprare  si  me  gustan.  9.  Antes  de  que  lo 
impidieramos,  se  escapo.  10.  A  pesar  de  que  tengan  mucho 
que  hacer,  estaran  temprano  en  casa.  11.  He  per  dido  mi 
sombrero,  de  manera  que  tengo  {result  clause,  hence  indica- 
tive) que  comprar  otro.  12.  Preparo  la  comida  de  manera 
que  nosotros  tuvieramos  que  comer  con  el.  13.  Es  imposi- 
ble  que  viajemos  todo  el  tiempo  hasta  que  volvamos  a  la 
escuela.  14.  Nos  es  imposible  viajar  todo  el  tiempo  hasta 
volver  a  la  escuela.  15.  No  fue  necesario  tocar  el  piano. 
16.  En  caso  de  que  no  nos  (from  us)  compre  el  piano,  lo 
venderemos  a  su  tio.    17.  Aunque  no  quieran  decirme  la 


132 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


verdad,  encontrare  quien  me  la  diga  (someone  to  tell  me  it) . 
18.  Siempre  que  se  acuerden  de  ello,  se  escriben  la  una  a 
la  otra. 

AA.    1.  We  shall  work  until  we  finish  this  lesson. 

2.  However  large  he  may  be,  a  big  man  is  not  always  strong. 

3.  Although  we  may  judge  ill  of  him,  this  is  sure — he  is  a 
good  student.  4.  Without  their  having  to  study  much 
(Without  that  they  have  to  study  much),  they  always 
have  good  marks.  5.  As  soon  as  they  return  to  the  house, 
they  will  not  want  (de&earan)  to  study.  6.  Unless  she 
prepares  (the)  dinner,  she  will  not  want  to  eat  it.  7.  We 
shall  not  write  again  until  you  finish  doing  that.  8.  I 
shall  buy  the  piano  for  him  in  order  that  he  may  play  it 
in  his  own  house.  9.  We  have  studied  well  in  order  that 
we  may  have  good  marks.  10.  We  study  hard  so  that  we 
may  have  very  good  marks.  11.  I  shall  have  to  play  the 
piano  until  they  wish  to  do  it.  12.  Whenever  he  wants  to 
play,  he  calls  the  other  little  children  in  his  house.  13.  We 
played  until  our  parents  entered  the  room.  14.  In  case 
they  wish  to  see  them,  we  shall  go  away  (use  form  of  irse). 
15.  In  spite  of  the  fact  that  he  studied  all  night,  he  did 
not  learn  his  lessons  well.  16.  We  wish  to  prepare  the 
meal  before  we  eat  because  they  do  not  feel  wyell  and  can't 
cook.  17.  I  shall  drink  the  coffee  unless  it  is  bad,  for  I  like 
coffee.  18.  In  case  they  buy  that  house  from  their  uncle, 
he  will  ask  them  eighty-five  hundred  dollars  for  it. 


LESSON  LIV 

Review  Appendix  C. 

1.  Subjunctive  in  Main  Clauses.  The  subjunctive  is 
used  in  independent  clauses  but  rarely.  But  cf.  the  ex- 
amples below: 

jViva  Chile!    Hurrah  for  Chile!     {lit,,  Long-live  Chile!) 
Quisiera  hacerlo,  I  should  like  to  do  it. 
i Quien  supiera  escribir!    If  I  could  only  write! 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  MAIN"  CLAUSES 


133 


In  such  cases,  the  subjunctive  may  be  understood  as 
depending  on  some  unexpressed  verb. 

2.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  in  the  first  person  plural 
(  without  being  introduced  by  que)  and  in  the  third  person 
singular  or  plural  (with  or  without  que)  to  express  a  wish. 
Estudiemos  ahora,  Let  us  study  now. 

(Que)  estudien  ahora  si  quieren,  Let  them  study  now  if  they 


Note:  The  first  person  plural  often  takes  the  form 
vamos  a  plus  the  infinitive. 


If  the  third  person  (singular  or  plural)  has  an  object 
pronoun,  the  pronoun  precedes  the  verb  if  que  is  used  or 
if  the  verb  is  negative ;  if  que  is  not  used  and  the  verb  is 
affirmative,  the  pronoun  follows. 

Que  lo  estudien  si  quieren,  Let  them  study  it  if  they  wish. 
Que  no  lo  estudien  si  no  quieren,  They  needn't  study  it  if  they 


Estudienlo  si  quieren,  Let  them  study  it  if  they  want  to. 

In  the  first  person  plural,  when  a  subjunctive  is  affirma- 
tive, the  pronoun  object  (1)  follows  and  is  joined  to  the 
verb;  and  (2)  when  that  pronoun  is  reflexive  nos,  the 
verb  form  drops  final  -s. 

Escribamoslo,  Let  us  write  it. 

Sentemonos,  Let  us  sit  down  (for  sentemos  plus  nos). 

But 

No  nos  sentemos,  Let  us  not  sit  down. 

3.  Subjunctive  in  Adjective  Clauses.  The  subjunctive 
is  used  in  adjective  clauses  which  refer  to  a  noun  regarded 
as  not  yet  definitely  known.  (Cf.  the  English:  "I  am 
looking  for  a  man  who  can  do  this  work,"  and  "I  am 
looking  for  the  man  who  did  this  work.") 

Busco  al  hombre  que  lo  hizo,  I  am  looking  for  the  man  who  did  it. 

But 

Busco  un  hombre  que  pueda  hacerlo,  I  am  looking  for  a  man 


wish. 


Let  us  study  now. 


don't  want  to. 


who  can  do  it. 


134 


SPANISH  GEAMMAR 


Es  el  mejor  alumno  que  haya  en  el  mundo,  He  is  the  best  stu- 
dent in  the  world  (subjunctive  because  the 
statement  is  not  literally  true). 

VOCABULARY 

la  Argentina,  Argentina  intitularse,  to  be  called,  to  be 

caro,  -a,  dear,  expensive  entitled 

gritar,  to  shout,  to  call  out  marcharse,  to  march  off,  to  go 

gordo,  -a,  stout  off 

hermoso,  -a,  beautiful,  hand-  el  mundo,  world;  todo  el  mundo, 

some  everybody 

hizo,  (he,  she,  it)  did,  made;  el  Peru,  Peru  {use  definite  article 

you  did,  made  in  Spanish) 

interesante,  interesting  unico,  -a,  only 

A.  1.  quisieramos  estar  2.  que  compren  3.  tin  nino 
que  prepare  4.  vendamos  5.  vamos  a  vender  6.  no  nos 
preocupemos  mas  7.  una  mujer  que  toca  el  piano  8.  la 
mejor  casa  que  hay  en  la  calle  9.  que  pida  10.  el  nino 
mas  flojo  que  haya  en  el  mundo  11.  la  alumna  que  toque 
el  piano  12.  han  hallado  al  hombre  que  lo  escribio  13.  el 
hombre  que  vive  aqui  14.  comamos  15.  que  laven 
16.  |  viva  Espana!  17.  quisiera  verla  18.  buscamos  una 
nina  que  escriba  bien  19.  que  se  sienten  20.  afeitemonos 
21.  no  nos  lavemos  22.  vamos  a  lavarnos  23.  que  lo  tenga 
24.  que  no  lo  tenga  25.  tengalo 

AA.  1.  let  us  remain  2.  I  wish  I  were  there  3.  I 
wish  we  were  there  4.  I  wish  I  were  there  (can  the  infini- 
tive he  used?)  5.  let  us  not  shave  6.  let  him  cook 
7.  hurrah  for  Argentina!  8.  hurrah  for  Peru!  9.  let  him 
shave  10.  we  should  like  to  study  11.  let  us  bathe  12.  a 
man  who  wrote  13.  we  want  a  girl  who  cooks  well  14.  he 
is  the  only  Englishman  who  has  a  house  in  this  street 
15.  let  us  write  to  each  other  (express  in  two  ways)  16.  let 
us  write  to  one  another  (express  in  two  ways) 

B.  1.  Todos  los  hombres  gritaron:  [Viva  Espana! 
2.  jViva  el  Key!  3.  Ya  esta  caliente  la  comida;  coma- 
mosla.  4.  Queremos  leer  unos  libros  que  sean  muy  in- 
teresantes.  5.  No  nos  gustan  los  alumnos  cuyas  lecciones 
cstan  muy  mal  preparadas.  6.  fistos  son  los  unicos  mucha- 
chos  en  esta  jclase.    7.  Quisiera  ser  mas  flaco;  me  parece 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  NOUN  CLAUSES 


135 


que  soy  demasiado  gordo.  8.  Levantemonos  ahora,  y  afeite- 
monos,  porque  tenemos  muchas  cosas  que  hacer  antes  de 
irnos.  9.  Deseo  tener  un  hombre  que  me  ensene  como  se 
hizo  este  trabajo.  11.  Quisiera  leer  esa  poesia  hermosa 
que  se  intitula:  "jQuien  supiera  escribir!"  12.  Quede- 
monos  aqui  hasta  que  su  hermano  vuelva;  si  no,  no  le 
encontraremos  despues.  14.  Buscamos  al  hombre  que  vive 
en  esta  casa.  15.  Juan  es  el  mejor  hombre  que  haya  vivido 
en  esta  ciudad. 

BB.  1.  I  should  like  to  call  with  the  others:  Hurrah 
for  the  King!  but  I  don't  like  (the)  kings.  2.  Can  you 
show  me  a  man  who  cooks  so  well  that  everyone  likes  what 
he  prepares?  3.  His  mother  cooks  well.  4.  Yes,  but  there 
are  no  men  who  cook  well.  5.  Let  us  prepare  the  meal  (in 
order)  to  see  if  you  will  like  it.  6.  Let  us  get  up  before 
we  have  breakfast.  7.  I  should  like  to  see  the  man  who 
did  this  work ;  it  is  very  good.  8.  If  they  intend  (piensan) 
to  go  early,  let  them  go  to  bed  now.  9.  Have  you  found 
the  poem  which  is  entitled:  "If  I  could  only  read!" 
10.  Let  them  sell  the  cloth  if  they  can  (it)  ;  I  don't  want 
it — it  isn't  good.  11.  Let's  stay  here  until  your  uncle 
comes;  if  we  leave  the  room  before  he  comes-in,  he  won't 
find  us.  12.  John  is  the  best  man  who  ever  taught  here, 
I  think.  13.  Let  us  wash  now,  because  afterwards  we 
shall  not  have  much  time.  14.  These  are  the  most  ex- 
pensive pens  they  sell  here ;  but  they  are  bad  nevertheless. 
15.  Let  them  stay  here,  if  they  wish;  but  if  they  don't 
study,  let  us  not  speak  to  them,  either.  16.  Let  us  look 
for  a  man  who  writes  so  well  that  he  may  work  with  us 
here. 

LESSON  LV 
SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  NOUN  CLAUSES 
Eeview  Appendix  C. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  noun  clauses  after  verbs 
meaning  to  wish,  to  will,  to  desire,  to  forbid,  to  deny,  to 


136 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


ask,  to  doubt,  to  fear,  to  hope,  to  be  glad  or  sorry,  and 

verbs  with  similar  meanings. 

Quiero  que  usted  estudie,  I  want  you  to  study  (I  want  that 
you  study). 

Desean  que  los  visitemos,  They  want  us  to  visit  them. 
Espero  que  le  guste,  I  hope  1  he  likes  it. 
Prohiben  que  ella  lo  pida,  They  forbid  her  asking  for  it. 
Temo  que  no  lleguen  a  tiempo,  I  am  afraid  they  may  not  arrive 
on  time. 

Duda  que  ella  este  aqui,  He  doubts  that  she  is  here. 

Note: 

(a)  A  verb  of  doubting,  when  used  negatively,  no 
longer  expresses  doubt,  and  may,  if  it  implies  a  fact,  be 
followed  by  the  indicative. 

No  duda  que  estan  aqui,  She  doesn't  doubt  (the  fact)  that  they 
are  here. 

Similarly,  certain  negative-interrogative  expressions  im- 
plying a  fact  are  followed  by  the  indicative. 

^No  sabe  que  estan  aqui?    Doesn't  she  know  that  they  are 
here  ? 

(b)  A  few  verbs  may  take  the  infinitive  construction 
as  well  as  the  que  construction,  even  where  the  subject  of 
the  main  verb  and  that  of  the  subjunctive  are  different. 
This  construction  may  be  used  by  aconsejar,  to  advise: 
dejar,  to  leave,  to  let)  mandar,  to  order,  to  command) 
permitir,  to  permit,  to  allow,  and  prohibir,  to  forbid. 

Me  manda  escribirle  (Me  manda  que  le  escriba),  He  bids  me 
write  her. 

Me  permite  escribirle  (Me  permite  que  le  escriba),  She  permits 
my  writing  him. 

2.  Verbs  meaning  to  say,  to  think,  to  declare,  and  verbs 
with  similar  meanings,  take  the  indicative  when  affirmative 
(for  then  they  state  a  fact)  ;  but  the  subjunctive  when 
interrogative  or  negative  (for  then  there  may  be  doubt 
about  the  statement  made). 

1  That  may  be  omitted  in  English,  but  que  is  seldom  omitted  in  Spanish 
(though  rogar,  permitir  and  a  few  others  occasionally  drop  it). 


SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  NOUN  CLAUSES 


137 


Dice  que  estaba  aqui,  He  says  that  he  was  here. 
iDice  que  estuviese  aqui?    Does  he  say  that  he  was  here? 
No  dice  que  estuviese  aqui,  He  does  not  say  that  he  was  here. 
Note: 

No  dice  si  estuvo  aqui,  He  doesn't  say  whether  he  was  here 

(si  =  whether  takes  only  the  indicative). 

3.  Impersonal  verbs  with  a  subjunctive  noun  clause  are 
discussed  in  Lesson  XL VI,  1  and  2. 

VOCABULARY 

aconsejar,  to  advise  permitir,  to  permit,  to  let,  to 
alegrarse,  to  rejoice,  to  be  glad  allow 

aprobar  (ue),  to  approve  preferir  (ie),  to  prefer 

mandar,  to  bid,  order,  command,  prohibir,  to  forbid,  to  prohibit 

request  suceder,  to  happen 
pasar,  to  pass;  to  go;  to  happen 

A.  1.  dudamos  que  esten  2.  aprueba  que  tengamos 
3.  prenrio  que  trabajaramos  4.  mando  que  quedasemos 
5.  prohibe  que  sea  6.  aconseja  que  visitemos  7.  quiere  que 
estudie  8.  teme  que  no  sea  9.  me  permiten  que  me  despida 
10.  me  manda  que  pregunte  11.  nos  permiten  despedirnos 
12.  le  prohibi  acabar  13.  espero  que  coman  14.  me  mando 
preguntar  15.  les  prohibi  que  acaben  16.  nos  ruega  que 
visitemos  17.  queremos  que  vosotras  nos  visiteis  18.  me 
permite  (que)  diga  19.  me  permite  decir  20.  me  aconseja 
venir  21.  dudo  que  veamos  22.  es  preciso  ver  23.  es 
preciso  que  veamos  24.  espero  que  veais  25.  les  es  preciso 
hallar  26.  es  lastima  que  no  sean  27.  es  lastima  que  no 
trabajen   28.  <;No  sabe  que  estan  aqui? 

AA.  1.  we  must  see  2.  we  doubt  that  there  was  3.  did 
he  say?  4.  it  is  necessary  5.  we  prefer  that  he  be  6.  they 
prohibit  our  remaining  (that  we  remain)  7.  they  ordered 
us  to  write  8.  they  don't  permit  our  wording  9.  they 
advise  our  seeing  10.  he  ordered  us  to  say  11.  it  is  time 
to  visit  12.  I  hope  you  visit  13.  they  prohibit  our  saying 
14.  they  advise  our  seeing  15.  I  am  glad  you  see  16.  he 
regrets  (siente)  we  visited  17.  they  advise  our  seeing 
18.  we  are  sorry  they  had  19.  they  permit  our  having 
20.  I  don't  know  that  they  said  21.  don't  you  know  that 
he  said?   22.  do  you  know  if  they  saw?   23.  do  you  know 


138 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


whether  they  saw?  24.  it  is  a  pity  they  didn't  have  25.  it 
is  a  pity  not  to  have   26.  I  don't  doubt  they  worked. 

B.  1.  Duda  que  toquen  el  piano  tan  bien  como  lo  toca- 
ban  sus  padres.  2.  Aprobamos  que  no  haya  mas  casas  en 
esta  calle  porque  ya  hay  bastantes.  3.  Niega  que  hubiera 
(the  sense  calls  for  a  past  subjunctive  after  a  present  tense, 
contrary  to  the  general  rule)  mucha  neblina  ayer;  dice  que 
habia  mucho  sol.  4.  Es  preciso  que  le  preguntemos  si 
estara  aqui  manana.  5.  Nos  ruega  que  hallemos  el  billete 
de  banco  que  perdieron.  6.  Le  prohibo  que  lo  busque 
porque  no  creo  que  lo  hayan  perdido.  7.  Es  lastima  que 
tenga  tantos  anos ;  ya  no  puede  trabajar.  8.  Me  permitio 
que  acostase  a  los  ninos  en  su  cama  de  el  porque  ya  era 
muy  tarde.  9.  Me  mandaron  que  limpiara  toda  la  vajilla 
porque  yo  primero  acabe  de  comer.  10.  Fue  tiempo  que 
nos  visitasen.  11.  Es  preciso  preguntarle  si  estara  aqui 
manana.  12.  Esperamos  que  ustedes  puedan  verlo  antes 
que  les  escriba.  13.  Aconsejo  que  escribiesemos  una  carta 
a  nuestros  tios  y  otra  a  nuestros  primos  tambien.  14.  Dudo 
que  los  rubies  que  ensefio  sean  tan  caros  como  los  que  V. 
tiene.  15.  Aconsejo  que  acostasemos  a  los  ninos  porque 
tan  tarde  era.    16.  ^No  sabe  usted  si  ya  han  Uegado? 

BB.  1.  He  doubted  that  we  wrote  to  our  parents  every 
week.  2.  It  was  a  pity  that  we  did  not  show  them  the 
rubies  before  they  bought  theirs.  3.  I  forbade  their  going 
to  bed  then  because  they  still  had  much  to  do.  4.  They 
allowed  us  to  go  home  before  them.  5.  We  advise  them  to 
play  the  piano  an  hour  every  day.  6.  I  doubt  that  there 
are  not  as  mqjiy  houses  in  that  street  as  in  this.  7.  She 
does  not  know  if  there  was  much  mist  yesterday.  8.  He 
advises  me  not  to  lose  any  more  notes  if  I  want  to  do  the 
work  well.  9.  We  don't  permit  the  children  to  go  to  bed 
so  early.  10.  It  was  necessary  for  them  to  write  a  letter 
every  four  days  (all  the  four  days).  11.  It  is  a  pity  that 
they  did  not  arrive  yesterday  because  today  we  have  to 
go  away.  12.  I  advised  the  window's  being  shut  (that  the 
window  shut  itself)  because  it  was  very  windy.    13.  They 


THE  INFINITIVE 


139 


forbade  our  seeing  them  before  writing  them.  14.  It  is 
time  for  us  to  wash  the  dishes,  for  if  not,  we  shall  not 
be  able  to  go  out.   15.  He  hopes  to  arrive  before  us. 

[Study  Appendix  D.  This  may  be  used  for  class  room 
drill  and  test  preparation.] 


LESSON  LVI 

THE  INFINITIVE 

1.  In  English,  the  infinitive  is  almost  always  recognized 
by  the  word  to  before  it.   "I  wish  to  go. ' ' 

Earely,  the  to  is  absent.  ' '  I  can  go  (I  am  able  to  go) . 9  9 

2.  In  Spanish,  the  infinitive  is  not  preceded  by  the  word 
for  to,  but  may  be  recognized  by  the  ending :  -ar,  -er,  or  -ir. 

3.  In  Spanish,  the  infinitive  is  used  (a)  after  another 
verb;  or  (b)  as  subject  of  a  verb. 

4.  After  another  verb : 

(a)  Some  verbs  are  followed  directly  by  the  infinitive 
without  any  preposition. 

dejar,  to  let,  to  permit  pensar  (ie),  to  intend 

desear,  to  desire,  to  want  poder  (ue),  to  be  able,  can 

hacer,  to  make  querer  (ie),  to  wish,  want 

importa,  it  matters,  it  is  im- 
portant 

No  puedo  hacerlo,  I  can't  do  it. 

Me  hace  ver,  He  shows  me  (lit.,  He  makes  me  see). 

(b)  Some  verbs  are  followed  by  the  preposition  a 
plus  the  infinitive. 

aprender  a,  to  learn  to  oponerse  a,  to  refuse  to,  to  oppose 

comenzar  (ie)  a,  to  begin  to        ponerse,  -a,  to  begin  to 
empezar  (ie)  a,  to  begin  to  principiar  a,  to  begin  to 

ir  a,  to  go  to  venir  a,  to  happen  to 

negarse  (ie)  a,  to  refuse  to  volver  (ue)  a,  (to  do  a  thing) 

again 

Aprende  a  hablar  frances,  He  is  learning  to  speak  French. 

(c)  Some  verbs  are  followed  by  the  preposition  de 
plus  the  infinitive. 


no 


SPANISH  GBAHMAE 


acabar  de,  (to  have)  just;  to  guardarse  de,  to  refrain  from 

have  finished  olvidarse  de,  to  forget 

acordarse  (ue)  de,  to  remember  tener  ganas  de,  to  be  eager,  to  feel 
alegrarse  de,  to  be  glad  like 

dejar  de,  to  leave  off.  to  cease  tratar  de,  to  try  to 

Tenemos  ganas  de  verle,  We  are  eager  to  see  him. 
(cl)  A  number  of  isolated  verbs  are  found  with  vari- 
ous prepositions. 

acordar  (ue)  en,  to  agree  on  echar  a,  to  begin  to 

consistir  en,  to  consist  of  echar  de,  to  manage  to 

insistir  en,  to  insist  on  luchar  por,  to  struggle  to 

fijarse  en,  to  notice  carefully         estar  para,  to  be  about  to 
tardar  en,  to  be  slow  in  estar  por,  to  be  inclined  to,  to  feel 

like 

Lucharon  por  escaparse,  They  struggled  to  get  loose. 
Tardo  en  venir,  He  was  late  in  coming. 

(e)  For  para  and  a.  see  Lesson  L.  2b. 

5.  Before  an  infinitive,  que  is  used  where  lo  que  would 

be  used  before  a  finite  form. 

Me  dijo  que  hacer,  He  told  me  what  to  do.    (C/.,  Me  dice  lo  que 
tenemos  que  hacer,  He  is  telling  me  what  we  have  to  do.) 

VOCABULARY 

contentarse  con,  to  be  satisfied      puro,  -a,  pure;  la  pura  verdad,  the 

with  "  plain  93  truth 

descansar,  to  rest  recorrer,  to  traverse,  to  go  over 

necesitar,  to  need  tras,  after 

A.  1.  iremos  a  verlo  2.  se  fijo  3.  no  echo  de  aprender 
1.  volvieron  a  trabajar  5.  queremos  lavarnos  6.  se  eon- 
tentaron  eon  visitar  ?.  aprendenios  a  escribir  8.  trataron 
de  escribir  9.  consiste  en  liacer  10.  acordaron  en  escri- 
birse  11.  se  guardo  de  decirlo  12.  pienso  escribirle 
13.  eran  14.  iban  a  visitar  15.  vivimos  para  trabajar 
16.  echo  a  perder  IT.  rne  alegro  de  verlas  18.  le  perdio 
(he  ruined  him)  19.  lo  perdio  (lie  lost  it)  20.  olvidaron 
cle  mandarrnelo  21.  estoy  por  escribirle  22.  esta  para 
escribirle  23.  lucho  por  liacerlo  21.  vienen  a  verme 
25.  tarda  en  venir    26.  importa  tenerlo 

AA.  1.  we  forgot  to  write  2.  they  again  vrrote  3.  we 
shall  be  satisfied  with  having    4.  do  you  agree  to  give? 


THE  INFINITIVE 


141 


5.  they  refrained  from  6.  will  you  go  and  (use  a  plus  in- 
finitive) visit?  7.  will  he  go  and  stay?  8.  will  he  go  in 
order  to  say?  9.  he  lived  in  order  to  work  10.  they 
managed  to  find  11.  he  lived  to  eat  12.  it  consists  in 
making  13.  they  are  opposed  to  writing  14.  they  intend 
to  visit  15.  we  didn't  manage  to  send  16.  we  forgot  to 
write  17.  they  are  about  to  write  18.  we  feel  like  going 
19.  are  they  coming?  20.  they  were  late  speaking  21.  they 
wish  to  find  22.  she  was  learning  to  write  23.  I  was  in- 
clined to  write 

B.  1.  Teniamos  ganas  de  tocar  el  piano  antes  de  entrar 
en  el  otro  cuarto  a  hablar  con  nuestros  padres.  2.  Deseo 
comprar  la  casa  si  no  piden  demasiado.  3.  Ire  a  sentarme 
en  aquella  silla  a  descansar  porque  estoy  muy  cansado. 
4.  Estamos  por  comprar  el  pano,  pero  no  tenemos  bastante 
dinero.  5.  Volvera  a  jugar  en  vez  de  estudiar  porque  es 
muy  flojo.  6.  Luchaban  por  escaparse,  pero  no  tenian 
bastantes  fuerzas.  7.  Se  olvidan  de  comprar  las  cosas  que 
necesitan,  y  asi  siempre  tienen  que  pedir[lo]  todo  prestado. 
8.  Trataremos  de  ver  la  ciudad  en  vez  de  descansar  esta 
tarde,  porque  estamos  seguros  que  no  tendriamos  bastante 
tiempo  para  hacerlo  en  una  sola  carrera.  9.  Estuvo  por 
ver  el  caballo,  pero  se  acordo  de  no  tener  dinero  para  com- 
prarlo  y  asi  quedo  en  casa.  10.  No  nos  contentamos  con 
comprar  lo  que  necesitamos,  lo  compramos  todo  (we  buy 
everything).  11.  Niega  que  volviesen  a  decir  lo  mismo — ■ 
dice  que  dijeron  la  pura  verdad.  12.  No  sabemos  que 
hacer.  13.  Si  quereis  acordaros  de  lo  que  hallasteis,  os 
acordareis  tambien  de  que  es  nuestro.  14.  No  echo  de  com- 
prender  lo  que  sucedia.  15.  Echamos  a  correr  tras  ellos, 
y  ellos  tambien  empezaron  a  correr.  16.  Pensamos  recorrer 
la  ciudad  en  coche,  porque  no  tenemos  el  tiempo  de  ir  a 
pie.  17.  No  importa  trabajar — importa  trabajar  bien. 
18.  Dejo  de  escribir  y  volvio  a  estudiar  la  leccion. 

BB.  1. 1  don't  remember  having  seen  the  horse  of  which 
you  are  speaking.  2.  "We  managed  to  buy  the  cloth,  be- 
cause we  did  not  find  any  other  that  we  liked.    3.  I  intend 


142 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


to  sell  him  the  cloth.  4.  I  intend  to  tell  him  what  we  think 
of  him — and  he  will  not  like  the  truth.  5.  I  began  to  run, 
and  they  after  me.  6.  He  finished  eating,  and  then  he 
began  to  wash  the  dishes.  7.  They  stopped  writing  to  us, 
and  then  we  didn't  write  to  them.  8.  They  have  just 
written  it ;  and  now  they  are  studying  again.  9.  She  had 
just  written  to  her  friends  when  they  entered  the  room. 
10.  It  is  important  to  buy  only  good  things.  11.  I  don't 
feel  like  playing  instead  of  studying,  because  I  have  already 
played  too  much.  12.  I  feel  like  buying  that  cloth,  but  I 
haven't  enough  money.  13.  We  don't  want  to  play  the 
piano  before  they  come,  for  we  still  have  to  dress.  14.  They 
will  go  and  (use  a)  buy  the  house  if  they  have  not  where 
to  live.  15.  He  said  it  again,  for  we  didn't  understand  it 
when  he  said  it  first. 


LESSON  LVII 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  AND  INFINITIVE  (summary) 
Review  Lesson  LVI. 

1.  For  the  present  participle  in  periphrastic  tenses,  see 
Lesson  XXXVII,  3. 

Esta  estudiando,  He  is  studying. 
Note  also: 

Sigue  trabajando,  He  goes  on  working  {from  seguir). 
Viene  llegando,  He  is  arriving  (from  venir). 
venirse  durmiendo,  to  be  falling  asleep 

Anda  filosofando,  He  goes  ahead  philosophizing  (from  andar). 

2.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  in  Spanish  where  the 
English  employs  the  form  in  -ing.  This  is  the  case  after 
such  verbs  as  ver,  to  see;  oir,  to  hear;  entender,  to  hear; 
mandar,  to  order,  to  have. 

Me  vio  trabajar,  He  saw  me  working. 
Note  the  passive  sense  with  mandar. 

Mando  hacerlo,  He  had  it  done  (ordered  it  done). 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  AND  INFINITIVE 


143 


3.  The  infinitive  is  used  as  subject  or  object  of  a  verb. 

(El)  leer  es  aprender,  Reading  is  learning. 

Saber  es  poder,  Knowledge  is  power  (To  know  is  to  be  able). 

Quiero  leerlo,  I  want  to  read  it. 

4.  Pronoun  objects  follow  and  are  joined  to  either  an 
infinitive  or  a  present  participle,  thus  forming  one  word 
(this  may  necessitate  a  written  accent). 

Estudiandolo  mucho,  lo  aprendio,  By  studying  it  hard,  he 


Quiero  escribfrselo  a  ella,  I  want  to  write  it  to  her. 
(Forms  like:  Se  lo  quiero  escribir,  though  found,  should 
be  avoided.) 

5.  Formation  of  Adverbs.  Any  adjective  may  be  turned 
into  the  corresponding  adverb  by  adding  -mente  to  the 
feminine  (cf.  English  -ly  in  pretty,  prettily). 

nueva     mente     nuevamente,  newly,  recently 
traidoramente,  treacherously 
felizmente,  happily 

Of  course,  many  adverbs  are  formed  independently  of 
adjectives. 

aprisa,  quickly  bien,  well 

For  irregular  adverbs,  see  Lesson  XXIII,  3. 
For  the  comparison  of  adverbs,  see  Lesson  XXIII,  1. 

VOCABULARY 

andar,  to  go  nuevamente,  newly,  recently 

aprisa,  quickly  oir,  to  hear 

felizmente,  happily  la  paz,  peace 

filosofar,  to  philosophize  seguir  (i),  to  go  on,  to  keep  on, 

haciendo,  doing,  making  (present  to  continue 


A.  1.  habiendolo  estudiado  (note  that  in  Spanish  the 
pronoun  object  can  not  ever  follow  the  past  participle) 
2.  habiendomelo  ensenado  3.  habiendolo  lavado  4.  habien- 
donos  lavado  5.  estan  tratando  6.  peor  7.  me  manda 
hacer  (me  here  can  not  follow  hacer  because  it  is  the  object 
of  manda)    8.  mejor  9.  le  vio  venir  10.  menos  11.  nueva- 


learned  it. 


participle) 
leer,  to  read 
malamente,  badly 


tratar,  to  treat ;  de,  to  try  to 

traidoramente,  treacherously 
vio,  (he,  she,  it)  saw;  you  saw 


144 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


mente  12.  ver  es  creer  13.  mas  14.  seguimos  escribiendo 
15.  trabajando  ganaron  16.  mas  felizmente  17.  estudiando 
aprendera  18.  puedo  ver  19.  puedo  verlo  20.  qneriendo 
hacerlo  21.  menos  22.  queremos  hallarlos  23.  habiendolo 
aprendido 

AA.  1.  more  2.  less  easily  3.  having  spoken  to  us 
4a  [by]  working  one  learns  5.  they  heard  us  coming-in 
6.  with  more  difficulty  7.  less  8.  they  have  ns  do  9.  better 
10.  having    11.  they  wanted  to  tell  us    12.  he  has  us  say 

13.  they  saw  me  run  14.  they  saw  me  running  15.  he 
informs  me  (he  makes  me  to  know)  16.  they  keep-on 
writing  17.  they  go-on  philosophizing  18.  having  spoken 
to  them 

B.  1.  El  no  tener  a  nadie  en  su  (one's)  casa  es  mejor 
que  tener  a  muchos.  2.  Trabajando  asi,  Juan  sera  el  mejor 
alumno  de  la  escuela.  3.  Lo  oi  (heard)  hablar  con  su  her- 
mano,  pero  nada  dijo  de  ti.  4.  Trabaja  tan  holgazana- 
mente  que  nunca  tiene  la  casa  limpia.  5.  Siguen  perdiendo. 
6.  Nos  ven  trabajar  todos  los  dias,  asi  que  no  pueden  decir 
que  no  estudiamos.  7.  Vivian  tan  felizmente  en  aquella 
ciudad  que  fue  lastima  que  tuviesen  que  vender  su  casa. 
8.  Mejor  es  vivir  felizmente  con  poco  que  vivir  infelizmente 
con  mucho.  9.  No  puedo  verlos  ahora  porque  siguen 
hablando  ccm  su  padre.  10.  Tan  malamente  me  trataron 
que  nunca  volvi  a  visitarlos.  11.  Bien  trabajar  es  mejor 
que  mucho  trabajar.  12.  Oian  (They  heard)  jugar  a  los 
ninos,  asi  que  los  acostaron.    13.  Vivio  y  murio  infeliz. 

14.  ;  Ay  de  ella ! 

BB.  1.  Having  a  poor  piano  is  better  than  having  none. 
2.  They  work  so  diligently  that  they  always  have  good 
marks.  3.  Although  they  work  now,  they  keep  on  asking 
their  parents  for  money.  4.  So  badly  did  he  treat  them 
that  they  never  visited  him  again.  5.  On  hearing  the  child 
play,  the  mother  put  him  to  bed.  6.  It  is  better  to  live  in 
peace  than  always  at  (en)  war.  7.  Knowledge  is  not  always 
power.  8.  Speaking  to  me  thus,  he  told  me  all  about  him 
and  his  cousins.    9.  Having  showed  it  to  him,  he  took  his 


ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES 


145 


hat  and  left  the  house.  10.  He  lived  very  unhappily 
(infeliz)  and  finally  died.  11.  By  studying  in  (the)  school 
one  does  not  learn  (it  does  not  learn  itself)  all  there  is  to 
be  learned  (hay  que  aprender).  12.  In  (the)  school  alone 
does  one  learn  well  (does  it  learn  itself  well).  13.  He 
heard  (oyo)  us  speak  and  afterwards  he  repeated  to  his 
brother  what  we  said  (dijimos). 


LESSON  LVIII 
ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES  (concluded) 
Review  Lesson  LI  (see  Appendix  E). 

(a)  -zar  verbs  change  z-  to  c-  before  -e  (apparently  with- 

out need;  compare  -jar  verbs). 

rezar,  to  pray  (stem  rez-,  sound  through) 

preterite  indicative:  rece 
present  subjunctive: 

rece,  reces,  rece;  recemos,  receis,  recen 

(b)  -cer  and  -cir  verbs  change  c-  to  z-  before  -o  or  -a.  (The 

verbs  treated  here  are  consonant  plus  -cer,  -cir.) 

veneer,  to  conquer,  to  overcome  (stem  venc-,  sound 
through) 

present  indicative:  venzo 
present  subjunctive: 

venza,  venzas,  venza;  venzamos,  venzais,  venzan 

esparcir,  to  scatter  (stem  esparc-,  sound  through) 

present  indicative:  esparzo 
present  subjunctive: 

esparza,  esparzas,  esparza;  esparzamos,  esparzais, 
esparzan 

Inceptives  (these  verbs  are  vowel  plus  -cer,  -cir,  with  a 
few  exceptions,  most  prominent  being  cocer,  decir,  and 
hacer). 


146  SPANISH  GRAMMAR 

conocer,  to  know,  to  be  acquainted  with  (stem  conoc-, 
sound  c-  as  th  in  through) 

present  indicative  present  subjunctive 

conozco  conocemos  conozca  conozcamos 

conoces  conoceis  conozcas  conozcais 

conoce  conocen  conozca  conozcan 

The  inceptives  (so-called)  insert  -c-  between  the  ortho- 
graphical -z-  and  the  ending. 

(c)  Verbs  which,  during  inflection,  happen  to  have  an  un- 
accented -i-  fall  between  two  vowels,  always  change 
that  -i-  to  -y-. 
leer,  to  read  (stem  le-) 

preterite  indicative  past  subjunctive        present  participle 


lei  leyese  leyera  leyendo 

leiste  leyeses  leyeras 

leyo  leyese  leyera 

leimos  leyesemos  leyeramos 

leisteis  leyeseis  leyerais 

leyeron  leyesen  leyeran 


Note  written  accents  in  preterite, 
(d)  Verbs  ending  in  -iar  or  -uar  1  may  (1)  accent  the  -i-  or 
-u- ;  or  (2)  have  it  form  a  diphthong  with  the  initial 
vowel  of  the  ending.    Verbs  ending  in  -guar  put  a 
diaeresis  over  the  -u-  when  the  ending  begins  with  -e. 
enviar,  to  send  (stem  envi-) 

present  indicative: 

envio,  envias,  envia;  enviamos,  enviais,  envian 
present  subjunctive:- 

envie,  envies,  envie,  enviemos,  envieis,  envien 
imperative  singular  intimate: 

envia  (Lesson  LXII,  1) 

Like  enviar  are  conjugated  variar,  to  vary;  vaciar,  to 
empty;  enfriar,  to  chill;  guiar,  to  guide;  telegrafiar,  to 
telegraph  ;  etc. 

continuar,  to  continue  (stem  continu-) 

present  indicative: 

continuo,  continuas,continua;  continuamos,  continuais, 
continuan 

1  Verbs  like  limpiar,  to  clean  and  averiguar,  to  ascertain,  differ  from  enviar 
and  continuar  only  in  not  having  the  accent  mark  in  the  forms  in  black  type 
above. 


ORTHOGRAPHIC  CHANGES 


147 


present  subjunctive: 

continue,  continues,  continue;  eontimiemos,  continueis, 
continuen 

imperative  singular  intimate: 
continua 

Like  continuar  are  conjugated  efectuar,  to  effect;  acen- 

tuar,  to  accent,  to  accentuate ;  graduar,  to  graduate  (as  by 
a  measure)  ;  situar,  to  situate;  etc. 

Note  that  (a)  and  (b)  each  change  in  seven  forms:  all 
present  subjunctive ;  and  preterite  indicative  first  singular 
for  (a)  and  present  indicative  first  singular  for  (b). 

(c)  changes  in  the  present  participle;  the  third  singular 
and  plural  of  the  preterite  indicative :  and  all  the  past  sub- 
junctive— fifteen  forms. 

(d)  changes  in  all  the  singular  present  indicative  and 
subjunctive,  and  third  plural ;  also  in  the  singular  impera- 
tive intimate — nine  forms. 

VOCABULARY 

(la)  agua,  water  reducir,  to  reduce 

alzar,  to  raise  taner,  to  play    [a  string  instru- 

cocer  (ue),  to  cook  ment) 
convencer,  to  convince  verdadero,  -a,  true,  real 

la  pagina,  page 

A.  1.  que  cuezan  2.  rezo  3.  leyeron  4.  que  creyesen 
5.  continuo  6.  envian  7.  conduzco  8.  que  no  venzan 
9.  limpiamos  10.  que  reduzcamos  11.  esparzo  12.  conozco 
13.  leyo  11.  que  tu  reces  15.  leyo  16.  ;no  hacen? 
IT.  efectuo  IS.  efectuo  19.  que  averigiie  *20.  que  con- 
tinuaran    21.  continuo 

AA.  1.  that  he  prays  2.  that  we  scatter  3.  it  fell 
1.  they  read  5.  he  makes  6.  I  continue  7.  that  she  is 
reading  8.  it  is  getting  cold  (enfriarse)  8.  she  begins 
9.  I  pray  10.  you  are  sending  11.  they  believed  12.  I 
effected    13.  they  will  continue 

B.  1.  Continual!  estudiando  mucho  aunque  siempre 


148 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


tengan  las  mejores  notas  de  la  clase.  2.  Principiaron  a  leer, 
y  leyeron  hasta  la  pagina  veinte.  3.  Quiero  que  todos  los 
pequenos  aprendan  a  rezar,  y  que  recen.  4.  Es  menester 
que  uno  no  esparza  sus  fuerzas.  5.  No  conozco  a  ese  hom- 
bre,  pero  si  conozco  a  su  hermano.  6.  Cuece  la  comida 
porque  su  madre  esta  en  casa  de  su  tia  Isabel.  7.  Lo  que 
hacen,  hacen  bien.  8.  ^Quiere  usted  que  yo  busque  a  mi 
primo  ?  9.  El  perro  mordio  los  huesos  que  hallo  en  la  calle, 
porque  tenia  mucha  hambre.  10.  Envian  un  billete  de 
banco  de  a  diez  dolares  (a  ten-dollar  bill)  todas  las  semanas 
a  sus  hijos.  11.  Le  han  telegrafiado  que  estarian  aqui 
manana,  ^no  es  verdad?  12.  Cuando  el  agua  se  enfrie,  la 
bebera.  13.  No  queria  que  leyesen  esos  cuentos  de  soldados. 
14.  Si  vencen  todas  aquellas  dificultades,  seran  mas  que 
liombres.    15.  ^Quiere  tu  madre  que  tu  cuezas  la  comida? 

BB.  1.  The  dogs  found  a  bone  in  the  street,  and  bit  it. 
2.  The  mother  wants  the  child  to  pray  every  night.  3.  We 
are  cooking  the  dinner.  4.  He  continued  studying  although 
his  eyes  were  sore.  5.  I  doubt  that  he  knows  our  cousin, 
for  he  never  lived  in  that  city.  6.  I  should  like  to  have 
this  boy  overcome  his  difficulties,  for  he  is  really  (form  the 
adverb  from  verdadero)  intelligent,  is  he  not?  7.  Don't 
they  send  any  money  to  their  children  at  school?  8.  I 
know  that  man,  but  I  have  never  visited  him  at  his  home. 
9.  That  night  they  read  no  more.  10.  I  shall  drink  the  tea 
after  it  gets  cold.  11.  He  has  but  little  (No  tienesino  poco) 
money,  for  he  buys  things  he  really  does  not  need.  12.  They 
believed  what  he  told  them.  13.  I  wish  they  didn't  believe 
everything  they  tell  them.  14.  They  empty  their  glasses 
and  then  ask  for  more  milk. 


INDEFINITE  AND  DEFINITE  ARTICLES 


149 


LESSON  LIX 

INDEFINITE  AND  DEFINITE  ARTICLES 

1.  As  compared  with  English,  Spanish  omits  the  indefi- 
nite article : 

"  (a)  when  there  is  a  noun  in  the  predicate  nominative. 

Es  capitan,  He  is  a  captain.  Es  profesor,  He  is  a  teacher. 

Quiere  hacerse  sastre,  He  wishes  to  become  a  tailor. 

In  this  construction,  the  noun  is  treated  as  an  adjective. 

(b)  before  otro,  (an)other;  cierto,  a  certain;  ciento, 
a  hundred ;  and  mil,  thousand. 

otro  vaso  de  agua,  another  glass  of  water 

Cierto  hombre  me  lo  dijo,  A  certain  man  told  me  so. 

cien  soldados,  a  hundred  soldiers 

2.  As  compared  with  English,  Spanish  often  omits  the 
definite  article  in  apposition.  The  indefinite  article  is  also 
sometimes  dropped  before  a  noun  in  apposition. 

Buenos  Aires,  centro  de  la  industria  ganadera  de  Sud-America  .  .  , 

B.  A.,  the  center  of  the  cattle  industry  of  South  America,  .  .  . 

3.  The  definite  article  is  used  more  widely  in  Spanish 
than  in  English.  Note  the  distributive  and  possessive  uses 
below. 

El  nino  tiene  la  cara  sucia,  The  child's  face  is  dirty  (The  child 

has  the  face  dirty). 
Tiene  los  ojos  azules,  His  eyes  are  blue. 
Tiene  la  mano  rota,  His  hand  is  broken. 

Todos  levantaron  la  mano  derecha,  All  raised  their  right  hands. 

(lit.,  All  raised  the  right  hand — the  Spanish  view  the 
matter  not  as  plural  hands,  but  as  each  having  one 
right  hand.) 

VOCABULARY 

Alfonso,  Alphonsus  la  persona,  person;  (plural,  people) 

azul,  blue  el  ojo,  eye 

el  carpintero,  carpenter  puesto,  -a  (put)  on  (irregular 

hacerse,  to  become  past  participle  of  poner) 

la  industria,  industry,  business  tal,  such;  un  tal,  such  a;  a  cer- 

el  ingeniero,  engineer  tain  (with  proper  noun) 

Jorge,  George  tales  .  .  .  tales,  some  .  .  .  others 

nacer,  to  be  born 


150 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


A.  1.  se  limpian  los  dientes  (to  themselves  they  clean 
the  =  they  clean  their)  2.  es  sastre  3.  Juan,  el  mas 
grande  (why  is  the  definite  article  kept  with  this  noun  in 
apposition?  Translate:  "John,  the  largest")  4.  Wash- 
ington, presidente  de  los  Estados  Unidos  5.  todos  los 
ninos  perdieron  el  sombrero  6.  J.  R.,  capitan  de  .  .  . 
7.  otra  ciudad  8.  la  escribi  9.  Jorge,  rey  de  Inglaterra 
10.  con  lapiz  11.  tales  corren  .  .  .  tales  gritan  .  .  .  tales 
lloran  12.  con  pluma  y  tinta  13.  cien  casas  14.  un  tal  X. 
me  lo  dijo  15.  tienen  los  pies  grandes  16.  es  carpintero 
17.  no  hace  nunca  tales  cosas   18.  un  tal  Jorge  me  lo  dijo 

AA.  1.  Alphonsus,  the  king  of  Spain  2.  he  never  does 
such  things  3.  Albany,  the  capital  of  New  York  (capital 
de  N.  Y.)  4.  they  broke  their  right  legs  5.  another  pen 
6.  her  eyes  are  blue  7.  they  are  not  teachers  8.  McKinley, 
president  of  the  United  States  9.  one  hundred  thirty- 
seven  10.  such  a  thing  11.  is  he  an  engineer?  12.  some 
are  studying,  some  are  writing  13.  Poincare,  the  presi- 
dent of  France  14.  Alessandri,  the  president  of  Chile 
15.  they  are  writing  with  pen  and  ink 

B.  1.  Los  ninos  se  limpiaron  los  dientes,  tomaron  el 
sombrero,  y  salieron  de  la  casa.  2.  Jorge  IV,  rey  de 
Inglaterra,  nacio  en  mil  setecientos  sesenta  y  dos,  y  murio 
en  mil  ochocientos  treinta.  3.  Cierto  hombre  me  dijo  que 
al  que  cuece  no  le  gusta  la  comida.  4.  En  cierta  calle  de 
esta  ciudad  hay  cien  casas  con  solo  tres  personas  en  cada 
una.  5.  Nueva  York,  centro  de  muchas  grandes  industrias, 
esta  en  los  Estados  Unidos.  6.  Quiero  otro  vaso  de  agua ; 
este  no  esta  lleno.  7.  El  nino  tiene  la  cara  muy  sucia ;  es 
preciso  que  la  lave.  8.  El  mismo  es  sastre,  pero  su  her- 
mano  es  capitan.  9.  Jorge,  tambien  capitan,  es  su  primo. 
10.  Los  dos  estudian  para  ser  ingeniero.  11.  Encontre  a 
cierto  hombre  que  me  dijo  que  habia  hallado  un  reloj  de 
oro.  12.  A  quel  no  es  ni  soldado  ni  capitan,  es  sastre. 
13.  Tal  (Such  a  one)  habla  un  poco  de  todo  que  no  en- 
tiende  mucho  de  nada.  14.  Todos  tenian  un  libro  en 
espanol,  y  otro  en  ingles. 


dates;  weather 


151 


BB.    1.  Their  eyes  are  blue,  and  their  hair  is  black. 

2.  Alphonsus  XII,  the  king  of  Spain,  was  born  in  1857. 

3.  This  man  is  an  engineer  and  his  brother  is  a  captain. 

4.  The  child  cleaned  his  teeth,  washed,  had  breakfast,  and 
then  left  the  house  to  go  to  school.  5.  In  a  certain  house 
on  X  .  .  .  Street,  live  eighteen  pupils  from  this  school 
alone.  6.  Buenos  Aires,  the  center  of  the  stock-raising 
industry  of  South  America,  has  much  more  than  a  million 
people  (inhabitants).  7.  The  little  boy  has  a  dirty  face; 
he  must  wash  it  before  he  has  supper.  8.  Some  were 
eating  and  some  were  drinking,  and  some  were  cooking. 

9.  A  hundred  people  can  easily  live  in  this  big  house. 

10.  Don  George  is  a  Sevillian;  dona  Mary  is  also  an 
inhabitant-of-Seville.  11.  I  never  found  such  a  thing. 
12.  A  certain  William  X.  told  me  so. 


LESSON  LX 

DATES;  WEATHER- 
Review  Lessons  XXVII  and  XXVIII. 

1.  For  the  days  of  the  week,  see  Lesson  XXXIV,  2. 

2.  The  months,  all  masculine,  and  written  with  a  small 
letter,  are: 

enero,  January  julio,  July 

febrero,  February  agosto,  August 

marzo,  March  se(p)tiembre,  September 

abril,  April  octubre,  October 

mayo,  May  noviembre,  November 

junio,  June  diciembre,  December 

a  principios  (mediados,  fines  or  ultimos)  de  marzo,  at  the  begin- 
ning (middle,  end)  of  March 
I A  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ?    What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

The  first  day  of  a  month  is  usually  el  primero ;  but  the 
other  days  are  el  dos,  el  tres,  etc. 

el  primero  (trece)  de  febrero,  the  first  (thirteenth)  of  February 
el  veinte  y  uno  de  mayo,  the  twenty -first  of  May 


152 


SPANISH  GRAMMAB 


3.  The  seasons  are : 


la  primavera,  spring 
el  verano,  summer 


el  otoiio,  autumn 
el  invierno,  winter 


4.  Note  the  expressions  below  (cf.  the  use  of  the  article 
in  Spanish)  : 

la  semana  que  viene  (proximo),  next  week 

el  mes  pasado,  el  ario  pasado,  last  month,  last  year 

el  tres  proximo  pasado,  (on)  the  third  of  last  month 

5.  Expressions  of  time  are  made  on  the  models  below : 

es  la  una,  it  is  one  o'clock 
son  las  dos,  it  is  two  o'clock 
es  la  una  y  media,  it  is  half  past  one 
son  las  tres  y  cuarto,  it  is  a  quarter  past  three 
son  las  tres  y  media,  it  is  half  past  three 
son  las  cinco  menos  cinco,  it  is  five  minutes  of  five 
son  las  seis  menos  cuarto,  it  is  a  quarter  of  six 
faltan  quince  (minutos)  para  las  ocho,  it  is  fifteen  minutes  of 


son  las  cinco  y  diez,  it  is  ten  minutes  past  five 

iQue  hora  es?    What  time  is  it?     (JL?so:  ;,Que  horas  son?) 

a  las  ocho,  at  eight  o'clock 

de  la  manana,  a.  m.3  in  the  morning:  por  la  manana,  during  the 

morning 

de  la  tarde,  p.  m.3  in  the  afternoon;  por  la  tarde,  during  the 

afternoon 

de  la  noche,  p.  m.,  in  the  night;  por  la  noche,  de  noche,  (in) 

during  the  night 

6.  Review  Lesson  XXVIII,  4.   Note  also : 

hace  buen  tiempo,  it  is  good  weather 
hace  frio,  it  is  cold 

The  difference  between  hay  and  hace  is  that  conditions 
of  weather  seen  rather  than  felt  are  expressed  by  hay; 
those  felt  rather  than  seen,  by  hace.  Hay  sol  and  hace  sol. 
however,  are  both  correct.  All  these  expressions  are  im- 
personal. 

Note  that  the  subject  is  personal  in : 


ei^'ht 


El  tiempo  es  bueno,  The  weather  is  good. 


dates;  weather 


153 


VOCABULARY 

anteayer,  day  before  yesterday  el  calor,  warmth;  hace  calor,  it  is 
atrasar,  to  be  slow  (used  of  a  warm  (used  only  of 

watch)  weather) 
avanzar,  to  advance  habil,  clever,  skilful,  apt 

pasado  manana,  day  after  to-         dia  habil  (util),  work  day,  week 

morrow  day 
la  lluvia,  rain 

A.  1.  hay  viento  2.  viernes  el  siete  de  marzo  de  mil 
novecientos  3.  el  cinco  de  octubre  4.  la  semana  pasada  5.  el 
dos  proximo  pasado  6.  ^hace  frio?  7.  el  ano  que  viene 
8.  hay  neblina  9.  son  las  cinco  veinte  y  tres  de  la  manana 
10.  son  las  ocho  11.  eran  las  once  y  cuarto  12.  hace  bnen 
tiempo  13.  el  tiempo  es  bueno  14.  el  veinte  y  cinco  de 
noviembre  de  mil  novecientos  veinte  y  cnatro  15.  jueves 
16.  el  viernes  que  viene  17.  a  las  siete  diez  y  ocho 
18.  (J que  hora  es?  19.  <:que  horas  son?  20.  <ja  cuantos 
del  mes  estamos?  21.  a  mediados  de  julio  22.  el  domingo 
(on  Sunday)    23.  los  jueves  (on  Thursdays) 

AA.  1.  it  is  half  past  eight  2.  what  time  is  it? 
3.  [on]  =  (the)  Thursday  4.  on  June  eighteenth,  1920 
5.  the  first  of  December,  1902  6.  it  was  eighteen  minutes 
past  four  in  the  morning  7.  last  Thursday  8.  next 
Monday  9.  it  is  cold  10.  it  is  very  cold  11.  it  is  foggy 
12.  the  past  month  13.  it  is  fine  weather  (two  ways)  14.  it 
is  ten  minutes  of  ten  15.  on  Friday  next  16.  Sundays 
(16  and  17  are  both:  the  Sundays)  17.  on  Sundays  18.  at 
eighteen  minutes  past  eight  in  the  evening  19.  at  a  quarter 
of  eleven  20.  at  a  quarter  of  six  21.  it  is  a  quarter  past 
one   22.  it  was  rainy 

B.  1.  <:Cuanto  azucar  compro  usted  anteayer?  2.  <;Que 
libros  estudiasteis  en  vuestra  clase  de  espanol  el  ano 
pasado?  3.  El  primero  de  octubre  empezamos  a  leer  un 
libro  de  Scott  y  el  quince  de  diciembre  empezamos  otro  de 
Shakespeare.  4.  ^Ira  usted  hoy? — No,  hay  lluvia  y  hace 
frio,  y  me  siento  Lin  poco  enfermo.  5.  A  las  cinco  menos 
cuarto  estudiabamos  todavia;  a  las  seis,  dormiamos;  y  a 
las  ocho  menos  cuarto,  acabamos  de  dormir.    6.  Para 


154 


SPANISH  GKAMMAK 


nianana  tenemos  que  escribir  en  espanol  los  meses,  que 
son:  abril,  noviembre,  agosto,  julio,  enero,  mayo,  junio, 
diciembre,  febrero,  marzo,  setiembre,  octubre.  7.  <;Estara 
escribiendo  ahora  tu  hermana? — Si,  esta  escribiendo  los 
dias  de  la  semana,  que  son:  sabado,  miercoles,  domingo, 
martes,  viernes,  lunes,  jueves.  8.  El  domingo  no  estudiaba 
nunca.    9.  A  las  cinco  veinte  y  dos  de  la  tarde  murio. 

10.  La  semana  que  viene  se  terminaran  las  clases,  y  noso- 
tros  viajaremos  durante  todas  las  vacaciones.  11.  <;Que 
hora  es  en  su  reloj  (by  your  watch)  ? — Son  las  diez  menos 
veinte  y  dos,  pero  mi  reloj  atrasa.  12.  No  estare  en  esa 
hasta  fines  de  febrero.  13.  Cuando  Uegamos  a  Madrid, 
habia  mucho  viento  y  no  hallamos  la  calle  en  donde  vivia 
nuestro  amigo.  14.  ^Cuantos  anos  tendra  tu  hermano  el 
veintidos  del  mes  que  viene?  15.  A  las  cuatro  menos 
cuarto  llego  el  senor  S.  con  su  hermano  menor  (Mr.  S. 
with  .  .  .). 

BB.  1.  The  day  after  tomorrow  we  shall  have  to  pre- 
pare for  the  Spanish  class  the  book  we  were  to  read. 
2.  These  are  the  books  you  asked-for.  3.  The  twenty-first 
of  March,  I  bought  a  book  entitled:  "Los  cuatro  jinetes 
del  Apocalipsis/'  in  English,  "The  Four  Horsemen  of  the 
Apocalypse,' '  which  my  friend  told  me  to  read.  4.  And 
.  on  the  twenty-first  of  April  I  finished  reading  it.  5.  It  is 
a  quarter  of  four,  and  there  is  yet  much  to  be  done.  6.  At 
the  beginning  of  August  they  arrived  in  this  city,  but 
they  are  not  in  the  city  now.  7.  What  time  is  it  by  your 
watch?  (see  B,  11)  8.  Isn't  it  nine  o'clock  yet? — Yes,  it 
is  eleven  minutes  past  nine*  9.  What  books  can  they  be 
reading?  you  did  not  show  me  them.  10.  At  half  past 
two  we  began  to  study;  at  eighteen  minutes  of  five  we 
were  still  studying;  at  a  quarter  past  six  we  ate  supper; 
and  at  a  quarter  of  nine  we  had  not  yet  finished  working. 

11.  Monday  begins  the  week — it  is  a  work  day.  12.  How 
old  was  your  brother  last  Thursday,  the  eighteenth  of 
November?  13.  Who  came  the  day  before  yesterday? 
14.  It  is  very  windy  today,  and  yesterday  it  was  so  sunny — 


USES  OF  DEFINITE  ARTICLE 


155 


il  is  never  good  weather.  15.  Next  month,  school  (classes) 
will  be  over  (terminarse),  and  the  long  vacations  will  be 
here.    16.  It  is  neither  rainy  nor  cold,  but  I  do  not  like 

the  weather  when  it  is  so  misty.  17.  The  days  of  the  week 
are:  Monday,  Sunday,  "Wednesday,  Friday,  Thursday, 
Tuesday,  and  Saturday.  18.  The  months  are:  October, 
February,  November,  March,  June,  August,  July,  May, 
January,  December,  September,  and  April. 


LESSON  LXI 

USES  OF  DEFINITE  ARTICLE 

Review  Lesson  LIX. 

1.  As  contrasted  with  English,  Spanish  shows  the  fol- 
lowing peculiarities : 

(a)  The  definite  article  is  used  before  abstract  or 

generic  nouns.1 

El  hombre  es  mortal,  Man  is  mortal. 
La  vida  es  corta,  Life  is  short. 
La  nieve  es  blanca,  Snow  is  white. 

(b)  In  speaking  of  persons,  the  definite  article  is  al- 
ways placed  before  any  title  of  address. 

el  capitan  Garcia,  Captain  Garcia 

El  profesor  Soler  no  esta,  Professor  iS'oler  is-not-here. 

El  senor  Gutierrez  no  esta,  Mr.  Gutierrez  is-not-here. 

Adjectives,  sometimes  nouns,  are  put  in  the  same 
construction. 

la  pequena  Isabel,  little  Elizabeth 
el  primo  Juan,  Cousin  John 

Note  that  the  article  is  not  used  in  speaking  to  a 
person. 

I  Senor  Blanco,  puede  usted  decirme  .  .  .  ?    Mr.  B.,  can  you 
tell  me  .  .  .  ? 

1  See  Appendix  F. 


156  SPANISH  GUAM  MAR 

(c)  The  definite  article  is  always  used  with  adjec- 
tives of  nationality  employed  as  nouns,  except  directly 
after  hablar  or  en. 

Aprendio  el  frances,  He  learned  French. 
But 

Aqui  se  habla  ingles,  English  is  spoken  here. 
Habla  ingles,  She  speaks  English, 
en  aleman,  in  German 

If  some  expression  intervenes,  then  the  article  is  re- 
tained. 

Habla  muy  bien  el  ingles,  He  speaks  English  very  well. 

The  article  is  always  used  with  castellano,  (Castilian) 

Spanish. 

Habla  el  castellano,  He  speaks  Spanish. 

(d)  The  definite  article  is  used  with  certain  countries 

and  cities,  and  with  any  country  modified. 

en  el  Canada,  in  Canada  el  Paraguay,  Paraguay 

del  Peru,  of  Peru  el  Japon,  Japan 

el  Cairo,  Cairo  el  Callao,  Callao 

la  dulce  Francia,  fair  France 

la  pintoresca  Espafia,  Spain  the  picturesque 

2.  For  the  definite  article  with  expressions  of  time,  see 
Lesson  LX,  4  and  5. 

3.  Note  that  the  definite  article  is  not  repeated  with  a 
second  noun  if  both  nouns  refer  to  the  same  person. 

el  tio  y  profesor,  the  uncle  and  teacher  {same  person) 
VOCABULARY 

corto,  -a,  short  servir  (i),  to  serve;  to  be  good 

dulce,  sweet,  fair,  gentle  for 
latino,  -a,  Latin  siguiente,  following 

mortal,  mortal  el  sobrino,  nephew;  la  sobrina, 

la  nieve,  snow  niece 
pintoresco,  -a,  picturesque         la  vida,  life 

A.  1.  los  hombres  2.  las  madres  son  buenas  3.  el 
Canada  4.  el  Cairo  5.  el  senor  X.  6.  aprenden  el  frances 
7.  la  mujer  8.  el  tio  Guillermo  9.  escribe  muy  bien  el 
aleman  10.  el  profesor  B.  11.  los  alumnos  estudian,  los 
padres  trabajan   12.  la  semana  que  viene   13.  en  espanol 


USES  OF  DEFINITE  ARTICLE 


157 


14.  la  America  espanola  15.  el  Japon  16.  hablan  ingles 
17.  el  lunes  proximo  18.  mi  profesor  y  amigo  19.  su 
senora  esposa   20.  en  aleman 

A  A.  1.  Latin  America  2.  men  are  mortal  3.  pupils 
study  4.  in  English  5.  your  uncle  6.  do  they  speak 
French?  7.  in  German  8.  Japan  9.  do  they  speak 
German?  10.  Callao  11.  next  year  12.  we  are  learning 
Spanish  13.  men  work  14.  next  Sunday  15.  Mr.  S. 
16.  Paraguay  17.  Captain  Garcia  18.  my  nephew  and 
pupil,  Mr.  Gonzalez  19.  they  speak  French  well  20.  fair 
France 

B.  1.  No  me  gusta  estudiar  el  espanol  todo  el  tiempo. 
2.  Los  perros  muerden  los  huesos.  3.  Los  caballos  son  muy 
ligeros,  pero  los  automoviles  son  aun  mas  ligeros.  4.  El 
capitan  Cienfuegos  tiene  un  caballo  que  costo  mil  dos- 
cientos  dolares.  5.  Un  amigo  mio,  el  senor  Moreno,  me 
dijo  que  tiene  tres  hijos  en  aquella  escuela.  6.  La  semana 
pasada,  escribi  una  carta  a  mi  primo.  7.  No  estoy  es- 
cribiendo  al  senor  Sanfuentes,  sino  al  senor  Chaparro. 
8.  El  Canada  esta  cerca  de  los  Estados  Unidos.  9.  Cuando 
estaremos  en  Francia,  estudiaremos  el  frances.  10.  Mi 
prima,  la  pequena  Isabel,  llegara  el  martes  proximo. 
11.  La  pintoresca  Espana  y  la  dulce  Francia — yo  quisiera 
ver  estos  dos  paises  tan  interesantes  (very  interesting 
countries).  12.  El  ano  que  viene  estaremos  en  el  Paraguay 
porque  entonces  pienso  hablar  muy  bien  el  espanol,  que 
vamos  aprendiendo  ahora.  13.  El  profesor  pregunto  al 
alumno:  <jD6nde  esta  el  Callao?  y  el  alumno  contesto:  en 
el  Peru.  14.  El  castellano  se  habla  en  Espana.  15.  Habla 
ingles,  pero  solo  lee  el  espanol.  16.  Los  hombres  tienen 
dos  manos  y  dos  pies.  17.  Quiero  present arle  a  mi  amigo 
y  profesor,  el  senor  Gutierrez.  18.  Ahora  no  vive  en  el 
J  apon. 

BB.  1.  Are  (Van)  horses  or  automobiles  faster? — I  like 
automobiles  better  than  horses.  2.  Which  is  larger — 
Canada  or  the  United  States?  3.  Dogs  like  bones.  4.  Pro- 
fessor Sanchez  asked  a  pupil  where  Cairo  is,  and  the  pupil 


158 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


did  not  answer.  5.  When  we  were  in  Spain,  we  studied 
Spanish  all  the  time.  6.  Do  yon  like  to  study  only  Spanish 
all  the  time?  7.  My  dear  Friend:  that  week  we  were  in 
Spain,  this  week  we  are  in  France,  and  the  latter  part  of 
next  month  w7e  intend  to  be  in  Japan.  9.  He  speaks 
Spanish  very  well,  but  he  doesn't  read  French.  10.  We 
should  very  much  like  to  see  the  fair  France  of  which  we 
are  to  read  in  the  "Chanson  de  Koland."  11.  Aren't  they 
writing  to  Captain  Moreno  today?  12.  They  received  a 
letter  from  him  last  month.  13.  How  much  did  Captain 
Davila  pay  for  his  horse  ?  14.  An  uncle  of  mine,  Pro- 
fessor Uribe,  teaches  in  our  school.  15.  Men  are  mortal. 
16.  Little  Mary  visited  us  last  week  with  her  mother. 


IMPERATIVE 

1.  In  Spanish,  there  are  special  forms  for  the  impera- 
tive only  in  the  intimate  affirmative. 


Except  for  very  marked  emphasis,  the  pronoun  subjects 
are  not  used. 

2.  In  all  other  imperative  forms,  the  subjunctive  is  used. 

(a)  negative  imperative  (intimate) 

no  hables  (tu),  do  not  speak 

no  hableis  (vosotros),  do  not  speak 

no  bebas  (tu),  do  not  drink 

no  bebais  (vosotros),  do  not  drink 

no  escribas  (tu),  do  not  write 

no  escribais  (vosotros),  do  not  write 

(b)  formal,  affirmative  or  negative 

(no)  hable  V.,  (do  not)  speak 
(no)  hablen  W.,  (do  not)  speak 


LESSON  LXII 


habla  (tu),  speak 
bebe  (tu),  drink 
escribe  (tu),  write 


hablad  (vosotros),  speak 
bebed  (vosotros),  drink 
escribid  (vosotros),  write 


IMPEKATIVE 


159 


(no)  beba  V.,  (do  not)  drink 
(no)  beban  VV.,  (do  not)  drink 

(no)  escriba  V.,  (do  not)  write 
(no)  escriban  VV.,  (do  not)  write 

Note  that  the  formal  imperative  must  express  the  pro- 
noun subject  usted,  ustedes  (see  Lesson  XIII,  6). 

3.  The  imperatives  of  the  first  person  plural  and  third 
singular  and  plural  (there  is  no  imperative  of  the  first 
singular)  are  given  in  Lesson  LIV?  2. 

4.  Distinguish  carefully  "Let  him  do  it  (if  he  likes)" 
and  "Let  him  do  it,"  (i.  e.,  don't  stop  him  from  doing  it). 

The  first  uses  (que  plus)  the  subjunctive;  the  second 
uses  the  imperative  of  permitir  or  dejar  plus  the  sub- 
junctive or  infinitive. 

Que  lo  haga  si  quiere,  Let  him  do  it  if  lie  likes. 
Permitale  Vd.  que  lo  haga,  ^ 

Permitale  Vd.  hacerlo,        I  Let  (Permit)  him  (to)  do  it. 
Dejele  Vd.  hacerlo,  J 

5.  Learn  the  intimate  imperatives  below  (the  other 
forms  of  these  verbs  are  of  course  from  the  subjunctive)  : 

tener:  ten  (tu)  tened  (vosotros) 

haber:  he  ha bed 

ser:  se  sed 

estar:  esta  estad 

decir :  di  decid 

ver :  ve  ved 

A.  1.  bebe  2.  decid  3.  conjuga  4.  vivid  5.  vive  (tu) 
6.  habla  7.  bebe  (tu)  8.  temed  9.  no  seas  10.  laven 
ustedes  11.  coma  usted  12.  estad  13.  no  tenga  usted 
14.  venda  Vd.  15.  tengan  ustedes  16.  no  aburras  17.  lee 
18.  no  leas  19.  esten  ustedes  20.  no  vendais  21.  busca 
22.  no  tengais  23.  ten  24.  escriba  V.  25.  ved  26.  no 
tengas  27.  escribamos  28.  tenga  Vd.  29.  no  venda  TJd. 
30.  no  tengan  ustedes  31.  no  vendas  32.  no  busques 
33.  no  busque  V.  34.  cierre  Vd.  35.  no  yerre  Ud. 
36.  cierra  37.  cuenta  38.  almuerza  39.  vuelve  40.  repi- 
tan  Vds.   41.  no  cuente  Vd.   42.  no  repitas   43.  no  almor- 


160 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


ceis  44.  no  vuelvan  ustedes  45.  que  tengan  46.  que 
coman   47.  que  diga 

AA.  1.  have  2.  play  3.  don't  have  4.  have  5.  count 
6.  say  7.  let  us  play  8.  be  9.  look-foj;  10.  see  11.  return 
12.  be  13.  don't  return  14.  do  not  be  15.  don't  look-for 
16.  say  17.  tell  18.  don't  fear  19.  wash.  20.  have- 
breakfast  21.  read  22.  don't  eat  23.  don't  look-for 
24.  sell  25.  repeat  26.  do  not  count  27.  count  28.  drink 
29.  don't  be  30.  be  31.  say  32.  don't  conjugate  33.  let 
him  be  34.  don't  work  35.  study  36.  let  us  study  37.  let 
them  study   38.  let  them  drink   39.  let  her  eat 

B.  1.  Trabaja  en  America,  donde  hay  buen  trabajo. 
2.  Vende  las  pizarras  que  has  hallado.  3.  No  comais  la 
comida  que  el  preparo ;  no  cocina  bien.  4.  Leed  este  libro, 
y  os  alegrareis  de  haberlo  leido  (past  participle  of  leer). 

5.  Sed  alumnas  diligentes  y  todas  tendreis  buenas  notas. 

6.  Acueste  Ud.  al  nino,  Senora,  porque  se  ve  (it  is  evident; 
lit,  it  sees  itself)  que  tiene  sueno.  7.  No  venda  usted  su 
casa  a  aquel  hombre ;  nunca  puede  pagar.  8.  Di  a  tu  padre 
todo  lo  que  te  dijeron  a  ti.  9.  Quedese  Vd.  aqui,  pues  yo 
tengo  que  irme.  10.  Vd.  tendra  que  quedarse  aquihasta  que 
Uegue  mi  hermano.  11.  Siga  usted  buscando  a  su  hermano 
porque  bien  pronto  le  hallara.  12.  Ten  la  verdad  como  la 
mejor  cosa  del  mundo.  13.  No  digas  eso  a  tu  padre. 
14.  No  compren  Vds.  una  casa  en  aquella  calle ;  es  la  calle 
mas  sucia  del  mundo.  15.  Halle  usted  sus  libros  antes  que 
vuelva.  16.  Escriban  Vds.  a  sus  padres  todas  las  semanas 
hasta  que  vuelvan  a  casa.    17.  No  cuente  usted  el  dinero. 

18.  Eepita  usted  a  estos  senores  lo  que  nos  dijo  ayer. 

19.  Que  lo  tengan  si  tanto  les  gusta.  20.  Busque  usted  sus 
libros;  si  no  los  busca,  no  los  hallara. 

BB.  1.  Don't  work  in  Spain — there  isn't  much  work 
there.  2.  Write  to  your  parents  every  day  while  you  are 
at  (the)  school.  3.  Don't  look  for  your  books;  I  have 
found  them  already.  4.  Put  your  children  to  bed,  Mrs. 
Smith;  they  are  tired.    5.  Don't  stay  here  any  longer, 


IMPERATIVE  WITH  PRONOUN  OBJECTS  161 


John,  for  I  shall  be  here  until  they  arrive.  6.  Don't  sell 
your  automobile  until  you  are  sure  that  you  can  buy 
another.  7.  Don't  be  so  lazy;  study  sometimes.  8.  Keep 
on  studying,  and  you  will  soon  have  good  marks,  as  your 
sister  has  (them).  9.  Read  these  books,  Mr.  Garcia;  you 
will  find  in  them  much  that  is  interesting.  10.  Don't  sell 
the  things  you  found — you  may  (can)  find  the  [one]  who 
lost  them.  11.  Don't  count  your  money,  John,  until  you 
earn  it.  12.  Always  tell  the  truth.  13.  Don't  sell  your 
house  until  you  have  another  for  yourself.  14.  Buy  that 
house  if  they  want  to  sell  it ;  it  is  the  best  one  in  the  city. 
15.  Don't  tell  your  father  what  they  said,  for  they  did  not 
tell  the  truth.  16.  Find  your  books  when  you  reach  home 
(to  the  house)  today;  for  without  them  you  are  not  to  come 
back  to  school.  17.  Don't  buy  a  piano  unless  you  play  the 
piano. 

LESSON  LXIII 

IMPERATIVE  WITH  PRONOUN  OBJECTS 

Review  Lessons  XXI;  XXXVIII;  LIV,  2;  LVII,  4;  and 
LXII. 

1.  "With  the  negative  imperatives,  the  pronoun  objects 
always  precede  the  verb. 

No  lo  ensenes,  Don't  show  it. 

But  with  an  affirmative  imperative,1  they  follow  and  are 
joined  to  it. 

Ensenalo,  Juan,  Show  it,  John. 
Ensenelo  usted,  senor  Garcia,  Show  it,  Mr.  G. 
Ensenadlo,  Show  it  (intimate  plural). 
Ensenemelo  Vd.,  Show  it  to  me. 

Note  that  the  stress  remains  on  the  original  syllable  of 
the  verb  when  pronouns  are  added;  and  that  this  may 
necessitate  a  written  accent  mark. 

1  In  all,  three  cases  have  the  pronoun  object  follow  the  verb :  present  parti- 
ciple, (teniendolo) ;  infinitive  (tenerlo) ;  and  affirmative  imperative  (tengalo  Vd.) . 

6 


162 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


In  the  third  persons  singular  and  plural,  the  pronouns 
precede  even  in  the  affirmative,  provided  que  is  used. 
Que  lo  digan  (ellos)  si  quieren,  Let  them  say  it  if  they  like. 

But, 

Diganlo  (ellos)  si  quieren,  Let  them  say  it  if  they  like. 

2.  Keflexive  pronouns  follow  exactly  the  same  rules  as 
the  ordinary  direct  and  indirect  pronouns. 

acuestate,  go  to  bed;  no  te  acuestes,  don't  go  to  bed 

Usted,  as  usual,  takes  everything  in  the  third  person, 
acuestese  V.,  go  to  bed;  no  se  acuesten  Vds.,  don't  go  to  bed 

3.  The  affirmative  second  person  plural  and  first  person 
plural  drop  final  -d  and  -s  respectively  of  the  verb  when 
adding  the  reflexive  pronouns  (os,  nos).  Cf.  Lesson  LIV, 
2,  Note,  par.  3. 

acostaos,  go  to  bed  {for  acostad  plus  os) 
acostemonos,  let  us  go  to  bed  (for  acostemos  plus  nos) 

Such  contraction  occurs  nowhere  else  than  in  the  two 

cases  above.  It  never  occurs,  for  instance,  in  the  negative. 

no  nos  afeitemos,  let  us  not  shave 

VOCABULARY 

ajeno,  -a,  strange,  foreign;  that       enteramente,  entirely 

of  another  el  maestro,  la  maestra,  teacher 

arrimarse,  to  approach,  to  come    la  vista,  sight ;  view 
close 

A.  1.  lavate  2.  bebalo  Vd.  3.  sientate  4.  escribamonos 
uno  a  otro  5.  no  os  escribais  mas  de  dos  veces  6.  lealo  Vd. 
7.  pideselo  8.  pagueselo  Vd.  9.  peinaos  10.  limpialo  11. 
pidanselo  Vds.  12.  que  sentemos  13.  presentese  Vd.  a  ella 
14.  sientense  ustedes  15.  lavaos  16.  ensenaselo  a  61 
17.  pidanselo  Vds.  a  ella  18.  que  se  escriban  unos  a  otros 
19.  lavese  Vd.  20.  acuerdese  V.  de  .  .  .  21.  peinate 
22.  no  lo  peines  23.  jno  lo  pienses!  24.  pidanselo  ustedes 
a  ellas  25.  enseneselo  Vd.  a  61  26.  felicitense  ustedes, 
senores  27.  llegate  (approach)  28.  dirijase  usted  29. 
sentaos  30.  no  llegue  usted  31.  dirigete  32.  acuerdate 
33.  creame  Vd.   34.  j  salvate !   35.  creeme 

AA.    1.  I  sit  down   2.  get  washed   3.  cook  it   4.  pay 


IMPEKATIVE  WITH  PRONOUN"  OBJECTS 


163 


them  5.  comb  yourself  6.  ask  them  for  it  7.  wash  them 
8.  introduce  them  to  her  9.  let  him  ask  them  10.  comb 
him  11.  congratulate  yourself  12.  ask  him  for  them 
13.  show  them  14.  write  to  each  other  15.  ask  it  of  them 
16.  I  don't  think  so  17.  don't  think  so  (it)  !  18.  clean 
them  19.  approach  20.  come  here  (llegarse)  21.  remem- 
ber 22.  sit  down  23.  rejoice  24.  follow  him  25.  let  us 
write  to  one  another  26.  bathe  27.  sit  down  28.  make 
your  way  29.  let  us  sit  down  30.  take  a  bath  31.  intro- 
duce them  to  them  32.  shave  33.  show  them  to  them 
34.  pay  them  for  it  35.  read  it  36.  run-off  37.  believe  us 
38.  let  us  remember 

B.  1.  Acordaos  unos  de  otros  mas  tarde.  2.  Tenlo 
(Consider  it)  por  seguro  que  no  te  ensenare  lo  que  he 
hallado.  3.  Si  quieren  vender  su  casa,  comprela  usted. 
4.  Escribaos  uno  a  otro  de  manera  que  no  os  perdais  en- 
teramente  de  vista.  5.  No  se  lo  pida  usted  nada  a  su  tio, 
porque  el  no  tiene  nada  que  darle.  6.  Diganles  ustedes 
que  no  estare  en  su  casa  hoy.  7.  Veanse  Uds.  en  el  espejo 
lo  (how)  sucios  que  estan.  8.  Entregueles  usted  el  dinero 
que  tiene  para  ellos.  9.  Sed  siempre  buenos,  y  sereis 
felices.     10.  Ensenale  a  tu  padre  lo  que  has  hallado. 

11.  Permitame  Vd.  que  le  ensene  la  leccion  de  su  hijo. 

12.  Felicitense  ustedes  de  tener  ninos  tan  buenos.  13.  Con- 
tentate  con  lo  que  tienes;  no  busques  lo  ajeno.  14.  Ya 
sabe  Ud.  por  que  trabajamos  asi.  15.  Enviales  una  carta, 
porque  no  les  escribimos  la  semana  pasada.  16.  Sientate 
ahi  y  quedate  hasta  que  acabemos  de  hablar.  17.  Lealo 
usted  porque  muy  interesante  es.  18.  Hallalo  antes  de 
Uegar  a  la  casa,  porque  si  no,  no  te  dejara  entrar  tu  papa. 
19.  Digalo  V.  a  su  padre,  porque  muy  contento  estara  el 
al  oirlo.  20.  Comprame  aquel  piano,  porque  de  muy 
buenas  ganas  aprenderia  yo  a  tocarlo. 

BB.  1.  Put  the  child  to  bed,  madam,  because  the  little 
[one]  must  be  very  tired.  2.  Buy  me  some  pencils,  John, 
I  haven't  any;  and  buy  some  (los)  good  [ones].  3.  Ee- 
peat  it,  because  I  did  not  hear  what  you  said.   4.  Look-f or 


164 


SPANISH  GEAMMAR 


them  until  you  find  them.  5.  Give  him  the  money  you 
found,  because  it  is  not  yours.  6.  Permit  me  to  show  you 
what  they  wrote  yesterday  in  my  book.  7.  Now  you  know 
what  work  they  want  to  do.  8.  Look  at  yourself  in  the 
glass — aren't  you  dirty!  ( j lo  sucio  que  estas!)  9.  Con- 
gratulate yourself  on  having  such  good  marks — it  is  evi- 
dent that  you  study  well.  10.  Read  the  books  I  bought — 
they  are  the  most  interesting  I  have  ever  read.  11.  Let 
us  be  satisfied  with  what  we  have;  let  us  not  seek  what- 
others-have  (lo  ajeno).  12.  Let  us  sit  down  here  and  talk. 
13.  Find  it  before  you  return  home.  14.  Send  them  a 
letter.  Let  us  both  write  them  letters.  15.  Ask  me  for 
nothing — I  have  nothing  to  give  you.  16.  Let  us  write 
each  other  every  week  so  that  we  may  have  sure  news  of 
each  other.  17.  Buy  them  for  him.  18.  Let  him  cook  the 
dinner.  19.  Don't  let  those  books  get  lost  (Let  those  books 
not  lose  themselves).  20.  Always  try  to  be  happy. 
21.  And  be  good ;  with  that,  you  will  always  be  happy. 


Esta 
Hace 


LESSON  LXIV 

1.  Spanish  Present  for  English  Perfect.  In  Spanish, 
the  present  tense  is  used  to  denote  an  action  begun  in  the 
past  and  continued  to  the  present.  In  English,  the  per- 
fect is  used. 

a  aqui  desde  hace  tres  dias, )  H  h    been  h     f    three  d 
:e  tres  dias  que  esta  aqui,  )  J 

Similarly,  the  imperfect  denotes  an  action  begun  far  in 
the  past  and  continued  to  some  nearer  time. 

Estaba  aqui  desde  hacia  tres  dias,  }  He  had  been  here  for  three 
Hacia  tres  dias  que  estaba  aqui,     ]  days. 

This  construction  is  not  found  in  the  negative. 

Hace  un  afio  que  no  ha  estado  aqui,  He  hasn't  been  here  for  a 
year. 


oonocer;  saber;  poder  165 

2.  The  conjunction  e  for  y  and  u  for  o.  Before  a  noun 
beginning  with  i  (hi-)  the  conjunction  y  becomes  e;  and 
before  a  noun  beginning  with  o-  (ho-)  the  conjunction  o 
becomes  u.  This  is  to  prevent  two  i's  or  two  o's  coming 
together. 

G6mez  e  hijo,  Gomez  and  Son 
uno  u  otro,  one  or  another,  either 

But  y  is  retained  before  y-  or  hie-. 

verdad  y  yerro,  truth  and  error 
agua  y  hielo,  water  and  ice 

3.  Por'and  Para.    Para  denotes  purpose,  destination. 

taza  para  te,  teacup 

el  lapiz  es  para  el,  the  pencil  is  for  him 

Por  means  on  account  of,  in  exchange  for,  by  means  of. 

Me  da  su  pluma  por  mi  lapiz,  He  gives  me  his  pen  for  my  pencil. 
Viajan  por  automovil,  They  travel  by  automobile. 
Lo  hace  por  mi,  He  does  it  for  me  (on  my  account). 

For  por  (de)  to  denote  the  agent  with  the  passive,  see 
Lesson  XVI,  3. 

4.  Distinguish  between  the  following  verbs: 

conocer,  to  know  (to  be  acquainted  with,  to  know  through  hav- 
ing seen,  heard,  etc.) 

saber,  to  know  (to  be  aware  of,  to  have  as  part  of  one's  mental 
knowledge;  to  know  how) 

;.Conoce  usted  al  senor  Herrera?    Do  you  know  Mr.  Herrera? 
Sabemos  que  Vd.  le  conoce,  We  know  that  you  are  acquainted 
with  him. 

saber,  can  (to  know  how,  to  be  mentally  able) 
poder,  can  (to  be  physically  able) 

Sabe  leer,  She  can  (knows  how  to)  read. 
Puede  levantarlo,  He  can  lift  it.  * 

5.  saber  a,  to  taste  of 

La  comida  sabe  a  cebollas,  The  dinner  tastes  of  onions. 


166 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


VOCABULARY 

el  ano,  year  ordinario,  -a,  ordinary 

el  arbol,  tree  el  pensamiento,  thought 

asistir,  to  be  present  pensar  (ie),  to  think 

la  cebolla,  onion  pensar  (ie)  en,  to  think  of  {to 

desde,  since  occupy  the  mind  with) 

europeo,  -a,  European  pensar  (ie)  de,  to  think  of  (to 

excelente,  excellent  have  an  opinion  of) 

hace  tres  dias,  three  days  ago       respectado,  -a,  respected 

la  hacienda,  country  estate  siempre,  always 

indio,  -a,  Indian  la  taza,  cup 

el  instinto,  instinct  taza  para  te,  teacup 

luchar,  to  struggle,  to  wrestle       taza  de  te,  cup  of  tea 
mientras,  while  elyerro,  error,  mistake 

nadar,  to  swim 

A.  1.  es  para  el  2.  hace  dos  dias  3.  flojo  u  ocupado 
4.  hace  ocho  dias  (a  week,  as  the  Spanish  reckon  the  first 
day)  que  estoy  aqui  5.  nos  conoce  6.  no  sabemos  leer  el 
castellano  7.  saben  que  estaremos  8.  sabe  a  9.  saben 
nadar  10.  estaba  enfermo,  pero  ahora  puede  nadar 
11.  para  ella  12.  por  el  13.  felices  e  infelices  14.  libro 
para  principiar  15.  ordinaria  o  excelente  16.  no  podemos 
levantarlos  17.  infelices  y  felices  18.  por  la  manana 
19.  Ie  conocemos  solo  desde  hace  quince  dias  20.  <;no  lo 
conoceis  de  vista?  21.  flojo  u  ocupado  22.  es  conocido  de 
todos  23.  por  ciento  treinta  dolares  24.  para  su  padre 
25.  la  vajilla  fue  lavada  por  la  nina 

A  A.  1.  they  have  been  working  here  for  twelve  weeks 
2.  we  know  that  you  know  him  3.  it  is  for  them  4.  Euro- 
peans and  Indians  5.  coming  and  going  (venirse  e  irse) 
6.  one  or  another  7.  we  know  Madrid  well  8.  he  can 
write  English  9.  he  can  wrestle  with  his  brother  10.  I 
write  it  for  him  11.  can  he  wrestle?  12.  a  teacup  13.  do 
you  know  them?  14.  it  tastes  of  15.  Indians  and  Euro- 
peans 16.  do  you  know  it?  17.  they  knew  him  18.  they 
are  known  by  all  19.  for  three  dollars  20.  it  was  read  by 
my  brother   21.  lazy  or  busy  students 

B.  1.  Hacia  tres  dias  que  estaban  alii,  y  todavia  no 
habian  principiado  a  trabajar.    2.  Saben  que  hemos  ha- 


SPANISH  PKESENT  EOR  ENGLISH  PERFECT  167 

llado  el  reloj  que  perdieron.  3.  Gomez  e  hijo  ya  no  estan 
en  Madrid ;  estan  en  Sevilla  y  tienen  una  hacienda  cerca 
de  alii.  4.  Todos  los  soldados  perdieron  sus  armas  mientras 
dormian.  5.  No  sabemos  lo  que  usted  dice.  6.  Bste  nino 
no  sabe  leer,  ni  siquiera  sabe  escribir.  7.  Yo  no  puedo  leer 
mas — estoy  enfermo  y  no  tengo  mas  fuerzas.  8.  No 
quiero  comer — toda  la  comida  sabe  a  cebollas.  9.  Flojo  u 
ocupado,  feliz  e  infeliz,  excelente  u  ordinario — en  este 
mundo  hay  [de]  todo.  10.  Compre  este  libro  para  mi 
hermano,  porque  el  sabe  leer — tiene  ocho  anos.  11.  Hace 
tres  anos  que  vivimos  en  esta  casa,  y  mucho  nos  gusta  esta 
calle.  12.  Por  la  tarde  cayo  (he  fell)  y  ahora  tiene  el 
brazo  enfermo.  13.  Europeos  e  indios — unos  y  otros  son 
hombres — y  los  hombres  sen  todos  mortales,  todos  tienen 
alma.  14.  Sabemos  que  usted  no  conoce  a  mi  hermano; 
quiero  presentarle  a  usted.  15.  Yo  queria  decirle  lo  que 
pensaba  de  el.  16.  No  piense  usted  en  esas  cosas.  17.  La 
compro  por  el  senor  X.,  el  cual  la  dio  a  su  hija.  18.  Cono- 
cemos  a  un  hombre  que  sabe  lo  que  hay  en  este  libro — lo 
escribio  el  mismo.  19.  Deseo  comprar  la  casa — es  la  mejor 
de  aquella  calle.  20.  Estos  lap  ices  son  para  tu  hermana. 
21.  Yo  soy;  el  es. 

BB.  1.  Didn't  the  soldiers  find  their  arms?  Are  they 
lost?  2.  Do  you  know  that  they  found  the  axe  they  lost? 
3.  He  works  from  six  in  the  afternoon  to  two  a.  m.  4.  He 
is  so  diligent  and  industrious  that  he  always  gets  good 
marks.  5.  They  know  we  met  him  last  year  in  Madrid. 
6.  That  smells  of  onions — I  don't  like  onions — I  won't 
eat  it.  7.  Happy  and  unhappy,  excellent  and  common- 
place (ordinary),  there  are  all  sort[s]  of  students  in  my 
class.  8.  They  have  been  working  here  for  eighteen  years, 
and  they  will  be  working  here  for  ever.  9.  He  is  always 
thinking  of  such  things — truth,  the  soul,  and  so  on.  10.  He 
is  philosophizing.  11.  They  have  been  visiting  us  once  a 
year  (al  ano)  for  thirteen  years.  12.  We  wished  to  buy 
the  piano,  when  we  were  told  that  it  cost  too  much.  13.  I 
bought  your  uncle 's  books  for  my  brother.    14.  Fernandez 


168 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


and  Son  are  no  longer  (mas)  in  that  street.  15.  His  arm 
is  hurt.  16.  It  is  they.  17.  Can't  this  child  read  ?  18.  How 
old  is  he?  19.  He  doesn't  know  how  to  wrestle.  20.  Euro- 
peans and  Indians  do  not  live  happily  together. 


LESSON  LXV 

1.  Irregular  Past  Participles.  Seven  verbs  in  Spanish 
have  an  irregular  past  participle,  though  regular  in  all 
other  forms. 

abrir,  to  open;  abierto,  opened 

cubrir,  to  cover;  cubierto,  covered 

escribir,  to  write;  escrito,  written 

imprimir,  to  print;  impreso,  printed,  imprinted 

morir  (ue),  to  die;  muerto,  died,  dead;  {transitively)  killed 

volver  (ue),  to  return;  vuelto,  returned 

solver  (ue)  to  solve;  suelto,  loose,  loosened;  solved 

2.  Four  regular  Spanish  verbs  have  an  irregular  past 
participle  in  addition  to  the  regular  past  participle. 

oprimir,  to  oppress;  oprimido,  opreso  {rare),  oppressed 
suprimir,  to  suppress;  suprimido,  supreso  {rare),  suppressed 
prender,  to  catch;  prendido  {used  for  perfect  tenses),  preso  (ad- 
jectival) 

romper,  to  break,  to  tear;  rompido  {used  for  perfect  tenses), 
roto  {adjectival) 

3.  Verbs  in  -ducir  belong  to  the  so-called  inceptive 
verbs.   For  the  present  tense,  see  Lesson  LVIII,  (b). 

conducir,  to  drive,  to  conduct,  to  take  (stem  inceptive) 
preterite  indicative  past  subjunctive 

conduje  condujese  condujera 

condujiste  condujeses  condujeras 

condujo  condujese  condujera 

condujimos  condujesemos  condujeramos 

condujisteis  condujeseis  condujerais 

condujeron  condujesen  condujeran 

Note  that  the  first  and  third  singular  of  the  preterite 
indicative  do  not  stress  the  ending;  also  that  the  third 
singular  and  plural,  as  well  as  the  first  singular,  do  not 
have  the  usual  preterite  endings  of  -ir  verbs. 


IRREGULAR  PAST  PARTICIPLES 


169 


Note  -j-  in  the  stem;  and  no  diphthongs  in  the  endings. 

VOCABULARY 

la  cantidad,  quantity,  amount       el  juez,  judge 

deducir,  to  deduce  reducir,  to  reduce 

la  hoja,  leaf,  page  tener  a,  to  hold 

A.  Give  the  past  participles  of:  1.  to  write  2.  to  im- 
print 3.  to  come  4.  to  loose  (to  solve)  5.  to  return  6.  to 
print   7.  to  return   8.  to  die   9.  to  solve 

AA.  1.  han  muerto  2.  conducimos  3.  ha  escrito  4.  con- 
duce 5.  que  deduzcan  6.  habian  conducido  7.  reducir 
8.  estaba  escrito  9.  queda  escrito  10.  han  vuelto  11.  lo 
condujimos  12.  ha  muerto  13.  se  ha  muerto  14.  esta 
todo  impreso  15.  ^esta  abierto?  16.  esta  abierta  17.  fue 
abierto  18.  que  conduzcamos  19.  que  condujeses  20.  esta 
escrito  21.  hojas  sueltas  22.  fue  impreso  23.  que  haya 
reducido 

AAA.  1.  that  we  deduce  2.  is  it  opened?  3.  she  died 
4.  did  he  return?  5.  he  led  6.  printed  7.  I  reduced  .  8.  I 
conducted  9.  that  you  are  leading  10.  it  is  written 
11.  you  conducted  12.  that  he  deduced  13.  that  she  has 
led  14.  by  whom  was  it  opened?  15.  has  she  written? 
16.  they  reduced  17.  covered  18.  oppressed  19.  captive 
(preso)  20.  loose  21.  imprinted  22.  they  have  sup- 
pressed   23.  suppressed 

B.  1.  Tiene  su  libro  abierto  y  esta  leyendo  (is  reading). 
2.  iQue  deduce  usted  de  todo  eso?  3.  Digale  V.  que  con- 
duzca  al  nifio  a  mi  padre.  4.  Condujeron  al  hombre,  al 
que  tenia  por  el  brazo,  al  juez.  5.  Dos  jueces  han  muerto 
la  semana  pasada.  6.  Han  vuelto  a  hacer  la  misma  cosa. 
7.  Nunca  escribio  un  libro ;  ha  escrito,  si,  unas  hojas  sueltas 
(occasional) — nada  mas.  8.  No  se  han  escrito  una  a  otra 
desde  que  la  mayor  dejo  la  ciudad.  9.  Despues  de  sacar 
una  cantidad  de  dinero  al  tio,  le  dejaron  solo  y  sin  familia. 
10.  ;  Pobre  nina  !  esta  muerta — y  ;  que  infeliz  era !  11.  Han 
impreso  el  libro  del  senor  Gutierrez,  pero  yo  no  creo  que 
sea  tan  bueno  como  el  primero  que  escribio.  12.  Quitaron 
a  mi  hermano  todo  lo  que  tenia  y  lo  dejaron  asi,    13.  Han 


170 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


cubierto  la  mesa  con  libros  y  papeles.  14.  Tienen  el  hom- 
bre  preso. 

BB.  1.  Who  printed  the  book  your  brother  wrote? 
2.  It  isn't  written  yet.  3.  He  will  never  write  a  book;  he 
has  written  some  occasional  pages,  but  that  is  all.  4.  They 
have  written  me  that  they  will  visit  us  next  Wednesday. 
5.  He  has  again  bought  a  house  in  that  city  and  intends  to 
remain  there  for  ever.  6.  His  book  is  open,  but  he  is  not 
studying.  7.  Poor  dog!  He  is  dead  now.  8.  They  took 
from  the  little  boy  all  the  things  he  had,  and  then  they 
ran  away.  9.  Tell  them  to  bring  the  child  here — I  shall 
see  what  is  the  matter  with  him.  10.  They  told  me  that 
Mr.  X.  died  last  week.  11.  I  want  them  to  bring  the  man 
they  found  (who  was)  robbing  the  child.  12.  They  have 
done-away-with  (suprimir)  examinations  this  year.  13.  The 
soldiers  found  the  man. 


LESSON  LXVI 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS  OF  VERBS;  IRREGULAR  VERBS 

1.  The  various  forms  of  Spanish  verbs  are  made  up  on 
five  fundamental  parts — the  so-called  principal  parts: 
(1)  first  person  singular  present  indicative;  (2)  infinitive; 
(3)  present  participle ;  (4)  past  participle;  (5)  third  per- 
son plural  preterite  indicative. 

hablar,  to  speak  {stem  habl-) 
From  (1),  hablo,  are  formed: 

(a)  present  indicative:  habl-o,  -as,  -a;  amos,  -ais,  -an 

(b)  present  subjunctive:  habl-e,  -es,  -e;  -emos,  -eis,  -en 

(c)  imperative,  intimate  affirmative:   habl-a;  -ad 

(d)  imperfect  indicative:    habl-aba,  -abas,  -aba;  -abamos,  -abais, 

-aban 

forms  of  the  present  subjunctive. 

The  other  imperatives  come  from  the  corresponding 

From  (2),  hablar,  are  formed: 

(a)  future  indicative:  hablar-e,  -as,  -a;  -emos,  -eis,  -an 

(b)  conditional:  hablar-ia,  -ias,  -la;   -iamos,  -iais,  -ian 


PKINCIPAL  PARTS  OF  VERBS 


171 


From  (3),  hablando,  are  formed: 

the  progressive  tenses  with  estar,  seguir,  andar,  venir,  etc. 
estoy  hablando,  sigue  escribiendo,  etc. 

From  (4),  hablado,  are  formed: 

(a)  the  perfect  tenses:  he  hablado,  habre  hablado,  que  haya  hablado, 

etc. 

(b)  the  passive  voice:  esta  escrito,  fue  escrito,  etc. 
From  (5)  hablaron1  are  formed: 

(a)  the  preterite  indicative:   habl-e,  -aste,  -6;  -amos,  -asteis,  -aron 

(b)  the  past  subjunctive:  habl-ase,  -ases,  -ase;  -asemos,  -aseis,  -asen 

habl-ara,  -aras,  -ara;  -aramos,  -arais,  -aran 

(c)  the  future  subjunctive:    habl-are,  -ares,  -are;  -aremos,  -areis, 

-aren 

The  future  subjunctive,  which  is  discussed  briefly  in 
Lesson  LXXVII,  need  not  be  learned  here  (but  note  simi- 
larity with  forms  of  past  -ra  subjunctive). 

2.  Of  irregular  verbs  below,  note  that  nearly  all  irregu- 
larities are  due  to  changes  in  the  stem.  Of  the  endings, 
the  future  and  conditional  are  always  regular. 

Some  verbs  with  an  irregular  first  person  singular  in- 
dicative form  the  entire  present  subjunctive  on  the  stem 
of  that  form.  Of  the  verbs  already  given,  ser,  decir,  tener 
go  by  this  rule.  Note  that  haber  is  an  exception  to  this 
rule. 

3.  Salir,  to  go  out 

(1)  salgo2 

(a)  salgo,  sales,  sale;  salimos,  salis,  salen 

(b)  saiga,  saigas,  saiga;  salgamos,  salgais,  salgan 

(c)  sal  salid 

(d)  salia,  salias,  salia;  saliamos,  saliais,  salian 

(2)  salir  {contracted  to  saldr-) 

(a)  saldre,  saldras,  saldrd;  saldremos,  saldreis,  saldran 

(b)  saldria,  saldrias,  saldria;  saldriamos,  saldriais,  saldrian 

(3)  saliendo 

esta  saliendo,  etc. 

1  Strictly,  the  first  and  second  persons  singular  and  plural  of  many  verbs  are 
to  be  connected  with  the  forms  in  (1);  but  for  convenience,  all  verbs  are  given 
as  hablar  above. 

2  Forms  in  boldface  have  some  irregularity. 


172 


SPANISH  GKA^OIAB, 


(b)  no  passive 


(b)  traeria,  traenas,  etc. 


(b)  fue  traido,  etc. 


(4)  salido 
(a)  lie  salido.  etc. 

[5)  salieron 

(a)  salt  saliste,  etc. 

(b)  saliese,  salieses,  etc.    saliera,  salieras,  etc. 
[cj  saliere,  salieres,  etc. 

i.  Traer.  to  bring,  to  fetch 
(1)  traigo 

(a  )  traigo,  traes,  trae:  traernos,  traeis,  traen 

(b)  traiga,  traigas,  traiga;  traigamos,  traigais,  traigan 

(c)  trae  traed 

(d)  traia,  traias,  etc. 
2  traer 

(a)  traere,  traeras,  etc. 

(3)  trayendo 
esta  trayendo,  etc. 

(4)  traido 
(a)  he  traido,.  etc. 

(5)  trajeron 

(a)  traje,  trajiste,  trajo;  trajimos,  trajisteis,  trajeron 

(b)  trajese,  trajeses,  trajese;  trajesemos,  trajeseis,  trajesen 
trajera,  trajeras,  trajera;  trajeramos,  trajerais,  trajeran 

(c)  trajere,  trajeres,  trajere;  trajeremos,  trajereis,  trajeren 

o.  Valer.  to  be  worth 

(1)  valgo 

(a)  valgo,  vales,  vale:  valernos,  valeis.  valen 

(b)  valga,  valgas,  valga;  valgamos,  valgais,  valgan 

(e)  val  or  vale  valed 

(d)  valia,  valias,  etc. 

(2)  valer  (contracted  to  valdr-) 

(a)  valdre,  valdras,  etc-. 

(3)  valiendo 

(4)  valido 
(a)  ha  valido,  etc. 

(5)  valieron 

(a)  vali,  valiste,  etc. 

(b)  valiese,  valieses.  etc. 

(c)  valiere.  valieres,  etc. 

VOCABULARY 

copiar,  to  copy  pasearse,  to  take  a  walk,  to  go  out 

A.  Give  the  principal  parts  of:  1.  vivir  2.  conjugar 
3,  beber  4.  estar  5.  coiner  6.  tener  7.  rezar  8.  haber 
9.  ser. 


(b)  valdria,  valdnas,  etc. 


(b)  no  passive 


valiera,  valieras.  etc. 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS  OF  VERBS 


173 


AA.  1.  Form  the  tenses  from  each  part  of  the  above 
verbs. 

AAA.    1.  vali    2.  traigo    3.  salir    4.  valgo    5.  traer 

6.  trajeron  7.  hemos  salido  8.  habian  traido  9.  he  valido 
10.  trayendo  11.  salgo  12.  valiendo  13.  vali  14.  salieron 
15.  valieron  16.  valdran  17.  que  valga  18.  traigo  19.  traje 

20.  traeme  21.  traereis  22.  que  salgamos  23.  que  salieran 
24.  salgamos  25.  valian  26.  trayendome  27.  no  salgan 
ustedes    28.  que  valiese 

AAAA.  1.  it  was  worth  2.  I  bring  3.  we  shan't  go 
4.  he  is  going  out    5.  they  brought    6.  that  we  are  worth 

7.  going  out  8.  to  go  out  9.  they  went  out  10.  let  us 
bring  11.  that  they  brought  12.  to  bring  13.  going  out 
14.  let  us  go  out  15.  weren't  you  going  out?  16.  that 
they  might  be  worth  17.  they  will  bring  18.  that  they 
went  out    19.  it  can  be  brought    20.  it  will  be  worth 

21.  bringing   22.  were  they  bringing? 

B.  1.  Ha  hablado  usted  todavia  a  su  padre  de  los 
libros  que  trajo  consigo?  2.  De  cuanto  dinero  con  que 
salio,  nada  tiene  ahora.  3.  No  vale  nada — ni  siquiera  sabe 
trabajar.  4.  Y  ^que  quiere  usted  que  valga?  5.  No  puede 
salir  hoy  el  nino — esta  enfermo.  6.  En  aquella  esquina 
hay  una  casa  blanca,  de  donde  salieron  los  dos  hombres  a 
quienes  usted  busca.  7.  Y  si  escribe  el  ejercicio,  <;que 
valdra  tal  trabajo  escrito?  8.  Han  deseado  que  nosotros 
salieramos  con  ellos,  pero  no  hemos  tenido  mucho  tiempo 
para  pasearnos.  9.  No  acabo  de  hablar  cuando  volvio  a 
salir  el  primo.  10.  Saliamos  de  la  casa  cuando  entro 
nuestro  primo  don  Jorge.  11.  No  puede  jugar  ahora 
porque  saldra  dentro  de  poco.  12.  Traeme  un  libro,  no 
tengo  nada  que  leer  ahora.  13.  No  valiendo  nada  hoy,  es 
posible  que  valga  algo  manana.  14.  ^Que  te  trajeron  tus 
tios?  15.  Sal  ahora  misino;  no  quiero  que  quedes  mas 
tiempo  aqui.  16.  No  salgan  ustedes,  porque  nos  queda 
todavia  mucho  que  hacer  con  ustedes.  17.  Traigame  Vd. 
otro  vaso  de  leche — este  no  es  muy  grande. 


174 


SPANISH  GBAMMAB 


BB.  1.  Let  us  leave  (go  out)  before  they  return.  2.  Tell 
them  to  bring  me  some  (a  little  of)  dinner;  I  haven't 
eaten  all  day.  3.  Did  you  show  me  the  book  that  you 
brought  to  your  father?  4.  Does  it  look  (parece)  good  to 
him?  5.  A  certain  friend  of  mine  told  me  that  they 
brought  him  the  book  of  which  you  were  speaking  to  me ; 
can  you  tell  me  what  (how)  is-its-title ?  6.  They  didn't 
prepare  the  exercises  they  brought,  but  they  copied  them ; 
and  so  these  exercises  are  worth  nothing.  7.  Where  are 
the  books  they  brought  with  them?  8.  Don't  go-out, 
Henry,  for  they  haven't  come  yet,  and  I  should  like  to 
talk  with  you  till  they  come.  9.  He  had  just  said  that 
they  were  coming,  when  they  arrived,  bringing  all  kind[s  ] 
of  things  with  them.  10.  They  haven't  any  (Nothing  re- 
mains to  them)  of  all  the  money  they  took  with  them. 
11.  Bring  me  some  bread  and  a  glass  of  milk.  12.  If  the 
book  of  which  you  were  speaking  is  worth  ten  dollars,  that 
one  would  be  worth  a  hundred.  13.  Can't  John  go  out 
today?  14.  No,  he  is  too  ill.  15.  It  was  necessary  for  us 
to  go  out  with  her.  16.  I'll  go  out  with  you  after  my 
father  reaches  home. 


LESSON  LXVII 
ORDINALS 

1.  The  ordinals  to  tenth  are : 

primero,  first  sexto,  sixth 

segundo,  second  se(p)timo,  seventh 

tercero,  third  octavo,  eighth 

cu^rto,  fourth  noveno,  ninth 

quinto,  fifth  decimo,  tenth 

For  the  ordinals  from  eleventh  on,  see  Appendix  G. 

For  primero.  tercero,  and  noveno,  there  are  also  the 
shorter  forms  primo,  tercio,  and  nono,  which  are  used  in 
the  compounds.  Sexto  may  be  written  sesto  (as  it  is 
usually  pronounced). 


ORDINALS 


175 


2.  Ordinals  are  regularly  inflected  like  any  other  adjec- 
tive. 

la  primera  leccion,  the  first  lesson 

3.  Beyond  tenth,  the  ordinals,  as  they  are  rarely  used, 
need  not  be  memorized. 

4.  For  the  ordinals  in  dates,  see  Lesson  LX,  2. 

5.  In  titles,  ordinals  are  used  to  tenth;  from  eleventh 
on,  the  cardinals  are  used.  In  other  expressions,  the  car- 
dinals are  used  with  the  one  exception  of  primero. 

Carlos  quinto,  Charles  the  Fifth  {note  the  absence  of  the  definite 
article) 

Enrique  tercero,  Henry  the  Third 
Luis  catorce,  Louis  the  Fourteenth 

el  primer  tomo,  the  first  volume    But  tomo  dos,  volume  two 

(the  second  volume) 

6.  For  the  apocopation  of  primero,  tercero,  see  Lesson 
XIX,  1. 

7.  Fractions  are  formed  up  to  tenth  by  using  a  cardinal 
as  numerator  and  an  ordinal  as  denominator.  Tercio,  third, 
is  used  in  fractions  instead  of  tercero.  From  eleventh  on, 
add  -avo  to  the  cardinal  for  the  denominator,  first  drop- 
ping the  final  vowel. 

dos  octavos,  two  eighths 

ocho  trezavos,  eight  thirteenths 

Seventeenth,  eighteenth,  and  nineteenth  keep  -e,  -o, 

and  -e  respectively. 

diecisieteavo  dieciochoavo  diecinueveavo 

VOCABULARY 

ayudar,  to  aid,  to  help  mas,  more;  plus 

elcapitulo,  chapter  medio,  -a,  half  {adjective) 

Carlos,  Charles  menos,  less;  minus 

cero,  zero  lamitad,  half  {noun) 

dividir  (por),  to  divide  by  la  parte,  part 

el  jefe,  chief,  leader,  head  el  quebrado,  fraction 

lamanzana,  apple  el  tomo,  tome,  volume  {of  a  series) 

A.  Count  the  ordinals  as  rapidly  as  you  can  from  first 
to  tenth. 


176 


SPANISH  GEAMMAE 


A  A.  1.  Count  the  ordinals  from  twenty-first  to  twenty- 
ninth^  using  the  text.  2.  Count  the  ordinals  from  thirtieth 
to  ninetieth,  using  the  text. 

AAA.  1.  centesimo  2.  milesimo  3.  rnillonesinio  4. 
Carlos  quint o  5.  primera  pagina  6.  capitulo  cliez  y  ocho 
T.  Luis  trece  8.  Enrique  cuarto  .  9.  Alfonso  trece  10.  la 
mitad  11.  dos  tercios  12.  tres  cuartos  13.  cuatro  quintos 
14.  cineo  sextos  15.  siete  octavos  16.  siete  decimos  IT.  diez 
onzavos  18.  siete  dozavos  19.  ocho  trezavos  20.  nueve 
catorzavos  21.  dos  quinzavos  22.  tres  dieciseisavos  23.  ocho 
veintavos  24.  nueve  veintiunavos  25.  un  nino  26.  por 
centesinia  vez.  27.  el  primero  de  enero  de  mil  ochocientos 
noventa  y  dos  28.  tercer  libro  29.  el  dos  de  mayo  de  mil 
novecientos  veinte  y  tres  30.  el  cuatro  de  julio  de  mil 
setecientos  setenta  y  seis  31,  la  mitad  del  camino  32.  un 
dolar  y  medio    33.  un  dolar  cincuenta 

AAAA.  1.  Alphonsus  XIII.  2.  (the)  half  (of)  my  apple 
3.  Charles  Y.  -1.  (Count  from  first  to  tenth;  eleventh  to 
twentieth  ;  decimals  from  thirtieth  through  ninetieth)  ;  hun- 
dredth; thousandth  5.  John  the  Second  6.  millionth 
?.  an  apple  and  a  half  8.  one  half;  two  thirds  9.  one 
quarter  10.  two  fifths  11.  one  sixth  12.  two  sevenths 
13.  three  eighths  14.  four  ninths  15.  three  tenths  16.  four 
elevenths  IT.  five  twelfths  18.  six  thirteenths  19.  seven 
fifteenths  20.  eight  fourteenths  21.  nine  twenty-thirds 
22.  one  hundredth    23.  a  millionth 

B.  1.  Xo  tenemos  que  ocuparnos  de  dos  tercios,  tres 
cuartos.  etcetera,  porque  no  pensamos  tener  (keep)  libros 
en  espanol.  2.  Por  centesinia  vez  te  cligo  que  no  puedo 
ayudarte  ahora ;  vuelve  mas  tarde  y  ya  (then)  hablaremos. 
3.  El  cinco  de  mayo  de  mil  novecientos  murio  aquel  gran 
presidente.  aquel  jefe  de  una  gran  nacion.  4.  ;Cuanto  es 
dos  mas  tres  dividido  por  cinco  mas  uno  menos  cero? 

5,  Carlos  quinto.  uno  de  los  reyes  mas  grandes  que  ha 
tenido  Espana,  murio  en  mil  quinientos  cincuenta  y  ocho. 

6.  En  la  pagina  diez  y  ocho  hallara  usted  las  noticias  que 


ANDAR 


177 


busca.  7.  No  me  basta  la  mitad  cle  una  manzana;  quiero 
una  manzana  y  media.  8.  La  tercera  parte  de  su  libro  no 
contiene  nada  que  valga.  9.  Luis  catorce  de  Francia  no  fue 
tan  bueno  como  grande.  10.  Mas  vale  ser  bueno  que 
grande.  11.  Sin  embargo,  la  mitad  del  mundo  quiere  ser 
grande  y  la  otra  mitad  no  puede  ser  buena.  12.  Tres  on- 
zavos  de  veinte  y  dos  son  seis.  13.  Todavia  no  he  leido  el 
tomo  tres. 

BB.  1.  I  don't  care-about  (No  me  ocupo  de)  thirds, 
fourths,  and  sixths.  2.  We  do  not  have  to  bother-with  (pre- 
ocuparnos  de)  such  things  in  our  school,  for  no  one  in- 
tends (piensa)  to  keep  books.  3.  Can  you  say  in  Spanish: 
sixteenth,  seventeenth,  eighteenth,  nineteenth,  twentieth, 
hundredth  ?  4.  Have  you  read  the  first  volume  yet  ?  Then 
you  do  not  intend  to  read  the  second.  5.  (The)  Half  (of) 
the  boys  in  the  city  go  to  my  school.  6.  He  has  to  be  told  a 
thing  for  [the]  hundredth  time  (see  B,  2)  before  he  begins 
to  do  it.  7.  On  what  page  can  I  find  that?  8.  It  begins 
on  the  twenty-eighth  page.  9.  Louis  the  Thirteenth  of 
France  died  in  the  year  1643.  10.  There  are  no  more 
apples;  but  there  is  still  (the)  half  (of)  an  orange  (una 
naranja) — eat  it  if  you  wish.    11.  Who  was  Charles  V.  ? 

12.  He  says  it  would  be  better  to  be  good  than  great. 

13.  How  do  you  say  in  Spanish:  2/3;  5/6;  5/17? 

LESSON  LXVIII 
Eeview  Lesson  LXVI. 
1.  Andar,  to  go 

(1)  ando 

(a)  ando,  andas,  etc. 

(b)  ande,  andes,  etc. 

(c)  anda 

(d)  andaba,  andabas,  etc 

(2)  andar 
(a)  andare,  andaras,  etc. 

(3)  andando 
esta  andando 


andad 

(b)  andaria,  andarias,  etc. 


178 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


(4)  andado 

(a)  he  andado,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  anduvieron 

(a)  anduve,  anduviste,  anduvo;  anduvimos,  anduvisteis,  andu- 

vieron 

(b)  anduviese,  anduvieses,  etc.    anduviera,  anduvieras,  etc. 

(c)  anduviere,  anduvieres,  etc. 

Andar  means  to  go,  with  the  idea  of  personal  locomotion. 
Anda  ligero,  He  goes  (walks)  lightly,  (he  has  a  light  gait). 
Andemos,  Let's  be  off. 

2.  Estar,  to  be 

(1)  estoy 

(a)  estoy,  estas,  esta;  estamos,  estais,  estan 

(b)  este,  estes,  este;  estemos,  esteis,  esten 

(c)  esta  estad 

(d)  estaba,  estabas,  etc. 

(2)  estar 

(a)  estare,  estaras,  etc.  (b)  estarla,  estarias,  etc. 

(3)  estando 

(4)  estado 

(a)  he  estado,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  estuvieron 

(a)  estuve,  estuviste,  estuvo;  estuvimos,  estuvisteis,  estuvieron 

(b)  estuviese,  estuvieses,  etc.         estuviera,  estuvieras,  etc. 

(c)  estuviere,  estuvieres,  etc. 

For  the  difference  in  meaning  between  estar  and  ser,  see 
Lessons  XIV  and  XV. 

3.  Caer,  to  fall 1 

(1)  caigo 

(a)  caigo,  caes,  cae;  caemos,  caeis,  caen 

(b)  caiga,  caigas,  caiga;  caigamos,  caigais,  caigan 

(c)  cae  caed 

(d)  cala,  caias,  etc. 

(2)  caer 

(a)  caer&,  caeras,  etc.  (b)  caeria,  caerias,  etc* 

(3)  cayendo 
esta  cayendo 

(4)  caido 

(a)  ha  caido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  cayeron 

(a)  cai,  caiste,  cay 6;  caimos,  caisteis,  cayeron 

(b)  cayese,  cayeses,  etc.  cayera,  cayeras,  etc. 

(c)  cayere,  cayeres,  etc. 

1  For  the  change  to  -y-,  see  Lesson  LVIII,  (c). 


huie;  aeguir;  oir  179 

Note  that  caer,  like  other  verbs  ending  in  a  strong  vowel, 
requires  an  accent  on  an  initial  stressed  -i  of  an  ending. 

4.  Huir,  to  flee  1 

(1)  huyo 

(a)  huyo,  huyes,  huye;  huimos,  huis,  huyen 

(b)  huya,  huyas,  huya;  huyamos,  huyais  huyan 

(c)  huye  huid 

(d)  hufa,  huias,  etc. 

(2)  huir 

(a)  huire,  huiras,  etc.  (b)  huiria,  huirias,  etc. 

(3)  huyendo 
esta  huyendo 

(4)  huido 

(a)  ha  huido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  huyeron 

(a)  hul,  huiste,  huyo;  huimos,  huisteis,  huyeron 

(b)  huyese,  huyeses,  etc.         huyera,  huyeras,  etc. 

(c)  huyere,  huyeres,  etc. 

Where  -ui-  occur  together,  they  are  considered  as 
forming  two  syllables,  whether  or  not  an  accent  is  written. 

Argiiir  writes  a  diaeresis  over  the  -u-  except  where 
-y  follows :  arguyo,  arguyes,  arguye ;  but  argiiimos,  argiiis. 
(Do  not  confuse  argiiir,  where  the  -u  is  sounded  and  is  a 
separate  syllable,  with  verbs  like  seguir,  where  the  -u  is 
silent  and  serves  merely  to  indicate  the  (good)  sound  of  g 
before  -i-;  see  Lesson  I,  8.) 

5.  Oir,  to  hear. 

(1)  oigo 

(a)  oigo,  oyes,  oye;  oimos,  ois,  oyen 

(b)  oiga,  oigas,  oiga;  oigamos,  oigais,  oigan 

(c)  oye  oid 

(d)  oia,  olas,  etc. 

(2)  oir  (oir-) 

(a)  oir§,  oiras,  etc.  (b)  oirla,  oirias,  etc. 

(3)  oyendo 

esta  oyendo,  etc. 

(4)  oido 

(a)  he  oido,  etc.  (b)  fue  oido,  etc. 

1  Note  the  change  to  -y-  here  too ;  the  -y-  is  also  inserted  between  u  followed 
by  -a,  -e,  or  -o,  the  so-called  strong  vowels. 


180 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


(5)  oyeron 

(a)  01,  oiste,  oyo;  oimos,  olsteis,  oyeron 

(b)  oyese,  oyeses,  etc.  oyera,  oyeras,  etc. 

(c)  oyere,  oyeres,  etc. 

Note  that  unstressed  -i-  before  a  vowel  is  changed  to  -y-. 
The  present  subjunctive,  on  the  model  of  the  first  singular 
present  indicative,  has  irregular  -g-.  In  the  second  and 
third  singular  and  third  plural  indicative,  and  second  sin- 
gular imperative,  -y-  is  inserted  before  -e. 

6.  Reir,  to  laugh  (R-ch.  Ill) 

(1)  rio 

(a)  no,  ries,  rie;  reimos,  rets,  rien 

(b)  ria,  rias,  ria;  riamos,  riais,  rian 

(c)  rie  reid 

(d)  reia,  relas,  etc* 

(2)  reir  (reir-) 

(a)  reire,  reiras,  etc.  (b)  reiria,  reirias,  etc. 

(3)  riendo 

esta  riendo,  etc. 

(4)  reido 

(a)  ha  reido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  rieron 

(a)  rei,  reiste,  rio;  reimos,  reisteis,  rieron 

(b)  riese,  rieses,  etc.  riera,  rieras,  etc. 

(c)  riere,  rieres,  etc. 

The  irregular  forms  of  the  preterite  indicative  and  past 
subjunctive  may  be  explained  as  the  radical-changed  -i-  of 
the  stem  combining  with  an  initial  i-  of  the  ending  to  form 
a  single  -i-.  The  stem,  however,  forms  a  separate  syllable, 
whether  there  is  an  accent  or  not  on  either  it  or  the  fol- 
lowing vowel.  Thus,  reir,  rio,  and  rio  have  two  syllables 
each ;  reire  has  three. 

VOCABULARY 

al  fin,  finally  la  piedra,  stone 

argiiir,  to  argue  no  poder  menos;  no  puedo 

el  cuidado,  care  menos  de  .  .  .  ,  I  can't 

tener  cuidado,  to  be  careful,  help 

to  take  care  seguramente,  surely 

i cuidado!  look  out!  j cuidado  sonrefr,  to  smile 

con  .  .  .  !  look  out  for  el  suelo,  ground,  floor 

frefr,  to  fry;  frito,  fried  {ir-  tirar,  to  throw 

regular  past  participle)  de  vez  en  cuando,  from  time 

influir,  to  influence  to  time 
(la)  Norte  America  (America  del 

Norte),  North  America 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


181 


A,  1.  huimos  2.  que  andemos  3.  que  huyan  4.  cai 
5,  argiii  6.  caeran  7.  arguyo  8.  cayo  9.  caigo  10.  que 
oigan  11.  anda  12.  esta  13.  no  oyo  14.  huyo  15.  es- 
tando  16.  sonrio  17.  no  han  estado  18.  freiamos  19. 
rieron  20.  huiran  21.  argiiian  22.  oiriamos  23.  huid 
24.  que  este  25.  cayo  26.  hemos  caido  27.  oire  28. 
^andais?  29.  estoy  30.  que  caigamos  31.  hui  32.  huye 
33.  huyes  34.  que  cayese  35.  caian  36.  oian  37.  oyo 
38.  que  sonriesemos  39.  reiremos  40.  oirian  41.  freire 
42.  que  huyesemos  43.  anduvieron  44.  estabamos  45.  que 
cayeran  46.  que  anduviera  47.  que  oyesemos   48.  arguyo. 

AA.  1.  I  am  going  2.  I  hear  3.  being  4.  he  fell  5.  will 
they  fall?  6.  they  will  fee  7.  I  shall  go  8.  they  hear 
9.  they  were  going  10.  that  they  argue  11.  that  you  hear 
12.  listen  (hear)  13.  to  be  14.  he  was  falling  15.  I  argue 
16.  going  17.  be  18.  I  fled  19.  that  she  goes  20.  were 
they  arguing?  21.  flee  22.  they  fled  23.  they  argue 
24.  they  were  fleeing  25.  they  are  falling  26.  they  have 
gone  27.  did  you  hear?  28.  I  am  frying  29.  they  will 
hear  30.  that  she  is  31.  I  fell  32.  that  we  hear  33.  were 
they?  34.  he  fled  35.  I  hear  36.  that  they  flee  37.  that 
you  smiled  38.  frying  39.  I  shall  influence  40.  they  in- 
fluenced 41.  he  was  influencing  42.  that  he  smiled  43.  he 
will  fry   44.  they  influence   45.  fried. 

B.  1.  Oi  lo  que  dijeron  tus  hermanos,  pero  ellos  no 
sabian  que  yo  lo  oi.  2.  No  deseaba  que  yo  la  oyese.  3. 
Oye,  Juan,  traeme  un  vaso  de  leche — tengo  mucha  sed. 
4.  Asi  andabamos  mucho  tiempo,  no  hablando  nunca  y  al 
fin  llegamos  a  la  casa,  donde  nos  lavamos  la  cara  y  las 
manos  e  hicimos  (had)  una  buena  comida.  5.  No  estando 
el  alii,  seguramente  habria  ido  yo  hasta  Madrid.  6.  Cayo 
el  nino  al  suelo  y  se  rompio  dos  dedos.  7.  Huyamos  antes 
de  que  nos  vean  y  nos  cojan.  8.  No  huire;  ni  tengo  por 
que  ni  puedo.  9.  He  oido  su  hermano  hablar  de  los  indios 
de  Norte  America;  parece  que  son  muy  interesantes.  10. 
No  es  preciso  que  ande  tanto  su  hermano ;  mejor  seria  que 
descanse  un  poco.   11.  Usted  arguye  tanto  y  si  bien  que  no 


182 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


podemos  menos  de  creer  lo  que  nos  dice.  12.  No  quiero  que 
caigas  tanto,  Juan ;  ;  cuidado  con  lo  que  haces  y  donde 
andas!   13.  Tiro  el  nino  una  piedra  y  entonces  huyo. 

BB.  1.  The  little  girl  fell  to  the  ground  and  broke  her 
arm.  2.  That  boy  threw  the  stone — I  saw  him  run  away. 
3.  They  do  not  go  far,  for  they  are  soon  tired.  4.  Was  it 
necessary  for  them  to  go  so  much?  5.  They  did  not  want 
him  to  hear  it — but  he  did  hear  it.  6.  Listen,  boy,  take 
these  dishes  and  give  them  to  the  girl  to  wash.  7.  I  wish 
this  child  would  not  fall  so  much.  8.  They  are  always 
arguing — they  are  forever  speaking,  but  they  never  work. 
9.  If  you  were  there,  I  should  visit  them  next  week.  10. 
They  hear  us  speak  of  that  story,  which  they  think  very 
interesting.  11.  They  fled  before  they  heard  what  we  were 
going  to  say  to  them.  12.  Look  out  for  what  you  say;  and 
don't  tell  all  you  hear.  13.  Will  they  be  here  tomorrow? 
14.  Who  is  going  around  (por)  here,  hearing  all  these 
things  ? 

LESSON  LXIX 
EXCLAMATIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS 

1.  Exclamatory  expressions  are  very  common  in  Spanish. 
As  these  are  often  highly  idiomatic,  they  are  best  learned 
by  experience.  Do  not  follow  the  literal  meaning  of  Span- 
ish interjections,  as  they  are  much  weaker  in  sense  than 
the  English. 

2.  Following  are  some  common  expressions,  with  sug- 
gestions of  English  equivalents. 

jay!  oh!  all!  (cf.  also  A,  2  oelow) 
;  ea !  hi !  hurray ! 
jdiablo!  the  deuce! 

jmil  diablos!  the  deuce!   {stronger  than  jdiablo!) 

ivalgame  Dios/  good  heavens! 

i  oiga !  ( i  oye ! )  listen !  see  here ! 

i  mire !  ( j  mira ! )  see  here !  listen  here ! 

ivamos!  come!  come! 

jvamos  a  ver!  come,  let's  see 

i Jesus  mil  veces!  good  gracious! 


EXCLAMATIONS  AND  INTERJECTIONS 


183 


jcanastos!  gee  whiz!  good  gracious! 

i  Jesus,  Jose,  y  Maria!  goodness  gracious! 

jDios  mio!   dear  me!  heavens!  gracious! 

jtoma!  well!  I  declare! 

ijuan  de  mi  alma!  Why,  my  dear  John! 

3.  Tan  or  mas  =  very. 

jQue  nifio  mas  grande!    What  a  big  child!     (Lit.,  What  a 

child  more  large!) 
jQue  hombre  tan  estupido!    What  a  very  stupid  man! 
i  Que  bueno  es !    How  good  he  is ! 

Y  j  como  he  de  hacerlo !    And  how  am  I  to  do  it ! 

4.  Note  the  use  of  que  where  there  is  a  full  or  partial 
ellipsis  of  a  main  clause  (cf.  with  Creo  que  no). 

Y  ;  como  que  no  hay  otro  modo  de  decirlo!    And  how  (do  you 

mean)  that  there  is  no  other  way  of  saying  it! 

VOCABULARY 

agradecer,  to  thank  estupido,  -a,  stupid 

Guillermo,  William  por  alii,  over  there 

embustero,  cheat 

A.  1.  j  canastos !  2.  i  ay  de  vosotros !  3.  j  que  nina  mas  floja ! 
4.  j  Jesus  mil  veces !  5.  joiga!  6.  ;  vamos  a  ver !  7.  jdiablo! 
8.  jmira,  Juan!  9.  ;Oh!  jsi!  10.  y  jcomo  han  de 
hallarlo  si  no  lo  han  perdido?  11.  jvalgame  Dios!  12. 
;Dios  mio!  13.  ;oye!  14.  jmire!  ;  Que  nino  mas  es- 
tupido!  16.  | ay! 

AA.  1.  listen  here !  2.  Oh,  no !  3.  and  how  should  he 
study?  4.  the  deuce!  5.  goodness  gracious!  6.  poor 
George!  7.  let's  see!  8.  ah!  9.  oh!  10.  I  declare!  11. 
gee  whiz!  12.  the  deuce!  13.  good  gracious!  14.  "What 
a  cheat  (j  Que  hombre  mas  embustero !)    15.  let's  eat ! 

B.  1.  Vamos  a  ver.  ^Quiere  usted  trabajar  aqui? — 
j  Aqui !  ;  Jamas !  2.  Y  ;  como  ha  de  estudiar  cuando  tu  estas 
todavia  aqui!  3.  He  perdido  mis  libros  y  todavia  no  los 
he  encontrado.  4.  Vamos  a  ver,  Maria.  <:Cuantos  afios 
tienes  ?  5.  ;  Jesus,  Jose,  y  Maria !  i  Es  ver  dad  lo  que  usted 
dice?  6.  ;  Que  buenos  son  ustedes!  ^Que  puedo  hacer 
para  decirles  lo  agradecido  que  quedo  ?  7.  j  Canastos ! 
cuanto  mas  la  nina  lava  los  vasos,  tanto  mas  sucios  estan. 


184 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


8.  j  Diablo !  y  <j  que  se  imagina  usted,  entonces  ?  9.  j  Vamos ! 
<;Quiere  usted  saber  una  cosa?  jEs  usted  una  gran  em- 
bustera!  10.  jPor  Dios!  jGuillermo!  ;no  le  dejes  entrar! 
11.  jToma!  jque  no  hay  otro  remedio  (there  is  no  help 
for  it)  !    12.  <iLe  diste  el  dinero  a  el?  (Did  you  give.  .  .  .) 

13.  ;  Canastos!  <:Y  te  lo  dara  el?  14.  ;  Ya  lo  creo  (I  should 
say)  que  me  lo  dara!  15.  jDios  mio!  ;  que  enfermo  me 
siento!  16.  Vamos  a  comer.  ^Que  no  tienes  hambre? 
17.  Parece  que  los  tema. 

BB.  1.  Poor  John!  Everything  he  does  comes  out 
(salir)  badly.   2.  Gee  whiz!  George!  don't  you  ever  study? 

3.  Hurry!    Go  out  quickly!     See  what  is  over  there! 

4.  Come!  Let's  eat!  I'm  very  hungry.  5.*  The  deuce! 
When  will  he  get  here?  6.  How  is  he  to  come  if  they 
didn't  tell  him  you  are  waiting  for  him?  What  a  lazy 
boy  you  are !  Why  don 't  you  do  something  from  time  to 
time?  8.  Good  heavens!  Does  he  imagine  we  can  wait  all 
night?  9.  W^ell!  the  more  he  studies,  the  less  he  knows. 
10.  Dear  me!  I  am  so  ill  and  I  can't  eat  anything.  11. 
Goodness,  Henry,  don 't  let  them  come  in  now ;  we  haven 't 
eaten  yet!  12.  Let's  see,  mother;  how  old  will  I  be  to- 
morrow?   13.  Listen,  Henry;  will  you  lend  me  a  pencil? 

14.  You  lost  your  money !   Heavens !  How  did  you  do  that ! 

15.  How  well  that  child  studies!    How  old  can  he  be? 

16.  He  is  fifteen  years  old.  17.  Goodness!  I  should  say  so! 
(see  B,  Ik) 

LESSON  LXX 
HABER,  to  have 

1.  Haber,  to  have 

(1)  he 

(a)  he,  has,  ha;  hemos,  habeis,  han 

(b)  hay  a,  hay  as,  hay  a;  hayamos,  hayais,  hay  an 

(c)  he  habed 

(d)  habfa,  habias,  etc. 

(2)  haber  {contracted  to  habr-) 

(a)  habre,  habras,  etc.  (b)  habria,  habrias,  etc^ 


habek;  saber 


185 


(3)  habiendo 

no  'periphrastic  tenses 

(4)  habido 

(a)  ha  habido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  hubieron 

(a)  hube,  hubiste,  hubo;  hubimos,  hubisteis,  hubieron 

(b)  hubiese,  hubieses,  etc.  hubiera,  hubieras,  etc. 

(c)  hubiere,  hubieres,  etc. 

For  the  distinction  between  haber  and  tener,  see  Les- 
sons XXVII,  XXVIII  and  XXIX.  For  the  various  tenses 
of  hay,  see  XXVIII,  3. 

The  imperative  singular  he  means  usually:  behold; 
he  aqui,  behold. 

2.  Saber,  to  know;  to  know  how;  can 

(1)  se 

(a)  se,  sabes,  sabe;  sabemos,  sabeis,  saben 

(b)  sepa,  sepas,  sepa;  sepamos,  sepais,  sepan 

(c)  sabe  sabed 

(d)  sabia,  sabias,  etc. 

(2)  saber  (contracted  to  stem  sabr-) 

(a)  sabre,  sabras,  etc.  (b)  sabria,  sabrias,  etc. 

(3)  sabiendo 

(4)  sabido 

(a)  ha  sabido,  etc.  (b)  fue  sabido,  etc. 

(5)  supieron 

(a)  supe,  supiste,  supo;  supimos,  supisteis,  supieron 

(b)  supiese,  supieses,  etc.  supiera,  supieras,  etc. 

(c)  supiere,  supieres,  etc. 

For  meanings,  see  Lesson  LXIV,  4  and  5. 

3.  Ser,  to  be 
(1)  soy 

(a)  soy,  eres,  es;  somos,  sois,  son 

(b)  sea,  seas,  sea;  seamos,  seais,  sean 

(c)  se  sed 

(d)  era,  eras,  era;  eramos,  erais,  eran1 


1  Ser  and  ir  are  the  only  two  Spanish  verbs  with  irregular  imperfect  indicative. 


186 


SPANISH  GKAMMAft 


(2)  ser 

(a)  ser§,  seras,  etc.  (b)  seria,  serias,  etc. 

(3)  siendo 

(4)  sido 

(a)  ha  sido  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  fueron  1 

(a)  fui,  fuiste,  fue;  fuimos,  fuisteis,  fueron 

(b)  fuese,  fueses,  etc.        fuera,  fueras,  etc. 

(c)  fuere,  fueres,  etc. 

For  the  differences  in  the  use  of  estar  and  ser,  see  Les- 
sons XIV  and  XV. 

4.  Caber,  to  be  contained 

(1)  quepo 

(a)  quepo,  cabes,  cabe;  cabemos,  cabeas,  caben 

(b)  quepa,  quepas,  quepa;  quepamos,  quepais,  quepan 

(c)  cabe  cabed 

(d)  cabia,  cabias,  etc. 

(2)  caber  {stem  contracted  to  cabr-) 

(a)  cabre,  cabras,  etc.  (b)  cabria,  cabrias,  etc. 

(3)  cabiendo 

(4)  cabido 

(a)  ha  cabido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  cupieron 

(a)  cupe,  cupiste,  cupo;  cupimos  cupisteis,  cupieron 

(b)  cupiese,  cupieses,  etc.  cupiera,  cupieras,  etc. 

(c)  cupiere,  cupieres,  etc. 

Note  the  construction  with  caber. 

Cuatro  sillas  caben  en  esta  pieza,  This  room  holds  only  four 

chairs  (Four  chairs  are-contained  in  this  room). 
No  cabe  duda,  There  is  no  doubt. 

5.  Ir,  to  go 

(1)  voy 

(a)  voy,  vas,  va;  vamos,  vais,  van 

(b)  vaya,  vayas,  vaya;  vayamos,  vayais,  vayan 
(c)  ve  id 

(d)  iba,  ibas,  iba;  ibamos,  ibais,  iban 

(2)  ir 

(a)  ire,  iras,  etc.  (b)  iria,  irias,  etc. 

1  The  preterite  indicative  and  past  subjunctives  of  ir  have  the  same  forms 
as  those  of  ser.  Note  that  fue,  fueron  omit  the  -i-,  as  do  also  all  past  subjunc- 
tives. Verbs  in  -ducir;  decir;  ir;  and  traer  are  in  the  same  class  as  regards  the 
third  singular  and  plural  preterite  indicative  and  all  past  subjunctives. 

Strong  preterites  (as  anduvo,  hubo,  estuvo,  etc.)  omit  the  -i-  in  the  third 
person  singular  preterite  indicative  only. 


m 


187 


(3)  yendo 
esta  yendo 

(4)  ido 

(a)  ha  ido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  fueron 

(a)  fill,  fuiste,  fue;  fuimos,  fuisteis,  fueron 

(b)  fuese,  fueses,  etc.  fuera,  fueras,  etc. 

(c)  fuere,  fueres,  etc. 

For  the  meaning  of  ir,  compare  also  Lesson  LXVIII,  1. 
Ir  means  go  in  the  most  general  sense  of  the  word.  Voy  a 
Nueva  York,  I  am  going  to  New  York  (how,  is  not  indi- 
cated). 

Ir  is  also  used  as  a  sort  of  future  auxiliary.  Voy  a  visi- 
tarle,  I  am  going  to  (I  shall)  visit  him. 

The  form  vamos  is  confined  to  the  imperative  first  plural 
use  in  main  clauses  only:  Vamos  a  entrar,  Let  us  go  in. 
In  subordinate  clauses  calling  for  the  subjunctive,  the 
regular  subjunctive  form  is  used,  introduced  by  que. 
Quiere  que  vayamos,  He  wants  us  to  go. 

VOCABULARY 

el  campo,  field  la  madera,  wood 

en  el  campo,  in  the  country       el  papel  secante,  blotting  paper 
el  diario,  newspaper  la  plumafuente,  fountain  pen 

la  duda,  doubt  supe,  etc.,  I  learned  (of)  (a  spe- 

el  escritorio,  writing  desk  rial  meaning  of  preterite 

el  estante,  bookshelf,  set  of  shelves  of  saber) 

hacemos,  we  do„  we  make 
la  Have,  key 

A.  1.  iba.  2.  he  3.  se  4.  que  sepa  5.  que  vayamos 
6.  soy  8.  que  sean  9.  que  quepa  10.  iban  11.  no  cabian 
12.  habria  13.  puede  haber  14,  que  supiesen  15.  ^cupo? 
16.  que  haya  17.  que  hayan  18.  habriamos  19.  id  20. 
idos  21.  vamonos  22.  iremos  23.  sed  24.  seremos  25. 
eran  26.  cabran  27.  que  sepan  28.  sabran  29.  supieron 
30.  vamos  31.  que  cupiesen  32.  supisteis  33.  se  34.  helo 
aqui  35.  seria  36.  que  hubiera  37.  ire  38.  habia  39. 
sabriamos  40.  que  estuvieran  41.  voy  42.  voy  a  ir  43. 
fuisteis   44.  que  vayamos 

AA.    1.  that  we  know    2.  I  have    3.  I  know'  4.  going 


188 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


5.  I  knew  6.  there  is  room  7.  they  will  be  8.  I  can  go 
9.  did  they  learn?  10.  I  am  11.  I've  learned  12.  that 
there  is  room  13.  we  shall  go  14.  they  have  gone  15.  have 
16.  there  is  17.  that  I  know  18.  we  shall  have  19.  they 
were  going  20.  that  they  went  21.  they  will  know  22. 
containing  23.  they  are  going  to  write  24.  behold 
25.  there-will-be-room  26.  did  you  know?  27.  there-was- 
room  28.  that  you  had  29.  there  were  30.  there  will  be 
31.  I  am  going 

B.  1.  Supe  ayer  que  van  a  visitarnos.  2.  Cien  personas 
caben  en  este  cuarto.  3.  Voy  a  comprar  una  plumafuente, 
nn  estante  de  madera,  y  papel  secante.  4.  No  hay  mucho 
que  decir ;  tenemos  que  comprarlos  hoy  mismo.  5.  No  cerro 
la  puerta  con  Have  (He  did  not  lock)  porque  perdio  la 
Have  y  no  sabe  donde  encontrar  otra.  6.  Quiero  que  seais 
tan  diligentes  como  sea  posible.  7.  <:Cabra  otro  escritorio 
en  esta  pieza?  8.  Yo  creo  que  no.  9.  Iremos  a  la  ciudad 
manana,  hoy  hemos  de  quedarnos  aqui  en  el  campo.  10.  Es 
sastre,  pero  no  trabaja.  11.  Lo  habran  perdido,  porque 
estan  buscando  algo  ahora.  12.  No  sabran  lo  que  hacemos 
a  menos  que  usted  se  lo  diga.  13.  ^Habra  alguien  alii  que 
me  ensene  lo  que  he  de  hacer?  14.  Puede  haber  mucho 
dinero  alii;  pero  no  me  importa,  porque  no  es  mio.  15.  Y 
£  como  ha  de  ser  tuyo  si  nunca  trabajas?  16.  Juan,  ^por 
que  quieren  ellos  que  nosotros  nos  vayamos?  17.  Leian  el 
diario. 

BB.  1.  There  cannot  be  room  for  eighty-five  persons  in 
these  two  rooms.  2.  There  have  been  many  men  in  this 
city  who  have  liked  very  much  to  live  here.  3.  Did  they 
learn  who  came  to  visit  them  when  they  were  at  our  house  ? 
4.  As  I  was  going  to  tell  it  to  them,  they  left.  5.  There 
cannot  be  so  many  pupils  in  your  school — it  is  too  small. 

6.  How  many  houses  are  there  now  on  your  street,  John? 

7.  Let  us  go;  we  have  not  much  time  now.  8.  There  will 
be  many  persons  there,  I  think.  9.  They  will  know  it  be- 
fore long  (little  time).    10.  They  want  us  to  go  before  the 


VOWELS 


189 


children  are  too  tired.  11.  If  they  knew  that,  we  should 
have  to  tell  them  all  we  heard.  12.  I  know  that  yon  know 
it,  but  I  don't  know  when  you  met  (conocer)  him.  13.  We 
are  to  see  them  tomorrow.    14.  No  doubt  of  it. 


LESSON  LXXI 
VOWELS 

Review  Lesson  II. 

1.  Note  the  following  distinctions  in  the  vowels  o  and  e. 

•  (a)  stressed  o  when  it  is  followed  by  a  single  conso- 
nant or  comes  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  pronounced  much  as 
in  hope. 

poco  ocho  habl6 

Followed  by  two  consonants  (only  one  at  the  end  of 
a  word),  or  in  the  diphthong  oi  (oy),  it  is  pronounced  as 
in  English  lock. 

donde  hombre  ron  (rum)  hoy 

(b)  e  when  followed  by  a  single  consonant,  at  the 
end  of  a  word,  or  followed  by  n  or  s  plus  a  consonant,  is 
pronounced  much  as  in  rake. 

pero  liable  entrar  bestia 

In  the  diphthong  ei  (ey),  followed  by  two  'consonants 
(only  one  at  the  end  of  a  word),  or  by  rr  or  j,  it  is  pro- 
nounced as  in  English  met. 

ley  excepto  ver  perro  deja 

2.  Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs.  For  the  sake  of  con- 
venience, vowels  are  divided  into  two  classes — the  strong 
(a,  o,  e)  and  the  weak  (i,  u). 

A  diphthong  is  a  combination  of  two  vowels  coming 
together  and  pronounced  as  a  single  vowel  sound ;  the  two 


190 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


vowels  therefore  form  one  syllable.1  A  triphthong  is  a 
similar  combination  of  three  vowels. 

3.  (a)  One  weak  and  one  strong  vowel  coming  together 
form  a  diphthong,  and  so  one  syllable.  If  there  is  a  written 
accent  over  a  diphthong,  it  can  come  only  on  the  strong 
vowel. 

ai    el  aire,  air  ia    la  Gloria,  (girl's  name) 

au    el  aula,  auditorium  ua   la  aduana,  customs  (house) 

ei    el  aceite,  oil  ie    el  hielo,  ice  :  yerro,  error 

eu    la  deuda,  debt  ue   el  abuelo,  grandfather 

oi     hoy,  today  io    elyodo,  iodine:  nacion 

ou   Cousino,  (proper  name)  uo   el  cuociente,  quotient 

(b)  Two  weak  vowels  coming  together  form  a  diph- 
thong, whether  or  not  the  i  has  a  written  accent.2 

ui   el  cuidado,  care;  muy,  very;  el  juicio,  judgment,  opinion; 
lingiiistico,  linguistic 

iu  la  ciudad,  city 

4.  Two  weak  vowels  and  one  strong  vowel  coming  to- 
gether form  a  triphthong,  making  a  single  syllable.  An 
accent,  if  written,  must  come  on  the  strong  vowel.  There 
are  four  triphthongs  in  Spanish. 

iei  limpieis,  (that)  you  clean 

uai  acentuais,  you  accent 

iai  limpiais,  you  clean 

uei  acentueis,  (that)  you  accent 

5.  (a)  Two  strong  vowels  coming  together  are  consid- 
ered as  forming  two  separate  syllables,  that  is,  they  never 
form  a  diphthong  but  are  pronounced  separately. 

ere  er  (creer),  to  believe  ro  er  (roer),  to  gnaw 

(b)  A  strong  and  weak  vowel  coming  together,  with 
an  accent  ivritten  on  the  weak  vowel,  are  considered  in  two 


1  For  general  purposes,  we  may  note  that  each  syllable  is  formed  on  one 
vowel  sound — single  vowel,  diphthong,  or  triphthong.  In  combinations  like  gui-, 
gue-,  qui-,  que-,  the  u-  need  be  considered  as  neither  vowel  nor  consonant — 
it  serves  merely  to  indicate  the  pronunciation  of  q-  or  g-. 

2  But  verbs  in  -uir,  as  huir,  arguir,  whether  or  not  an  accent  is  written,  show 
two  syllables:  hu  ir,  argu  ir.  Similar  are  words  like  fluido,  where  the  fl-  at  the 
beginning  of  the  words  have  to  be  supported  by  the  full  vowel  force  of  -u-. 
(But  in  I ingu istico,  the  -ui-  form  one  syllable.) 


DAR 


191 


separate  syllables;  that  is,  they  do  not  form  a  diphthong 
but  are  pronounced  separately. 

el  ma  iz  (maiz),  corn  acentu  o  (acentuo),  I  accentuate 

o  fr  (ofr),  to  hear 

A.  Tell  whether  the  single  vowels  below  are  strong  or 
weak;  and  where  two  or  three  vowels  occur  together, 
whether  they  form  diphthongs  or  triphthongs,  or  are  in 
separate  syllables.  1.  farmaceutico  (pharmaceutical)  2. 
fue  3.  nacion  4.  averiguais  5.  juicio  6.  fluido  7.  guia 
{diphthong  or  triphthong? — why  is  the  -u-  here? — is  the  -u- 
pronounced?)  8.  leais  (diphthong  or  triphthong? — are  there 
two  weak  vowels?  how  many  syllables  are  there?)  9.  acen- 
tuas  10.  acentuais  11.  acentuare  12.  varia  13.  variara 
14.  buey  15.  tiene  16.  teneis  17.  rey  18.  vacio  19. 
vuelvo  20.  volvais  21.  volvio  22.  volveis  23.  vaiven 
(fluctuation)  24.  jabalies  25.  genio  (temper)  26.  in- 
■vierno   27.  accion  (share  of  stock)    28.  ley   29.  leyes 

A  A.  Pronounce  the  words  in  A. 

AAA.  Learn  the  new  voords  in  A. 

AAAA.  Compose  sentences  containing  one  or  more  words 
in  A.  Can  you  make  these  sentences  without  first  writing  an 
English  model  for  each? 


LESSON  LXXII 

1.  Dar,  to  give 

(1)  doy 

(a)  doy,  das,  da;  damos,  dais,  dan 

(b)  de,  des,  de;  demos,  deis,,  den 

(c)  da  dad 

(d)  daba,  dabas,  etc. 

(2)  dar 

(a)  dar£,  daras,  etc.  (b)  daria,  darias,  etc. 

(3)  dando 

esta  dando,  etc. 

(4)  dado 

(a)  he  dado,  etc.  (b)  fue  dado,  etc. 


192 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


(5)  dieron 

(a)  di,  diste,  dio;  dimos,  disteis,  dieron 

(b)  diese,  dieses,  etc.  diera,  dieras,  etc. 

(c)  diere,  dieres,  etc. 

asco  me  da,  it  disgusts  me      dar  las  dos,  to  strike  two  o'clock 
dar  a  la  calle,  to  face  the  street       darse  por,  to  act  as  if 
dar  en  la  trampa,  to  fall  into  the  trap 
dar  con,  to  come  across 

2.  Ver,  to  see  {stems  ve-  and  v-) 

(1)  veo 

(a)  veo,  ves,  ve;  vemos,  veis,  ven  {from  both  stems) 

(b)  vea,  veas,  etc. 

(c)  ve  ved 

(d)  veia,  veias,  etc. 

(2)  ver 

(a)  ver§,  veras^  etc.  (b)  verfa,  verias,  etc. 

(3)  viendo 
esta  viendo 

(4)  visto 

(a)  he  visto,  etc.  (b)  fue  visto,  etc. 

(5)  vieron 

(a)  vi,  viste,  vio;  vimos,  etc. 

(b)  viese,  vieses,  etc.  viera,  vieras,  etc. 

(c)  viere,  vieres,  etc. 

Besides  the  past  participle,  ver  is  irregular  in  having 
two  stems  (ve-  being  found  in  the  first  singular  present 
indicative,  all  present  subjunctive,  and  all  imperfect  in- 
dicative). 

no  ver  la(s)  hora(s)  de,  to  be  very  anxious  to 
es  de  ver,  it  is  worth  seeing,  you  ought  to  see 

3.  Poder  (R-ch.  I),  to  be  able,  can 

(1)  puedo 

(a)  puedo,  puedes,  etc. 

(b)  pueda,  puedas,  etc. 

(c)  no  imperative 

(d)  podia,  podias,  etc. 

(2)  poder  (contracted  to  podr-) 

(a)  podre,  podras,  etc.  (b)  podria,  podrlas,  etc. 

(3)  pudiendo  {note  the  u  of  the  stem) 

(4)  podido 

(a)  ha  podido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  pudieron 

(a)  pude,  pudiste,  pudo;  pudimos,  pudisteis,  pudieron 


QUERER 


193 


(b)  pudiese,  pudieses,  etc.       pudiera,  pudieras,  etc. 

(c)  pudiere,  pudieres,  etc. 

a  m£s  no  poder,  with  all  one's  might 
no  poder  mas,  to  be  exhausted 
no  poder  menos  de,  can't  help 

4.  Querer  (R-ch.  I),  to  wish,  to  want;  to  love 

( 1 )  quiero 

(a)  quiero,  quieres,  etc. 

(b)  quiera,  quieras,  etc. 

(c)  quiere  quered 

(d)  queria,  querfas,  etc. 

(2)  querer  (contracted  to  stem  querr-) 

(a)  querrS,  querras,  etc.  (b)  querria,  querrias,  etc. 

(3)  queriendo 

(4)  querido 

(a)  ha  querido,  etc.  (b)  es  querido,  etc. 

(5)  quisieron 

(a)  quise,  quisiste,  quiso;  quisimos,  quisisteis,  quisieron 

(b)  quisiese,  quisieses,  etc.  quisiera,  quisieras,  etc. 

(c)  quisiere,  quisieres,  etc. 
querido,  -a,  beloved,  dear 
como  usted  quiera,  as  you  like 

iQue  quiere  decir  .  .  .  ?    What  does  .  .  .  mean? 

VOCABULARY 

acontecer,  to  happen  el  consejo,  advice 

amable,  nice,  amiable,  kind  gracias,  thanks 

el  asco,  disgust  por  lo  menos,  at  least 

avisado,  -a,  prudent,  clever        la  prisa,  haste 
la  bendicion,  blessing  tener  prisa,  to  be  in  a  hurry- 

la  calle,  street 

A.  Give  parts  and  conjugate  each  tense  of  querer,  ver, 
dar,  poder. 

AA.  1.  he  querido  2.  fue  dado  3.  querremos  4.  queria 
5.  podre  6.  dieron  7.  demos  8.  ^visteis?  9.  da  10.  dad 
11.  que  quieran  12.  dar  an  13.  que  dieran  14.  que  veamos 
15.  ve  16.  vere  17.  que  vea  18.  daban  19.  que  de  20. 
quise  21.  dad  22.  que  pueda  23.  dabamos  24.  podriais 
25.  disteis  26.  pudiendo  27.  daremos  28.  ved  29.  ve 
30.  veran  31.  que  pudierais  32.  podian  33.  pudiste 
34.  que  quisieramos  35.  querian  36.  dad  37.  que  diese 
38.  que  viesemos  39.  no  puede 
7 


194 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


AAA.  1.  I  give  2.  can  you?  3.  they  saw  4.  that  you 
can  5.  we  wish  6.  you  would  not  give  7.  you  have  8.  see 
9.  you  were  able  10.  that  they  could  11.  you  will  wish 
12.  that  I  want  13.  give  14.  I  saw  15.  that  he  was  able 
16.  that  she  gives  17.  that  they  saw  18.  were  you  giving? 
19.  they  wished  20.  we  should  see  21.  you  saw  22.  that 
you  gave  23.  I  was  able  24.  you  could  25.  you  would 
want  26.  he  used  to  give  27.  we  shall  give  28.  that  I 
may  see   29.  shall  we  be  able?   30.  that  we  wanted 

B.  1.  Quieren  mucho  a  sus  padres  porque  son  ninos 
muy  amables.  2.  Esta  casa  no  da  a  la  calle  X.,  sino  a  la 
calle  A.  3.  No  pude  menos  de  decir  cuanto  acontecio. 
4.  No  dieron  en  la  trampa — les  habia  dicho  (said)  mi  her- 
mano  lo  que  iba  a  suceder.  5.  Mi  querido  Juan:  Ya  hace 
ocho  dias  que  quiero  escribirte,  y  hasta  hoy  no  he  escrito. 
6.  Si  damos  con  el  niiio  que  robo  los  lap  ices,  podremos 
decirle  algo.  7.  No  ven  las  horas  de  visitar  a  sus  abuelos 
porque  estos  les  dan  muchos  regalos  de  ano  nuevo.  8.  Dice 
que  no  podria  hacerlo.  9.  No  ha  podido  hacerlo.  10.  No 
pudimos  examinar  el  pano  porque  no  teniamos  mucho 
tiempo.  11.  Sin  embargo  puedo  decirle  que  no  me  gusta 
de  ninguna  manera.  12.  No  habrian  podido  hacerlo.  13. 
El  no  querra  acompanarme  si  vamos  antes  de  lunes. 
14.  <;Que  te  dio  tu  tio?  15.  Nada  me  dio  ni  me  dara  nada, 
si  no  es  un  buen  consejo  y  su  bendicion.  16.  El  hombre 
no  quiso  conducir  el  automovil  por  no  saber  como  con- 
ducirlo.  1?.  Quisimos  que  ellos  nos  acompanasen,  pero 
ellos  no  pudieron  venir.  18.  ^Han  visto  ustedes  a  la  nina 
que  lavo  la  vajilla?  19.  No  era  una  nina,  sino  mi  hermand 
Juan.  20.  Es  imposible  que  den  en  la  trampa — saben  de- 
masiado.  21.  No  vi  al  hombre  que  vino  a  verme.  22.  Des- 
pues  de  que  hube  visto  aquello,  me  fui  sin  decir  nada. 

BB.  1.  Children  ought  (debieran)  to  do  as  their  par- 
ents tell  them.  2.  I  came  across  a  man  who  showed  me  the 
street  where  my  uncle  and  aunt  lived.  3.  They  are  very 
anxious  to  return  to  Seville,  for  they  don't  like  Madrid. 


CONSONANTS 


195 


4.  They  did  not  fall  into  the  trap.  5.  My  cousins  live  on 
X.  Street,  which  is  the  longest  street  in  the  city.  6.  They 
wanted  to  visit  us  todaj^  before  going  to  New  York  (Nueva 
York).  7.  We  shall  be  able  to  do  it,  but  we  shall  not  want 
to  do  it.  8.  They  wanted  us  to  see  their  new  house,  but  we 
had  to  go  away  the  same  day,  and  so  we  did  not  have 
enough  time.  9.  Dear  Henry,  This  letter  can  not  be  very 
long,  because  I  am  in  a  hurry.  10.  He  could  have  done  it 
if  he  had  wanted  to.  11.  Did  he  want  to  drive  the  auto? 
(Conducir,  guiar,  or  manejar  may  be  used.)  12.  No,  he 
was  too  ill.  13.  Did  they  see  the  book  you  wrote  ?  14.  They 
couldn't  do  that — it  was  impossible.  15.  It  was  necessary 
for  us  to  study  at  least  six  hours  a  day.  16.  They  won't 
give  you  anything  for  that — it  is  no  good.  17.  Give  me 
the  books — give  me  them,  I  tell  you.  18.  See  here;  aren't 
you  sick?  19.  Then  how  can  you  swim?  20.  I  did  not  see 
my  father  today — he  had  to  go  away  before  I  woke-up. 
21.  Do  as  you  like. 

LESSON  LXXIII 
CONSONANTS 

Review  Lessons  LI  and  LVIII;  Lesson  I. 

This  lesson  takes  up  in  more  detail  some  consonants 
omitted  or  discussed  but  briefly  in  Lesson  I. 

1.  There  are  no  consonants  written  doubled  in  Spanish, 
as  in  the  English  words  pretty,  supper.1  11  and  rr  are  not 
doubled — they  are  special  sounds,  11  being  sounded  ap- 
proximately as  li-  in  million,  and  rr  being  trilled  twice  as 
long  as  single  r,  which  itself  is  pronounced  with  a  single 
tap  of  the  tongue,  cc,  as  in  leccion,  are  two  separate 
sounds. 

rr  is  written  so  within  a  word,  but  only  single  at  the 


^Beware  of  writing-  philosopho  for  filosofo;  assistencia  for  asistencia;  mathe- 
maticas  for  matematicas;  arithmetica  for  aritmetica;  annuario  for  anuario; 
innocente  for  inocente;  sumptuoso  for  suntuoso;  etc. 


196 


SPANISH  GKAMMLAB 


beginning ;  the  r-  of  rosa  is  pronounced  the  same  as  -rr-  in 
perro. 

The  double  nn  in  such  words  as  innoble,  ignoble; 
ennoblecer.  to  ennoble,  to  embellish;  ennegrecer,  to  blacken, 
are  too  infrequent  to  merit  more  than  passing  attention. 

x  is  pronounced  as  ks.  But  when  a  consonant  follows, 
it  has  the  sound  s. 

eximio,  eminent,  famous       excepto,  except  [pronounce  escepto) 

2.  The  following  sounds  and  spellings  are  to  be  carefully 
noted. 

ce,  ci,  z,  which  in  Spain  are  pronounced  the,  thi  (as  in 
English  through),  are  pronounced  se,  si  {as  in  English  so) 
in  all  South  America  and  much  of  southern  Spain, 
cero  cirio  zambullir 

d  between  vowels  or  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  pro- 
nounced like  th  in  them. 

ciudad 

d  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  or  after  1  or  n  in  a 
phrase  or  word,  is  pronounced  like  English  d  (in  do), 
dar         en  donde         andar         al  dar         aldea,  village 

h.  although  usually  silent,  is  faintly  pronounced  with 
initial  hue-, 
hueso 

k  is  not  an  original  Spanish  letter,  and  is  therefore 
found  only  in  words  of  foreign  origin. 

kilometro,  kilometer    kiosco,  news  stand  (also  written  quiosco) 

11  (see  above)  is  by  many  Spaniards  pronounced  as  y 
in  English  yes. 
hallar 

The  pronunciation  of  b  and  v  is  explained  in  Lesson  I, 
3.  Note  further  that  at  the  beginning  of  a  phrase,  or  after 
m  or  n,  one  must  pronounce  b  or  v  like  English  b  (either 
m  or  n  is  here  pronounced  m). 


DECIR 


197 


jva!  well!  really!  en  vez  de,  instead  of 

enviar,  to  send  embestir  (i),  to  attack 

el  baile,  dance 

A.  Review  the  pronunciation  of  all  the  letters  of  the 
alphabet. 

AA.  Learn  the  new  words  above. 
AAA.  Pronounce  and  translate: 

1.  No  escribia  mas  de  cinco  ejercicios  todas  las  tardes. 

2.  Compraron  sus  zapatos  ayer.  3.  ^Has  hallado  el  libro 
rojo?  4.  Sus  primas  y  las  de  su  tio  son  muy  diligentes. 
5.  Estan  aqui  los  Garcia?  6.  ^Por  que  no  repite  V.  lo  que 
has  oido?  7.  Llamaba  a  su  perro.  8.  Aun  dudo  si  estan 
aqui.  9.  Estan  en  vacaciones.  10.  Viven  en  la  misma  aldea. 
11.  Le  cogi  por  el  brazo.  12.  En  verdad,  no  lo  oi.  13. 
Todos,  excepto  el.  14.  Lo  compre  al  hombre  que  tiene  el 
kiosco.  15.  No  estudiamos  matematicas.  16.  Este  camino 
(road)  tiene  tres  kilometros.  17.  Busque  usted  sus  libros. 
18.  No  viven  en  la  misma  ciudad.  19.  Ellas  en  vez  de  ellos. 
20.  j  Va!    21.  Es  dificil  que  lo  encuentres. 


LESSON  LXXIV 

1.  Decir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  say 

(1)  digo 

(a)  digo,  dices,  dice;  decimos,  decis,  dicen 

(b)  diga,  digas,  diga;  digamos,  digais,  digan 

(c)  di  decid 

(d)  decia,  decias,  etc. 

(2)  decir  (contracted  to  stem  dir-) 

(a)  dire,  diras,  etc.  (b)  diria,  dirias,  etc. 

(3)  diciendo 
esta  diciendo 

(4)  dicho 

(a)  he  dicho,  etc.  (b)  queda  dicho,  etc. 

(5)  dijeron 

(a)  dije,  dijiste,  dijo;  dijimos,  dijisteis,  dijeron 

(b)  dijese,  dijeses,  etc.  dijera,  dijeras,  etc. 

(c)  dijere,  dijeres,  etc. 


198 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


The  compounds  bendecir,  to  bless,  and  maldecir,  to 
curse,  are  both  regular  in  the  future  and  conditional,  and 
imperative  singular.  Note  past  participles,  bendito, 
maldito. 

bendecire,  bendice,  maldeciran,  maldecirian 

2.  Venir  (E-ch.  II),  to  come 

(1)  vengo 

(a)  vengo,  vienes,  viene;  venimos,  veins,  vienen 

(b)  venga,  vengas,  venga;  vengamos,  vengais,  vengan 
(e)  ven  venid 

(d)  venia,  venias,  etc. 

(2)  venir  {contracted  to  stem  vendr-) 

(a)  vendre,  vendras,  etc.         (b)  vendria,  vendrias,  etc. 

(3)  viniendo 
esta  viniendo 

( 4 )  venido 

(a)  lia  venido  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  vinieron 

(a)  vine,  viniste,  vino;  vinimos,  vinisteis,  vinieron 

(b)  viniese,  vinieses,  etc.        viniera,  vinieras,  etc. 

(c)  viniere,  vinieres,  etc. 

Este  traje  no  me  viene,  This  suit  does  not  become  me. 
I A  que  viene  eso  ?    What  is  the  good  of  that  ?  What  does  that 
lead  to? 

convenir  en,  to  agree  to;   {3rd.  sing,  as  impersonal)  it  suits; 

Me  conviene,  That  suits  me. 
Convengo  en  ello,  I  agree  to  it. 

3.  Hacer,  to  do,  to  make 

(1)  hago 

(a)  hago,  haces,  hace;  hacemos,  haceis,  hacen 

(b)  haga,  hagas,  haga;  hagamos,  hagais,  hagan 

(c)  haz 1  haced 

(d)  hacia,  hacias,  etc. 

(2)  hacer  {contracted  to  stem  har-) 

(a)  hare,  haras,  etc.  (b)  haria,  hanas,  etc. 

(3)  haciendo 
esta  haciendo 

(4)  hecho 

(a)  ha  hecho,  etc.  (b)  esta  hecho,  etc. 

(5)  hicieron 

(a)  hice,  hiciste  hizo1;  hicimos,  hicisteis,  hicieron 


1  c  of  the  stem  is  here  changed  to  z  to  indicate  the  th  sound  (as  in  through). 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


199 


(b)  hiciese,  hicieses,  etc.  hiciera,  hicieras,  etc. 

(c)  hiciere,  hicieres,  etc. 

hacer  caso  de,  pay  attention  to;  No  haga  Vd.  caso  de  eso,  Don't 

pay  attention  to  that, 
hacer  de,  to  act  like 

hacerse,  to  become,  to  make  oneself ;  se  hace  tarde,  it  is  becoming 
late;  se  hace  noche,  night  is  drawing  on 

4.  Poner,  to  put,  to  place 

(1)  pongo 

(a)  pongo,  pones,  pone;  ponemos,  poneis,  ponen 

(b)  ponga,  pongas,  ponga;  pongamos,  pongais,  pongan 

(c)  pon  poned 

(d)  poma,  pomas,  etc. 

(2)  poner  {contracted  to  stem  pondr-) 

(a)  pondre,  pondras,  etc-  (b)  pondria,  pondrias,  etc. 

(3)  poniendo 
esta  poniendo 

(4)  puesto 

(a)  he  puesto,  etc.  (b)  fue  puesto,  etc. 

(5)  pusieron 

(a)  puse,  pusiste,  puso;  pusimos,  pusisteis,  pusieron 

(b)  pusiese,  pusieses,  etc.        pusiera,  pusieras,  etc. 

(c)  pusiere,  pusieres,  etc. 
ponerse,  to  become 

ponerse  a,  to  set  about,  to  begin 

5.  Tener  (R-ch.  I),  to  have,  to  hold 

(1)  tengo 

(a)  tengo,  tienes,  tiene;  tenemos,  teneis,  tienen 

(b)  tenga,  tengas,  tenga;  tengamos,  tengais,  tengan 

(c)  ten  tened 

(d)  tenia,  tenias,  etc. 

(2)  tener  (contracted  to  stem  tendr-) 

(a)  tendre,  tendras,  etc.  (b)  tendria,  tendrias,  etc. 

(3)  teniendo 
esta  teniendo 

(4)  tenido 

(a)  he  tenido,  etc.  (b)  fue  tenido,  etc. 

(5)  tuvieron 

(a)  tuve,  tuviste,  tuvo;  tuvimos,  tuvisteis,  tuvieron 

(b)  tuviese,  tuvieses,  etc.        tuviera,  tuvieras,  etc. 

(c)  tuviere,  tuvieres,  etc. 

For  idioms  with  tener,  see  Lessons  XXVII,  3,  4,  5; 
XXIX,  1 ;  LVI,  4c. 


200 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


no  tener  nada  que  ver  con,  to  have  nothing  to  do  with 
tener  razon,  to  be  right 
detenerse,  to  stop,  to  halt 

VOCABULARY 

el  centavo,  cent  la  pelota,  ball 

doler  (ue),  to  pain,  to  ache  un  rato,  a  while 

le  duele  la  cabeza,  he  has  a  elresfriado,  cold  (the  sickness) 

headache  el  remedio,  remedy 

la  f  onda,  inn  no  hay  remedio,  there  is  no  help 

gastar,  to  spend  for  it 

A.  Give  the  principal  parts  and  conjugate  every  tense  of 
hacer,  decir,  poner,  venir,  and  tener. 

AA.  1.  vendran  2.  haz  3.  que  hicieramos  4.  pon- 
dremos  5.  dira  6.  pon  7.  pongan  ustedes  8.  digo  9.  ven 
10.  puse  11.  poniais  12.  haciamos  13.  pondre  14.  que 
ponga  15.  dijisteis  16,  tenga  usted  17.  teniamos  18. 
dijeron  19.  que  viniesemos  20.  que  venga  21.  ponia 
22.  que  tengamos  23.  tuve  24.  di  25.  vine  26.  tengamos 
27.  que  haga  28.  decias  29.  no  hagas  30.  tendre 
31.  que  pusieran  32.  que  digamos  33.  venid  34.  hagamos 
35.  tuvimos  36.  tiene  37.  pusieron  38.  decid  39.  ^veni- 
ais?    40.  haran    41.  pongamos    42.  que  tengan 

AAA.  1.  they  were  putting  2.  I  make  3.  I  put  4.  I 
say  5.  they  put  6.  that  I  made  7.  we  shall  make  8.  they 
have  9.  that  he  has  10.  would  he  say?  11.  I  shall  place 
12.  let  us  do  13.  let  us  put  14.  let  her  say  15.  we  come 
16.  they  will  come  17.  was  she  doing?  18.  let  us  have 
19.  would  they  have?  20.  let  him  put  21.  do  it  22.  that 
I  place  23.  he  did  it  24.  would  he  put?  25.  had  he? 
26.  have  27.  say  28.  that  she  says  29.  would  they  put? 
30.  I've  made  31.  that  she  made  32.  that  I  had  33.  I 
shall  say  34.  he  was  saying  35.  that  they  said  36.  they 
wouldn't  come  37.  that  we  came  38.  that  we  come 
39.  come 

B.  Detente,  mi  hija,  quiero  hablar  contigo.  2.  Nunca 
tiene  razon;  siempre  esta  hablando  de  cosas  con  que  no 
tiene  nada  que  ver.  3.  Se  detuvo  en  una  fonda  al  lado  del 
camino  y  no  volvimos  a  verlo.    4.  Me  hace  mal  el  brazo 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


201 


derecho;  no  se  lo  que  tendre.  5.  Tengo  ganas  de  ver  lo  que 
ban  comprado;  no  veo  las  horas  de  visitarlos.  6.  Se  puso 
muy  serio ;  despues  de  un  rato  nos  hablo  como  sigue.  7.  A 
los  veinte  y  cuatro  anos,  se  hizo  medico.  8.  Vinieron  a 
vernos  la  semana  pasada,  pero  no  estuvimos  en  casa,  y  asi 
no  pudimos  hablar  con  ellos.  9.  Hace  diez  anos,  no  tenia 
ni  un  centavo;  hoy  es  el  hombre  mas  rico  de  la  ciudad. 

10.  Se  puso  entonces  a  trabajar  con  todas  sus  fuerzas. 

11.  Vino  a  su  casa  despues  de  las  tres  y  media.  12.  Tiene 
ganas  de  ponerse  el  sombrero  y  salir,  pero  todavia  esta 
demasiado  enfermo.  13.  Di,  ^que  quieres  mas?  ^ ir  a  la 
escuela  o  jugar  a  la  pelota?  14.  Hagamoslo,  que  (for) 
tenemos  que  hacerlo;  despues  saldremos.  15.  Hacia  tres 
horas  que  teniamos  el  dinero — y  despues  de  otra  hora  mas, 
lo  habiamos  todo  gastado.  16.  Ven  manana — alia  veremos 
(we'll  see  about  it  then).  17.  Me  dijeron  que  yo  no  se  lo 
dijese  a  usted — pero  no  hay  remedio,  usted  tiene  que 
saberlo. 

BB.  1.  They  have  lived  in  this  house  for  ten  years,  but 
they  don't  like  it.  2.  Probably  they  will  sell  it  and  buy 
another.  3.  Do  you  feel  like  setting  about  studying  to  be 
a  doctor?  4.  Did  you  say  that  this  child  can't  read? 
5.  What  they  told  me,  it  is  not  necessary  for  me  to  say  over 
again  to  you.  6.  Tell  it  to  them — I'd  like  to  have  them 
hear  it.  7._Tell  me  what  you  read  and  I'll  tell  you  what 
you  are.  8.  Please  come  here  at  once.  9.  Stop.  Now  tell 
me  what  you  were  doing.  10.  My  head  hurts  me  very 
much.  11.  You  wrere  right.  It  was  his  uncle,  not  (que  no) 
his  father,  who  bought  the  house.  12.  I  have  a  headache. 
13.  He  is  becoming  more  industrious;  I  think  he  will  do 
his  work  well  this  year.  14.  We  felt  like  buying  the  house, 
but  we  are  afraid  they  are  asking  too  much  for  it.  15.  They 
stopped  at  X.  Street,  where  the  father  of  one  of  the  boys 
lives.  16.  Will  you  come  and  (a)  see  us  next  week  if  you 
have  time?  17.  I  haven't  seen  them  for  four  years.  18. 
They  stopped  near  the  corner,  and  talked  [for]  fifteen 
minutes.   19.  He  has  a  cold. 


202 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


LESSON  LXXV 

STRESS  AND  ACCENT;  DIVISION  INTO  SYLLABLES 

Review  Lesson  III,  1,  2,  3. 

1.  Accents  are  occasionally  used,  not  to  denote  irregular 
stress,  but  to  break  two  adjacent  vowels  into  two  syllables, 
(that  is,  prevent  them  from  forming  a  diphthong,  which 
would  make  one  syllable  only).  The  stress  of  the  word 
may  be  regular. 

maiz  tio 

Note  that  in  both  these  words,  the  stress  comes,  in 
maiz,  on  the  last  syllable,  as  it  should ;  in  tfo,  on  the  next 
to  the  last,  as  it  should.  The  accent  merely  shows  the  two 
vowels  to  form  separate  syllables,  and  not  a  dipthong.1 

2.  Accents  are  also  used  to  distinguish  an  interrogative 
(direct  or  indirect)  or  exclamatory  from  a  corresponding 
relative.  Here  the  accent  is  written  on  the  syllable  nor- 
mally bearing  the  stress,  whether  or  not  irregular. 

interrogative  relative 
icual?  which?  cual,  which 

ipor  que?  why?  porque,  {written  as  one  word)  because 

3.  The  general  rules  for  division  of  words  into  syllables 
are : 

(a)  A  single  consonant  goes  with  the  following  vowel. 

elegir,  to  choose ;  e  le  gir  poner,  po  ner 

aficion,  affection,  tenderness;  a  fi  cion 

(b)  ch,  11,  rr,  and  x  are  considered  as  single  consonants, 
borrar,  to  erase ;  bo  rrar       hallar,  ha  liar       mucho,  mu  cho 

(c)  Two  consonants  are  separated. 

atletico,  athletic;  at  letico       irlandes,  Irish;  irlandes 

Note  1.  But  if  the  second  of  two  consonants  is  1  or  r, 
the  two  are  considered  as  a  single  one  (as  above  in  3b). 
hablar,  ha  blar  abrir,  a  brir 

1  Note  that  an  accent  is  sometimes  written  over  the  strong  vowel  of  a  diph- 
thong; nacion,  habeis.  Here,  of  course,  it  indicates  that  the  word  is  irregularly- 
stressed. 


STRESS   AND  ACCENT 


203 


Note  2.  If  the  consonant  before  1  is  r  or  s  or  t ;  or  if 
the  consonant  before  the  r  is  s,  the  two  consonants  are 
separated  (as  in  3c). 

irlandes,  irlandes  isla,  island;  is  la 

atletico,  at  letico  israelita,  Israelite;  is  raelita 

(d)  A  weak  and  a  strong  vowel  together  form  a  diph- 
thong when  (a)  no  accent  is  written  at  all;  (b)  an  accent 
is  written  on  the  strong  vowel.  Similarly,  two  weak  vowels 
and  a  strong  vowel  form  a  triphthong. 

peinar,  pei  nar  hablais,  ha  blais 

acentuais,  acen  tuais  buey,  ox  {one  syllable) 

But  when  a  strong  and  weak  vowel  occur  together 

with  an  accent  written  on  the  weak  vowel,  they  never  form 

a  diphthong  but  split  into  two  separate  syllables. 

maiz,  ma  iz  tio,  ti  o 

Two  strong  vowels  always  separate  into  two  distinct 
syllables, 
leer,  le  er 
Note  also: 

huir,  hu  ir        argiiir,  ar  gii  ir,       fluido,  flu  i  do       cruel,  cru  el 

A.  In  AAA  in  Lesson  LXXIII,  (1)  divide  every  word 
into  syllables;  (2)  indicate  what  words  are  regular,  what 
irregular,  in  stress. 

LESSON  LXXVI 
1.  Antojarse,  to  fancy  (impersonal) 

This  verb  is  impersonal ;  that  is,  it  is  used  Only  in  the 
third  person  singular  of  the  various  tenses. 

Se  me  antoja  que  .  .  .  ,  I  fancy  that  .  .  . 
Se  le  antoja  que  .  .  .  ,  He  fancies  .  .  . 

The  present,  imperfect,  and  preterite  are  the  only 
common  tenses.  These  are  formed  regularly  on  the  model 
of  the  first  conjugation,  and  are  used  as  in  the  examples 
above. 


204  SPANISH  GRAMMAR 

2.  Constar,  to  be  clear,  to  be  evident 

This  verb  is  wholly  regular  in  formation;  but  being 
impersonal,  it  is  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  of 
the  tense  required. 

3.  Placer,  to  be  pleased  (impersonal) 

(1)  place 

(a)  place         (b)  plegue,  or         (c)  lacking         (d)  placia 
plega,  or 
plazga 

(2)  placer 

(a)  placera  (b)  placeria 

(3)  placiendo 

(4)  placido 

(a)  ha  placido,  etc.  (b)  no  passive 

(5)  C  plugo,  or  (b)    5  pluguiese    pluguiera,  or 
\  placio  { placiese  placiera 

(c)   j  pluguiere,  or 
\  placiere 

The  compound  complacerse  (en),  to  be  pleased  to 
(with),  is  conjugated  as  are  the  inceptives. 

4.  Asir,  to  grasp,  to  seize 
(1)  asgo 

(a)  asgo,  ases,  ase;  asimos,  asis,  asen 

(b)  asga,  asgas,  asga;  asgamos,  asgais,  asgan 

(c)  ase  asid 

(d)  asia,  asias,  etc. 

All  other  forms  of  asir  are  made  up  regularly. 

5.  Soler  (R-ch.  I),  to  be  used,  to  be  wont 
( 1 )  suelo 

(a)  suelo,  sueles,  suele;  solemos,  soleis,  suelen 

(b)  solia,  solias,  etc. 

Soler  is  used  only  in  the  present  and  imperfect  in- 
dicative.  Forms  like  ha  solido  are  rarely  found. 

6.  Yacer,  to  lie,  to  be  lying  down,  to  be  prone 

(1)    fyazco,  yaces,  yace;  yacemos,  yaceis,  yacen 
(a)  1  yazgo 
[yago 


SUPERLATIVE  ABSOLUTE 


205 


(b)  f  yazca,  yazcas,  etc. 
\  yazga,  yazgas,  etc. 
[yaga,  yagas,  etc. 

(c)  J  yace  yaced 
I  yaz 

(d)  yacia,  yacias,  etc. 

Other  forms  are  made  up  regularly.  This  verb  is 
quite  rare. 

7.  Superlative  Absolute.  Besides  the  regular  superlative 
of  comparison,  there  is  the  so-called  superlative  absolute. 

"It  is  very  excellent,  most  excellent,  extremely  excel- 
lent, quite  excellent"  are  English  quivalents  of  the  super- 
lative absolute.  In  Spanish,  this  superlative  absolute  is 
formed  by  adding  -fsimo  to  the  stem  of  an  adjective  or 
adverb. 

inteligente  inteligentisimo,  most,  very  intelligent 

ligero,  swift  ligensimo,  swiftest 

ligeramente,  swiftly        ligerisimamente,  most  swiftly 

Note  that  the  original  accent  is  retained  in  the  new 
compound  (see  A  10  below) 

8.  Intensive  (Emphatic)  Prefixes.  Re-,  te-,  que-,  indi- 
vidually or  tAvo  or  three  together,  may  be  prefixed  to  an 
adjective  or  adverb  to  make  it  more  emphatic. 

i  que  bueno !  how  good ! 

ique  rebueno!   )  h  d, 

jretequebueno!  J    ow  ve  y  gooa' 

A  word  may  be  repeated  for  emphasis. 

mucho  mucho,  very,  very  much 

VOCABULARY 

el  alimento,  food  emplear,  to  employ,  to  use 

dulce,  sweet  el  helado,  ice  cream 

los  dulces,  sweets,  candy  tonto,  -a,  foolish 

A.    1.  solian  trabajar  2.  retonto   3.  se  le  antoja  4.  cer- 
quisima  (cerca)    5.  que  le  plega  o  no   6.  me  complazco  en 
,decir    7.  asgo    8.  aqui  yace    9.  solia  acontecer    10.  faci- 
lisimo    11.  dificilisimamente    12.  que  asgan    13.  muchi- 


206 


SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 


simo  14.  poquisimo  (from  what  word?  why  -qu-?)  15.  me 
place  clecirle 

B.  1.  Se  le  antoja  ser  soldado.  2.  Solia  acontecer  que 
no  habia  trabajo  y  entonces  los  pobres  no  tenian  ni  dinero 
ni  alimento.  3.  Hacian  una  carrera  por  la  ciudad  en  coche 
muy  rapidamente.  4.  Aquellos  ninos  son  inteligentisimos — 
siempre  saben  sus  lecciones.  5.  Los  verbos  placer,  asir,  y 
yacer  en  esta  leccion  no  se  usan  mucho ;  en  vez  de  ellos  se 
emplean  los  verbos  agradar  o  gustar;  agarrar  o  coger;  y 
estar  acostado  o  estar  en  el  suelo.  6.  <iVive  cerca  de  voso- 
tros  ? — Si,  cerquisima.  7.  Lo  que  tu  dices  es  retequebueno. 
8.  Muchisimo  me  gusta.  9.  La  vida  es  dulce.  10.  Faci- 
Hsimo  es  tr  aba  jar,  pero  el  no  hacer  nada  cuesta  (is  hard). 
11.  Los  helados  eran  riquisimos. 

LESSON  LXXVII 
AUGMENTATIVES  AND  DIMINUTIVES 

1.  Certain  endings  are  added  to  nouns,  adjectives,  and 
adverbs  to  give  them  various  diminutive,  affectionate,  aug- 
mentative, or  pejorative  meanings.  The  beginner  should 
never  add  these  of  his  own  initiative  to  any  word,  but 
should  follow  Spanish  practice  as  he  finds  it. 

2.  The  diminutive  endings  -ito,  -cito,  -ecito  indicate 
smallness,  affection,  pity. 

-illo,  -cillo,  -ecillo  indicate  smallness,  or  contempt,  or 
indifference. 

-uelo,  -zuelo,  -ezuelo  indicate  smallness  or  scorn. 

3.  The  augmentative  (or  pejorative)  endings  -on,  -eron, 
-eton,  -azo  indicate  bigness. 

-acho,  -achon,  -arron,  -ejon,  -ote,  -ucho  indicate  big- 
ness or  scorn. 


callado,  quiet 
cerca,  near 


calladito,  very  quiet,  still  as  a 

mouse 
cerquita,  quite  near 


AUGMENTATIVES  AND  DIMINUTIVES 


207 


la  campana,  bell 


la  zorra,  fox 
la  casa,  house 


el  viejo,  old  man 


la  mujer,  woman 


la  buharda,  garret  window 


Serafina,  Serafina 
Juana,  Jane 


Luis,  Louis 
papa,  father,  "  dad  " 
Francisco,  Francis 


hasta  luego,  good-by  for  a 


while 


Finita,  little  Serafina 
Juanita,  little,  dear  Jane; 

"  Janey  " 
hasta  lueguito,  good-by  for  a 

short  while 
Luisito,  little,  dear  Louis 
papacito,  dear  father,  "  daddy  " 
Paquito,  "  Frankie  " 
la  buhardilla,  small  garret 
la  campanilla,  small  bell 
la  mujercilla,  little  woman,  insig- 
nificant woman 
la  zorrilla,  polecat,  skunk 
el  caseron,  ill -proportioned,  big 
house 

la  casucha,  ugly  old  house 
el  vejote,  repulsive  old  man 


4.  Future  (Hypothetical)  Subjunctive.  In  Spanish, 
there  exists  a  future  subjunctive,  the  forms  of  which  are 
made  by  substituting  -re  etc.  for  the  -ra  past  siibjunctive. 

hablare,  hablares,  hablare;  hablaremos,  hablareis,  hablaren 
bebiere,  bebieres,  bebiere;  bebieremos,  bebiereis,  bebieren 
viviere,  vivieres,  viviere;  vivieremos,  viviereis,  vivieren 

The  future  subjunctive  is  practically  not  found  in 

modern  Spanish,  surviving  only  in  some  proverbs,  legal 

language,  and  other  stereotyped  expressions. 

venga  lo  que  viniere,  come  what  may 

Primero.    Que  cada  seccion  .  .  .  y  que  si  le  fuere  posible  .  .  . 

First.    That  each  section  .  .  .  and  that  if  it  were  possible 


...  en  cuanto  fuere  posible  .  .  .  ,  in  so  far  as  may  be  possible  .  .  . 
pese  a  quien  pesare,  grieve  whom  it  may  (pesar,  to  grieve  a 


for  him.  .  .  . 


person) 


208 


SPANISH  GKAMMAR 


APPENDIX  A 
PERSON  AND  NUMBER 

1.  In  English,  a  verb  rarely  changes  in  form.  Thus 
I  speak,  you  speak,  he  speaks;  we  speak,  they  speak — all 

these  forms,  with  but  one  exception,  are  identical.  People 
know  just  what  we  mean  by  the  words  I,  you,  we,  and 
so  on. 

2.  For  convenience,  we  class  the  above  forms  according 
to  person  and  number. 

(a)  By  number  we  indicate  whether  we  are  speaking 
of  one  person  or  of  several  persons — of  I  or  of  we,  of  he 
or  of  they. 

(b)  By  person  we  indicate  whether  we  mean  I  (first 
person) ;  you  (second  person)  ;  or  he,  she,  it  (third  person) 
— these  are  all  singular;  or  we  (first  person)  ;  you  (second 
person)  ;  or  they  (third  person) — these  are  all  plural. 

3.  In  Spanish,  however,  instead  of  always  using  the  pro- 
nouns to  indicate  person  and  number,  verbs  add  certain 
endings  which  are  different  for  each  person  of  the  singular 
and  plural.  These  endings  are  added  to  the  stem  (the 
stem  of  any  Spanish  verb  may  be  obtained  by  dropping 
the  ending  of  the  infinitive,  which  is  the  form  of  the  verb 
always  given  in  vocabularies  and  corresponds  to  the  Eng- 
lish form  of  the  verb  with  to — to  speak). 

Thus  the  Spanish  verb  to  speak  is  hablar.  Dropping 
the  infinitive  ending  -ar,  we  have  left  the  stem  habl-,  to 
which  are  added  the  various  endings  to  give  person  and 
number  (see  Lesson  IV). 

APPENDIX  B 
IDIOMS 

1.  If  one  language  could  be  translated  into  another 
merely  by  giving  the  equivalent  of  each  word  as  it  occurs, 


APPENDIX  B 


209 


language  work  would  consist  merely  of  learning  the  dic- 
tionary. But,  aside  from  regular  constructions,  there  are, 
in  every  language,  certain  expressions  which  can  not  be 
explained  by  the  regular  rules  of  the  grammar  of  that  lan- 
guage. As  a  general  thing,  these  idioms,  so-called,  cannot 
be  literally  translated.  Many  of  them,  however,  are  easily 
understood. 

2.  Gustar,  with  a  dative  object,  means  literally  to  please. 

La  casa  gusta  a  mi  padre,  The  house  pleases  to  my  father; 

better  English,  My  father  likes  the  house. 
Me  gusta  tocar  el  piano,  To  me  it  pleases  to  play  the  piano; 

better  English,  I  like  to  play  the  piano. 

Agradar  and  alegrar  are  used  in  the  same  sense. 
No  me  agrada  trabajar  tanto,  I  don't  like  to  work  so  much. 

3.  Acabar  de,  to  have  just  (used  only  in  the  present  and 
imperfect) 

Acaba  de  trabajar,  He  has  just  worked  {literally,  He  finishes 

from  working). 
Acababamos  de  escribir,  We  had  just  written. 

The  preterite  of  this  verb  gives  an  idiom  meaning 
finished. 

Acabo  de  escribir,  He  finished  writing. 

4.  Volver  a  (+  verb),  again  (lit,  to  return  to.  .  .  .) 

Volvio  a  hablar  con  mi  tfo,  He  spoke  again  with  my  uncle  (lit., 

He  returned  to  speak  with  my  uncle.) 
Volvimos  a  escribir  los  ejercicios,  We  again  wrote  the  exercises. 

5.  Entrar  en,  to  enter,  to  go  into  (In  English,  ive  say,  We 
enter  a  room;  but  as  enter  cannot  take  a  direct  object,  the 
Spanish  says  to  enter  into  a  room.) 

Entro  en  la  pieza,  She  entered  (into)  the  room. 

6.  Sometimes,  the  reverse  of  5  is  the  case — the  Spanish 
has  not  a  preposition  where  the  English  has. 

Busco  un  libro,  I  am  looking-for  a  book. 

7.  Tirar  (de) 

Tiro  una  piedra,  He  threw  a  stone. 
Tiro  de  la  mesa,  He  pulled  at  the  table. 


210 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


8.  Learn  the  above  idiomatic  expressions.  There  are  in- 
numerable expressions,  some  like,  some  different  from, 
these.  If  the  student  once  grasps  the  idea  of  the  idiom, 
and  learns  the  meaning  and  use  of  each  as  he  comes  to  it, 
he  will  have  no  difficulty.  The  essential  thing  is  to  try  to 
think  in  Spanish,  as  one  does  in  English ;  to  think  in  Span- 
ish idiom. 


APPENDIX  C 
THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

1.  The  subjunctive  mood,  as  a  very  important  element 
of  Spanish  grammar,  should  be  thoroughly  understood  in 
its  main  outlines  before  the  student  takes  it  up  in  detail. 
Though  English  possesses  a  few  uses  of  the  subjunctive, 
they  are  net  numerous  enough  or  close  enough  to  the  Span- 
ish to  be  of  much  help  in  understanding  the  Spanish  sub- 
junctive. 

2.  The  general  purpose  of  the  subjunctive  is  to  lend  to 
the  verb  a  tinge  of  doubt  or  uncertainty.  The  subjunctive 
is  thus  found  in  subordinate  clauses  depending  on  a  main 
verb  expressing  or  implying  doubt  or  uncertainty. 

3.  In  the  six  instances  below,  the  verb  of  the  main  clause 
casts  doubt  upon  or  expresses  uncertainty  about  the  sub- 
ordinate clause.  The  subordinate  clause  is  accordingly  put 
in  the  subjunctive. 

(Note.  In  Spanish,  when  a  subordinate  verb  in  a 
complex  sentence  has  a  different  subject  from  that  in  the 
main  clause,  both  verbs  must  be  finite,  and  the  second  must 
be  introduced  by  que. 

Very  rarely,  que  is  found  omitted,  as  after  impedir, 
solicitar,  and  permitir.  The  beginner,  however,  should  not 
omit  que. 

Sometimes,  the  infinitive  is  found  even  where  the  sub- 


APPENDIX  C  211 

ject  changes,  chiefly  after  aconsejar,  permitir,  prohibir, 
and  mandar.) 

(1)  emotion,  fear 

I  am  afraid  he  may  come,  Temo  que  venga. 

In  all  expressions  of  an  emotion,  as  fear  or  joy,  there 
is  a  desire  to  use  the  subjunctive  as  a  less  matter-of-fact 
mood. 

(2)  doubt,  uncertainty 

Is  it  possible  that  they  may  come?    Es  posible  que  vengan? 
I  doubt  that  she  will  come.    Dudo  que  ella  venga. 

In  neither  case  is  the  coming  yet  an  actual  fact — 
there  is  doubt,  uncertainty — hence,  the  subjunctive. 

(3)  command,  request,  forbidding 

I  ask  him  to  give  me  the  book  (I  ask  him  that  he  give  me  the 
book).    Le  pido  que  me  de  el  libro. 

When  a  command  is  given,  we  never  know  whether  it 
will  be  carried  out — there  is  doubt,  uncertainty;  hence, 
the  subjunctive. 

(4)  conditions  contrary  to  fact  (conditional  sentences  in 
which  the  if -clause  states  the  contrary  of  the  truth) 

If  I  had  stayed,  I  should  have  seen  him.    Si  hubiese  quedado,  le 
habria  visto. 

But  it  is  not  a  fact  that  I  stayed ;  hence,  the  subjunc- 
tive must  be  used  to  show  that  indefiniteness. 

(5)  in  sentences  where  the  subordinate  clause,  an  ad- 
jective clause  usually,  describes  somebody  or  something  as 
yet  not  definitely  known 

I  want  a  gardener  who  is  a  good  worker.    Quiero  un  jardinero 
que  sea  un  buen  trabajador. 

We  do  not  really  know  just  who  that  man  may  be; 
hence,  the  subjunctive  must  be  used  to  indicate  the  un- 
certainty. 


SPAXISH  GEAM^IAE 


(6)  in  adverbial  clauses  not  yet  considered  as  actual 
facts,  actual  happenings 

I  shall  do  it  before  lie  comes  {definite  time  of  his  coming  not 
yet  }:r.rj\ri\  .    Lo  liare"  antes  de  que  el  venga. 

I  wanted  to  do  it.  before  lie  came  (definite  time  of  his  coming 
not  then  known).  Queria  liaeerlo  antes  que  el 
viniese. 

Even  if  he  does  it,  it  won't  make  matters  better  {hut  there  is 
still  douot  as  to  whether  he  will  do  it  .  Aunque  lo 
haga,  no  servira. 

I  shall  do  it  so  that  they  may  recognize  my  good  intentions  {but 

we  are  not  certain  that  they  will).  Lo  hare  para 
que  reconozcan  mi  buena  voluntad. 


Review  Appendix  C. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  the  mood  used  in  subordinate 
clauses  (a  few  apparent  exceptions  are  easily  explained) 
to  express  doubt,  uncertainty. 

2.  The  endings  of  the  first  conjugation  are  : 

present  tense 
-e,  -es,  -e;  -emos,  -eis,  -en 

past  tense 

f -ase,  -ases,  -ase;  -asemos,  -aseis,  -asen 


(a)  For  practical  purposes  the  beginner  may  use 
either  the  -se  or  -ra  past  subjunctive  but  see  contrary-to- 
fact  conditions.  Lesson  XLY  . 

The  form  in  -se  is  more  common  in  Spain,  and  the 
form  in  -ra  in  par:-  ::  South  America. 

(b)  The  endings  of  the  present  subjunctive  are  the 
same  as  those  of  the  present  indicative  save  that  -e  is  sub- 
stituted for  -a  (-0  in  the  first  singular). 

3.  The  endings  of  the  second' and  third  conjugations  are  : 


APPEXDIX  D 


SUMMARY  OF  SUBJUNCTIVE 


-a,  -i 


present  tense 
-as,  -a;  -amos,  -ais,  -an 


APPENDIX  D 


213 


past  tense 

-  (-iese,  -ieses,  -iese;  -iesemos,  -ieseis,  -iesen 
j  -iera,  -ieras,  -iera;  -igramos,  -ierais,  -ieran 

(a)  The  endings  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations 
are  alike. 

(b)  In  the  present  tense,  substitute  -a  for  -e  of  the 
endings  of  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  first  conjugation. 

(c)  In  the  past  tense,  substitute  -ie-  for  -a-  of  the 
endings  of  the  past  subjunctive  of  the  first  conjugation. 

4.  The  subjunctive  is  used : 

(a)  in  contrary-to-fact  conditions,  with  moods  and 
tenses  as  follows : 

Present  contrary  to  fact 
if-elause  result  clause 

si  plus  -se  past  subjunctive  -ra  past  subjunctive  or  conditional 

si  plus  -ra  past  subjunctive  conditional 

Si  estuviese  aqui,  le  hablaria  )  T^  ,  ,        T  ,     n  , 

Si  P«ti,v,P«p  «n«f  1p  hMara     V  lf  he  Were  here*>  1  sll0uld  SPeak 


Si  estuviese  aqui,  le  hablara   r        ^  him 
Si  estuviera  aqui,  le  hablaria  ^ 

Note  also  the  substitutions: 

Estuviera  el  aqui,  {  hablaria  Were  he  here,  I  should  speak  to 
Estando  el  aqui,  M  * 

A  estar  el  aqui,  ) 

Past  contrary  to  fact 

si  plus  -se  pluperfect  subjunctive    {  ~ra  P^uPer^c^  subjunctive 
r  r    r  j  [or  conditional  perfect 

si  plus  -ra  pluperfect  subjunctive     conditional  perfect 

Si  hubiese  estado  aqui,  le  habria  hablado  )  If  he  had  been  here,  I 
Si  hubiese  estado  aqui,  le  hubiera  hablado  I  should  have  spoken 
Si  hubiera  estado  aqui,  le  habria  hablado   J     to  him. 

Note  also  the  substitutions: 

Hubiese  estado  el  aqui,  le  habria  (hubiera)  hablado  )  ^ d  hTe  libee,n1 
Habiendo  estado  el  aqui,  le  habria  (hubiera)  hablado  >■  £ere?  1  shou[a 
A  haber  estado  el  aqui,  le  habria  (hubiera)  hablado  )    toa\eimSF  1 

(b)  in  adverbial  clauses  of  time,  place,  purpose,  con- 
cession, manner,  and  other  (adverbial)  relations,  if  in- 
definite. 

Le  hablare  antes  que  ellos  lleguen,  I  shall  speak  to  him  before 
they  arrive. 


214  SPANISH  GEAMMAR 

Note: 

Le  hablare  antes  de  llegar  (yo),  I  shall  speak  to  him  before  (my) 
arriving. 

(c)  In  adjective  clauses,  the  antecedent  of  which  is 
indefinite. 

Busco  un  hombre  que  pueda  hacerlo,  I  am  looking  for  a  man  who 
can  do  it. 

Note: 

Busco  al  hombre  que  lo  hizo,  I  am  looking  for  the  man  who 

did  it. 

(d)  in  noun  clauses,  the  indefinite  subject  or  object 
of  a  verb:  e.  g.,  it  is  necessary,  it  is  time,  it  is  possible; 

verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  desiring,  forbidding,  denying, 
asking,  doubting,  fearing,  hoping,  to  be  glad  or  sorry. 

Es  preciso  que  estudie,  He  must  study  (It  is  necessary  that  he 
study). 

Quiero  que  estudie,  I  want  him  to  study  (I  want  that  he  studies). 

Note:  where  a  real  fact  is  stated,  the  indicative  is 
used ;  so  always  after  si  =  whether. 

No  dudo  que  estan  aqui,  I  don't  doubt  (this  is  a  fact)  that  they 
are  here. 

No  sabe  si  estan  aqui,  He  does  not  know  whether  they  are  here. 

(e)  in  the  first  person  plural  and  third  person  singu- 
lar and  plural,  to  express  a  hope  (the  so-called  optative  or 
hortatory  use).  Apparently  these  cases  occur  in  inde- 
pendent clauses,  as  are  a  few  other  isolated  instances;  but 
these  are  explained  on  the  ground  of  an  understood  main 
verb. 

Estudiemos  (Vamos  a  estudiar),  Let  us  study. 
Que  lo  digan  (Diganlo),  Let  them  tell  it. 
jViva  el  Paraguay!   Hurrah  for  Paraguay! 


APPENDIX  E 


APPENDIX  E 
Orthographic  changes  chart  (cf.  Lessons  LI  and  LVIII) 

-ar  verbs  change  before  e  in  all  -er,  -ir  verbs  change  before  o  in 
present  subjunctive  and  first  present  indicative  and  a  in 
singular  preterite  indicative:  all  present  subjunctive: 

c  becomes  qu:  sacar  qu  becomes  c:  delinquir 

g  gu:  llegar  gu  g:  distinguir 

gu  gu:  averiguar  — •  —   

z  c:    rezar  c  z:  veneer;  esparcir 

j  j:     (not  g):  dejar  g  j:  coger,  elegir 

(so  also  verbs  like  crujir) 

Note  also  the  changes  below : 

Verbs  with  a  stem  ending  in  11  and  n  drop  initial  i  of 
endings  -io  and  -ie- :  preterite  third  singular  and  plural ; 
present  participle;  all  past  and  future  subjunctive;  bullir; 
tenir. 

Leer  and  other  verbs  in  which  an  i  becomes  intervocalic 
change  the  -i-  to  -y-.  This  occurs  in  the  same  forms  as  in 
bullir:  leer;  reir. 

Note  special  written  accents  in  verbs  like  reir. 

Verbs  like  huir  introduce  a  y  between  the  stem  and  end- 
ing in  all  forms  where  the  ending  begins  with  any  vowel 
but  i.  This  occurs  in  all  forms  as  in  bullir,  and  also  in  the 
present  indicative  all  singular  and  third  plural,  all  the 
present  subjunctive,  and  in  the  affirmative  imperative  sin- 
gular. 

Distinguish  verbs  like  enviar,  continuar,  which  place  a 
written  accent  on  -i-,  -u-,  in  all  singular  and  third  plural 
present  indicative  and  subjunctive  and  intimate  singular 
imperative;  and  verbs  like  limpiar,  averiguar,  which  do  not. 

Like  enviar  are  conjugated : 

confiar  to  confide  guiar,  to  guide 

desafiar,  to  challenge  porfiar,  to  persist 

desconfiar,  to  distrust  resfriar,  to  chill 

espiar,  to  spy  telegrafiar,  to  telegraph 

expiar,  to  expiate  vaciar,  to  empty 

fiar,  to  trust  variar,  to  vary;  etc. 


216 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


Like  continuar  are  conjugated: 


acentuar,  to  accent 
efectuar,  to  effect 
exceptuar,  to  except 
habituar,  to  accustom 
insinuar,  to  insinuate 

Like  limpiar  are : 


perpetuar,  to  perpetuate 
puntuar,  to  punctuate 
situar,  to  situate 
valuar,  to  evaluate;  etc. 


afiliar,  to  affiliate ;  anunciar,  to  announce ;  dif erenciar,  to 
differentiate ;  estudiar,  to  study ;  etc. 


APPENDIX  F 
ABSTRACT  AND  GENERIC  NOUNS 

1 'Snow  is  white."  We  speak  of  the  whiteness  of  snow, 
of  the  mortality  of  men.  But  we  cannot  see,  touch,  hear, 
etc.  whiteness  or  mortality.  These  are  simply  ways  of  re- 
garding snow  or  men.  Nouns  like  whiteness,  mortality, 
truth,  death,  honesty,  etc.,  are  abstract  nouns  —  nouns 
which  refer  not  to  the  thing  itself  but  to  a  quality  of  that 
thing — its  redness,  truth,  honesty,  death,  etc.,  something 
which  has  no  reality  detached  from  concrete  nouns. 

In  a  garden  are:  a  birch,  an  oak,  a  maple.  Each  is  a 
thing  by  itself,  a  special  kind,  a  special  unit.  But  when 
one  wishes  to  refer  to  them  all,  one  calls  them  " trees." 
"Trees"  is  a  word  which  designates  the  class  to  which  be- 
long a  certain  group  of  units  wThich  possess  certain  qualities 
in  common.  So  we  speak  of  men,  quadrupeds,  rodents, 
fauna,  flora,  mammals,  etc.  Such  nouns,  referring  to  a 
class,  are  called  generic  nouns. 


APPENDIX  H 


217 


APPENDIX  Gr 

ORDINALS 


primero,  first 
segundo,  second 
tercero,  third 
cuarto,  fourth 
quinto,  fifth 
sexto,  sixth 
se(p)timo,  seventh 
octavo,  eighth 
noveno,  ninth 
decimo,  tenth 
undecimo,  eleventh 
duodecimo,  twelfth 
decimo  tercio,  thirteenth 
decimo  cuarto,  fourteenth 
decimo  quinto,  fifteenth 
decimo  sexto,  sixteenth 
decimo  se(p)timo,  seventeenth 
decimo  octavo,  eighteenth 
decimo  nono,  nineteenth 
vigesimo,  twentieth 
vigesimo  primo,  twenty-first 
trigesimo,  thirtieth 

See  also  Lesson  LXVII. 


cuadragesimo,  fortieth 
quincuagesimo,  fiftieth 
sexagesimo,  sixtieth 
septuagesimo,  seventieth 
octogesimo,  eightieth 
nonagesimo,  ninetieth 
centesimo,  hundredth 
centesimo  vigesimo,  hundred 
twentieth 
ducentesimo,  two-hundredth 
trecentesimo,  three -hundredth 
cuadragentesimo,  four-hundredth 
quingentesimo,  five -hundredth 
sescentesimo,  six -hundredth 
septengesimo,  seven -hundredth 
octogentesimo,  eight-hundredth 
nonagentesimo,  nine -hundredth 
milesimo,  thousandth 
dosmilesimo,  two -thousandth 
tresmilesimo,  three -thousandth 
millonesimo,  millionth 


APPENDIX  H 
IDIOMS  AND  TRANSLATION 

Eeview  Appendix  B. 

1.  Idioms  can  not  very  well  be  classified,  and  so  it  is  not 
practical  to  give  rules  for  them.  Idioms  are  learned  best 
by  noting  individual  cases  in  Spanish,  and  then  practicing 
on  them. 

The  exact  use  of  idiom  polishes  translation  and  makes 
it  natural. 

The  only  rule  of  translation  is:  Translate  (1)  as 
closely  as  (2)  idiomatic  English  permits  (and  vice-versa 
of  course).    (1)  The  English  of  the  translation  should  be 


218 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR 


as  rigorously  close  as  the  genius  of  either  language  permits. 
(2)  The  English  translation  should  be  English — Not  Eng- 
lish words  in  Spanish  order  or  Spanish  words  in  English 
order — but  English  words  in  English  order;  and  so  for 
the  Spanish. 

2.  Tiempo — hora — vez  give  an  obvious  illustration.  All 
are  translated  into  English  as  time.  But  compare  the  three 
English  sentences  below. 

(a)  Art  is  long  and  time  is  fleeting.  Or,  I  stayed  a 
long  time.   Me  quede  mucho  tiempo. 

(b)  What  time  is  it?   ^Que  hora  es? 

(c)  I  did  it  eight  times.   Lo  hice  ocho  veces. 

(a)  is  time  in  general,  as  men  speak  of  "time  and  space.' 7 
Spanish  tiempo. 

(b)  is  time  specifically,  measured  by  the  clock,  counted 
by  the  second,  the  minute,  hour.    Spanish  hora. 

(c)  is  time  without  reference  to  either  of  the  above;  it  is 
time  in  the  sense  of  occasion,  single  or  multiple.  I  did  it 
one  time,  on  one  occasion ;  I  did  it  twenty  times,  on  twenty 
occasions.    Spanish  vez. 

To  say  (a)  Quede  mucha  vez,  for  Quede  mucho 
tiempo;  or  (b)  iQue  tiempo  es?  for  ^Que  hora  es?;  or 
(c)  Lo  hice  ocho  tiempos  or  horas  for  Lo  hice  ocho  veces 
would  be  meaningless  or  misleading.  As  well  say  in  Eng- 
lish :  ' '  What  occasion  is  it  ? ' '  for  ' '  What  time  is  it  ? ' ' 

3.  Compare  the  use  of  gustar,  acabar  de,  volver  a,  tener 
que,  hay  viento,  ;  pobre  de  usted !,  haber  de,  hay  que,  the 

future  of  probability,  the  use  of  gender  and  mood — all 
these  differ  imperceptibly  or  markedly  from  the  corre- 
sponding English. 

4.  Please! 

sirvase  (plus  the  infinitive)     Sirvase  hacerlo,  Please  do  it. 
tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  [plus  the  infinitive)     Tenga  V.  la  bondad 

de  hacerlo,  Please  do  it. 
hagame  V.  el  favor  de  (plus  the  infinitive)     Hagame  V.  el  favor 

de  hacerlo,  Please  do  it. 


APPENDIX  H 


219 


Please  =  Yes,  please  is  Si  me  hace  el  favor. 

I  Quiere  Ud.  mas  agua  ? — Si  me  hace  el  favor,  Do  you  want  more 
water? — Yes,  please. 

5.  If  the  student  will  take  idioms  at  their  face  value,  as 
something  more  or  less  different  from  the  regular  con- 
structions, he  will  have  no  unusual  trouble.  The  one  thing 
is  to  remember  that  languages  are  different  from  each 
other,  not  merely  in  vocabulary,  but  in  construction  and 
expression.  If  the  student  will  study  structure  and  idiom 
rather  than  vocabulary,  he  will  have  little  difficulty  in 
giving  smooth,  natural  translations;  and  ultimately,  using 
a  language  without  resort  to  translation  at  all. 


220  SPANISH  GRAM  MAE 

LIST  OP  IEEEGULAE  VEEBS 

(Numbers  and  letters  refer  to  lessons  and  subdivisions.) 


acentuar,  to  accentuate  58 
acordarse,  to  remember  39,  1(a); 
52,  1 

acostarse,  to  go  to  bed  39,  1  (a) ; 
52,  1 

agradecer,  to  thank  58,  (b) 
almorzar,  to  lunch  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1; 

58,  (a) 
alzar,  to  raise  58 
andar,  to  go  68 

aprobar,  to  approve  39,  1  (a) ;  52, 1 

argiiir,  to  argue  68 

asir,  to  grasp  76 

avanzar,  to  advance  58,  (a) 

averiguar,  to  ascertain  51 

bendecir,  to  bless  75 

bullir,  to  boil  51 

buscar,  to  look  for  51,  1(a) 

caber,  to  be  contained  in  70 
caer,  to  fall  58,  (c) ;  68 
cerrar,  to  shut  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
cocer,  to  cook  39,   1(a);   52,  1; 

58,  (b) 
coger,  to  catch  51 
comenzar,  to  commence  39,  1  (a) ; 

52,  1;  58,  (a) 
competir,   to   compete   39,   1  (c) ; 

52,  3 

complacerse,  to  be  pleased  76 
conducir,  to  drive  58,  (b) 
confesar,  to  confess  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
confiar,  to  confide  App.  E. 
conjugar,  to  conjugate  51,  1(c) 
conocer,  to  know  58 
contar,  to  count  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
continuar,  to  continue  58 
convencer,  to  convince  58 
convenir,  to  agree  74 
costar,  to  cost  39,  1  (a) ;  52,  1 
creer,  to  believe  58,  (c) 
cubrir,  to  cover  65 

dar,  to  give  72 
decir,  to  say  74 
deducir,  to  deduce  65 


degollar,  to  behead  39,  1  (a) ;  52,  1 

(torite  -giie-  where  diphthong 
occurs) 

delinquir,  to  be  delinquent  51 
derretir,  to  melt  39,  1(c);  52,  3 
desafiar,  to  challenge  App.  E. 
desconfiar,  to  distrust  App.  E. 
desosar,  to  bone  39,  1(a);  52,  1 

{write   deshueso,  etc.) 
despedirse,  to  take  leave  39,  1(c)  ; 

52,  3 

despertar,   to  awaken  39,  1(a); 
52,  1 

detenerse,  to  halt  74 
dirigirse,  to  go  51,  1(d) 
distinguir,  to  distinguish  51 
doler,  to  pain  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
dormir,  to  sleep  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 

efectuar,  to  effect  App.  E. 

elegir,  to  choose  39,  1(c);  52,  3; 

51,  1(d) 

empezar,  to  begin  39,  1(a);  52,  1; 

58,  (a) 

encender,  to  kindle  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
encerrar,  to  shut  up  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
encontrar,  to  meet  39,  1(a);  52,  1 
enfriar,  to  grow  cold  58 
ennegrecer,  to  grow  black  58,  (b) 
ennoblecer,  to  ennoble  58,  (b) 
entender,  to  understand  39,  1(a); 

52,  1 

entregar,  to  hand  over  51 
enviar,  to  send  58 
equivocarse,  to  be  mistaken  51, 
1(a) 

erguir,  to  erect  39,  2  and  1(c); 

51,  1(f) 
errar,  to  err  39,  2 
escribir,  to  write  65 
esparcir,  to  scatter  58 
espiar,  to  spy  App.  E. 
estar,  to  be  68 

exceptuar,  to  except  App.  E. 
expiar,  to  expiate  App.  E. 

fabricar,  to  manufacture  51 
fiar,  to  trust  App.  E. 
frefr,  to  fry;  p.p.  frito  68 


LIST  OF  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


221 


guiar,  to  guide  App.  E. 
grunir,  to  grunt  51 
guiar,  to  guide  App.  E. 

haber,  to  have  70 

habituar,  to  accustom  App.  E. 

hacer,  to  do  74 

holgarse,  to  loaf  39,  1(a);  52,  1; 

51,  1(c) 
huir,  to  flee  68 

impedir,  to  prevent  39,  1(c) ;  52,  3 
imprimir,  to  imprint  65 
insinuar,  to  insinuate  App.  E. 
ir,  to  go  70 

jugar,  to  play  35;  39,  1(a);  52,  3; 

51,  1(c) 
juzgar,  to  judge  51,  1(c) 

leer,  to  read  58 

llegar,  to  arrive  51 

Hover,  to  rain  39^  1(a) ;  52,  1 

menguar,  to  diminish  51,  1(e) 
mentir,  to  lie  39,  1(b) ;  52,  2 
merecer,  to  deserve  58,  (b) 
morder,  to  bite  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 
morir,  to  die  39,  1(b) ;  52,  2 

nacer,  to  be  born  58,  (b) 
negar,  to  deny  39,  1(a);  52,  1; 
51,  1(c) 

nevar,  to  snow  39,  1(a);  52,  1 

oir,  to  hear  68 
oler,  to  smell  39,  2 
oponerse,  to  resist  71 
oprimir,  to  oppress  65 

parecer,  to  appear  58,  (b) 

pedir,  to  ask  39,  1(c) ;  52,  3 

pensar,  to  think  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 

perder,  to  lose  39,  1  (a) ;  52,  1 

perpetuar,  to  perpetuate  App.  E. 

placer,  to  please  76 

poder,  to  be  able  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1 

poner,  to  put  74 

porfiar,  to  persist  App.  E. 

preferir,  to  prefer  39,  1(b);  52,  2 


prender,  to  take  65 

puntuar,  to  punctuate  App.  E. 

querer,  to  wish  39,  1(a) ;  52,  1;  72 

reir,  to  laugh  68 
repetir,  39,  1(c) ;  52,  3 
resfriar,  to  chill  App.  E. 
rezar,  to  pray  58 
roer,  to  gnaw  58 

rogar,  to  ask  39,  1(a);  52,  1;  51, 
1(c) 

romper,  to  break  65,  2 

saber,  to  know  70 
sacar,  to  draw  out  51 
salir,  to  go  out  66 
seguir,  to  follow  39,  1(c);  52,  3; 
51,  1(f) 

sentarse,  to  sit  down  39,  1(a); 
52  1 

sentir,  to  feel  39,  1(b) ;  52,  2 
ser,  to  be  70 

servir,  to  serve  39,  1(c) ;  52,  3 
situar,  to  situate  App.  E. 
solver,  to  solve  39,  1(a);  52,  1; 
65,  1 

sonreir,  to  smile  68 
suprimir,  to  suppress  65 

telegrafiar,  to  telegraph  58 

temblar,  to  tremble  39,  1(a) ;  52, 1 

tener,  to  have  74 

tenir,  to  stain  51 

tocar,  to  touch  51,  1(a) 

traer,  to  bring  66 

tronar,  to  thunder  39,  1(a);  52,  1 

vaciar,  to  empty  58 
valer,  to  be  worth  66 
valuar,  to  evaluate  App.  E. 
variar,  to  vary  58 
veneer,  to  conquer  58 
venir,  to  come  74 
ver,  to  see  72 

vestir,  to  clothe  39,  1(c) ;  52,  3 
volver,  to  return  39,  1(a);  52,  1; 
65 

yacer,  to  lie  76 
zambullirse,  to  dive  51,  2 


VOCABULARY  1 


SPANISH— ENGLISH 


A 

a,  to,  at;  {conj.  after  verb  of 
motion),  in  order  to  5;  50, 
2  (b) 

el  abogado,  lawyer  47 
el  abril,  April  60 

abrir,  to  open;  p.p.,  abierto 
65 

el  abuelo,  grandfather;  la  abue- 

la,  grandmother  71 
aburrir,  to  bore,  to  weary,  to 

tire  11 
aburrirse,  to  be  bored  48 
acabar,  to  finish;  acabar  de 

.  .  ,  to  have  just  {see  App. 

B) 

la  accion,  action;  share  (of  stock) 
71,  A27 

el  aceite,  oil  (used  as  food)  71 
acentuar,  to  accentuate  58;  71 
acentuo,  I  stress,  accent  3 
el  acero,  steel  37 

acompanar,  to  accompany,  to 

go  with  42 
aconsejar,  to  advise  55 
acontecer,  to  befall,  to  take 

place,  to  happen  72 
acordar  en  (R-ch.  I),  to  agree 

to  56 

acordarse  de  (R-ch.  I),  to  re- 
mind oneself  of,  to  remem- 
ber 48 

(estar)  acostado  (seeyacex)  76 
B5 

acostar  (R-ch.  I),  to  put  to 
bed;  (reflexive)  to  go  to 
bed  35 

acudir,  to  hasten,,  to  come  to 
11 

adelante  (adv.),  on,  ahead  47 
la  aduana,  customs,  custom- 
house 71 

afeitarse,  to  shave  oneself  48 
el  aficion,  affection,  fondness  75 

1  Numbers  refer  to  lessons. 


a  fin  (de)  que  (conj.),  in  order 
that  53 

agarrar,  to  grasp;  to  take  (a 
street  car)  76,  B5 
el  agosto,  August  60 

agradar,  to  please;  me  agrada, 
it    pleases   me,   I   like  it 
(App.  B) 
agradecer,  to  thank  69 
(la)  agua,  water  2;  58 
(la)  aguila,  eagle  19 

ahi  (adv.),  there  30 
ahora  (adv.),  now  16 
el  aire,  air;  manner  71 
jaja!  (inter jec),  aha!  3 
ajeno,  -a  (adj.),  strange,  for- 
eign, that  of  another  63 
al  (a  plus  el)  and  infinitive 
=  on  and  English  present 
participle  50 
la  aldea,  village  73 

alegrar,  to  please,  rejoice;  me 
alegra,  it  rejoices  me,  I  like, 
I  am  glad  of  it  (App.  B)  ; 
55 

aleman,  -a  (adj.),  German  2 
Alemania,  Germany  15 
al  fin  (adv.),  finally  68 
Alfonso,  Alphonsus  59 
alguno,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.),  some; 

(after  noun),  none,  no  19; 

41 

el  alimento,  food  76 

al  lado  de  (prep.),  beside,  at 

the  side  of  42 
(la)  alma,  soul  19 

i  .  .  de  mi  alma!  (inter jec), 

dear  .  .  !  69 
almorzar  (R-ch.  I) ,  to  lunch  35 
alojar,  to  lodge,  to  dwell  51 
alumno,  -a,  pupil,  student  5 
alzar,  to  raise  58 
alia  veremos,  we'll  see  about 

it  (then)  74,  B16 
alii  (adv.),  there  11 


223 


224 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULAEY 


amable  (adj.),  nice,  amiable, 

kind  72 
amar,  to  love  16 
amarillo,  -a  (adj.),  yellow  41 
a  menudo  (adv.),  frequently, 

often  48 
a  menos  que  (conj.),  unless  53 
(la)  America,  America  4 

americano,  -a,  American  14 
amigo  -a,  friend  5 
Ana,  Anna  22 
ancho,  -a  (adj.),  wide  41 
andar,  to  go  57;  68 
angosto,  -a  (adj.),  narrow  41 
el  animal,  animal  51 

anteayer    (adv.),  day  before 

yesterday  60 
antes  (adv.),  before  32 
antes  (de)  que  (conj.),  before 

50 

antiguo,  -a  (adj.),  ancient  25 
antojarse;  se  le  antoja,  he  fan- 
cies  (impersonal  verb)  49; 
76 

Apocalipsis,  Apocalypse  60 
el  ano,  year  20 

a  pesar  de  que  (conj.),  in  spite 

of  the  fact  that  53 
aplicado,  -a  (adj.),  diligent,  in- 
dustrious 41 
aprender,  to  learn  56 
aprender,  -a,  to  learn  to  56 
aprisa  (adv.),  quickly  57 
aprobar  (R-ch.  I),  to  approve 
55 

la  apuntacion,  note  (as,  "  to 
make  a  note  of  something  ") 
39 

aquel,  aquella;  -os,  -as,  that; 

those  (adj.),  30 
aquel,  aquella;  -os,  -as,  that; 

those  (pro.)  30 
aqui  (adv.),  here  11 
el  arbol,  tree  64 
la  Argentina,  Argentina  54 

argiiir,  to  argue  68 
la  aritmetica,  arithmetic  19 
(la)  arma,  arm  (military  term)  51 
arrimarse,    to    approach,  to 
come  (close)  63 


el  asco,  disgust ;  asco  me  da,  it 

disgusts  me  72 
asegurar,  to  assure 
asi  (adv.),  so,  and  so  3 
asi  que   (conj.),  and  so;  so 

that  47 
asir,  to  grasp,  to  seize  76 
la  asistencia,  aid;  presence,  au- 
dience 73 
asistir,  to  be  present  64 
la  atencion,  attention  45 
atletico,  -a,  athletic  3;  75 
atrasar,  to  be  behind;   (of  a 
watch),  to  be  slow  60 
(la)  aula,  hall,  lecture  hall,  audi- 
torium 71 
aun,  even,  still  (e.  g.,  "that  is 
still  larger")    (adv.  of  de-  - 
gree) 

aun,  yet,  as  yet,  still  (e.  g., 
"he  is  still  here")  (adv.  of 
time)  3 
aunque  (conj.),  although  53 
el  automovil,  automobile  43 
avanzar,  to  advance  60 
averiguar,  to  ascertain  51 
avisado,    -a    (adj.),  prudent, 

clever  72 
ayer  (adv.),  yesterday  11 
ayudar,  to  aid,  to  help  67 
el  azahar,  orange  blossom  1 
el  azucar,  sugar  17 

azul  (adj.),  blue  3;  59 

B 

elbaile,  dance  73 

bajar,  to  descend,  to  go  down 
31 

bajo  (prep.),  under  24 
el  bambu,  bamboo  34 

banarse,  to  bathe  oneself,  to 
take  a  bath  48 

barato,  -a  (adj.),  cheap,  inex- 
pensive 34 

bastante  (adv.  or  adj.), 
enough  14 

beber,  to  drink  10 

bendecir,  to  bless  74 
la  bestia,  beast  71 

bien  (adv.),  well  10,  B7;  23 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


225 


el  billete  de  banco,  bank  note  37 

bianco  -a  {adj.),  white  6 
elbolsillo,  pocket  40 
la  bondad,  kindness ;  tenga  Y.  la 
bondad  de  .  .  .  ,  please  .  .  . 
(App.  H) 

bonito,  -a  (adj.),  pretty  33 

borrar,  to  erase,  to  efface  75 
elbrazo,  arm  31 

brillante  (adj.),  brilliant  39 

brincar,  to  jump  51 

brunir,  to  polish  51 

bueno,  -a,  good  10 

Buenos  Aires,  Buenos  Aires 
(capital  of  Argentina)  59 
el  buey,  ox  2 

la  buhardilla,  small  garret  (cf. 
buharda,  garret  window)  77 
bullir,  to  boil  51 
burlon,  -a  ( adj. ) ,  humorous  33 
buscar,  to  look  for,  to  seek,  to 
fetch  12;  51 

C 

jca!  (inter jec),  not  at  all!  27 
el  caballo,  horse  38 
elcabello,  hair;  los  cabellos,  hair 
(singular  collective  noun  in 
English)  31 
caber,  to  be  contained  in,  to 
have  room  for  70 
la  cabeza,  head  74 

cada  (indecl.  adj.),  each,  ev- 
ery; cadauno  or  una  (pro.), 
each  one,  every  one 
caer,  to  fall  68 
el  cafe,  coffee;  cafe;  (pi.)  cafes 
17;  34 

Cain,   Cain    (see   Genesis  in 
Bible) 

el  Cairo,  Cairo  (city  in  Egypt) 
61 

el  calcetm,  sock  16 

caliente  (adj.),  hot  14 
elcalor,  heat;   tener  (mucho) 
calor,  to  be   (very)  warm 
27;  hace  calor,  it  is  warm 
(of  weather)  60 
calzarse,  to  put  on  (shoes)  49 
calladito,  -a  (adj.) ,  very  quiet 


callado,  -a  (adj.),  quiet  77 
el  Callao,  Callao  (city  in  Peru) 
61 

la  calle,  street  12 
la  cama,  bed  1 

cambiar,  to  change 
el  camino,  way,  road 
la  camisa,  shirt  29 
la  campanilla,  small  bell  (cf.  la 

campana,  bell)  77 
el  campo,  field;  country;  en  el 

campo,  in  the  country  (as 

opposed  to  the  city)  70 
el  Canada,  Canada  61 
el  canape,  couch  34 

jcanastos!     (inter  jec),  Gee 

whiz!  Good  gracious!  69 
cansado,  -a  (adj.),  tired  (with 

estar)  15;  tiring,  annoying, 

boring  (with  ser)  14 
cantar,  to  sing  47 
la  cantidad,  quantity,  amount  65 
la  capital,  capital  (of  a  country) 

59,  AA3 
el  capitan,  captain  14 
el  capftulo,  chapter  67 
la  cara,  face  8 

Carlos,  Charles  67 
la  carne,  meat  17 

caro,  -a   (adj.),  dear,  expen- 
sive 54 
el  carpintero,  carpenter  59 
la  carta,  letter  40 
la  carrera,  circuit;  race,  trip  38 
el  carro,  (street)  car,  trolley  car 

(see  tranvia)  31 
la  casa,  house  10 
el  caseron,  big  (ill-proportioned) 

house  77 
castano,  -a   (adj.),,  chestnut - 

colored  31 
el  castellano,  'Castilian  61 

castellano,  -a  (adj.),  Castilian, 

Spanish   (of  the  peninsula 

Spain)  61 
la  casucha,  ugly  old  house  77 
la  cebolla,  onion  39,  BB5 
el  centavo,  cent  74 
la  centinela,  sentinel  33 
elcentro,  center;  el  Centre,  the 


8 


226 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


center  of  town,  down  town 
59 

cerca  de  {prep.),  near  30 
el  cero,  zero  67 

cerquisima  (adv.),  very  near 
76 

cerquita  (adv.),  quite  close  77 
cerrar  (R-ch.  I),  to  close,  to 
lock,  to  shut  35 
el  cielo,  sky,  heaven  13 

cierto,  -a ,  ( adj. ) ,  certain,  sure ; 
(for  meaning  before  or  af- 
ter noun,  see  33) 
el  cilindro,  cylinder  1 
el  cirio,  wax  candle  73 
la  ciudad,  city  23 
la  clase,  class ;  kind,  sort  41 
la  cobardia,   cowardice,    act  of 
cowardice  50 
cocer  (R-ch.  I),  to  cook,  to  boil 
58 

cocinar,  to  cook  8 
el  coche,  coach,  carriage  38 

coger,  to  catch,  to  seize,  to 

take  (g  to  j  before  a  or  o) 

51 

comenzar  (R-ch.  I),  to  begin 
56 

comer,  to  eat  10 
el  cometa,  comet  33 
la  comida,  meal,  dinner  8 
como  (conj.),  as;  how  23 
icomo?  (conj.),  how?  18 
competir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  com- 
pete 36 

complacerse  (en),  to  be  pleased 

with  76 
completo,  -a  (adj.),  complete, 

perfect  39 
comprar,  to  buy,  to  purchase  8 
con  (prep.),  with  5 
conducir,  to  lead;  to  drive  (as 

an  auto)  43 
confesar  (R-ch.  I),  to  confess, 

to  admit  35 
la  confianza,  confidence 
conjugar,  to  conjugate  16 
conmigo,  with  me  42 
conocer,  to  know,  to  be  ac- 


quainted with,  to  be  fami- 
liar with,  to  meet  58 

considerar,  to  consider  32 

consistir  en,  to  consist  of  56 

constar  (impersonal),  to  be 
clear,  to  be  evident  76 

contar  (R-ch.  I),  to  count;  to 
relate,  to  recount  35 

contentarse  con,  to  be  satisfied 
with  56 

contento,  -a  (adj.),  contented, 
glad,  happy  7 

contestar,  to  answer,  to  reply 
36 

contigo,  with  you,  with  thee  42 

continuar,  to  continue  58 

convencer,  to  convince  58 

convencerse,  to  convince  one- 
self, to  be  convinced  48 

convenir,  to  agree;  (3rd  sing, 
as  impersonal),  it  suits  74 

copiar,  to  copy  66 
el  cortaplumas,  penknife  34 

cortar,  to  cut 

corto,  -a  (adj.),  short  61 

correr,  to  run  42 
la  cosa,  thing  10 

costar  (R-ch.  I),  to  cost  39 

Cousino,  Oousino  (surname)  2 

creer,  to  believe;  to  think  (as, 
"I  think  so  ")  23 

cruel  (adj.),  cruel  71 

crujir,  to  creak  51 
el  cuaderno,  notebook  39 

cuadrado,  -a  (adj.),  square  33 

cual  (rel.  adj.  or  pro.),  which, 
what  24 

I  cual?  (inter,  pro.  or  adj.), 
which?  what?  18 

cuando  (conj.),  when 

I  cuando?  when  18 

cuanto,  -a;  -os,  -as  (rel.  adj. 
or  pro.),  how  much;  how 
many;  as  much  (many)  as 
23  ;  24 

cuanto  or  mientras  mas  .  .  . 

(tanto)  mas,  the  more  .  .  . 

the  more,  23 
^ cuanto,  -a;  -os,  -as?  (inter. 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


227 


adj.  or  pro.),  how  much? 
how  many?  18 

cuantos  estamos  del  mes? 
What  day  of  the  month  is 
it?  60 

el  cilarto,   fourth;    quarter  (in 

telling  time)  60 
el  cuarto,  room  49 

cubrir,  to  cover;  cubierto  (ir- 

reg.  past,  part.),  covered  65 
la  cuchara,  spoon  18 
la  cucharita,  spoon,  teaspoon  18 
el  cuchillo,  knife  18 
el  cuello,  collar  29 
el  cuento,  story;  account  19 
el cuidado,  care ;  tener  cuidado, 

to  be  careful,  to  take  care; 

i  Cuidado  que  .  .  .  !  Look 

out  that.  .  .  .  !  68 
cumplir    (con),  to  fulfil,  to 

complete  32 
el  cuociente,  quotient  71 
el  cura,  priest  1 

cursi  {adj.),  cheap  34 

cuyo,  -a;  -os,  -as  (pos.  adj.  or 

pro.  ),  whose  24;  j  cuyo,  -a; 

-os,  -as?  (int.)  18 

CH 

la  chaqueta,  jacket  29 

chico,  -a  (adj.),  little,  small 
33 

el  chubasco,  squall  2 
D 

da,  (he,  she,  it)  gives  38 
dado  que  (conj.),  considering 
53 

dan,  (they)  give  38 

dar,  to  give  16;  72 

dar  a  la  calle,  to  face  the 

street  72 
dar  con,  to  come  across  72 
dar  las  dos  (etc.),  to  strike 

two  (o'clock)  72 
dar  las  gracias,  to  thank  72 
darse  por,  to  act  as  if  72 
darse  por  entendido,  to  appear 

to  understand  72,  B21 


de  (prep.),  of,  from;  (conj.), 
than  5;  23 

deber,  ought,  must;  to  owe  35 
el  deber,  duty  32 

decidirse  (por),  to  decide 
(oneself),  to  make  up  one's 
mind  48;  (with  verb),  a 

decir,  to  say,  to  tell  40;  74 
el  dedo,  finger  31 

deducir,  to  deduce  65 

degollar  (R-ch.  I),  to  behead 
(List  of  Irreg.  Verbs) 

dejar,  to  let,  to  allow,  to  per- 
mit 62  (transitive  only) 

dejar  de,  to  leave  off  (doing 
a  thing) ;  dejo  de  escribir, 
he  stopped  writing,  he  left 
off  writing  50 

delinquir,  to  be  delinquent  51 

de  manera  de  (or)  que  (conj.), 
so  that  50;  53 

demasiado  (adv.),  too  (as9  too 
much)  46 

de  modo  de  (or)  que  (conj.), 
so  that  53 

de  ninguna  manera  (adv.),  in 
no  way  41 

un  dentista,  dentist  33 

dentro  de  (prep.),  within  40 
el  dependiente,  clerk  43 

derecho,    -a     (adj.),  right; 
straight  31 
el  derecho,  law  47 

derretir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  melt  36 

desayunarse,  to  breakfast,  to 
have  breakfast  49 
el  desayuno,  breakfast  50 

descansar,  to  rest  56 

descubridor,  -a  (adj.  or  noun), 
discoverer  2 

desde  (prep.),  since;  desde  que 
(conj.),  for  (Sp.  present  — 
Engl,  perf.)  64 

desear,  to  desire,  to  want  15 

desnudar  ( se ) ,  to  undress  (one- 
self),  49 

desosar  (R-ch.  I),  to  bone 
(List  of  Irreg.  Verbs) 

despacio,  -a  (adj.),  slow,  leis- 
urely 23 


228 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULAEY 


despacio  (adv.),  slowly  23 
despedir  {R-ch.  Ill),  to  dis- 
miss; (refl.),  to  take  leave 
36;  52 

despertar  (R-ch.  I),  to  wake 
up  (transitive) ;  despertarse, 
to  awaken,  to  wake  up  (in- 
transitive) 49 

despues  (adv.),  after,  after- 
wards 28 

despues  de  (prep,  of  time),  af- 
ter 25 

despues     (de)    que  (conj.), 

after  50 
detenerse,  to  stop,  to  halt  (in- 
transitive) 74 
detenldamente    (adv.),  care- 
fully 41 
detras  de  (prep.),  behind  32 
la  deuda,  debt  71 
el  dia,  day;  dia  habil  (or  util), 

work  day  33;  60 
eldiablo,    devil;     idiablo!  the 
deuce!    imil    diablos!  the 
deuce !  69 
el  diario,  newspaper  70 

dice,  (he,  she,  it)  says,  tells 
24 

dicen,  (they)  say,  tell  24 
el  diciembre,  December  60 
el  diente,  tooth  8 

dieron,  (they)  gave  36 

dificil  (adj.),  difficult  10 
la  dificultad,  difficulty  38 

dijeron,  (they)  told,  said  8, 
BB14 

dijimos,  we  said 

dijo,  (he,  she,  it)  said,  told 
3;  24 

diligente   (adj.),  diligent,  in- 
dustrious 7 
el  dinero,  money  19 

dio,   (he,  she,  it)   gave;  you 
gave  36 
el  Dios,  God  27 

j^Dios    mio!     (interjec.),  Good 
heavens!  69 
dire,  diras,  etc.,  I  shall  tell, 
you  will  tell,  etc.  42 


dirigirse,  to  make  one's  way 

(toward),  to  go  48 
distinguir,  to  distinguish  51 
dividir,  to  divide  67 
el  dolar,  dollar  4 

doler   (R-ch.  I),  to  pain,  to 

ache;  le  duele  la  cabeza,  he 

has  a  headache  74 
el  domingo,  Sunday  34 
don,  Mr.,  master  20 
donde  (conj.),  where  24 
en  donde    (conj.),  where,  in 

which  73 
I  donde?   (int.  conj.),  where? 

21,  B4 

dona,  Mrs.,  mistress,  Miss  20 

dormir  (R-ch.  I),  to  sleep  35 
el  dormitorio,  bedroom  19 

dos,  two  2 
la  duda,  doubt  70 

dudar,  to  doubt  43 

duele,  it  hurts;  it  grieves;  me 
duele  este  pie,  this  foot 
hurts  me  31 

dulce  (adj.),  sweet;  fair,  gen- 
tle 61 

durante  (prep.),  during  43 
el  duro,    dollar    (coin   used  in 
Spain)  1 

E 

e  =  y,  and  64 

jea!  (interjec),  hi!  hurrav! 
69 

echar  a,  to  begin  to  56 
echar  de,  to  manage  to  56 
el  ejercicio,  exercise;  practise  15 
el,  the  (def.  art.,  maso.  sing.)  4 
el  (disj.  pro.),  him,  (to)  him 

42;  (sub.  pro.),  he  13 
el  (la)  cual;  los  (las)  cuales, 

(rel.  pro.),  who,  whom  25 
electrico,  -a  (adj.),  electrical 

30 

elegir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  elect,  to 

choose  75 
Elena,  Helen  12 
el  mio     (pos.    pro.),    mine;  el 

nuestro,  ours  40 
el  (la;  los,  las)  que  (pers.  pro.), 
who,  whom  25 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


229 


el  suyo  (pos.  pro.),  his,  hers,  its; 

yours  (polite),  theirs  40 
eltuyo  (pos.  pro.),  yours;  thine 

40 

(el)  uno  .  .  .  (el)  otro,  the  one 

.  .  .  the  other;  each  other; 

(plural),  some  .  .  .  others; 

one  .  .  .  another  48 
el  vuestro  (pos.  pro. ) ,  yours  40 
ella  (pers.  and  disj.  pro.),  she; 

her,  to  her  13;  42 
ellos,  ellas    (pers.  pro.,  disj. 

pro.),  they;  them;  to  them 

13;  42 

embestir,  to  attack,  to  assail 
73 

embustero,  -a  (adj.  or  noun), 

cheat  69 
empezar  (R-ch.  I),  to  begin  56 
el  empleado,  clerk,  employee  25 
emplear,  to  employ,  to  use  76 
en  (prep.),  in,  on;  en  su  reloj, 

by  your  watch  4;  60,  Bll 
en  casa  (de)  (adv.  or  prep.), 

at  the  house  (of),  at  home 

38 

en  caso  (de)  que  (conj.),  in 
case  53 

encender  (R-ch.  I),  to  light, 

to  kindle  35 
encerrar  (R-ch.  J),  to  shut  in, 

to  lock  up  35 
encontrar  (R-ch.  I),  to  meet, 

to  find,  to  come  across  31 
enemigo,  -a   (adj.  or  noun), 

enemy  16 
el  enero,  J anuary  60 

enfermo,  -a   (adj.),  sick,  ill, 

sore  31 

enfriar,  to  chill,  to  make  cold 
58 

en  lata  (adj.),  canned,  tinned 
41 

ennegrecer,  to  blacken,  to  ob- 
scure 73 

ennoblecer,  to  ennoble,  to  em- 
bellish 73 

enorme   (adj.),  enormous  33 

Enrique,  Henry  12 


en  seguida  ( adv. ) ,  then,  next, 
at  once,  immediately  43 

ensenar,  to  show,  to  teach,  to 
point  out  24 

entender  (R-ch.  I),  to  under- 
stand, to  hear  35 

entonces  (adv.),  then  33 

entrar  (en),  to  enter,  to  go 
into  (intransitive  verb) 
(App.  B) 

entregar,   to   hand   over,  to 
give  (over)  51 
el  entresuelo,  ground  floor  19 
el  entusiasmo,  enthusiasm  41 

en  vez  de  (prep.),  instead  of 
45 

enviar,  to  send  58 
equivocarse,  to  be  mistaken  52 
erguir  (R-ch.  II  or  III),  to 

erect  (see  List  of  irreg. 
verbs) 

errar  (R-ch.  I),  to  err;  to 
wander  39 

es,  (he,  she,  it)  is;  you  (po- 
lite) are  6 

escaparse,  to  escape,  to  run 
*         off  48 

escoces,  -a  (adj.),  Scotch  (man) 
33 

escribir,  to  write  11 
escrito    (irreg.    past,  part.), 
written  16;  65 
el  escritorio,  writing  desk  70 
la  escuela,  school  23 

ese,   esa;    esos,  esas  (adj.), 

that;  those  30 
ese,   esa;   esos,  esas  (pro.), 
that;  those  30 
(la)  Espana,  Spain  15 

espanol,  -a  (adj.),  Spanish  14 
esparcir,  to  scatter  58 
la  especie,   kind,    sort,  species, 
class  41 

el  espejo,   mirror,  looking-glass 
48 

esperar,  to  wait  for,  to  hope 
espia,  spy  33 

esposo,  -a,  spouse;  husband; 
wife 


230 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULAEY 


la  esquina,  corner  (of  a  street) 
19 

el  estadista,  statesman  16 
(los)Estados  Unidos,  the  United 
States  15 
el  estante,    bookshelf,    set  of 
shelves  70 
estar,  to  be  (see  also  ser)  15; 
68 

estar  para,  to  be  about  to  56 
estar  por,  to  be  inclined  to,  to 

feel  like  56 
este,  -a;   -os,  -as  (demonstr. 

adj.),  this;  these  30 
este,  -a;  -os,  -as  (demonstr. 
pro.),  this  (one);  these  30 
el  estudiante,   student    (in  col- 
lege) 30 
estudiar,  to  study  13 
estupido,  -a  (adj.),  stupid  69 
etcetera,   et   cetera,   and  so 

forth  49 
europeo,  -a  (adj.,  noun)  Euro- 
pean 64 
el  examen,  examination  39 
examinar,  to  examine  41 
excelente  (adj.),  excellent  64 
excepto  (prep.),  except  73 
eximio,    -a    (adj.),  eminent; 

famous  73 
existir,  to  exist  24 
el  exito,  favorable  result,  out- 
come 39 

F 

fabricar,  to  manufacture;  fa- 
bricarse,  to  be  manufac- 
tured 49 

facil  (adj.),  easy  5 

f altar,  to  be  lacking;  (also 
used  in  expressions  of  time-, 
f  altan  cinco  minutos  para  las 
ocho,  it  is  five  minutes  of 
eight)  60 

farmaceutico,  -a  (adj.),  phar- 
maceutical 71 
el  favor,  favor;   hagame  V.  el 
favor  de,  please  (lit.,  do  me 
the  favor  to  .  .  .) 


si  me  hace  el  favor,  please 
(yes,  please)  (App.  H) 
el  f  ebrero,  February  60 

felicitarse,to  congratulate  one- 
self 48 

feliz  (adj.),  happy,  lucky  7 
felizmente  (adv.),  happily  57 
Fernandez,    Fernandez  (sur- 
name) 

figurarse,  to  fancy,  to  imagine 
49 

fijarse  en,  to  notice  carefully 
56 

filosofar,  to  philosophize  57 
el  filosofo,  philosopher  73 

a  fines  de  (prep.),  at  the  end 

of  (a  month)  60 
Finita,  little  Serafina  77 
flaco,  -a  (adj.),  thin,  lean  8 
flojo,  -a  (adj.),  lazy  31 
fluido,  -a  (adj.),  fluent,  liquid 

71 

elfrac,  (dress)  coat  1 

frances,  -a  (adj.),  French  14 
(la)  Francia,  France  15 

frefr,  to  fry;   (past  part.)  frito 
68 

fresco,  -a  (adj.),  fresh  15 
frio,  -a  (adj.),  cold  14 
el  frio,  cold  27 

fuerte  (adj.),  strong 
la  f uerza,  strength;  las  fuerzas, 
strength,    force  (singular 
noun  in  Eng.) 

G 

Gabriel,  Gabriel  12 

ganadero,  -a   (adj.),  herding, 
stock-raising  59 

ganar,  to  gain,  to  earn  26 
(las)  ganas,  desire (s) ;  tener  ga- 
nas  de,  to  feel  like  ...  56 

garboso,   -a    (adj.),  graceful, 
elegant  1 

gastar,  to  spend  74 
el  general,  general  1 

generalmente    (adv.),  gener- 
ally 14 

el  genio,  genius,  character,  tem- 
per 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


231 


el  giro,  (bank)  draft  1 
la  gloria,  glory;    (also)  Gloria, 
Gloria  (a  girVs  name)  71 
Gomez,  Gomez  (surname)  64, 
B3 

Gonzalez,  Gonzalez  (surname)?, 
gordo,  -a  (adj.),  stout  54 
gracias  (adv.),  thanks  72 
grande  (adj.),  large,  big  6;  22 
gritar,  to  shout,  to  call  out  54 
grunir,  to  grunt  51 
guardarse  de  .  .  .  ,  to  refrain 
from  ...  56 
la  guerra,  war  1 

ll  |  gui'a,  guide  33 

guiar,  to  guide  58 
Guillermo,  William  69 
guisar,  to  cook  1 
gustar,  to  please;  me  gusta, 

it  pleases  me,  I  like  (App. 

B) 

el  gusto,  taste  49 

Gutierrez,  Gutierrez  (sur- 
name) 

H 

haber,  to  have  (auxiliary  for 
perfect  tenses — cf.  also  te- 
ner.  For  idioms,  see)  28; 
70 

ha  de,  he  is  to  .  .  .  29 

hay  que,  ought  to  .  .  .;  you 

should  ...  29 
habil    (adj.),   clever,  skilful, 
apt 

dia  habil,  work  day  60 
el  ) 

,     J-habitante,  inhabitant  22 
la  )  1 

hablador,  -a  (adj.),  talkative, 
garrulous  33 

hablar,  to  speak,  to  talk  4 

hace  (he,  she,  it)  makes,  does 
38;  it  is  (in  expressions  of 
weather)  60;  (Sp.  present 
for  Eng.  perfect)  64 

hacer,  to  do,  to  make  74 

hacer  saber,  to  let  know,  to 
inform  57,  AA15 

hacerse,  to  become,  to  make 
oneself  59;  74 

hacia  (prep-.),  towards  42 


hacia,  (he,  she,  it)  was  mak- 
ing,  made;    (Sp.   imp.  for 
Eng.  pluperf.)  64 
la  hacienda,  country  estate  64 
(la)  hacha,  axe  (for  el  hacha)  19 

hallar,  to  find  4 
(la)  hambre,  hunger;  tener  ham- 
bre,  to  be  hungry  27 
haragan,  -a  (adj.),  lazy  33 
hare,  haras,  etc.,  I  shall  do, 

you  will  do,  etc.  42 
hasta    (adv.),   as   much  as; 

(conj.),  until  22,  B7 
hasta  que  (conj.),  until  53 
hasta  luego    (adv.),  good-by, 
"so-long";   hasta  lueguito 
(adv.),  good-by,  "so-long" 
.  77 

hay,  there  is,  there  are  (for 
other  tenses,  see  28);  (for 
expressions  of  weather,  see 
28,  4) 

no  hay  remedio,  there  is  no 
help  for  it  74 
el  helado,  ice  cream  39 
el  hermano,  brother  6 

hermoso,  -a  (adj.),  beautiful, 
handsome  54 
el  hielo,  ice  14 
el  hierro,  iron  37 

hinchado,  -a  (adj.),  swollen  2 
la  hipotesis,  hypothesis  34 
hizo,  (he,  she,  it)  made,  did 
54 

la  hoja,  leaf,  page  39 

holgarse  (R-ch.  I),  to  loaf,  to 
have  a  good  time  48 
el  hombre,  man  9 
el  hombro,  shoulder  40 
la  hora,  hour;  time;  iQue  hora 
es?  what  time  is  it?  60 

hoy  (adv.),  today  4 
el  hueso,  bone  39 
el  huevo,  egg  17 

huir,  to  flee  68 
el  huracan,  hurricane  2 

I 

igualmente  (adv.),  equally 
imaginarse,    to    imagine,  to 


232 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULAKY 


fancy  (also  used  imperson- 
ally) 49 

impedir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  hinder, 
to  prevent  36 

importa,  it  matters,  it  is  im- 
portant 56 

imposible  [adj.),  impossible; 
es  —  que  (takes  subjunc- 
tive) 43 

imprimir,  to  imprint,  to  print; 
(irreg.  past  part.)  impreso 
65 

indiferente  (adj.),  indifferent 
41 

indio,  -a  (adj.),  Indian  64 
la  industria,  industry,  business 
59 

infeliz  (adj.),  unhappy;  un- 
lucky 29 

i  infeliz  de  usted!  unhappy 
you!  woe  to  you!  (App. 
H93) 

el  ingeniero,  engineer  59 
(la)  Inglaterra,  England  15 

ingles,  -a  (adj.),  English  14 
innoble  (adj.),  ignoble  73 
insistir  (en),  to  insist  (on)  56 
el  instinto,  instinct  64 

inteligente  (adj.),  intelligent 
76 

inteligentisimo,  -a  (adj.),  in- 
telligent, most  (extremely) 
intelligent  76 

interesante  (adj.),  interesting 
38 

intitularse,  to  be  called,  to 
have  as  title  54 
el  invierno,  winter  60 

ir,  to  go  56;  70 

irlandes,  -a  (adj.  or  noun), 
Irish  75 

irse,  to  go  off,  to  go  away  49 

Isabel,  Elizabeth  20 

-isimo,  -a   (superlative  abso- 
lute   ending)    very,  most, 
extremely  76 
la  isla,  island  75 

israelita  (adj.  or  noun),  Is- 
raelite 75 

izquierdo,  -a  (adj.),  left  31 


j 

el  jabali,  wild  boar 
el  jaguar,  jaguar  1 

jamas  (adv.),  never  41 
el  jamon,  ham  19 
el  jef e,  chief,  leader,  head  67 
Jesus,  Jesus;   i Jesus  mil  ve- 
ces!    (inter jec.) ,  Good  gra- 
cious! 69 
el  jinete,  horseman 
Jorge,  George  59 
Jose,  Joseph;  ;  Jesus,  Jos§,  y 
Maria !  (inter jec.),  Gracious ! 
69 

la  jota,  jota  (name  of  the  letter 
.J)  1 

jbven  (adj.  or  noun),  youth; 

young  boy  (girl)  35 
Juan,  John  12 
Juana,  Jane  77 
Juanita,  little  (or  dear)  Jane 

77 

el  jueves,  Thursday  34 

eljuez,  judge;  (pi.)  jueces  65 
jugar   (R-ch.  I),  to  play  35 

eljuicio,  judgment;  sense,  rea- 
son, opinion  71 

el  julio,  July  60 

eljunio,  June  60 

juntos,  -as  (adj.),  together  45 
juzgar,  to  judge,  to  think,  to 
consider  32 

K 

elkilometro,  kilometer  73 
elkiosco   (also  quiosco),  kiosk, 

news  stand  73 

L 

ellado,    side    42;    al   lado  de 
(prep.),  beside;  a  mi  lado, 
beside  me  42 
la  mia,  mine  40 
la  nuestra,  ours  40 
el  lapiz,  pencil  5 

largo,  -a  (adj.),  long  33 
las  (def.  art.  fern,  plural)  9 
lalastima,    pity;    es  lastima, 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


233 


(with  subjunctive),  it  is  a 
pity  46 

la  suya,  his,  hers,  its;  yours 

(polite) ;  theirs  40 
latino,  -a  (adj.),  Latin  61;  el 

latin,  (the  language) 
la  tuya,  yours,  thine  40 
lavar,  to  wash  16 
la  vuestra  (pro.),  yours  40 
la  leccion,  lesson  6 
la  leche,  milk  17 
leer,  to  read  58 
lejos  (adv.),  far  48 
levantar,  to  lift;  (refl.),  to  get 
up  49 
la  ley,  law  34 
el  libro,  book  6 
el  liceo,  high  school  45 

ligero,  -a  (adj.),  swift,  light, 

rapid  38 
limpiar,  to  clean  8;  58 
limpio,  -a,  (adj.),  clean  15 
lingiiistico,  -a  (adj.),  linguis- 
tic 71 

listo,  -a  (adj.),  ready  32 
lo  (neuter  adj.  as  adv.),  how 
29,  2 
elloro,  parrot  2 

los  (def.  art.,  masc.  pi.),  the  9 
luchar  (por),  to  struggle  (to) 

56;  to  wrestle  64 
luego  que  (conj.),  as  soon  as, 

when  53 
Luis,  Louis  67 
Luisito,  little  Louis  77 
ellunes,  Monday  34 
laluz,  light;  candle  30 

LL 

la  Have,  key  70 
llegar  (a),  to  arrive,  to  reach 

(intransitive)  32;  51 
lleno,  -a  (adj.),  full  15 
llevar,  to  carry;    (refl.),  to 

carry  off  49 
llorar,  to  weep,  to  cry  27 
Hover  (R-ch.  I) ,  to  rain  35 
lalluvia,  rain;  hay  lluvia,  it  is 
rainy  60 


M 

la  madera,  wood  70 
la  madre,  mother  6 

madrileno,  -a  (adj.),  (inhabi- 
tant) of  Madrid  25 
el  maestro,     (primary)  school 

teacher  63 
elmaiz,  maize,  corn  3;  71 
mal  (adv.),  badly  23 
malamente  (adv.),  badly  57 
maldecir,  to  curse  74 
malo,  -a  (adj.),  bad;  ill,  sick 
14;  15 

la  mama,  mother,  mamma  34 
mandar,   to   order,   to  com- 
mand, to  send  44 
la  mano,  hand  33 
la  mantequilla,  butter  17 
la  manzana,  apple  67 
manana  (adv.),  tomorrow;  (as 
noun,    feminine),  morning 
11 

elmaravedi,  farthing;  (pi.)  ma- 

ravedies;    also,  maravedis, 

maravedises  34 
marchar,  to  walk;   (refl.),  to 

go  off  54 
Maria,  Mary  12;  j  Jesus,  Jos6, 

y  Maria!     Good  gracious! 

69 

elmartes,  Thursday  34 
elmarzo,  March  60 

mas  (adv.),  more  ]4;  plus  67 
las  matematicas,  mathematics  73 
el  mayo,  May  60 

mayor  (adj.),  older  23;  33 
me,  me;  myself;  to  me  21; 
38;  48 
la  media,  stocking  16 
a  mediados  de  (prep.),  in  the 
middle  of  (a  month)  60 
lamedicina,  medicine  47 
el  medico,  doctor  47 
la  medida,  measure,  means  1 
medio,  -a  (adj.),  half  (see  also 
la  mitad)  60;  67 
la  me  j  ilia,  cheek  2 

mejor  (adj.),  better  23 
menester;  es  menester,  it  is 
necessary  51 


234 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


menguar,    to    diminish  (see 

averiguar) 
menor  {adj.),  younger  23 
menos    {adv.),   less   23;  por 

lo  menos  {adv.),  at  least  72 
mentir  (R-ch.  II),  to  lie,  to 

tell  a  falsehood  35 
merecer,  to  deserve  {see  cono- 

cer) 

el  mes,  month  60 
la  mesa,  table  7 
meter,  to  put  40 
mi  {disj.  pro.),  me,  to  me; 

myself  42;  48 
mi(s)  {pos.  adj.),  my  17 
elmiedo,  fear;  tener  miedo,  to 
be  afraid  27 
mientras  {conj.),  while  64 
el  miercoles,  Wednesday  34 
la  mies,  grains;  {pi.)  mieses  34 
mio,  -a  {adj.),  my,  mine  40 
jmire!  see  here!  listen  here! 
69 

mirar,  to  look  (at)  50 
mismo,  -a  {adj.),  same;  very, 
-self  24 

la  mitad,  half  {see  also  medio) 
67 

moderno,  -a  {adj.),  modern  25 
el  momento,  moment  40 
la  Moneda,  the  Mint ;  Calle  de  la 
Moneda,   Treasury  (Mint) 
Street  13 
lamontana,  mountain  25 
morder  {R-ch.  I),  to  bite  39 
moreno,  -a  {adj.),  dark,  brun- 
ette 14 

morir  {R-ch.  II),  to  die  35; 
{p.p.  irreg.)  muerto,  dead; 
killed  {trans.)  65 
mortal  {adj.),  mortal  61 
lamosca,  fly  24 

elmozo,  boy;  servant,  waiter  6; 

la  moza,  girl  6 
elmuchacho,  boy;  la  muchacha, 

girl  8 

mucho,  -a;   -os,  -as   {adj.  or 
pro.)  much;  many  10 


mucho  (adv.),  much,  a  great 
deal  10 
la  mujer,  woman  5 
la  mujer  cilia,  little,  insignificant 

woman  77 
elmundo,  world;  todo  el  mundo, 
everybody  54 
mutuamente  (adv. )7nmtually, 
each  other,  one  another  48 
muy  (adv.),  very  10 

N 

nacer,  to  be  born;  nacio,  (he, 
she)  was  born  59 
la  nacion,  nation  12 

nada  (pro.),  nothing;  (adv.), 

not  at  all  41 
nadar,  to  swim  64 
nadie  (pro.),  nobody  41 
la  naranja,  orange  67,  BB10 
la  neblina,  mist,  fog ;  hay  mucha 
neblina,  it  is  very  misty  28 
necesario,    -a    (adj.),  neces- 
sary;   es  necesario  (takes 
subjunct.)  43 
necesitar,  to  need  56 
negarse  (R-ch.  1),  to  refuse  56 
el  negociante,  business  man  47 
los  negocios,  business 

negro,  -a  (adj.),  black  6 
nevar  (R-ch.  I),  to  snow  35 
ni   (conj.),  nor;  ni  .  .  .  ni, 

neither  .  .  .  nor  7;  41 
ni  por  mucho,  not  by  a  good 
deal  25 
la  nieve,  snow  33 

ninguno,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.),  no, 
none,  no  one  19 
la  nina,  girl  6 
laninita,  little  girl  77 
elnino,  boy  6 
los  ninos,  children  9 

no  (adv.),  no;  not  8;  41 
ino?  isn't  it  true?  isn't  that 
so?  won't  he?  didn't  they? 
aren't  you?  etc.  35 
no   solamente  .  .  .  sino  que, 

not  only  .  .  .  but  also  50 
esta  noche  (adv.),  tonight  46 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


235 


•6no    es    verdad?    (see  £no? 

above)  35 
no  hay  por  que,  there  is  no 

reason  for 
no  .  .  .  mas  (adv.),  no  more, 

no  longer  41 
no  .  .  .  mas  que,  only  23 
(la)  Norte  America,  North  Ameri- 
ca;    (also)     America  del 

Norte  68 
no  sea  que  (conj.),  unless  53 
nosotros,  -as  (pers.  pro.),  we; 

us  13;  42 
la  nota,  mark  (in  school  work) 

39  . . 

las  noticias,  news  40 
el  noviembre,  November  60 
nuestro,  -a  (adj.),  our,  ours  40 
(la)  Nueva  York,  New  York  59, 
Bo 

nuevamente  (adv.),  newly  57 
nuevo,  -a  (adj.),  new  57 
nunca  (adv.),  never  41 


0 

o  (conj.),  or  7 
el  occidente,  Occident,  west  1 
el  octubre,  October  60 

ocupado,  -a  (adj.),  busy  48 
ocuparse  de,  to  busy  oneself 

with,  to  bother  about  48 
joiga!     (ioye!),     (inter jec), 

listen!  see  here!  69 
oir,  to  hear  57;  68 
el  ojo,  eye  59 

oler  (R-ch.  I),  to  smell  39 
olvidarse  (de),  to  forget;  se 

me  olvida    (impersonal),  I 

forget  49 
oponerse  (a),  to  refuse,  to  op- 
pose 56 
oprimir,  to  oppress  65 
ordinario,  -a  (adj.),  ordinary, 

common,  average  64 
el  otono,  autumn  60 

otro,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.),  other, 

another  13 


P 

el  padre,  father  6 

pagar,  to  pay  51 
la  pagina,  page  58 
el  pais,  country  (nation)  61,  Bll 
la  paja,  straw  33 
la  palabra,  word,  speech  16 
el  pan,  bread;  loaf  17 
el  pano,  cloth  41 

el  papa,  father,   "dad";  (pi.), 

papas  34 
el  papacito,  dear  father  77 
elpapel,  paper  (in  general;  not 

a  newspaper)  2 
el  papel  secante,  blotting  paper 

70 

para  (prep.)   for;   (conj.),  in 
order  to  5;  50 
el  Paraguay,  Paraguay  (country 
in  South  America)  61 

parece,  it  seems;  me  parece, 
it  seems  to  me;  I  think  30 
la  pared,  wall 

Paris,  Paris  24,  BB8 
la  parte,  part  67 

partir,  to  leave  (intransitive) , 
to  depart  47 

pasado  (past.  part,  as  adj.), 
past,  last;  el  mes  proximo 
pasado,  last  month;  pasado 
manana,  day  after  tomor- 
row 60 

pasar,  to  pass,  to  go;  to  hap- 
pen 25 

pasearse,  to  take  a  walk  66 
la  paz,  peace  57 

pedir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  ask  (a 
favor;  dative  of  person,  ac- 
cusative of  thing)  36 
pedir  prestado,  to  borrow  47 
peinarse,  to  comb  oneself  48 
la  pelota,  ball  74 
el  pensamiento,    thought;  (a) 
thought  64 
pensar  (R-ch.  7),  to  think;  to 

intend  56;  65 
pensar  en,  to  think  of  (one's  at- 
tention is  centered  on)  64 


236 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULAKY 


pensar  de,  to  think  of  (have 
an  opinion  of)  64 

peor  (adv.),  worse  23 

pequeno,  -a  (adj.),  small,  lit- 
tle 5 

perder  (R-ch.  I),  to  lose;  to 

ruin  35;  56,  A18 
perezoso,  -a  (adj.) ,  lazy,  idle  7 
permitir,  to  permit,  to  allow 

55 

pero  (conj.),  but  1 
la  persona,  person  59 
el  Peru,  Peru  (country  in  South 

America)  61 
elperro,  dog  1 

elpescado,  fish  (out  of  water)  41 

el  peso,  dollar,  peso  (South 
American  coin;  see  also 
duro  and  peseta) ;  weight  20 

elpetroleo,  kerosene  30 

el  pez,  fish  (in  water,  not 
caught)  41 

el  piano,  piano  6 

el  pie,  foot  19 

la  piedra,  stone  68 

la  pieza,  room  12 

la  pimienta,  pepper  24 

pintoresco,  -a  (adj.),  pictur- 
esque 38 

elpiso,  floor,  story  (of  a  house) 
13;  19 

elpiso  bajo  or  los  bajos,  ground 
floor  (of  a  two-story  house) ; 
el  piso  alto  or  los  altos, 
upper  floor  (of  a  two-story 
house)  13 
piso  principal,  main  floor,  sec- 
ond floor  (of  a  house  of 
several  stories)  19 
la  pizarra,  slate,  blackboard  5 

placer,  to  please  76 
el  planeta,  planet  33 
el  plato,  plate,  dish,  course  18 
la  playa,  beach,  shore  43 
la  pluma,    pen;  plumafuente, 
fountain  pen  5 
pobre,  poor;    jpobre  de  el! 

poor  fellow!  14;  29 
poco,  -a;  -os,  -as  (adj.),  little; 
few  23 


poco  (adv.),  little,  but  little 

23 

poder  (R-ch.  I),  to  be  able, 

can  35 

no  poder  mas,  to  be  exhausted 
72 

a  mas  no  poder,  with  all  one's 

might  72 
no    poder    menos    de  .  .  .  , 

can't  help  (doing)  68 
el  poema,  poem  33 
la  poesia,  poem;  poetry  54,  Bll 
poner,  to  put;  (refl.),  to  put 
on  (clothes)  49;  ponerse,  to 
become;  ponerse  a,  to  set 
about,  to  begin  to  56 
poquisimo,  -a  (adj.),  very  lit- 
tle 76,  A14 
por,  for,  on  account  of,  by,  in 
exchange      for,  through, 
around  4;  68,  BB14 
por  .  .  .  que  (subjunct.) ,  how- 
ever 53 

por  consiguiente  (adv.),  conse- 
quently 13 

jPor  Dios!  (inter  jec.) ,  for 
Heaven's  sake!  27 

por  lo  comun  (adv.),  generally 
46 

I  por  que?  (int.  conj.) ,  why  ?  18 
porque  (rel.  conj.),  because  50 
posible    (adj.),    possible;  es 
posible    (subjunct.) ,    it  is 
possible  43 
postrero,  -a  (adj.),  last  (of  a 
series;  see  ultimo)  19 
el  precio,  price  14 

preciso;  es  preciso,  it  is  ne- 
cessary (subjunct.) ,  43 
preferir  (R-ch.  II),  to  prefer 
55 

la  pregunta,  question  52 

preguntar,  to   ask    (a  ques- 1 
tion)  24 

prender,  to  catch;  (past,  part.) 
preso,  prendido  65 

preocuparse  de,  to  be  pre- 
occupied with;  to  occupy 
oneself  with  48 

preparar,  to  prepare  8 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


237 


presentar,    to    introduce,  to 

present  42 
el  presidente;     la  presidenta, 

president  33 
el  preso,  captive   (see  prender) 

65 

prestar,  to  lend,  to  pay  (with 
such  words  as  atencion,  at- 
tention) 45 
la  primavera,  spring  60 

primero,   -a    (adj.   or  pro.), 
first  19 
el  primo ;  la  prima,  cousin  6 

principal  (adj.),  chief;  piso 
principal,  main  floor,  second 
floor  19 

principiar  (a),  to  begin  (to)  56 

a  principios  de  (prep.),  at  the 
beginning  of  (a  month)  60 
laprisa,  haste;  tener  prisa,  to 
be  in  a  hurry  72 

probablemente  (adv.),  proba- 
bly 32 

el  prof esor,  la  prof esora,  teacher, 

professor  39 
elprograma,  program  33 
prohibir,    forbid    (subjunct.) , 

55 

pronto  (adv.) , soon,  quickly,at 
once,  immediately  52 

propio,  -a  (adj.),,  own  52 

proximo,  -a  (adj.),  next;  near, 
nearest  60 
la  puerta,  door  13 

piles  (conj.),  for;  (adv.),  well 
48 

puesto  (adj.),  on,  put  on  (of 

clothes)  59 
puro,  -a  (adj.),  pure;  la  pura 

verdad,  the  mere  truth  56 

Q 

que   (conj.),  that,  than  23; 

30,  3 
que  (expletive)  69 
que-   (prefix^   very  (reteque- 

bueno)  76 
que   (rel.  pro.),  which,  that, 

who,  whom  10;  24 
^qu6?      (int.    pro.),  what? 

which?  who?  whom?  18 


el  quebrado,  fraction  67 

quedar,  to  remain,  to  stay  15 
querer  (R-ch.  I),  to  wish;  que- 

rer  a,  to  love,  to  like  (a 

person)  35 
querer  decir,  to  wish  to  say, 

to  mean  72 
como  V.  quiera,  as  you  wish, 

as  you  like  72 
querido,    -a    (past.    part,  as 

adj.),  dear,  beloved  72 
iquia!  (adv.),  not  at  all!  (see 

;ca!)  27 
^quien?     (int.    pro.),  who? 

whom?  18 
iQuien  supiera  .  .  .  !    If  I 

could  only  .  .  .  !  54 
quien  (rel,  pro.),  who,  whom; 

he  who,  whoever  24;  25 
quinto,  fifth  67 
quisiera,    I    should    wish,  I 

should  like,  I  wish  44 
quitar,  to  take  away,  to  de- 
prive of  47 

R 

rajar,  to  split,  to  cleave  51 
rapidamente    (adv.),,  rapidly, 

swiftly  38 
raro,  -a  (adj.),  rare,  unusual 

41 

el  rato,  while  74 

re-   (emphatic  prefix),  very; 

rebueno,  very  good  76 
recibir,    to    receive;    to  be 

passed  (in  a  class)  39 
recorrer,  to  traverse,  to  go 

over  56 
redondo,  -a  (adj.),  round  33 
reducir,  to  reduce  58 
refr,  to  laugh  68 
reirse  (de),  to  laugh  at,  to 

make  fun  of  48 
el  reloj,  the  watch,  clock  12 
el  remedio,  remedy,  aid;  no  hay 

remedio,  there  is  no  help  for 

it  74 

repetir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  repeat 
36 


238 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABTJLAKY 


el  resfriado,  cold  (a  sickness)  74 
respectado,  -a  {adj.),  respected 
64 

el  rey,  king  34 
rezar,  to  pray  51 
rico,  -a  {adj.),,  rich,  excellent, 

sumptuous  14 
rien,  they,  you  (polite)  laugh 

48 

el  rincon,  corner  (inner  corner) 
19 

robar,  to  rob,  to  steal  47 
roer,  to  gnaw;  see  leer,  58 
rogar  (R-ch.  I) ,  to  beg,  to  ask, 

to  request  51 
rojo,  -a  (adj.),  red  11 
romper,  to  break ;  ( past  part. ) , 
roto  52;  (also)  rompido  65 
ronco,  -a  (adj.),  hoarse  33 
la  rosa,  rose  73 
el  rubi,  ruby  34 

rubio,  -a  (adj.),  blond,  light 
14 

S 

el  sabado,  Saturday  34 
sabe  a,  it  tastes  of  64 
saber,  to  know;  to  know  how 
46;  70 

sacar,  to  pull  out;  to  draw 

out  51 
salir,  to  go  out  11 
la  salud,  health;    i  salud!  your 
health!  Greetings!  6 
estar  bueno  (malo)  de  salud, 
to  be  in  good  (bad)  health 
43 

salvarse,  to  save  oneself,  to 
run  away  48 
el  santo,  saint ;  holy  22 
la  sardina,  sardine  41 
el  sastre,  tailor  14 

satisfactorio,  -a  (adj.),  satis- 
factory 22 
satisfecho,  -a  (past.  part,  as 

adj.),  satisfied  10 
se  (pers.  pro.),  (to)  himself, 
herself;  yourself  (formal)  ; 
to    him,,   to    her;    to  you 
(formal)  38;  42;  48 


la  sed,  thirst ;  tener  sed,  to  be 

thirsty  17 
la  seda,  silk  41 

seguir  (R-ch.  Ill) ,  to  continue, 

to  go  on  57 
segun  (prep.),  according  to  42 
seguramente    (adv.),  surely, 

certainly  68 
seguro,  -a  (adj.),  sure,  certain 

49 

la  semana,  week  34 
el  sendero,  path  25 

sentar    (R-ch.   I),    to  seat; 

(refl.)  to  sit  down  35 
sentir  (R-ch.  II),  to  feel;  to 
be  sorry  35 
el  senor,  gentleman;  sir;  Mr.  13 
la  senora,  lady;  madam;  Mrs.  13 
la  senorita,  young  lady;  Miss  13 
el  septiembre,   September  (also 
setiembre)  60 
ser,  to  be  (see  also  estar)  14; 
70 

yo  soy,  etc.,  it  is  I,  etc.  18, 
BB1 

Seranna,  Serafina  (girVs 
name)  77 

servir  (R-ch.  Ill) ,  to  serve ;  to 
be  good  for;  sfrvase,  please 
36;  (App.  E) 

sevillano,  -a  (adj.),  (native) 
of  Seville  25 

si  (conj.),  if,  whether  45 

si  (adv.),  yes  11;  30 

si  (disj.  pro.),  himself,  them- 
selves; yourself,  yourselves 
(formal)  48 

siempre  (adv.),  always  64 

siempre  que  (conj.),  provided 
that  53 

siguiente  (adj.),  following  49 
la  silla,  chair  35 
el  sillon,  big  chair,  armchair  2 

sin  embargo  (adv.),  neverthe- 
less 38 

sino  (que),  (conj.),  but  41 

sin  que  (conj.),  without  53 

sirvase  V.  (and  infinitive), 
please  (App.  H) 

sobresaliente  (adj.),  excellent 
39 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


239 


el  sobrino,  nephew ;  la  sobrina, 
niece  61 
socarron,     -a     {adj.),  sly; 
roguish  33 
el  sofa,  sofa  45 

el  sol,  sun;  hay  mucho  sol,  it  is 

very  sunny  28 
el  soldado,  soldier  14 

soler,  to  be  wont,  to  be  used 
to  76 

solo,  -a  (adj.),  alone,,  only  42 

solo  {adv.),  only  42 

solver  (R-ch.  I),  to  solve;  (past 
part.),  suelto,  solved,  loos- 
ened; occasional  65 
el  sombrero,  hat  4 

son,  (they)  are  9,  BB5 

sonrefr,  to  smile  68 

su(s)  (pos.  adj.),  his,  her,  its; 
their;  your  (polite)  17 

suceder,  to  happen  55 

sucio,  -a  (adj.),  dirty,  soiled 
15 

el  suelo,    ground,    floor    (of  a 

room)  13 
suelto  (see  solver)  39 
el  sueno,  sleep;  tener  (mucho) 

sueno,  to  be  (very)  sleepy 

27 

suficiente  (adj.),  sufficient  14 
suntuoso,  -a   (adj.),  sumptu- 
ous 73 

supiera;  si  supiera  .  .  ,  if  I . 

knew  how  ...  54 
suprimir,  to  suppress;  (past 

part.)    suprimido    and  su- 

preso  65 
suyo,  -a  (pos.  adj.),  his,  her, 

its;  their;  your  (polite)  40 

T 

tal,  such;   (un)  tal,  such  a; 

tales  .  .  .  tales,  some  .  .  . 

others  59 
tambien  (adv.),  also  7 
tampoco  (adv.),  either  10 
tan  (adv.),  as;  very  23;  69 
tan  (adv.  with  adj.  or  adv.) 

como,  as  (so)  ...  as  50 


tanto,  -a  (adj.) ,  so  much ;  (pi.) 
so  many;  cuanto  mas  .  .  . 
tanto  menos,  the  more  .  .  . 
the  less  23;  25 

tanto  (adv.),  so  much  25 

tanto  .  .  .  como,  so  (as)  much 
...  as  50 

taner,  to  play  (a  musical  in- 
strument) 58 

tardar  en,  to  be  slow  in  56 

tarde  (adv.),  late  35 
la  tarde,   afternoon;    todas  las 
tardes,  every  afternoon  26 
la  taza,  cup ;  taza  para  te,  tea- 
cup; taza  de  te,  cup  of  tea 
64 

-te-   (emphatic  prefix)  very; 

retequebueno,  very  good  76 
te  (pers.  pro.),  (to)  thee,  you; 

yourself  21;  38;  48 
elte,  (plural,  tes),  tea  17 
tejer,  to  weave  51 
telegrafiar,  to  telegraph  58 
el  telegrama,  telegram  33 

temblar    (R-ch.  I),    (de  and 

noun),  to  tremble  (with)  35 
temer,  to  fear,  to  be  afraid  10 
temprano  (adv.),  early  45 
el  tenedor,  fork  18 
tener,  to  have  27 ;  74 
tener  a,  to  hold  67 
tener  ganas  de,  to  feel  like  56 
tener  hambre,  to  be  hungry  27 
no  tener  nada  que  ver  con,  to 

have  nothing  to  do  with  74 
tener  que,  to  have  to,  must  29 
tener  razon,  to  be  right  74 
tengo,  I  have  17 
tenir  (R-ch.  Ill),  to  stain,  to 

dye  51 

tercero,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.),  third 
19 

terminar,  to  finish  60,  BB15 
tesis,  thesis  34 

ti  (disj.  pro.),  (to)  thee;  you; 

thyself,  yourself  42;  48 
la  tia,  aunt  6 

tibio,    -a    (adj.),  lukewarm, 

tepid  15 


240 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


el  tiempo,  time;  weather  35 
a  tiempo  {adv.),  on  time  46 
es  tiempo  de  que,  it  is  time 
for  (to)  (with  subjunct.)  43 
tiene,  (he,  she,  it)  has;  (you 

polite)  have  11 
tienen,    (they)    have;  (you 
polite)  have  11 
la  tinta,  ink  6 
el  tio,  uncle  6 

tirar,  to  throw  68 
tirar  de,  to  pull  at  (App.  B) 
la  tiza,  chalk  5 

tocar,  to  touch;  to  play  (a 

musical  instrument)  6;  16 
todavia  (adv.),  still,  yet  34 
todo,  -a  (adj.),  all;  todos  los 

.  .  .  every  14;  26 
jtoma!    (inter  jec),    well!  I 

declare!  69 
tomar,  to  take  7 
el  tomo,  tome,  volume  67 
tonto,  -a  (adj.),  foolish  76 
trabajar,  to  work  4 
el  trabajo,  work  6 
traer,  to  bring  66 
traidor,   -a    (adj.    or  noun), 

treacherous,  traitor  33 
traidoramente  (adv.),  treach- 
erously 57 
eltraje,  suit  49 

la  trampa,  trap ;  dar  en  la 
trampa,  to  fall  into  the 
trap  72 

tranquilo,  -a  (adj.),  tranquil, 
quiet,  calm  49 
el  tranvia,  street  car,  trolley  car 
(word  used  in  Spain)  31 

tras  (prep.),  after  56 

tratar  de,  to  try  to ;  tratar,  to 
treat  56 

tronar  (R-ch.  I),  to  thunder  35 
el  trueno,  thunder  33 

tti  (pers.  pro.),  you;  thou  13 

turco,  -a  (adj.  or  noun),  Turk- 
ish, Turk  33 

tu(s)   (pos.  adj.),  your;  thy 
17 

tuyo,  -a  (pos.  adj.),  thy,  your 
40 


U 

u  =  o,  or  64 

a  ultimos  de  (prep.),  at  the 
end  of  (a  month)  60 

un,  una  (indef.  art.),  a,  one; 
unos,  unas,  some  9 

unico,  -a  (adj.),  only  54 

uno  .  .  .  otro,  the  one  .  .  .  the 
other;  each  other;  (pi.) 
some  .  .  .  others;  one  an- 
other 48 

usar,  to  use,  to  wear  34 

usted;  (pi.),  ustedes;  V.,  Vd., 
Ud.;  VV.,  Vds.,  Uds.,  you 
(polite)  13 

util  (adj.),  useful;  dia  util, 
work  day  60 


V 

;va!  (inter jec.) ,  well!  really! 
73* 

las  vacaciones,  vacation  43 
vaciar,  to  empty  58 
vacio,  -a  (adj.),  empty  15 
el  vaiven,  fluctuation,  alternat- 
ing movement  2 
la  vajilla,  kitchen  utensils  (col- 
lective  noun)  16 
valer,  to  be  worth  66 
jvalgame   Dios!    Good  heav- 
ens! 69 
el  valor,  worth,  value  33 

jvamos    a    ver!     (inter  jec), 

come!  let's  see!  69 
variar,  to  vary  58 
el  vaso,  glass  15 

Vd.  =  usted,     you  (polite 

form)  13 
se  ve,  it  is  evident 
veinte  (num.  adj.),  twenty  20 
elvejote,  (repulsive)  old  man  77 
veneer,  to  overcome,  to  con- 
quer 58 
vender,  to  sell  10 
venir,  to  come  51;  74 
venir  a,  to  happen  to  (plus 
verb)  56 


SPANISH— ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


241 


la  ventana,  window  13 
ver,  to  see  29;  72 
es  de  ver  .  .  .  ,  it  is  worth 

seeing  ...  72 
no  ver  las  horas  de  .  .  .  ,  to 
be  very  anxious  to  ...  72 
el  verano,  summer  60 
elverbo,  verb  16 
la  verdad,  truth  6 

£  verdad?  (see  £no?  above) 
verdaderamente,  truly,  really, 
58,  BB6 

verdadero,  -a  {adj.),  real,  true 
58 

vestir  {R-ch.  Ill),  to  dress; 
{refl.),  to  dress  oneself,  to 
dress  36 
la  vez,  time  (in  series) ;  ocho  ve- 
ces,  eight  times  12 
de  vez  en  cuando,  from  time 

to  time  68 
a   veces    (adv.),    at  times, 
sometimes  44 
viajar,  to  travel  43 
viene,    (he,   she,   it)  comes; 
you  (polite)  come  57 
la  semana  que  viene,  next 
week  60 
elviento,  wind;  hay  viento,  it 

is  windy  28 
elviernes,  Friday  "34 

vino,  (he,  she,  it)  came;  you 
(polite)  came  50 
el  vino,  wine  17 

Vina  del  Mar,  Vina  del  Mar 
(lit.,  vineyard  of  the  sea), 
name  of  a  beach  near  Val- 
paraiso, Chile  43 


vio,   (he,  she,  it)   saw;  you 
(polite)  saw  57 
la  virtud,  virtue  6 

visitar,  to  visit  42 
la  vista,  sight;  view;  de  vista, 
by  sight  63 
jviva  .  .  .  !  hurrah  for  .  .  .  ! 
54 

vivir,  to  live  11 

volver  (R-ch.  I),  to  turn,  to 

return;  volver  a  .  .  ,  to  .  .  . 

again:  volvio  a  escribir,  he 

wrote  again  35;  (App.  B) ; 

(irreg.  past  part.),  vuelto  65 
vosotros,  -as  (per s.  pro.) ,  you; 

yourselves  13;  42 
la  voz,  voice  33 

vuestro,  -a  (pos.  adj.),  your 

17;  40 

Y 

y  (conj.),  and  5 

ya  (adv.),  already,  now;  ya 

no,  no  longer  13 
iya  lo  creo!  I  should  say  so! 

69,B14 
yacer,  to  lie  76 
yo  (pers.  pro.),  I  13 
elyodo,  iodine  71 

Z 

zambullirse,  to  dive ;  see  bullir 
51 

el  zapato,  shoe  29 
la  zorra,  fox  1 

la  zorrilla,  polecat,  skunk  77 
zumbar,  to  buzz  1 


GEXEEAL  VOCABULAEY 


ENGLISH— SPANISH 


A 

a,  un,  una  (indef.  art.)  9 

to  be  able,  poder  (ue)  35 

to  be  about  to,  estar  para  56 

to  accentuate,  acentuar;  you  ac- 
centuate, acentuais  58:  71 

to  accompany,  acompanar  42 

according  to.  segtin  {prep.)  42 

account,  el  cuento  19 

to  ache,  doler  (ue) ;  he  has  a  head- 
ache, le  duele  la  cabeza  74 

to  be  acquainted  with,  conocer  58 

action,  la  accion  71.  A27 

to  admit,  confesar  (ie)  35 

to  advance,  avanzar  60 

to  advise,  aconsejar  55 

affection,  la  aflcion  75 

to  be  afraid,  terner  10;  tener  mie- 
do  27 

after,  despues  de  {prep,  of  time) 
25;  despues  {adv.)  28;  despues 
(de)  que  (conj.)  50;  tras  {prep.) 
56 

afternoon,  la  tarde  26 
afterwards,  despues  [adv.)  28 
again,  volvio  a   .  .  .   {inf.),  he 

wrote  again,  volvio  a  escribir 

{App.  B) 
to  agree,  convenir  74 
to  agree  to,  acordar  (ue)  en  56 
aha!  ;aja!  {inter jec.)  3 
ahead,  adelante  {adv.)  47 
aid,  la  asistencia  73 
to  aid,  ayudar  67 
air,  el  aire  71 
all,  todo.  -a  (adj.)  14;  26 
to  allow,  dejar  62;  permitir  55 
alone,  solo,  -a  [adj.)  42 
Alphonsus,  Alfonso  59 
already,  ya  {adv.)  13 
also,  tanibien  {adv.)  7 
alternating  movement,  el  vaiven  2 
although,  aunque  {conj.)  53 
always,  siempre  (adv.)  64 
America,  America  4 

242 


American,  amerieano.  -a   {adj.  or 

noun)  14 
amiable,  amable  {adj.)  72 
amount,  la  eantidad  65 
ancient,  antiguo,  -a  {adj.)  25 
and,  y  [conj.)  5;  e  (before  initial 

i  or  hi)  64 
animal,  el  animal  51 
Anna,  Ana  22 

annoying,  cansado,  -a  {with  ser; 

used  of  j)ersons)  14 
to  answer,  contestar  36 
to  be  very  anxious  to,  no  ver  las 

horas  de  72 
Apocalypse,   Apocalipsis    {in  the 

last  book  of  Sew  Testament)  60 
apple,  la  manzana  67 
to  approach,  arrimarse  63 
to  approve,  aprobar  (ue)  55 
April,  abril  60 
apt,  habil  (adj.)  60 
(they)  are,  son  9,  BB5 
aren't  you?  ;.  no?  ;. no  es  verdad? 

I  ver  dad?  35 
to  argue,  argiiir  6S 
arithmetic,  la  aritmetica  19 
arm,  (la)  arma  (military  term)  51; 

(of  the  body)  el  brazo  31 
around,  por  (prep.)  68,  BB14 
to  arrive,  llegar  32;  51 
as,  como   (conj.)   23;  as  .  .  .  as, 

tan  (adj.  or  adv.)  como  50 
to  ascertain,  averiguar  51 
to  ask  (a  favor-,  dative  of  person 

and  accusative  of  thing)  pedir 

(i)  36  (see  preguntar) 
to  ask  (a  question-,  dative  of  per- 
son   and    accusative   of  thing) 

preguntar  24  (see  pedir ) 
to  ask,  rogar  (ue)  51 
as  much  (many)  as,  cuanto,  -a; 

-os;  -as  23;  tanto  (noun)  como 

50 

as  much  as,  hast  a  (adv.)  22,  B7 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


243 


as  soon  as,  luego  que  {conj.)  53 
to  assail,  embestir  73 
at,  a  5 

athletic,  atletico,  -a  {adj.)  3;  75 
at  once,  en   seguida    (adv.)  43; 

pronto  {adv.)  52 
to  attack,  embestir  73 
attention,  atencion  45 
at  the  side  of,  al  lado  de  {prep.)  42 
audience,  la  asistencia  73 
auditorium,  (la)  aula  71 
August,  el  agosto  60 
aunt,  la  tia  6 

automobile,  el  automovil  43 
autumn,  el  otofio  60 
to  awaken,  despertarse  (ie)  49 
axe,  (la)  hacha  (written  and  pro- 
nounced el  hacha — see  19) 

B 

bad,  malo,  -a  (with  ser)  14 
badly,  mal  (adv.)  23;  malamente 

(adv.)  57 
ball,  la  pelota  74 
bamboo,  el  bambu  34 
bank  note,  el  billete  de  banco  37 
to  bathe  oneself,  bafiarse  48 
to  be,  ser,  estar  14;  15;  68;  70; 

it  is  I,  etc.,  soy  yo,  etc. 
beach,  la  playa  43 
beast,  la  bestia  71 
beautiful,  hermoso,  -a  (adj.)  54 
because,  porque  (rel.  conj.)  50 
to  become,  hacerse  59;  74;  ponerse 

56 

bed,  la  cama  1 

bedroom,  el  dormitorio  19 

to  befall,  acontecer  72 

before,  antes  (adv.)  32;  antes  (de) 
que  (conj.  of  time)  50 

to  beg,  rogar  (ue)  51 

to  begin,  comenzar  (ie)  56;  to  be- 
gin to,  echar  a  56;  to  begin,  em- 
pezar  (ie)  56;  to  begin  (to), 
principiar  (a)  56;  to  begin,  po- 
nerse a  56 

at  the  beginning  of  (a  month),  a 
principios  de  60 

to  behead,  degollar  (ue) 
(List  of  Irreg.  Verbs) 


behind,  detras  de  (prep.)  32 

to  be  behind,  atrasar;  (of  a  watch) 

to  be  slow  60 
to  believe,  creer  23 
small  bell,  la  campanilla  (from 

campana,  bell)  77 
beside,  al  lado  de  (prep.)  42 
better,  mejor  (adj.)  23 
big,  grande  (adj.)  22 
to  bite,  morder  (ue)  39 
black,  negro,  -a  (adj.)  6 
blackboard,  la  pizarra  5 
to  blacken,  ennegrecer  73 
to  bless,  bendecir  74;  (past  parts.) 

bendito,  bendecido 
blond,  rubio,  -a  (adj.)  14 
blue,  azul  (adj.)  3;  59 
(wild)  boar,  el  jabali 
to  boil,  bullir  51;  cocer  (ue)  58 
bone,  el  hueso  39 

to  bone,  desosar  (ue)  (List  of  irr. 

verbs) 
book,  el  libro  6 
bookshelf,  el  estante  70 
to  bore,  aburrir  11 
to  be  bored,  aburrirse  48 
boring,  cansado  (with  ser)  14 
to  be  born,  nacer;  he  was  born, 

nacio  59 
to  borrow,  pedir  (i)  prestado  47 
to  bother  about,  ocuparse  de  48 
boy,   el   mozo;    el   mucliacho;  el 

nifio;  little  boy,  niuito  6;  8;  77 
bread,  el  pan  17 

to  break,  romper;  (irreg.  past 
part.),  roto;  (also)  rompido52; 
65 

breakfast,  el  desayuno  50 
to  breakfast,  desayunarse  49 
brilliant,  brillante  (adj.)  39 
brother,  el  hermano  6 
brunette,  moreno,  -a  (adj.)  14 
Buenos  Aires,  Buenos  Aires  (capi- 
tal of  Argentina)  59 
to  burnish,  brufiir  51 
business,  los  negocios;  la  indus- 

tria  47;  59 
business  man,  el  negociante  47 
busy,  ocupado,  -a  (adj.)  48 


244 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


to  busy  oneself  with,  ocuparse  de 
48 

but,  pero  {conj.)  1;  sino  (que)  41 
butter,  la  mantequilla  17 
to  buy,  comprar  8 
to  buzz,  zumbar  1 
by,  por  16;  by  your  watch,  en  su 
reloj  60,  Bll 

C 

Cain,  Cam  (see  first  book  of  Old 

Testament) 
Cairo,  el  Cairo  {city  in  Egypt)  61 
to  call  out,  gritar  54 
Callao,  el  Callao  {city  in  Peru)  61 
to  be  called,  intitularse  54 
calm,  tranquilo,  -a  (adj.)  49 
came,    (he,  she,  it)    came,  vino; 

you  came  (polite  form),  vino  50 
can,  poder  (ue)   (physically  able) 

35;  saber  (mentally  able)  70 
Canada,  el  Canada  61 
candle,  la  luz  30 
wax  candle,  el  cirio  73 
canned,  en  lata  (adj.)  41 
capital,  la  capital  (of  a  country) 

59,  AA3 
captain,  el  capitan  14 
captive,  el  preso  (see  prender) 
car,  trolley  car,  el  carro  (word 

used   in   South   America)  31; 

el  tranvia  (word  used  in  Spain) 
care,  el  euidado  68;  to  be  careful, 

tener  euidado  68 
carefully  (adv.),  detenidamente  41 
carpenter,  el  carpintero  59 
carriage,  el  coche  38 
to   carry,   llevar;   to   carry  off, 

llevarse  49 
Castilian,  castellano,  -a   (adj.  or 

noun)  61 
to  catch,  coger  51;  prender;  (past 

part.),,  preso,  prendido,  caught, 

captive  65 
cent,  el  centavo  74 
center,  el  centro;  (also  center  of 

town,  down  town)  59 
certain,  cierto,  -a   (adj.)   33;  se- 

guro,  -a  (adj.)  49 
certainly,  seguramente  68 


chair,  la  silla  35;  arm  chair,  el 

sillon  2 
chalk,  la  tiza  5 
to  change,  cambiar 
chapter,  el  capitulo  67 
character,  el  genio 
Charles,  Carlos  67 
cheap,  barato  -a;  cursi  (adj.)  34 
cheat,    embustero,    -a     (adj.  or 

noun)  69 
cheek,  la  mejilla  2 
chestnut-colored,  castano,  -a  (adj.) 

31 

chief,  principal  (adj.)  19 
chief,  el  jefe  67 
children,  los  ninos  9 
to  chill,  enfriar  58 
to  choose,  elegir  (i)  75 
circuit,  la  carrera  38 
city,  la  ciudad  1 ;  23 
class,  la  clase  41 
class  (sort),  la  especie  41 
clean,  limpio,  -a  (adj.)  15 
to  clean,  limpiar  8;  58 
to  be  clear,  constar  (impersonal) 
76 

to  cleave,  rajar  51 

clerk,  el  dependiente  43;  el  em- 

pleado  25 
clever,  avisado,  -a  (adj.)  72;  habil 

(adj.)  60 
clock,  el  reloj  12 
to  close,  cerrar  (ie)  35 
cloth,  el  pano  41 
coach,  el  coche  38 
(dress)  coat,  el  frac  1 
coffee,  el  cafe;  (pi.)  los  cafes  17; 

34 

cold,  el  frio  27 

cold,  frio,  -a  (adj.)   14;  resfriado 

(sickness)  74 
collar,  el  cuello  29 
to  comb  oneself,  peinarse  48 
to  come,  venir  51;  74 
you  (polite)  come,  viene  57 
come!    jvamos  a  ver!   (inter jec.) 

69 

to  come  across  (to  find),  encon- 

trar  (ue)  31;  dar  con  72 
to  come  close,  arrimarse  63 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


245 


to  come  to,  acudir  a  11 
comet,  el  cometa  33 
common,  ordinario,  -a  64 
to  compete,  competir  (i)  36 
complete,  completo,  -a  {adj.)  39 
to  confess,  confesar  (ie)  35 
confidence,  la  confianza 
to  congratulate  oneself,  felicitarse 
48 

to  conjugate,  conjugar  16 
to  conquer,  veneer  58 
consequently,     por  consiguiente 

(adv.)  13 
to  consider,  considerar;  juzgar  32 
considering,  dado  que  (conj.)  53 
to  consist  of,  consistir  en  56 
to  be  contained  in,  caoer  70 
contented,  contento,  -a  (adj.)  7 
to  continue,  continuar  58;  seguir 

(i)  57 

to  convince,  convencer  58;  to  con- 
vince oneself,  to  be  convinced, 

convencerse  48 
to  cook,  coeer  (ue)  58;  cocinar  8; 

guisar  1 
to  copy,  copiar  66 
corner  (of  a  street),  la  esquina; 

(inside  corner)  el  rincon  19 
to  cost,  costar  (ue)  39 
couch,  el  canape;  (pi.)  los  canapes 

34 

could;  if  I  could  only  .  .  .  !  jQuien 

supiera  .  .  .  !  54 
to  count,  contar  (ue)  35 
country,  el  campo;  in  the  country, 

en  el  campo  70;  country  estate, 

la  hacienda  64;  (nation),  el  pals 

61,  Bll 

country  (nation),  pais  61,  Bll 

course  (of  a  meal),  el  plato  18 

cousin,  primo,  -a  6 

Cousino,  Cousifio  (surname)  2 

to  cover,  cubrir  69;    (irreg.  past 

part.),  cubierto  65 
cowardice,  act  of  cowardice,  la  co- 

bardia  50 
to  creak,  crujir  51 
cruel,  cruel  (adj.)  71 
to  cry,  llorar  2;  27 
cup,  la  taza;  teacup,  taza  para  te; 

cup  of  tea,  taza  de  te  6  4 


to  curse,  maldecir  74;  (past  parts.) 

maldito,  maldecido 
custom-house,  la  aduana  71 
customs,  la  aduana  71 
to  cut,  cortar 
cylinder,  cilindro  1 

D 

dance,  el  baile  73 
day,  el  dia  33 

day   before   yesterday,  anteayer 

(adv.)  60 
dead,  muerto,  -a  (past  part,  of  mo- 

rir)  65 

dear  (expensive;  also  beloved), 
caro,  -a  (adj.)  54;  querido  (be- 
loved) 72 

dear  ...  !  .  .  .  de  mi  alma ! 
(inter  jee.)  69 

debt,  la  deuda  71 

December,  el  diciembre  60 

to  decide  (oneself),  decidirse  (por) 
48;  (with  verb),  a 

I  declare!  jtoma!  69 

to  deduce,  deducir  65 

to  be  delinquent,  delinquir  51 

dentist,  el  dentista  33 

to  depart,  partir  47 

to  deprive  of,  quitar  47 

to  deserve,  merecer  (see  conocer) 

to  descend,  bajar  31 

to  desire,  desear  15 

the  deuce!  jdiablo!  (inter jec.)  69; 
;mil  diablos!  69 

devil,  el  diablo  69 

did  you?  (see  aren't  you?  above) 

to  die,  morir  (ue)  35;  (irreg.  past 
part.),  muerto  65 

difficult,  dificil  (adj.)  10 

diligent,  aplicado,  -a  (adj.)  41; 
diligente  (adj.)  7 

to  diminish,  menguar  (see  averi- 
guar) 

dinner,  la  comida  8 

dirty,  sucio,  -a  (adj.)  15 

discoverer,  descubridor,  -a  (adj.  or 
noun)  2 

disgust,  el  asco;  it  disgusts  me, 

asco  me  da  72 
dish  (course),  el  plato  18 


246 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


to  dismiss,  despedir  (i)  36 
to  distinguish,  distinguir  51 
to  dive,  zambullirse;  see  bullir  51 
to  divide,  dividir  67 
to  do,  liacer,  74;  I  shall  do,  you 
will  do,  etc.,  hare,  haras,  etc.  42 
doctor,  el  medico  47 
does,  (he,  she,  it),  hace  38 
dog,  el  perro  1 

dollar,  el  dolar  4;   el  peso,  (in 

South  America)  20;  el  duro,  (in 

Spain)  1 
door,  la  pnerta  13 
doubt,  la  duda  70 
to  doubt,  dudar  43 
draft  (bank  draft),  el  giro  1 
to  draw  out,  sacar  51 
to  dress,  vestir  (i)  36;  to  dress 

oneself,  vestirse 
to  drink,  beber  10;  tomar  7 
to  drive  (a  carriage,  an  auto),  con- 

ducir,  guiar,  manejar  43 
during,  durante  (prep.)  43 
duty,  el  deber  32 
to  dwell,  alojar  51 
to  dye,  tenir  (i)  51 

E 

each,  cada  (indecl.  adj.) 
each  one,  cada  uno,  -a  (pro.) 
each  other,  (el)  uno  .  .  .  (el)  otro 

48;  mutuamente  (adv.)  48 
eagle,   (la)   aguila  19    (see  agua 

above) 

early,  temprano  (adv.)  45 

to  earn,  ganar  26 

easy,  facil  (adj.)  5 

to  eat,  comer  10 

to  efface,  borrar  75 

egg,  el  huevo  17 

either,  tampoco  (adv.)  10 

to  elect,  elegir  (i)  75 

electrical,  electrico,  -a  (adj.)  30 

elegant,  garboso,  -a  (adj.)  1 

Elizabeth,  Isabel  20 

to  embellish,  ennoblecer  73 

eminent,  eximio,  -a  (adj.)  73 

to  employ,  emplear  76 

employee,  empleado,  -a  (adj.)  25 

empty,  vacio,  -a  (adj.)  15 


to  empty,  vaciar  58 

at  the  end  of  (a  month),  a  fines  de 

(prep.)  ;    a  ultimos  de  (prep.) 

60 

enemy,  enemigo,  -a  (adj.  or  noun) 
16 

engineer,  ingeniero  59 
England,  (la)  Inglaterra  15 
English,  ingles,  -a  (adj.)  14 
to  ennoble,  ennoblecer  73 
enormous,  enorme  (adj.)  33 
enough,  bastante  (adj.  or  adv.)  14 
to    enter,   entrar    (en)  (intrans. 

verb)   (App.  B) 
enthusiasm,  el  entusiasmo  41 
equally,  igualmente 
to  erase,  borrar  75 
to  erect,  erguir  (ye  or  i)  (App.  of 

irreg.  verbs) 
to  err,  errar  (ye)  39 
to  escape,  escaparse  48 
European,  europeo,  -a  (adj.)  64 
even,  ami  (adv.  of  comparison) 
every,  cada   (indecl.  adj.)  ;  todos 

los  .  .  .  ;  everyone,  cada  uno, 

-a  14 

everybody,  todo  el  mundo  54 

to  be  evident,  constar;  it  is  evi- 
dent, consta  76;  se  ve 

examination,  el  examen  39 

to  examine,  examinar  41 

excellent,  excelente  (adj.)  64;  rico, 
-a  (adj.)  14;  sobresaliente  (adj.) 
39 

except,  excepto  (prep.)  73 

exercise,  el  ejercicio  15 

to  be  exhausted,  no  poder  mas  72 

to  exist,  existir  24 

expensive,  caro,  -a  (adj.)  54 

extremely,  (suffix)  -lsimo,  -a  76 

eye,  el  ojo  59 

F 

face,  la  cara  8 

to  face  the  street,  dar  a  la  calle  72 
fair,  dulce  (adj.)  61 
to  fall,  caer  68 

to  fall  into  the  trap,  dar  en  la 
trampa  72 
famous,  eximio,  -a  (adj.)  73 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


247 


to  fancy,  antojarse;  he  fancies,  se 
le  imagina;  se  le  antoja  49;  76 

far,  lejos  (adv.)  48 

farthing,  el  maravedi;  (pi.)  mara- 
vedies,  maravedfs,  maravedises 
34 

fast,  to  be  fast    (of  a  watch), 

avanzar  60 
father,  el  padre;  father,  "  dad," 

papa;   (plural)  papas  34;  dear 

father,  papacito  77 
favor,  el  favor  (App.  E) 
favorable  result,  el  exito  39 
fear,  el  miedo  27 
to  fear,  temer  10 
February,  el  febrero  60 
to  feel,  sentir  (ie)  35 
to  feel  like,  tener  ganas  de;  estar 

por  56 

Fernandez,  Fernandez  (surname) 

to  fetch,  buscar  12 

few,  pocos,  -as  (adj.    or  pro.)  23 

field,  el  campo  71 

fifth,  quinto,  -a  67 

finally,  al  fin  (adv.)  68 

to  find,  encontrar  (ue)  31;  hallar  4 

finger,  el  dedo  31 

to  finish,  acabar  (App.  B) ;  termi- 

nar  60,  BB15 
first,  primero,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.)  19 
fish,  el  pescado   (out  of  water) ; 

(see  also  el  pez,  in  water,  not 

caught)  41 
to  flee,  huir  68 

floor  (of  a  room),  el  suelo  13;  (of 
a  house),  el  piso;  ground  floor 
(of  two-story  house)  el  piso  bajo 
or  los  bajos;  upper  floor  (of 
two-story  house')  el  piso  alto  or 
los  altos ;  main  floor,  second 
floor  (of  house  of  several  sto- 
ries), el  piso  principal  13;  19 

fluctuation,  el  vaiven  2 

fluent  (fluid  as  adj.),,  fluido,  -a  71 

fly,  la  mosca  24 

fog,  la  neblina;  it  is  foggy,  hay 

neblina  28 
following,  siguiente  (adj.)  49 
fondness,  la  aficion  75 
food,  el  alimento  76 


foolish,  tonto,  -a  (adj.  or  noun)  76 
foot,  el  pie  19 

for  (Sp.  present  for  Eng.  perfect), 

desde  hace  .  .  ;    (Sp.  imp.  for 

Eng.  pluperf.  .  .)  64 
for,  para  (prep.)  5;  por  4 
for,  pues  (conj.)  48 
For  Heaven's  sake!  jpor  Dios! 
forbid,  prohibir  55 
force,  la  fuerza  or  las  fuerzas 
foreign  (that  of  another),  ajeno, 

-a  (adj.)  63 
to  forget,  olvidarse  (de) ;  I  forget, 

se  me  olvida  (impersonal  est.) 

49 

fork,  el  tenedor  18 

fourth,  (quarter,  in  telling  time), 

el  cuarto  60 
fox,  la  zorra  1 
fraction,  el  quebrado  67 
France,  (la)  Francia  15 
French,  f ranees,  -a  (adj.)  14 
frequently,  a  menudo  (adv.)  48 
fresh,  fresco,  -a  (adj.)  15 
Friday,  el  viernes  34 
friend,  amigo,  -a  5 
from,  de  (prep.)  5 
to  fry,  freir;   (irreg.  past  part.), 

frito,  68 
to  fulfil,  cumplir  (con)  32 
full,  Ueno,  -a  (adj.)  15 
to  make  fun  of,  reirse  de  48 


G 

Gabriel,  Gabriel  12 

to  gain,  ganar  26 

garret;    small  garret,  buhardilla 

(from  buharda,  garret  window) 

77 

garrulous,  hablador,  -a  (adj.)  33 
gave;   (they)  gave,  you  (polite) 
gave,  dieron;  (he,  she,  it)  gave, 

dio  36 

Gee  whiz!  jcanastos!  69 

general,  el  general  1 

generally,  generalmente  (adv.)  14; 

por  lo  comun  (adv.)  46 
genius,  el  genio 


248 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


gentle,  dulce  (adj.)  61 
gentleman,  el  senor  13 
George,  Jorge  59 
Germany,  Alemania  15 
German,  aleman,  -a  (adj.)  2 
to  get  up,  levantarse  49 
girl,  la  moza;  la  muchacha  6;  8 
to  give,  dar  72;  (they)  give,  dan; 

(he,  she,  it)  gives,  da  38 
to  give  (over),  entregar  51 
glad,  contento,  -a  7 
glass,  el  vaso  (drinking  glass)  15 
Gloria,  Gloria  (girl's  name)  71 
glory,  la  gloria  71 
to  gnaw,  roer;  see  leer  58 
to  go,  ir  56;  70;  andar  57;  68; 

dirigirse  48;  pasar  25 
to  go  down,  bajar  31 
to  go  into,  entrar  en  (intransitive) 

(App.  B) 

to  go  off,  away,  irse  49;  mar- 

charse  54 
to  go  out,  salir  11 
to  go  over  (to  traverse),  recorrer 

56 

to  go  with,  acompanar  42 

to  go  to  bed,  acostarse  (ue)  35 

God,  el  Dios  27 

Gomez,  Gomez  (surname)  64,  B3 
Gonzalez,  Gonzalez  (surname)  2 
good,  bueno,  -a  (adj.)  10 
to  be  good  for,  servir  (i)  61 
good-by,  liasta  luego,  hasta  hie- 

guito  (adv.)  77 
Good  gracious,  jcanastos!  (inter- 

jec.)  69;  j  Jesus,  Jose,  y  Maria! 

69 

Good  heavens!  jDios  mio!  (inter- 

jec.)  69 
graceful,  garboso,  -a  (adj.)  1 
Gracious!  j  Jesus,  Jose,  y  Maria! 

69 

grains,  la  mies;   (pi.)  las  mieses 
17 

grandfather,  el  abuelo  71 
grandmother,  la  abuela  71 
to  grasp,  agarrar;  asir  76,  B5 
a  great  deal,  mucho  (adv.)  9 
it  grieves  (hurts),  duele  31 
ground,  el  suelo  13 


ground  floor,  el  entresuelo  (of  a 

building  of  several  stories)  19 
to  grunt,  grunir  51 
guide,  el  (or)  la  guia  33 
Gutierrez,  Gutierrez  (surname) 

H 

hair,  a  hair,  un  cabello;  hair  (col- 
lective) los  cabellos  31 

half,  medio,  -a  (adj.)  60;  la  mitad 
(noun)  67 

hall  (lecture  hall),  (la)  aula  71 

to  halt,  detenerse  74 

ham,  el  jamon  19 

hand,  la  mano  33 

to  hand  over,  entregar  51 

to  happen,  acontecer  72;  pasar  55; 
suceder  55;  venir  a  (with  verb) 
56 

happily,  felizmente  (adv.)  57 
happy,  contento,  -a  (adj.) ;  feliz  7 
has,  (he  she,  it;  you  polite),  tiene 
11 

haste,  la  prisa  72 

to  hasten,  acudir  11 

hat,  el  sombrero  4 

to  have,  liaber  (auxiliary  for  per- 
fect tenses) ;  tener  (to  possess) 
27;  28;  29;  56;  70;  74 

have,  (they;  you  polite),  tienen  11 

to  have  breakfast,  desayunarse  49 

head,  la  cabeza,  74;  (chief),  el  jefe 
67 

health,  la  salud  6 

health;  to  be  in  good  health,  estar 

bueno  de  salud  43 
to  hear,  entender  (ie)  35;  oir  57; 

68 

heat,  el  calor  27  • 

heaven,  el  cielo  13 

Good  heavens!  iValgame  Dios!  69 

Helen,  Elena  12 

to  help,  ayudar  67 

help,  el  remedio;  there  is  no  help 
for  it,  no  hay  remedio  74;  can't 
help  (doing),  no  poder  menos  de 
68 

Henry,  Enrique  12 
her,  to  her,  ella  (disj.  pro.)  42; 
le  (conj.  pro.)  ;  se  (with  a  fqU 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


249 


lowing  direct  obj.  pro.)  ;  su  (pos. 

adj.)  17;  21 
herding,  ganadero,  -a  (adj.)  59 
here,  aqui  (adv.)  11 
hers,  suyo,  -a  (adj.  or.  pro.)  40 
herself,  to  herself  (reft,  pro.),  se 

38;  si  (dis;.  pro.)  42;  48 
hi!  jea!  69 

high  school,  el  liceo  45 

him,  to  him,  el  (disj.  pro.)  42;  le 
(conj.  pro.)  ;  se  (followed  by  a 
direct  obj.  pro.)  38;  (to)  him- 
self, si,  (refl.  pro.)  38;  42;  48 

to  hinder,  impedir  (i)  36 

his,  su(s)  (pos.  adj.)  17;  suyo,  -a 
(pos.  adj.  or  pro.)  40;  el  suyo 
(pos.  pro.)  40 

hoarse,  ronco,  -a  (adj.)  33 

hold,  tener  a  65 

holy,  santo,  -a  (adj.)  22 

to  hope,  esperar 

horse,  el  caballo  38 

horseman,  el  jinete 

hot,  calient e  14 

hour,  la  hora  60 

house,  la  casa  10;  (big,  ill-propor- 
tioned house),  el  caseron;  (ugly 
old  house),  la  casucha  77 
at  the  house  of,  at  home,  en  casa 
(de)  (adv.  or  prep.)  38 

how,  como  (conj.  adv.)  23 

how?  (int.  conj.)  £como?  18 

how,  lo  (as  in:  .  .  how  good 
they  are  ... ")  29,  2 

however,  por  (adj.  or  adv.)  que 
(subjunct.)  53 

how  many,  cuantos,  -as  23;  how 
many?  ^cuantos,  -as?  18 

how  much,  cuanto,  -a  23;  how 
much?  i cuanto,  -a?  18 

humorous,  burlon,  -a  33 

hunger,  (la)  hambre  27 

hungry,  to  be  hungry,  tener  ham- 
bre 27 

hurrah  for  .  .  .  !  jviva  ...  !  54 
hurricane,  el  huracan  2 
to  be  in  a  hurry,  tener  prisa  72 
it  hurts,  duele  31;  this  foot  hurts 
me,  me  duele  este  pie  31 


husband,  el  esposo 
hypothesis,  la  hipotesis  34 

I 

I,  yo  (pers.  pro.)  13 

ice,  el  liielo  14 

ice  cream,  el  helado  39 

idle,  perezoso,  -a  (adj.)  7 

if,  si  (conj.)  45 

ignoble,  innoble  (adj.)  73 

ill,  enfermo,  -a  31;  malo,  -a  (with 

estar)  15 
to  imagine,  flgurarse;  imaginarse 

49 

immediately,  en  seguida  (adv.)  43; 

pronto  (adv.)  52 
it  is  important,  importa  56 
impossible,  imposible  (adj.)  43 
to  imprint,  imprimir  (irreg.  past 

part.)  impreso  65 
in,  en  (prep.)  4 

in  case,  en  caso  (de)  que  (conj.) 
53 

to  be  inclined  to,  estar  por  56 
Indian,  indio,  -a  64 
(Indian)  corn,  maiz  3;  72 
indifferent,  indiferente  41 
industrious,  aplicado,  -a  (adj.)  41; 

diligente  (adj.)  7 
industry,  la  industria  59 
inexpensive,  barato,,  -a  24 
to  inform,  hacer  saber  57,  AA15 
inhabitant,  el  habitante  22 
ink,  la  tinta  6 

in   order   that,    a   fin    (de)  que 

(conj.)  53;  para  que 
in  order  to,  para  (conj.)  5 
to  insist  (on),  insistir  (en)  56 
instead  of,  en  vez  de  (prep.)  45 
instinct,  el  instinto  64 
intelligent,  inteligente  (adj.) ;  very 

intelligent,  inteligentisimo,  -a  76 
to  intend,  pensar  (ie)  56 
interesting,  interesante  (adj.)  38 
to  introduce,  presentar  42 
iodine,  el  yodo  71 
Irish,  irlandes,  -a  (adj.  or  noun)  75 
irorf,  el  hierro  37 


250 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULAKY 


is,  (he,  she,  it),  es  6;  it  is  (in  ex- 
pressions of  weather)  liace  60 
island,  la  isla  75 

Israelite,  israelita  (adj.  or  noun) 
75 

is  to,  (he,  she,  it),  lia  de  29 
its,  su(s)  (pos.  adj.)  17 

J 

jacket,  la  chaqueta  29 
jaguar,  el  jaguar  1 
Jane,  Juana;  little  Jane,  Juanita 
77 

January,  el  enero  60 
Jesus,  Jesus  69 
John,  Juan  12 

joined,  anexo,  -a;  anejo,  -a  (adj.) 

Joseph,  Jose  69 

judge,  el  juez;  (pi.)  jueces  65 

to  judge,  juzgar  32 

judgment,  el  juicio  71 

July,  el  julio  60 

to  jump,  brincar  51 

June,  el  junio  60 

to  have  just,  acabar  de  .  .  .  (App. 
B) 

K 

kerosene,  el  petroleo  30 
key,  la  Have  70 
kilometer,  el  kilometro  73 
kind,  amable  (adj.)  72 
kind,  la  especie  41 
to  kindle,  encender  (ie)  35 
kindness,  Ja  bondad  (App.  H) 
king,  el  rey  34 

kitchen  utensils,  la  vajilla  (col- 
lective) 16 

knife,  el  cucliillo  18 

to  know,  conocer  58;  to  know 
how,  saber  46;  70 

L 

to  be  lacking,  faltar  60 

lady,  la  senora  13 

large,  grande  (adj.)  6;  22 

last,  pasado  (past  part,  as  adj.,  as 

el  mes  pasado,  last  month)  60; 

(of  a  series)  postrero,  -a(  adj.) 

19 


late,  tarde  (adv.)  35 

Latin,  latino,  -a  (adj.)  61;  latin, 

(the  language) 
to  laugh,  reir  68 

laugh,  (they;  you,  polite)  rien  48 

to  laugh  at,  reirse  de  48 

law,  el  derecho  (abstract  noun 
only)  47;  la  ley  34 

lawyer,  el  abogado  47 

lazy,  flojo,  -a  (adj.)  31;  haragan, 
-a  (adj.)  33;  perezoso, -a  (adj.)  7 

to  lead,  conducir  43 

leader,  el  jefe  67 

leaf,  la  hoja  39 

lean,  flaco,  -a  (adj.)  8 

to  learn,  aprender  56 

at  least,  por  lo  menos  (adv.)  72 

to  leave,  partir  (intransitive)  47 

to  leave  off  (doing  a  thing),  de- 
jar  de  ...  50;  he  left  off  writ- 
ing, dejo  de  escribir  50 

left,  izquierdo,  -a  (adj.)  31 

leisurely,  despacio,  -a  (adj.)  23 

to  lend,  pre  star  45 

less,  menos  (adv.)  23 

lesson,  la  leccion  6 

to  let,  dejar  62;  to  let  know, 
hacer  saber 

let's  see!  jvamosaver!  (inter jee.) 
69 

letter,  la  carta  40 
to  lie   (tell  a  falsehood) ,  mentir 
(ie)  35 

to  lie  (to  lie  down),  yacer  76 
to  lift,  levantar  49 
light,  la  luz  30 

light  (blond),  rubio,  -a  (adj.)  14 
light  (swift),  ligero,  -a  38 
to  light,  encender  (ie)  35 
to  like  (a  person),  querer  (ie)  a 
35;  (a  thing),  gustar  (imperson- 
al est.)  (App.  B) 
I  should  like,  quisiera  44;  I  like  it, 
me  agrada;  me  alegra;  me  gusta 
(App.  B) 
linguistic,  linguistico,  -a  71 
liquid,  fluido,  -a  (adj.)  71 
listen!  joiga!  joye!;  listen  here! 
jmire!  69 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


251 


little  (in  size),,  cliico,  -a  (adj.)  33; 

pequeno,  -a  5 
little  (in  amount),  poco,  -a  (adj.) 

23 

little,  but  little,  poco  (adv.) ;  lit- 
tle, poco  de  (partitive  adv.)  23 

little  girl,  la  ninita  77 

to  live,  vivir  11 

loaf,  el  pan  17 

to  loaf,  liolgarse  (ue)  48 

to  lock,  cerrar  (ie)  35 

to  lock  up,  encerrar  (ie)  35 

to  lodge,  alojar  51 

long,  largo,  -a  (adj.)  33 

no  longer,  no  .  .  .  mas  (adv.)  41; 
ya  no  13 

to  look  at,  mirar  50 

to  look  for,  buscar  12 

Look  out  that  .  .  .  !  jCuidado  que 
.  .  .  !  68 

looking-glass,  el  espejo  48 

to  lose,  perder  (ie)  35 

Louis,  Luis;  little  Louis,  Luisito 
67;  77 

to  love,  amar  16;  querer  a  (ie)  35 
lukewarm,  tibio,  -a  (adj.)  15 
to  lunch,  almorzar  (ue)  35 

M 

madam,  senora  13 

made,  (he,  she,  it;  you  polite), 
hacia  64;  liizo  (preterite)  54 

Madrid  (inhabitant  of),  madrileno, 
-a  (adj.  or  noun)  25 

maize,  maiz  3;  71 

to  make,  hacer  74 

makes,  (he,  she,  it;  you  polite), 
hace  38 

to  make  cold,  enfriar  58 

to  make  oneself,  hacerse  59;  74 

to  make  up  one's  mind,  decidirse 
por;  (with  verb),  a  48 

to  make  one's  way  toward,  to  go, 
dirigirse  48 

was  making,  (he,  she,  it;  you  po- 
lite) hacia  64 

mamma,  la  mama;  (pi.)  las  ma- 
mas 34 

man,  el  hombre  9 


to  manage,  echar  de  56 

manner,  el  aire  71 

to  manufacture,  fabricar  49;  to  be 

manufactured,  fabricarse  49 
many,  muchos,  -as  (adj.),  10 
March,  el  marzo  60 
mark  (in  school),  la  nota  39 
Mary,  Maria  12 

mathematics,  las  matematicas  73 
it  matters,  importa  56 
May,  el  mayo  60 

me,  to  me,  mi  (disj.  pro.)  42;  48; 

me  (conj.  pro.)  21;  38;  with  me, 

conmigo  42 
meal,  la  comida  8 
to  mean  (to  wish  to  say),  querer 

decir  72 
means,  la  medida  1 
measure,  la  medida  1 
meat,  la  carne  17 
medicine,  la  medicina  47 
to   meet,   conocer   58;  encontrar 

(ue)  31 
to  melt,  derretir  (i)  36 
mere  truth,  la  pura  verdad  56 
middle,    in    the    middle    of  (a 

month),  a  mediados  de  60 
might,  with  all  one's  might,  a  mas 

no  poder  72 
milk,  la  leclie  17 
mine,  el  mio  (pos.  pro.)  40 
mint,  la  moneda  13 
mirror,  el  espejo  48 
miss,  dona  (with  first  name)  20; 

la  seiiorita  (used  with  surname) 

13 

mist,  la  neblina;  it  is  misty,  bay 

neblina  28 
Mrs.,   Mistress,   dona   (with  first 

name)    20;    senora    (used  with 

surname)  13 
mistake,  la  falta 

mistaken,  (to  be),  equivocarse  52 
mister,   Mr.,   master,   don  (with 

first    name)    20;    senor  (used 

with  surname)  13 
modern,  moderno,  -a  (adj.)  25 
moment,  el  momento  40 
money,  el  dinero  19 
month,  el  mes  60 


252  • 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


Monday,  el  lunes  34 

more,  mas  (adv.)  14;  the  more  . . . 
the  more,  cuanto  mas  . .  .  (tanto) 
mas  23;  no  more,  no  longer,  no 
. .  .  mas  (adv.)  41 

morning,  la  manana  11 

mortal,  mortal  (adj.)  61 

most,  isimo,  -a  (suffix)  76 

mother,  la  madre  6 

mountain,  la  montana  25 

much,  mucho  (adv.)  10 

much,  mucho,  -a  (adj.)  10 

must,  deber  35 

mutually,  mutuamente  (adv.)  48 
my,  mi(s)  (pos.  adj.)  17;  mio,  -a 
(pos.  adj.  or  pro.)  40 

N 

narrow,  angosto,  -a  (adj.)  41 

nation,  la  nacion  12 

near,  cerca  de  (prep.)  30;  proximo, 

-a  (adj.)  60 
necessary,    necesario,    -a  (adj.); 

preciso  43 
it  is  necessary,  es  necesario  43; 

es  menester  51 
to  need,  necesitar  56 
neither,  ni;  neither  .  .  .  nor,  ni 

.  .  .  ni  (conj.)  7;  41 
nephew,  el  sobrino  61 
never,  nunca  (adv.) ;  jamas  (adv.) 

41 

nevertheless,  sin  embargo  (adv.)  38 
new,  nuevo,  -a  (adj.)  57 
newly,  nuevamente  (adv.)  57 
news,  las  noticias  40 
newspaper,  el  diario  70 
news  stand,  el  kiosco  (quiosco)  73 
New  York,  Nueva  York  59,  B5 
next,  en  seguida  (adv.)  43 
next,  proximo,  -a  (adj.)  60;  next 

week,  la  semana  que  viene  60 
nice,  amable  (adj.)  72 
niece,  la  sobrina  61 
no   (none),  ninguno,  -a   (adj.  or 

pro.)   19;    (after  noun)  alguno 

19;  41 
no,  no  (adj.)  8;  41 
nobody,  nadie  (pro.)  41 


no  one,  ninguno,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.) 
19 

nor,  ni  (conj.)  7 

North  America,  America  del  Norte, 
Norte  America  68 

not,  no  (adv.)  8;  41;  not  at  all! 
jca!  (inter jec.) ;  nada  (adv.;  in- 
ter jee.)  41;  not  by  a  good  deal, 
ni  por  mucho  (adv.;  inter  jec.) 
25 

note    (as,  "to  make  a  note  of 

something"),  la  apuntacion  39 
notebook,  el  cuaderno  39 
nothing,  nada  (pro.)  41 
to  notice  carefully,  fijarse  en  56 
November,  el  noviembre  60 
now,  ahora  (adv.)  16;  ya  (adv.) 
13 

to  obscure,  ennegrecer  73 
occasional,  suelto,  -a  (past  part. 

as  adj.  from  solver)  65 
to  occupy   oneself   with,  preocu- 

parse  de  48 
October,  el  octubre  60 
of,  de  (prep.)  5;   (in  expressions 

of  time) ;  faltan  cinco  minutos 

para  las  ocho,  it  is  five  minutes 

of  eight  60 
often,  a  menudo  (adv.)  48 
oil  (as,  olive  oil),  el  aceite  71 
old  (out-of-date),  anejo,  -a  (adj.)  2 
older,  mayor  (adj.)  23;  33 
on,  en  (prep.)  4;  adelante  (adv.) 

47 

on  (plus  present  part.),  al  (plus 

in  fin.)  50 
on  account  of,  por  (prep.)  4 
on  (put  on,  as :  "  he  has  his  hat 

on ")  puesto,  -a  59 
one,  un,  una  (indef.  art.)  9 
one  another,  (el)  uno  .  .  .  (el) 

otro ;  mutuamente ;  the  one  . . . 

the    other,    (el)    uno  .  .  .  (el) 

otro  48 
onion,  la  cebolla  39,  BB5 
only,   tmico,   -a    (adj.)    54;  solo 

(adv.)     42;    no  .  .  .  mas  que 

(adv.)    23;    not   only  .  .  .  but 

also,  no  solo  (or  solamente)  .  .  . 

sino  que  50 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULAKY 


253 


to  open,  abrir  65 

opened,  abierto  (irreg.  past  part.) 
65 

opinion,  el  juicio  71 

to  oppose,  oponerse  (a)  56 

to  oppress,    oprimir    65;  {past 

parts.)  oprimido,  opreso 
or,  o  (conj.)  7;  u  =  o  {before  0- 

or  ho-)  64 
orange,  la  naranja  67,  BB10 
orange  blossom,  el  azaliar  1 
to  order,  mandar  44 
ordinary,  ordinario,  -a  64 
other  (another),  otro  -a  {adj.  or 

pro.)  13 
ought,  deber  35 

ought  to  ...  ,  hay  que  ...  29 
our(s),   nuestro,   -a    {adj.);  (el) 

nuestro  {pro.)  40 
outcome,  el  exito  39 
to  overcome,  veneer  58 
to  owe,  deber  35 
own,  propio,  -a  {adj.)  52 
ox,  el  buey  2 

P 

page,  la  hoja  39;  la  pagina  {as  of 
a  book)  58 

to  pain,  doler  (ue)  74 

paper  (in  general,  not  a  news- 
paper), el  papel;  blotting  paper, 
el  papel  secante  70 

Paraguay,  el  Paraguay  61 

Paris,  Paris  24,  BB8 

parrot,  el  loro  2 

part,  la  parte  67 

to  pass,  pasar  25 

to  be  passed  (in  a  class  on  an 
examination)  recibir39;  aprobar 

past,  pasado,  -a  (past  part,  as 
adj.)  60 

path,  el  sendero  25 

to  pay,  pagar  51 

to  pay  (attention),  prestar  (aten- 

cion)  45 
peace,  la  paz  57 

pen,    la    pluma;    fountain  pen, 

plumafuente,  5;  70 
pencil,  el  lapiz  5 
penknife,  el  cortaplumas  34 


pepper,  la  pimienta  24 
perfect,  eompleto,  -a  (adj.)  39 
to  permit,  dejar  62;  permitir  55 
person,  la  persona  59 
Peru,  el  Peru  61 

pharmaceutical,    farmaceutico,  -a 

(adj.)  71 
philosopher,  el  filosofo  73 
to  philosophize,  filosofar  57 
piano,  el  piano  6 

picturesque,  pintoresco,  -a  (adj.) 
38 

pity,  la  lastima;  it  is  a  pity,  es 

lastima  46 
planet,  el  planeta  33 
plate,  el  plato  18 

to  play,  jugar  (ue)  35;  (a  musical 
instrument)  tafier,  tocar  6;  16; 
58 

to  please,  alegrar;  it  pleases  me, 
I  like,  me  alegra;  gustar,  me 
gusta,  I  like  (App.  B) ;  placer 
76;  agradar;  me  agrada,  it 
pleases  me,  I  like  (App.  B) 

to  be  pleased  with,  complacerse 
(en)  76 

please,  tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  . . .  ; 
hagame  V.  el  favor  de  . . .  ;  sir- 
vase  V.  (App.  H) 

please  (yes,  please),  si  me  hace  el 
favor  (App.H) 

plus,  mas  67 

pocket,  el  bolsillo  40 

poem,  la  poesia  54,  Bll;  el  poema 
33 

poetry,  la  poesia,  54,  Bll 

to  point  out,  ensenar  24 

polecat,,  la  zorrilla  77 

to  polish,  brufiir  51 

poor,  pobre  (adj.)-,  jpobre  de  el! 

poor  fellow!  14;  29 
possible,  posible  (adj.)  43 
practice,  el  ejercicio  15 
to  pray,  rezar  51 
to  prefer,  preferir  (ie)  55 
to  be   preoccupied   with,  preocu- 

parse  de  48 
to  prepare,  preparar  8 
to  present,  presentar  42 
to  be  present,  asistir  64 


254: 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


president,  el  presidente,  la  presi- 

denta  33 
pretty,  bonito,  -a  33 
to  prevent,  impedir  (i)  36 
price,  el  precio  14 
priest,  el  cura  1 

to  print,  irnprimir;    (irreg.  past 

part.),  impreso  65 
probably,  probablemente  (adv.)  32 
professor,  el  profesor.  la  profesora 

39 

program,  el  programa  33 
provided  that,  siempre  que  (conj.) 
53 

prudent,  avisado,  -a  {adj.)  72 

to  pull  at,  tirar  de  {App.  B) 

to  pull  out,  sacar  51 

pupil,  alumno,  -a  5 

to  purchase,  comprar  8 

pure,  puro,  -a  (adj.)  56 

to  put,  meter  40;  poner;  to  put  on 

(clothes),  ponerse  49 
to  put  to  bed,  acostar  (ue)  35 
to  put  on  (shoes),  calzarse  49 

0 

quantity,  la  cantidad  65 
question,  la  pregunta  52 
quickly,  aprisa  (adv.)  57;  pronto 

(adv.)  52 
quiet,    callado,    -a    (adj.)  •  very 

quiet,  calladito  77;  tranquilo,  -a 

(adj.)  49 
quotient,  el  cuociente  71 

R 

race,  la  carrera  38 

rain,  la  lluvia;  it  is  rainy,  hay 

lluvia  60 
to  rain,  Hover  (ue)  35 
to  raise,  alzar  58 
rapid,  ligero,  -a  (adj.)  38 
rapidly,  rapidamente  (adv.)  38 
rare,  raro,  -a  (adj.)  41 
to  reach,  llegar  (a)  (intrans.)  32; 

51 

to  read,  leer  58 

ready,  listo,  -a  (adj.)  32 


real,  verdadero,  -a  (adj.)  58 
really,  verdaderamente  58,  BB6; 

jva!  (inter jec.)  really!  73 
reason,  la  razon  74;  (judgment)  el 

juicio  71;  there  is  no  reason  for, 

no  hay  por  que 
to  receive,  recibir  39 
to  recount,  contar  (ue)  35 
red,  rojo,  -a  (adj.)  11 
to  reduce,  reducir  58 
to  refrain  from,  guardarse  de  56 
to  refuse,   negarse    (ie)    (a)  56; 

oponerse  (a)  56 
to  rejoice,   alegrarse    (de)  (App. 

B)  ;  55 
to  relate,  contar  (ue)  35 
reliable,  eierto,  -a  33 
to  remain,  quedar  (se)  74 
remedy,  el  remedio  74 
to  remember,  acordarse  (ue)  de  48 
to  remind   oneself    of,  acordarse 

(ue)  de  48 
to  repeat,  repetir  (i)  36 
to  reply,  contestar  36 
repulsive  old  man,  el  vejote  77 
to  request,  rogar  (ue)  51 
respected,    respectado    -a  (past. 

part,  as  adj.)  64 
to  rest,  descansar  56 
to  return,  volver  (ue)  35 
returned,  vuelto  (irreg.  past  part.) 

65 

rich,  rico,  -a  14 

right,  derecho,  -a  (adj.) ;  asy  "right 

hand")  31 
to  "be  right,  tener  razon  74 
road,  el  camino 
to  rob,  robar  47 
roguish,  socarron,  -a  (adj.)  33 
room  (of  a  house),  el  cuarto  49; 

la  pieza  12 
to  have  room  for,  caber  70 
round,  redondo,  -a  (adj.)  33 
rose,  la  rosa  73 
ruby,  el  rub!  34 

to  ruin,  perder  (ie)  (person  as  ob- 
ject) 56,  A18 
to  run,  correr  42 
to  run  away,  salvarse  48 
to  run  off,  escaparse  48 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


255 


S 

said,  (they,  you  polite),  dijeron  8, 
BB14;  (he,  she,  it),  dijo  3;  24; 
(we),  dijimos 
saint,  santo  {adj.  or  noun)  22 
sake;    For  Heaven's   sake,  ;por 
Dios!  27 

same,  mismo,  -a  (adj.  before  noun) 
24 

sardine,  la  sardina  41 
satisfactory,  satisfactorio,  -a  {adj.) 
22 

satisfied,  satisfecho,  -a  (past  part. 

as  adj.)  10 
to  be  satisfied  with,  contentarse 

con  56 
Saturday,  el  sabado  34 
to  save  oneself,  salvarse  48 
saw,  (he,  she,  it;  you  polite),  vio 

57 

to  say,  decir  40;  74 
say,  (they;  you  polite),  dicen  24 
says,  (he,  she,  it;  you  polite) dice 
24 

to  scatter,  esparcir  58 
school,  la  escuela  23 
Scotch,  escoces,  -a  (adj.  or  noun) 
33 

to  seat,  sentar  (ie) ;  to  seat  one- 
self, to  sit  down,  sentarse  (ie) 
35 

to  see,  ver  29;  72;  we'll  see  about 

it,    alia    veremos;    see  here! 

jmire!  joiga!  joye!  69;  74,  B16 
to  seek,  buscar  12 
it  seems,  parece  30 
to  seize,  asir  76;  coger  51 
-self,  mismo  (intensive  adj.  after 

noun)  24 
to  sell,  vender  10 
to  send,  enviar  58;  mandar  44 
sense,  el  juicio  71 
sentinel,  la  centinela  33 
September,  el  se(p)tiembre  60 
Serafina,  Serafina  (girl's  name)  77 

little  Serafina,  Finita  77 
servant,  el  mozo  6 
to  serve,  servir  (i)  36 
set  of  shelves,  el  estante  70 
Seville   (native  of),  sevillano.  -a 

(adj.  or  noun)  25 


share  (of  stock),  accion  71,  A27 

to  shave  oneself,  afeitarse  48 

she,  ella  13 

shirt,  la  camisa  29 

shoe,  el  zapato  29 

shore,  la  playa  43 

short,  corto,  -a  61 

should,  you  should,  hay  que  29; 

I  should  say  so!   jYa*  lo  creo! 

69,B14 
shoulder,  el  hombro  40 
to  shout,  gritar  54 
to  show,  ensenar  24 
to  shut,  cerrar  (ie)  35 
to  shut  in,  encerrar  (ie)  35 
sick,  enfermo,  -a   (adj.)  31 

malo,  -a  (adj.)  (with  estar)  15 
side,  el  lado  42 

sight,  la  vista  63;  by  sight,  de 

vista 
silk,  la  seda  41 

since,   desde   que    (conj.) ;  desde 

(prep.)  64 
to  sing,  cantar  47 
sir,  senor  13 

to  sit  down,  sentarse  (ie)  35 

skilful,  habil  (adj.)  60 

skunk,  la  zorrilla  77 

sky,  el  cielo  13 

slate,  la  pizarra  5 

sleep,  el  sueiio  27;  to  sleep,  dor- 

mir  (ue)  35;  to  be  sleepy,  tener 

sueuo  27 

slow,  despacio,  -a  (adj.)  23;  to  be 
slow  (of  a  watch),  atrasar  60 

slowly,  despacio  (adv.)  23 

to  be  slow  in,  tardar  en  56 

sly,  socarron,  -a  (adj.)  33 

small,  chico,  -a  (adj.)  33;  pequeno, 
-a  5 

to  smell,  oler  (hue)  39 

to  smile,  sonreir  68 

snow,  la  nieve  33 

to  snow,  nevar  (ie)  35 

so,  and  so  (conj.  adv.),  asi  3 

"so  long,"  hasta  luego  (adv.)  77 

and  so  forth,  et  cetera,  etcetera  49 

so  many,  tantos,  -as  (adj.)  25 

so  much,  tanto,  -a  (adj.)  25 

so  much,  tanto  (adv.)  25 

so  that,  asi  que  (conj.)-  47 


256 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


so  that,  de  manera   (de  or)  que 

{conj.)  50;  53;  de  modo  (de  or) 

que  {conj.)  53 
sock,  el  calcetm  16 
sofa,  el  sofa  45 
soiled,  sucio,  -a  {adj.)  15 
soldier,  el  soldado  14 
to  solve,  solver  (ue) ;  {irreg.  past 

part.)  suelto  65 
some,  alguno,  -a  {adj.  or  pro.)  19; 

41 

some,  unos,  unas  {adj.  or  pro.)  9 
some  .  .  .  others,  (los)  unos  .  .  . 

(los)  otros  48;  tales  .  .  .  tales  59 
sometimes,  a  veces  {adv.)  44 
soon,  pronto  {adv.)  52 
to  be  sorry,  sentir  (ie)  35 
sore,  enfermo  31 
sort,  la  clase;  la  especie  41 
soul,  (la)  alma  19 
Spain,  la  Espana  15 
Spanish,  espafiol,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.) 

14 

to  speak,  hablar  4 

speech,  la  palabra  16 

to  spend,  gastar  74 

in  spite  of  the  fact  that,  a  pesar 

de  que  53 
to  split,  rajar  51 

spoon,  la  cuchara  18;  small  spoon, 

teaspoon,  la  cucliarita  18 
spouse,  esposo,  -a 
spring,  la  primavera  60 
squall,  el  chubasco  2 
square,  cuadrado,  -a  {adj.)  33 
to  stain,  tenir  (i)  51 
statesman,  el  estadista  16 
to  stay,  quedar  (se)  15 
to  steal,  robar  47 
steel,  el  acero  37 

still  {as,  "He  is  still  here  "),  toda- 

via  34;  aim  3 
still  (as,  "That  is  still  larger"), 

aun  {adv.  of  degree) 
stock  raising,  ganadero,  -a  (adj.) 

59 

stocking,  la  media  16 
stone,  la  piedra  68 
to  stop,  detenerse  74 


stopped;  he  stopped  writing,  dej6 

de  escribir  50 
story  (narrative) ,  el  cuento  19 
story  (of  a  house),  el  piso  13 
stout,  gordo,  -a  (adj.)  54 
straight,  derecho,  -a  31 
strange,  ajeno,  -a  (adj.)  63 
straw,  la  paja  33 
street,  la  calle  12 
street  car,  el  tranvia  31 
strength,  la  fuerza;  las  fuerzas 
strike,  to  strike  two  (o'clock),  dar 

las  dos  72 
strong,  fuerte  (adj.) 
to  struggle  (for),  luchar  (por)  56 
student,    alumno,    -a     (in  high 

school)-,    5;    el  estudiante  (in 

college)  30 
to  study,  estudiar  13 
stupid,  estupido,  -a  (adj.)  69 
such,  tal;  such  a,  (un)  tal  59 
sufficient,  suficiente  (adj.)  14 
sugar,  el  azucar  17 
suit,  el  traje  49 

it  suits,  convenir    (3rd  sing,  as 

impersonal)  74 
summer,  el  verano  60 
sumptuous,    rico,    -a    (adj.)  14; 

suntuoso,  -a  (adj.)  73 
sun,  el  sol;  it  is  sunny,  hay  sol  28 
Sunday,  el  domingo  34 
to  suppress,  suprimir;  (past  part.) 

suprimido  and  supreso  65 
sure,  seguro,  -a  (adj.)  49;  cierto, 

-a  33 

surely,  seguramente  (adv.)  68 
sweet,  dulce  (adj.)  61 
swift,  ligero,  -a  (adj.)  38 
swiftly,  rapidamente  (adv.)  38 
to  swim,  nadar  64 
swollen,  hinchado,  -a  (adj.)  2 

T 

to  take,  coger  51 
table,  la  mesa  7 
tailor,  el  sastre  14 
to  take,  tomar  7 

to  take  (a  street  car),  agarrar  76, 
B5 

to  take  care,  tener  cuidado  68 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


257 


to  take  leave  (refl.),  despedirse  (i) 
52 

to  take  place,  acontecer  72 

to  take  a  walk,  pasearse  66 

to  take  away,  quitar  47 

to  talk,  hablar  4 

talkative,  hablador,  -a  (adj.)  33 

taste,  el  gusto  49 

to  taste  of,  saber  a;  it  tastes  of 
onions,  sabe  a  cebollas  64 

tea,  el  te;  (pi.)  tes  17 

to  teach,  ensefiar  24 

teacher  (primary  school),  el  maes- 
tro, la  maestra  63;  (high  school, 
college),  el  profesor,  la  profesora 
39 

teaspoon,  la  cucliarita  18 

telegram,  el  telegrama  33 

to  telegraph,  telegrafiar  58 

to  tell,  decir  40;  74;  I  shall  tell, 

you  will  tell,  etc.,  dire,  diras, 

etc.  42 
temper,  el  genio 
tepid,  tibio,  -a  (adj.)  15 
than,  que;  de;  de  (el,  etc.,  lo)  que 

(conj.)  5;  23 
to  thank,  agradecer  69;   dar  las 

gracias  72 
thanks,  gracias  (adv.)  72 
that,  aquel,  -11a;  ese,  -a  (adj.)  30 
that,  aquel,  -11a;  §se,  -a  (  pro.)  30 
that,  que  (rel.  pro.)  10;  24 
that,  que   (conj.)    (expletive,  see 

69)  30,  3 
the,  el,  la;  los,  las  9 
their(s),  su(s) ;  suyo,  -a  (s)  (pos. 

adj.  or  pro.)  17 ;  40 
them,  ellos,  ellas  (pers.  pro.)  42 
themselves,  si  (disj.  pro.)  48 
then,  en  seguida   (adv.)   43;  en- 

tonces  (adv.)  33 
there,  ahl  (adv.);  allf  11;  30 
there  is,  there  are,  hay  28 
these,  estos,  -as  (demonstr.  adj.)  30 
these,  §stos,  -as  (demonstr.  pro.)  30 
they,  ellos,  -as  (pers.  pro.)  13 
thin,  flaco,  -a  (adj.)  8 
thine,  tuyo,  -a  (pos.  adj.)  17 
thing,  la  cosa  10 

to  think,  pensar  (ie) ;  to  think  of 
9 


(to  put  one's  attention  on),  pen- 
sar en;  to  think  of  (to  have  an 
opinion  of),  pensar  de  56;  64 

think;  I  think  so,  creer;  lo  creo, 
creo  que  si  23 ;  I  think  (it  seems 
to  me),  me  parece  30 

third,  tercero,  -a  (adj.  or  pro.)  19 

thirst,  la  sed  17 

thirsty,  to  be  thirsty,  tener  sed  17 
this,  este,  -a  (demonstr.  adj.)  30 
this,  este,  -a  (demonstr.  pro.)  30 
those,  esos,  -as;  aquellos,,  -as  30 

(as  pro.,  use  accent) 
thought,  el  pensamiento  64 
thou,  tu  (pers.  pro.)  13 
through,  por  (prep.)  4 
to  throw,  tirar  68 
thunder,  el  trueno  33 
to  thunder,  tronar  (ue)  35 
Thursday,  el  jueves  34 
thy,  tu(s)   (pos.  adj.);   (el)  tuyo 

(adj.  or  pro.)  17 
time  (as,  "What  time  is  it?  "),  la 

hora  60 

time  (in  general),  el  tiempo  35;  on 
time,  a  tiempo  46;  it  is  time  for 
(to),  es  tiempo  de  (que)  43 

time  (in  series)  la  vez  12;  at 
times,  a  veces  (adv.)  4:4:;  from 
time  to  time,  de  vez  en  cuando 
68 

to  have  a  good  time,  holgarse  (ue) 
48 

tinned,  en  lata  (adj.)  41 

to  tire,  aburrir  11 

tired,  cansado,  -a  (with  estar)  15 

tiring,  cansado,  -a  (with  ser)  14 

to  have  as  title,  intitularse  54 

to,  a  5;  (after  verb  of  motion,  as 

conj.,  in  order  to)  50,  2(b) 
today,  hoy  (adv.)  4 
together,  juntos,  -as  (adj.)  45 
told,  (he,  she,  it),  dijo  3,  24 
told,  (they),  dijeron  8,  BB14 
tomorrow,  mafiana  (adv.)  11 
tonight,  esta  noche  (adv.)  46 
too,  demasiado  (adv.  of  degree)  46 
tooth,  el  diente  8 
to  touch,  tocar  6 
towards,  hacia  (prep.)  42 


258 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


traitor,  traidor,  -a  (adj.  or  noun) 
33 

tranquil,  tranquilo,  -a  {adj.)  49 
trap,  la  trampa  72 
to  travel,  via  jar  43 
to  traverse,  recorrer  56 
treacherous,  traidoii,  -a  {adj.)  33 
treacherously,  traidoramente  ( adv. ) 
57 

Treasury  Street,  Calle  de  la  Mo- 

neda  13 
to  treat,  tratar  56 
tree,  el  arbol  64 

to  tremble   (with),  temblar  (ie) 
(de)  35 

trip  {around  a  city),  la  carrera  38 
trolley  car,  el  tranvia  (word  used 

in  Spain)    31;   el  carro  (word 

used  in  South  America) 
true,  verdadero,  -a  (adj.)  58 
truly,  verdaderamente  (adv.)  58 
truth,  la  verdad  6 
to  try  to,  tratar  de  56 
Tuesday,  el  martes  34 
Turk,  turco,  -a  (adj.  or  noun)  33 
Turkish,  turco,  -a  (adj.)  33 
to  turn,  volver  (ue) ;  revolver  (ue) 

35 

twenty,  veinte  (numeral  adj.)  20 
two,  dos  (num.  adj.)  2 

U 

uncle,  el  tio  6 

under,  bajo  (prep.)  24;  debajo  de 
to  understand,  entender  (ie)  35 
to  undress,  desnudar;  to  undress 

oneself,  desnudarse  49 
unhappy,  infeliz  (adj.)  29 
United  States,  (los)  Estados  Uni- 

dos  15 

unless,  a  menos  que  (conj.)  53;  no 

sea  que  (conj.)  53 
unlucky,  infeliz  (adj.)  29 
until,  hasta  que  (conj.)  53 
unusual,  raro,  -a  (adj.)  41 
us,,  nosotros,  -as  (disj.  pro.)  42 
to  use,  emplear  76;  usar  34 
to  be  used  to  (plus  verb),  soler 

(ue)  76 
useful,  util  (adj.)  60 


V 

vacation,  las  vacaciones  43 
value,  el  valor  33 
to  vary,  variar  58 
verb,  el  verbo  16 

very,  muy  (adv.)  10;  mismo,  -a 
(adj.  after  noun)  24;  -isimo,  -a 
(adj.  or  adv.  suffiw)  76;  tan 
(adv.)  69;  re-,  te-,  que-,  (pre- 
fixes, used  alone  or  together)  76 

very  little,  poqmsimo,  -a  (adj.  or 
adv.)  76,A14 

very  near,  cerqulsima  (adv.)  76 

very  sunny,  it  is  very  sunny,  hay 
mucho  sol  28;  60 

view,  la  vista  63 

village,  la  aldea  73 

Vina  del  Mar,  Vina  del  Mar,  (lit., 
Vineyard  of  the  Sea,  name  of  a 
beach  near  Valparaiso,  in  Chile) 
43 

virtue,  la  virtud  6 
to  visit,  visitar  42 
voice,  la  voz  33 
volume,  el  tomo  67 

W 

to  wait  for,  esperar 
waiter,  el  mozo  6 

to  wake  up  (transitive)  despertar 
(ie) ;  (intransitive)  despertarse 
(ie)  49 

to  walk,  marchar  54;  pasearse  66 

wall,  la  pared 

to  wander,  errar  (ye)  39 

to  want,  desear  15 

war,  la  guerra  1 

to  be  very  warm,  tener  mucho 
calor  (of  persons)  27;  it  is 
warm  (of  weather),  hace  calor 
60 

to  wash,  lavar  16 
watch,  el  reloj  12 
way,  el  camino;  in  no  way,  de 

ninguna  manera  (adv.)  41 
water,   (la)    agua;    (written  and 

pronounced  el  agua)  2;  58 
we,  nosotros,  -as  (pers.  pro.)  13 
to  wear,  usar  34 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


259 


to  weary,  aburrir  11 
weather,  el  tiempo  35 
to  weave,  tejer  51 
Wednesday,  el  miercoles  34 
week,  la  semana  34 
to  weep,  llorar  2;  27 
weight,  el  peso  20 
well,  bien  {adv.)  10,  B7;  23 
well,  pues  (conj.  adv.)  48 
well!   jva!  {inter jec.)  73;  itoma! 
69 

west,  occidente;  el  oeste  1 

what,  cual  {rel.  adj.)  24 

what,   que    {with   inf.) ;    lo  que 

{with  finite  verb)  56 
what?  ^cual?    {int.   adj.)  £cual? 

{int.  pro.)  ique?  18;  What  day 

of  the  month  is  it?  lA  cuantos 

estamos  del  mes?  60 
when,  cuando   {rel.  conj.) ;  luego 

que  (conj.)  18;  53 
when?  i  cuando?  {int.  conj.)  18 
where  {conj.)  donde,  en  donde  24 
where?   {int.  conj.)   i donde?  £en 

donde?  21,  B4 
whether,  si  (-conj.)  45 
which,  que  {rel.  pro.)  24 
which?  ique?  ^cual?  {int.  adj.  or 

pro.)  18 
while,  el  rato  74 

while,  mientras  {conj.) ;  mientras 

que  {conj.)  64 
white,  bianco,  -a  6 
who,  whom,  que,  quien  {rel.  pro.) 

10;  24 

who?  whom?  ique?  i  quien?  {int. 
pro.)  18 

who,  el  cual  (or  que)    {rel.  pro.) 
25 

whose,  cuyo,  -a  {pos.  adj.  or  pro.) 
24 

whose?   £cuyo,  -a?    {int.  adj.  or 
pro.) 

why?  ipor  qu£?  18 

wide,  ancho,  -a  {adj.)  41 

wife,  la  esposa 

William,  Guillermo  69 

window,  la  ventana  13 

wind,  el  viento  28 

windy;  it  is  windy,  hay  viento  28 

wine,  el  vino  17 


winter,  el  invierno  60 

to  wish,  querer   (ie)   35;  I  wish, 

quisiera  44   (=1  should  like); 

(they)  wish,  quieren  3 
with,  con  {prep.)  5;  with  all  one's 

might,  a  mas  no  poder  72 
within,  dentro  de  {prep.)  40 
without,  sin  que  {conj.)  53 
why?  ipor  que?  {conj.)  18 
woe  to  you!  jinfeliz  de  usted!  29 
woman,    la    mujer;  insignificant 

woman,  mujercilla  77 
to  be  wont,  soler  (ue)  76 
wood,  la  madera  70 
word,  la  palabra  16 
work,  el  trabajo  6 
to  work,  trabajar  4 
work  day,  dia  habil  60;  dia  util 

60 

world,  el  mundo  54 

worse,  peor  {adj.  or  adv.)  23 

worth,  el  valor  33;  to  be  worth, 

valer  66 
it  is  worth  seeing,  es  de  ver  72 
to  wrestle,  luchar  64 
to  write,  escribir  11 
writing  desk,  el  escritorio  70 
written,  escrito  {irreg.  past  part. 

of  escribir)  16;  65 


Y 

year,  el  aiio  20 
yellow,  amarillo,  -a  {adj.)  41 
yes,  si  {adv.)  11 ;  30 
yesterday,  ayer  {adv.)  11 
yet,  todavia  {adv.)  34;  ailn  3 
you,  to  you  (thee),  yourself  {re- 
flex or  pers.  pro.),  te  21;  38;  48; 
ti  {disj.  pro.)  42;  48;  tu  {pers. 
pro.)  13 

you,  usted,  Ud.,  Vd.,  V.  {subject  or 
disj.  pro.)  13;  42 

you,  vosotros,  -as  {int.  pi.,  subject 
or  disj.  pro.)  13;  42 

to  you,  te  {int.  pers.  pro.,  sing.), 
vosotros,  -as  {pi.) ;  le  {formal 
pers.  pro.,  sing.),  les  (pi.) ;  ti, 
vosotros,  -as,  Vd.,  Vds.,  (disj.) 
38;  42;  48 


260 


ENGLISH— SPANISH  VOCABULAEY 


young  girl,  joven  35 
younger,  menor  {adj.)  23 
young  lady,  la  senorita  13 
your,  vuestro,  -a  {pos.  adj.)  17; 

40;    tu(s)     {pos.    adj.);  su(s) 

{pos.  adj.,  polite)  17 
yours,  suyo,  -a  {pos.  adj.,  polite) ; 


el  suyo  {pos.  pro.,  polite)  40; 
tuyo,  -a  {pos.  adj.,  int.  form) ;  el 
tuyo  {pos.  pro.,  int.  form)  40 
youth  (lad),  el  joven  35 

Z 

zero,  el  cero  67 


SUBJECT  INDEX 


(Individual  words  are  to  be  found  in  the  Vocabulary  or 
Table  of  Contents.) 


Accentuation,  III,  1-4;  in  inter- 
rogative words,  XVIII,  4;  in 
pronouns,  XXX,  2 ;  use  of  accent 
mark,  LXXV,  1,  2. 

Adjectives:  gender,  V,  2,  3;  IX,  3; 
XXXIII,  1,  2;  number,  IX,  1,  2; 
position,  VII,  2;  XXXIII,  4,  6; 
comparison,  XXIII.  Descrip- 
tive, VII,  2;  limiting,  VII,  2. 
Demonstrative,  XXX,  1 ;  inter- 
rogative, XVIII ;  possessive, 
XVII;  XL,  5;  '(def.  art.  for  pos., 
XL,  6);  prepositional,  XXXVII; 
5;  relative,  XXIV,  4. 

Adverbs:  Comparison,  XXIII. 

Agent,  with  the  passive,  XVI,  3. 

Agreement:  see  Adjectives;  Pas- 
sive; Possessives. 

Apocopation,  XIX,  1-4;  XXII,  6,  7. 

Articles:  uses  of,  LIX,  LXI;  def. 
art.  for  pos.  adj.,  XL,  6. 

Augmentatives,  LXXVII,  1,  3. 

Brackets,  use  of  in  exercises,  p.  8, 
fn.  2. 

Capitals,  III,  6. 
Cardinals:   see  Numerals. 
Changes  in  Spelling:   see  Verbs. 
Comparison,  XXIII. 
Conditions:     in    the  indicative, 

XLV,  1(a)  ;  in  the  subjunctive, 

see  Subjunctive. 
Conjunctions:    with  indicative,  L, 

1 ;   with  infinitive,  L,  2 ;  with 

subjunctive,  LIII,  2. 
Conjunctive:    see  Pronouns. 
Consonants:    see  Pronunciation. 
Contraction:  of  articles  with  a  or 

de,  V,  3;   of  imperative  with 

pronoun  object,  LXIII,  3;  see 

also  Apocopation. 


Dates  and  Time,  LX,  1,  2,  4,  5. 
Demonstratives:    see  Adjectives; 

Pronouns. 
Diminutives,  LXXVII,  1,  2. 
Diphthongs,  II,  6;  III,  4;  LXI, 

2,  3. 

Disjunctive:    see  Pronouns. 

Exclamations,  LXIX. 

Fractions :  see  Numerals — Ordi- 
nals. 

Gender:  see  Adjectives;  Nouns; 
Pronouns. 

Idioms,  XXVII,  5;  XXVIII,  4; 
XXIX;  LX,  6;  LXIV,  4;  Apps. 
B  and  H. 

Imperative:  forms,  LTV,  2;  LXII; 
for  position  of  pronouns  with, 
see  Pronouns. 

Indicative:  see  Conditions;  Con- 
junctions ;  Tenses. 

Infinitive:   see  Verbs. 

Interjections,  LXIX. 

Interrogation:   see  Verbs. 

Inter  rogatives :  see  Adjectives; 
Pronouns. 

Intransitive  verb,  p.  28,  fn.  1. 

Mood:   see  Verbs. 

Negation:   see  Verbs. 

Neuter,  XII,  3;  XXXI,  3. 

Nouns :  gender,  V,  1 ;  VI ;  XXXIII, 

1,  3;  number,  IX,  1,  2;  XII,  1; 

XXXIV.    Adjectives  as  nouns, 

XXII,  8.    Abstract  and  generic, 

App.  F. 

Number:  see  Adjectives;  Nouns, 
App.  A. 

261 


262 


SUBJECT  INDEX 


Numerals:  Cardinals,  XX;  XXIT; 
Ordinals,  LXVII;  App.  G. 

Object :  direct,  use  of  a  with,  XII,  2. 

Omission:  of  indef.  art.  with  pre- 
dicate nominative,  XIV,  3;  with 
ciento  or  mil,  XXII,  5;  of  y  in 
numbers,  XXII,  2. 

Order,  with  ser  and  one  predicate 
adjective,  p.  10,  fn.  1. 

Ordinals:    see  Numerals. 

Orthographic  changes:    see  Verbs. 

Parentheses,  use  of  in  exercises, 
p.  8,  fn.  2. 

Participles:  present,  XXXVII,  1, 
2;  LVII,  1;  past,  XVI,  1;  can- 
not be  followed  by  pro.  obj.,  p. 
143,  A,  1. 

Passive:   see  Verbs. 

Person,  App.  A. 

Personal  pronouns:  see  Conjunc- 
tive; Disjunctive;  Subject. 

Plural:  see  Adjectives;  Nouns; 
App.  A. 

Position:  see  Adjectives;  Pro- 
nouns. 

Possession,  VII,  1. 

Possessives:  see  Adjectives;  Pro- 
nouns. 

Prepositional:  see  Pronouns — dis- 
junctive. 

Pronouns :  conjunctive,  XXI ; 
XXXVIII,  1-6;  XLVIII,  1;  de- 
monstrative, XXX,  2;  XXXI; 
disjunctive,  XLII;  XLVIII,  1;  in- 
terrogative, XVIII ;  possessive, 
XL;  reciprocal  and  reflexive, 
XLVIII;  XLIX;  relative,  XXIV; 
XXV;  subject,  XIII.  Position 
of  personal  pronouns,  XXI,  2; 
XXXVIII;  LVII,  4;  with  im- 
perative, LXIII;  cannot  be  used 
with  past  part.,  p.  143,  A,  1; 
with  ser,  XXXVIII,  7. 

Pronunciation :  consonants,  I ; 
LXXIII;  vowels,  II;  LXXI. 

Punctuation,  III,  5. 

Radical-changing:    see  Verbs. 


Reciprocal:   see  Verbs. 
Reflexive:    see  Pronouns;  Verbs. 
Relatives:   see  Pronouns. 
Repetition,  of  article  or  preposi- 
tion, V,  4. 

si  or  si  used  to  make  statements 
emphatic,  p.  Ill,  fn.  1. 

Singular:  see  Adjectives,  Nouns; 
App.  A. 

.Stress:    see  Accentuation. 

Subjunctive:  future,  LXXVII,  4; 
past  (imperfect),  XLIV;  pres- 
ent, XLIII;  sequence  of  tenses, 
XLIII,  4;  XLIV,  3,  4;  in  adjec- 
tive clauses,  LIV,  3;  in  adverb- 
ial clauses,  LIII;  in  conditional 
sentences,  XLV;  with  imperson- 
al expressions,  XLVI,  1,  2;  in 
main  clauses,  LIV,  1 ;  in  noun 
clauses,  LV;  in  wishes,  LIV,  2. 
See  also  Apps.  C  and  D.  Radi- 
cal-changing verbs,  LII. 

Superlative:    see  Comparison. 

Syllabification:   LXXV,  3. 

Taking  away,  dative  of,  XL VII,  1. 

Tenses  (indicative)  :  conditional, 
XXXII,  2,  3,  5;  imperfect  (past 
descriptive),  XXVI;  future, 
XXXII,  1,  3,  4;  LXX;  past 
anterior  ( secondary  pluperfect ) , 
XLVII,  2;  perfect  tenses, 
XXVIII,  5 ;  present,  IV,  3 ;  pres- 
ent (imperfect)  for  English  per- 
fect (pluperfect),  LXIV,  1; 
preterite,  VIII,  2,  3;  progressive 
tenses,  XXXVII,  3. 

Time:   see  Dates. 

Transitive  verbs,  p.  28,  fn.  1. 

Triphthongs,  II,  6;  LXI,  2,  4. 

Verbs:  first  conjugation,  IV; 
VIII;  second  conjugation,  X; 
third  conjugation,  XI.  Princi- 
pal parts,  LXVI,  1.  Interroga- 
tion, V,  5 ;  negation,  VIII,  4,  5 ; 
XLI,  1-3.  Omission  of  pro.  subj., 
IV,  2.  Infinitive:  after  con- 
junctions, L,  2;  as  noun,  L,  3; 


SUBJECT  INDEX 


263 


LVII,  2,  3;  with  prepositions, 
LVI,  1-3;  for  subjunctive,  XLVI, 
2.  Imperative,  see  Imperative; 
participles,  see  Participles ;  pass- 
ive voice,  XVI,  1-4;  (see  also 
p.  28,  fn.  1)  ;  reflexives  and  re- 
ciprocals, XL VIII;  XLIX;  sub- 
junctive, see  iSubjunctive.  Tenses, 
see  Tenses.  Changes  in  spelling 
( Orthographic    changes ) ,    LI ; 


LVIII;  App.  E;  inceptives, 
LVIII,  (b)  ;  LXV,  3.  Irregular, 
see  Table  of  Contents;  List  of 
Irregular  Verbs.  Radical-chang- 
ing, XXXV;  XXXVI;  XXXIX; 
LII. 

Voice,  passive:    see  Verbs, 
very  much  =  muy,  p.  17,  fn.  1. 
Vowels:    see  Pronunciation. 

Weather,  expressions  of  LX,  6. 


